Welcome to iGrafx Professional 2000

Welcome and thank you for buying iGrafx Professional 2000. iGrafx Professional is an intelligent business diagramming and modeling solution designed for knowledge workers, managers, and IT professionals. With the intuitive ease of use of iGrafx Professional, it has never been easier to create free-form, structured, network, process, software, and presentation diagrams.

iGrafx Professional Features

•	Intelligent Departments

•	Automatic Connectors

•	Automatic Off-page Connectors

•	Unlimited Page Size

•	Powerful Graphics Engine

•	Powerful, Flexible Shape Numbering

•	Automatic Fit-to-Text

•	Crossovers and Intersection Dots

•	Multiple Text Areas

•	Multiple Fonts, Interline Spacing, Paragraphs, Bullets within Shapes

•	Visual Basic for Applications 6.0 Support

•	VBA iShapes

•	Integrated VBA Programming Interface

•	Web Support (HTML and Java)

•	20+ filters, including: CGM, DWG, and Visio®.


System Requirements

The minimum system requirements for installing and running iGrafx Professional are listed below.

•	Pentium processor

•	Windows 95, 98, or Windows NT 4.0 or higher

•	16 MB RAM for Windows 95 and 98; 32 MB RAM for NT

•	At least 50 MB of hard drive space

•	640x480 256 color monitor (800x600, 16-bit color recommended)

•	CD-ROM drive

•	Mouse or other pointing device


Technical Support

Getting the most out of your investment is central to your success. That is why we have developed a fee-based support program for registered users in the U.S. and Canada that delivers fast, flexible, and comprehensive service for the Micrografx products you own. This program is backed by our commitment and all the resources necessary to provide you with the service you expect.

Our staff of experienced technical advisors are specialists in the critical areas and applications important to you. Our experts can assist callers quickly and efficiently.

Complimentary Support

As a registered iGrafx Professional  customer, you are entitled to thirty days of complimentary support following your first call to our technical support staff.

You can receive technical support from a technical support advisor between the hours of 7:00 a.m. and 5:00 p.m. (Central time), Monday - Friday.

To contact technical support during this time, call (972) 234-2694.

You can fax your questions to (972) 644-3688.

Contact Micrografx through the Internet as follows:

http://www.mgxsupport.com

Thereafter, whether you want full-service coverage or occasional support for your Micrografx products, you will like the flexibility of choosing only those services you need.


Using Online Documentation

Online documentation, found in Adobe® Acrobat® PDF format, contains all reference materials found in Help and information found in the user’s guide. Access the PDF documentation by clicking the Start button, pointing to Programs, iGrafx, and then Documentation. The PDF documentation is also located on the Application CD-ROM as uncompressed files.


Learning About Help

To use iGrafx Professional more effectively, we designed an integrated online help system using the familiar Windows 95 help system with the three tabs, Contents, Index, and Find. You access this help system through the Help menu on the application.

In addition, help information for iGrafx Professional  is accessible through context-sensitive online help. The help system is designed so that you can easily find the information you want—from conceptual topics, to specific procedures, to detailed information on buttons, tools, and dialog boxes—with just a few mouse clicks.

The most up-to-date information regarding iGrafx Professional  can be found in the Readme.txt on the root of the CD.


Using Help


Using Help

The iGrafx Professional online help contains many useful features for finding, copying, and printing Help topics. When used together, these features help you find topics faster. The ability to print hardcopy from the Help also helps keep a record of concepts and procedures that you are likely to use most.


To find a topic in Help

To copy information from a Help topic

To print a Help topic


To find a topic in Help

1	Click the Contents tab to browse through topics by category.

2	Click the Index tab to see a list of index entries: either type the word you're looking for or scroll through the list.

3	Click the Find tab to search for words or phrases that may be contained in a Help topic.


To copy information from a Help topic

To print a Help topic

Using Help

Learning About Help


To copy information from a Help topic

1	In the Help topic window, click the Edit menu or the Options button, and then click Copy.

2	You can also use the right mouse button to click inside the topic or pop-up window.

3	In the document where you want the information to appear, click the place where you want to put the information.

4	On the Edit menu, click Paste.

Tip

If you want to copy only part of a topic, select the part you want to copy before you click the Copy command.


To find a topic in Help

To print a Help topic

Using Help

Learning About Help


To print a Help topic

In the Help topic you want to print, click the Print button or the Options button, and then click Print Topic.

You can also use your right mouse button to click inside the Help window, and then click Print Topic.

Tip

You can print a group of related topics by clicking a book in the Help Contents and then clicking Print.


To find a topic in Help

To copy information from a Help topic

Using Help

Learning About Help


Using Toolbars and Tool Palettes

iGrafx Professional uses toolbars and tool palettes to provide much of its functionality. Toolbars contain icons that provide a set of related tools. For example, the Formatting toolbar contains tools for formatting elements of the diagram or model. With Tool palettes, you can select from a palette of styles or colors. For example, there is an Arrowheads tool palette for selecting the direction of an arrow or style of an arrowhead. There are color palettes for text, lines, and fills.

You can display the following toolbars:

•	Standard

•	Formatting

•	Toolbox

•	Draw

•	Preset Styles

•	Data

•	iDiagram

•	Visual Basic

•	Connector Line Tool

•	Zoom

•	Controls

•	Arrange

•	Model

•	Trace


To create a new toolbar

To rename a toolbar

To reset a toolbar

To delete a toolbar

To make a toolbar a floating palette

To dock a floating toolbar

To create a floating palette from a toolbar tool

To show or hide toolbars


Standard Toolbar

The Standard toolbar contains tools that help you perform basic functions in iGrafx Professional. Most of these functions appear as commands in the File and Edit menus.

Tool	Name	Description
	New	Creates a new diagram.
	Open	Opens a previously existing diagram.
	Save	Saves the active diagram.
	Print	Prints the active diagram.
	Print Preview	Shows the diagram as it looks when you print it.
	Spelling	Checks the spelling of text in your diagram.
	Cut	Removes the selected item and places it on the Clipboard.
	Copy	Copies the selected item and places it on the Clipboard.
	Paste	Places the contents of the Clipboard on the diagram.
	Format Painter	Copies the formatting of the selected text, shapes, or lines to other text, shapes, or lines.
	Undo	Undoes an action or change.
	Redo	Reverses the last undo you made.
	View Shape Palettes	Shows or hides the Shape palette.
	Draw	Opens the Draw Toolbar.
	Properties	Opens the Properties dialog box.
	Zoom Control	Magnifies the diagram by the percentage you select or enter.
	Help	Displays information about the item you click next.


Formatting Toolbar

The Formatting toolbar gives you easy access to the options you use to define the way text, lines, and shapes look in your diagrams. Additional formatting options are available on the Format menu.

Tool	Name	Description
	Font Name	Displays and changes the name of the current font.
	Font Size	Shows the current point size.
	Bold	Turns text bold (or removes bold, if it is already bold).
	Italic	Turns text italic (or removes italic, if it is already italic).
	Underline	Underlines text (or removes underline, if it is already underlined).
	Opaque	Makes the text’s background transparent.
	Text Color	Applies color to text.
	Vertical Align	Specifies Top, Middle, or Bottom alignment. Click the tool and then choose from the menu.
	Horizontal Align	Specifies Left, Center, or Right alignment. Click the tool and then choose from the menu.
	Insert Field	Inserts a new field into a shape.
	Bullets	Makes selected text a bulleted list.
	Decrease Indent	Moves paragraph to the left.
	Increase Indent	Moves paragraph to the right.
	Increase Line Spacing	Increases line spacing in selected text.
	Decrease Line Spacing	Decreases line spacing in selected text.
	Rotate Text Left	Rotates text 90 degrees to the left.
	Rotate Text Right	Rotates text 90 degrees to the right.
Tips

You also can use the commands on the Format menu to specify formats, text color, fill color, line color, line styles, line weight, styles for filled lines, arrowhead styles, crossover styles, shadows, and 3D effects.

There are also shortcut keys for vertically aligning shapes: Top (CTRL+SHIFT+4), Middle (CTRL+SHIFT+6), Bottom (CTRL+SHIFT+8).

There are also shortcut keys for horizontally aligning shapes: Left (+3), Center (CTRL+SHIFT+5), Right (CTRL+SHIFT+7).

When you click the down arrow next to a color tool, a palette of colors opens. If you click a color, the program applies it to the next shape or currently selected shapes. To set a custom color, click More Colors, and the Color dialog box opens.


Toolbox Toolbar

The Toolbox toolbar gives you easy access to the tools you use most to create and change diagrams.

Tool	Name	Description
	Selector	Selects, moves, and resizes drawn elements.
	Insert Department	Adds, edits, or deletes department attributes.
	Shapes	Places shapes in a diagram and selects shape attributes and properties. You can use different shapes to represent steps, documents, events, and other information in diagrams.
	Connector Line	Connects shapes with different types of lines. Choose from Direct, Right Angle, Curved, Org Chart, Cause and Effect, and Lightning Bolt lines.
	Text	Enters and changes text, types text blocks, types text on lines, and changes text. (It is not necessary to select the Text tool to add text to a selected shape.)
	Shape Numbering	Numbers shapes.
	Zoom Control	Changes the view percentage.


Draw Toolbar

The Draw toolbar contains tools that align, flip, rotate, reorder, replace, and otherwise arrange objects. Objects include shapes, text, and lines. You cannot perform all operations on all types of objects.  For example, you can only rotate or flip shapes.

Tool	Name	Description
	Draw	Draws shapes in a diagram.
	Selector	Selects, moves, and resizes drawn elements.
	Rotate	Rotates selected objects.
	Edit Points	Edits the connect points in the graphic.
	Rotate Right	Rotates the selected objects 90 degrees to the right.
	Rotate Left	Rotates the selected objects 90 degrees to the left.
	Flip Horizontal	Flips the selected objects horizontally.
	Flip Vertical	Flips the selected objects vertically.
	Arrange	Opens a list of Arrange commands for modifying objects in the diagram. The Arrange commands are: • Align - aligns shapes vertically and horizontally.  • Make Same Size - makes selected shapes same size.  • Even Spacing - spaces selected shapes evenly.  • Order - moves objects in your diagram.   • Group - groups selected objects.  • Ungroup - ungroups selected grouped object.
	Combine	Opens a list of Combine commands so you can connect and disconnect closed and open objects. You can also form shapes from different combinations of operations. The Combine commands are: • Connect Open - connects the selected, closed objects.  • Connect Closed - connects the selected open objects and closes them.  • Disconnect - disconnects the selected connected objects.  • Join - creates a new shape by joining the selected objects together.  • Intersect - creates a new shape from the intersection of the selected shapes.  • Outline - creates a new shape from the outline of the selected shapes.  • Slice - slices the selected closed shape with the selected open shape.
	Layer Manager	Opens the Layer Manager. In Layer Manager, you can change the visible, print, and lock properties of layers. Also, Layer Manager selects the current layer; adds, deletes, and renames layers; changes the order of layers; and specifies whether you want to change the current or all layers.
	Fill Color	Specifies the color for a shape.
	Line Color	Applies color to lines, line endings, and shape borders.
	Text Color	Applies color to text.
	Line Style	Changes the style (solid, dashed, dotted) for lines and shape borders. You can select from several line styles, such as solid and dotted, which are also used to define the border styles for shapes.
	Line Weight	Determines line weight, or thickness. Click the tool and then use the arrows to adjust the weight. It is also used to set the border weight for shapes.
	Arrowheads	Sets the arrowhead styles for the selected line. When you click the tool, a list of the most commonly used arrowheads opens. For a wider selection of arrowhead styles, click More at the bottom of the list. Note You cannot change arrowhead styles on filled lines.
	Crossovers	Changes the crossover style for the currently selected line. To change the crossover style for the entire diagram, use the Connector Line command on the Format menu.
	Shadow	Places a drop shadow on the current shape.
	3D	Gives the shape a 3-dimensional appearance.


Preset Styles Toolbar

The Preset Styles toolbar stores and accesses the styles that you use most frequently for text, shapes, and lines.

Tool	Name	Description
	Shape Style box	Shows the current styles for shapes, including the border and shadow style and width, fill pattern, and color. The styles are applied to the next shape you place in your diagram.
	Add Shape Style tool	Adds the current shape style to the Shape Style list.
	Edit Shape Styles tool	Renames or removes the selected item from the Shape Style list.
	Line Style box	Shows the current styles for lines, including the line and arrow styles, widths, and colors. The styles are applied to the next line you draw.
	Add Line Style tool	Adds the current line style to the Line Style list.
	Edit Line Styles tool	Renames or removes the selected item from the Line Style list.
	Text Style box	Shows the current styles for text, including the font, size, style, and color. The styles are applied to the next character you type.
	Add Text Style tool	Adds the current text style to the Text Style box.
	Edit Text Styles tool	Renames or removes the selected item from the Text Style list.


iDiagram Toolbar

The iDiagram toolbar contains tools that help you set up and run iDiagrams.

Tool	Name	Description
	Insert Entity	Inserts an entity into the selected shape.
	Entity Manager	Shows or hides the Entity Manager.
	Execute	Runs the diagram.
	Stop	Stops the execution of an iDiagram.
	Pause/Resume	Pauses or resumes the execution of an iDiagram.
	Step	Runs the diagram one step at a time.


Visual Basic Toolbar

Use the Visual Basic toolbar to add or edit Visual Basic properties and code to iGrafx Professional shapes.

Tool	Name	Description
	Visual Basic Editor	Displays the Visual Basic Editor.
	Design/Run Mode	Switches between the Design and the Run modes.
	Properties	Displays properties for the selected object.
	Edit Code	Edits the code for the object.
	Code Assistant	Adds code to the object.
	Controls	Displays controls options.


Model Toolbar

The Model toolbar contains all the tools needed for modeling functions. Most of the tools on this toolbar also appear as commands in the Model menu. Use these tools with iGrafx Process.

Tool	Name	Description
	Start/Resume	Starts or resumes the model simulation.
	Pause	Pauses the model simulation.
	Stop	Stops running the model simulation.
	Trace	Traces execution of the simulation.
	Run Setup	Modifies run setup data.
	Generators	Modifies generator attributes.
	Resources	Creates or modifies resources used for the simulation.
	Schedules	Creates or modifies schedules used for the simulation.
	Events	Creates or modifies events used for the simulation.
	Attributes	Creates, modifies, or initializes attributes used for the simulation.
	Functions	Creates or modifies functions used for the simulation.
	Monitors	Creates, modifies, or finds monitors used for the simulation.
	Components	Opens the Components dialog box for adding and modifying components.
	View Scenario	Displays the current scenario.
	View Report	Displays the report of the current scenario.


To create a new toolbar

1	On the View menu, click Toolbars.

2	Click New.

3	Type a name for the new toolbar, and click OK.

4	Drag the tools you want from the Customize dialog box to your new toolbar.

Tips

You can open the Tools menu and click Customize. With the Customize dialog box open, press CTRL, drag a tool from a toolbar and drop it into empty space to create a new toolbar.


To rename a toolbar

To reset a toolbar

To delete a toolbar

To make a toolbar a floating palette

To dock a floating toolbar

To create a floating palette from a toolbar tool

To show or hide toolbars

Using Toolbars and Tool Palettes


To rename a toolbar

1	On the View menu, click Toolbars.

2	Click the toolbar you want to rename.

3	Click Rename.

4	Type a new name for the toolbar.

Note
You cannot rename an iGrafx Professional toolbar. You can rename only the toolbars that you create.


To create a new toolbar

To reset a toolbar

To delete a toolbar

To make a toolbar a floating palette

To dock a floating toolbar

To create a floating palette from a toolbar tool

To show or hide toolbars

Using Toolbars and Tool Palettes


To reset a toolbar

1	On the View menu, click Toolbars.

2	Click the toolbar you want to reset.

3	Click Reset.

Notes
Resetting the toolbars returns them to the default, installed setting. This removes any tools that you added and adds tools that were originally on the toolbars.

Resetting the toolbars only affects those tools added or removed through the Customize feature in the Toolbars dialog box or Customize command on the Tools menu.

Only the selected toolbar is reset.


To create a new toolbar

To rename a toolbar

To delete a toolbar

To make a toolbar a floating palette

To dock a floating toolbar

To create a floating palette from a toolbar tool

To show or hide toolbars

Using Toolbars and Tool Palettes


To delete a toolbar

1	On the View menu, click Toolbars.

2	Click the toolbar you want to delete.

3	Click Delete.

Note
You cannot delete an iGrafx Professional toolbar. You can delete only the toolbars you create.


To create a new toolbar

To rename a toolbar

To reset a toolbar

To make a toolbar a floating palette

To create a floating palette from a toolbar tool

To show or hide toolbars

Using Toolbars and Tool Palettes


To make a toolbar a floating palette

1	Click in a blank area of the toolbar.

2	Hold down the mouse button and drag the toolbar from its position.


To create a new toolbar

To rename a toolbar

To reset a toolbar

To make a toolbar a floating palette

To create a floating palette from a toolbar tool

To show or hide toolbars

Using Toolbars and Tool Palettes


 To dock a floating toolbar

1	Click in a blank area of the toolbar.

2	Drag the toolbar to any side of the program's window.

3	When the border changes from thick to thin, you can drop the toolbar into position.


To create a new toolbar

To rename a toolbar

To reset a toolbar

To delete a toolbar

To make a toolbar a floating palette

To create a floating palette from a toolbar tool

To show or hide toolbars

Using Toolbars and Tool Palettes


To create a floating palette from a toolbar tool

1	Click one of the following tools. (These tools are on the Draw toolbar).

	Text Color	Fill Color	Line Color
	Line Style	Line Weight	Arrowheads
	Crossovers	Shadow	3D
2	Drag the palette off the tool.

3	If you want, you can close the Draw toolbar. The floating palette remains open until you close it.


To create a new toolbar

To rename a toolbar

To reset a toolbar

To delete a toolbar

To dock a floating toolbar

To show or hide toolbars

Using Toolbars and Tool Palettes


To show or hide toolbars

1	On the View menu, click Toolbars.

2	Select the toolbars you would like to view, or clear the toolbars you no longer want to view.

3	Click OK.


To create a new toolbar

To rename a toolbar

To reset a toolbar

To delete a toolbar

To make a toolbar a floating palette

To create a floating palette from a toolbar tool

To show or hide toolbars

Using Toolbars and Tool Palettes


Customize dialog box

Element	Description
Categories	Menu and toolbar names in the application.
Tools	Available for assigning to existing menus and toolbars, or new toolbars.


To create a new toolbar


Using Color Palettes

With iGrafx Professional, you can color text, lines, and fills. You can change default color and create as many as 33 custom colors.


To create a custom color

1	Click the Fill Color, Line Color, or Text Color tool on the Draw toolbar.

2	Click More Colors.

3	Click or drag anywhere in the large color window to select a color.

4	Click OK. The color becomes the selected color for the fill, text, or line. It also appears in the color palette.

Tips

Move the vertical scroll bar on the right to adjust the amount of white and black in your color.

For finer control, you can type the values you want in the text boxes. Values must be between 0 and 255.

When the custom color palette is full, you can still add more colors. When you do, the first custom color (in the upper left corner) is removed and your new color is added in the lower right corner of the palette.

If you are using Windows-standard VGA (16 colors), certain colors appear different when drawing lines and typing text, because of the limitations of your display driver.


To color an existing line

To color fill

To color existing text


To color an existing line

1	Click the line that you want to apply color to.

2	   Click the Line Color tool.

3	Click the color you want.


To color fill

To color existing text


To color fill

1	Click the shape that you want to apply color to.

2	   Click the Fill Color tool.

3	Click the color you want.


To color an existing line

To color existing text


To color existing text

1	Click the text that you want to apply color to.

2	   Click the Text Color tool.

3	Click the color you want.


To color an existing line

To color fill


Using ToolTips

ToolTips are short messages that appear in bubble text. These messages help explain the name of the tool or button and, in some cases, what the tool or button does.


To show or hide ToolTips

1	On the View menu, click Toolbars.

2	Click Show ToolTips.

or

Clear the Show ToolTips box.


To use ToolTips


To use ToolTips

1	On the View menu, click Toolbars.

2	Make sure the Show ToolTips box is checked.

3	Point to a tool or button in the window, and hold the mouse still for a short time. A short message (bubble) appears, explaining the tool or button.


To show or hide ToolTips


Using Menus and Commands

For more information about commands in iGrafx Professional, click on the following menus:

File menu

Edit menu

View menu

Insert menu

Format menu

Tools Menu

Arrange menu

Model menu

Window menu

Help menu


File menu

The File menu contains the following commands:

Command	Description
New	On the File menu, point to New and click one of the three commands.  You can create a new document as: • A Basic Diagram  • Process  • A new document based on a template
Open	Opens an existing diagram or workspace. You can open these file types: • Documents (file names ending with an IGX, FLO, ABC, AF3, AF2, PFD).  • Templates (file names ending with the IGT extension).  • Workspaces (file names ending with the IGW extension).  Tip The shortcut key is CTRL+O.
Close	Closes the active document.
Close All	Closes all documents.
Save	Stores a document or template as a file. The first time you save a new document choose where you want to store the file. Afterwards, each time you choose the Save command, your changes are saved in that file. You also can save templates for use with new documents.
Save As	Makes a copy of the document under a new name or in another location, so that you have both the original document and a copy.
Save Workspace	Saves the names of open documents and their window arrangement in a file. When you open a workspace file, the document files open and restore the arrangement.
Save as Web Page	Saves a iGrafx Professional file with related HTML format or Java applets, including graphics, for publication on the Web. This feature also converts links to the diagram to HTML format. When the diagrams are viewed on the Internet or an intranet and if you converted the links, clicking on a linked shape opens the associated diagram.
Components	Manages diagrams and diagram components by listing them in a hierarchical, or outline, view. This makes it easy to add new diagrams, rename or edit existing diagrams, and delete diagrams you are no longer using.
Shape Library	Adds shapes to the Toolbox toolbar. After you add a shape, you can change its size, line width, and color. You can also duplicate or add Visual Basic functionality to a shape(s).
Template	Provides information on the template associated with the document.
Page Setup	• Sets the size of the page.   • Sets the orientation of the page (portrait or landscape)  • Sets the scaling to fit diagrams on pages  • Sets the size of the page margins (borders)  • Sets custom headers and footers  • Sets the order in which pages are printed  If you change your page margin, the objects on the page also move. The default page size is determined by the selected printer.
Print Preview	Previews how the diagram looks when you print it.
Print	Prints your diagrams and adds them to presentations and reports. You can print all the pages, a range of pages, or only selected objects in the diagram. Tip You can also use the shortcut key: CTRL+ P
Send	Creates an e-mail message with the current document as an attachment. Note This feature works with any MAPI E-mail system. MAPI e-mail systems include Microsoft Mail, Microsoft Exchange, and Lotus cc:Mail.
Recent File	Lists the last four documents you opened or saved. Quickly opens documents you recently changed. The complete path name appears for documents outside the current directory. A number appears beside each documents name. You can type the number to open the documents or click the document name.
Exit	Closes open documents and the program. Use this command when you finish working with the program, or when you want to free memory to work in another program.


To create a new document using the New command

To create a new template

To create a document from a template

To open a DRW file

To save a document or template

To save a diagram as a Web page

To add a shape to the Toolbox toolbar

To insert a predefined header or footer

To print a diagram

To send a document as an e-mail attachment


Edit menu

The Edit menu contains the following commands:

Command	Description
Undo	Reverses the last action or change on a diagram. If an action cannot be reversed, Can't Undo appears on the menu.
Redo	Reverses the last undo you made. A description of the action to be redone follows the Redo command. For example, Redo Move indicates that Redo can redo a move action. If the program cannot reverse the most recent undo, Redo is not available.
Cut	Removes the selected objects from a diagram and places them on the Clipboard.
Copy	Copies the selected objects in a diagram and places them on the Clipboard.
Paste	Places the contents of the Clipboard into the active diagram.
Paste Special	Pastes information from the Clipboard in various formats.
Select	Specifies the shapes, lines, text blocks, or OLE objects that you want selected in a diagram.
Select All	Selects all objects in a diagram.
Clear	Deletes the selected objects from a diagram. The Clear command deletes objects permanently. They are not placed on the Clipboard. Use the Undo command to recover a cleared object.
Duplicate	Duplicates the selected objects.
Find	Searches for text in the diagram. You can search the diagram (including shapes, lines, and master Items), in notes, in data fields, or in all of these elements. You can look for the text as a whole word and search for the text exactly as you have entered its case.
Replace	Searches for and replaces text in shapes, lines, notes, and the entire diagram. You cannot replace shape numbers.
OLE Links	Opens a list of the objects linked to the active diagram. Use this command to update the object with changes made in the source file, open the source file, change the source file or item, or break the link to the source file. You can only change the links of linked objects. For example, you cannot break a link of an inserted object.
Object	Opens the object application so you can change the linked or embedded object.
Properties	Displays the Properties dialog box for setting or modifying properties of selected objects.


To undo an action

To redo (reverse) your last undo

To cut objects

To copy objects

To paste objects

To select diagram components

To delete objects

To duplicate objects

To find text

To replace text in a diagram


View menu

The View menu contains the following commands:

Command	Description
Normal	Displays the diagram graphically.
Tabular	Displays the diagram as a table with associated data for each shape.
Full Screen	Displays all of the elements of your diagram on the screen without menus or tools. Press ESC to return to the previous view.
Master Page	Displays the items that appear on every page. For example, if you place a shape in the bottom left-hand corner of the master page, this shape appears in the same place on every page.
Toolbars	Displays or hides toolbars. You can also customize the toolbars, reset toolbars, create new toolbars, delete custom toolbars, choose large or small tool sizes, choose color or black and white tools, and show or hide ToolTips using this command.
Status Bar	Displays or hides the status bar.
Output	Displays or hides the output window.
Gallery	Displays or hides the gallery.
Note	Displays or hides the Note window.
Hidden Lines	Displays or hides hidden lines.
Page Breaks	Displays or hides page breaks.
Rulers	Displays or hides the rulers.
Zoom	Changes the magnification of a diagram. To zoom in means to magnify. To zoom out means to reduce the magnification.


To use Normal view

To use Full Screen view

To view the Master Page

To show or hide toolbars

To use the Status Bar

To open the Output window

To show or hide the Gallery

To open the Note window

To turn page breaks on or off

To turn rulers on or off

To choose a zoom percentage


Insert menu

The Insert menu contains the following commands:

Command	Description
Link	Inserts a link from a shape to another diagram, file, or URL.
Department	Inserts a new department.
Picture	Inserts pictures from other files, iGrafx 3D files, and iGrafx Image files.
iGrid	Inserts an iGrid.
SPC Chart	Inserts SPC charts.
OLE Object	Inserts objects from other applications.


To link a shape to a new diagram

To link a shape to a file or Web page

To insert a department

To insert a SPC chart in a diagram


Format menu

The Format menu contains the following commands

Command	Description
Font	Sets the font, size, color, and orientation for diagram text.
Text Alignment	Selects between horizontal or vertical alignment, and sets text orientation and tab size.
Text Layout	Sets text and subtext area sizes for shapes.
Fields	Creates or edits shape fields.
Numbering	Displays or hides shape numbers, automatically or manually renumbers shapes, and sets the next shape number.
Fill	Sets shape fill styles as solid, pattern, or gradient.
Line and Border	Sets line size, style, and color.
Shadow/3D	Chooses shadow or 3D styles for shapes.
Callout Line	Chooses callout line sizes, styles, and colors.
Diagram	Edits the properties for departments.


To choose text styles

To rotate text with a shape

To add secondary text areas to a shape

To add a field to a shape

To connect a callout line to a shape from a graphic

To edit text in department headers


Tools Menu

The Tools menu contains the following commands:

Command	Description
Spelling	Checks the spelling of any text included in documents. You can check the spelling of all the text in the document, or only selected text.
Protect Diagram	Sets or removes password protection to protect your diagram from unauthorized changes.
Change Diagram Type	Changes a Process diagram to a Basic Diagram, or changes a Basic Diagram to a Process diagram.
iDiagram	Runs an iDiagram, assigns a starting entity to a shape, and opens the Entity Manager.
Visual Basic	Uses the Visual Basic Editor to edit codes, views VB shape properties, and assign VB macros to shapes.
Custom Data	Manipulates custom data, inserts legends, creates, displays, and updates custom data.
Export Diagram	Exports a diagram to another file.
Customize	Customizes the program toolbars and the Toolbox.
Options	Sets options for shape spacing and alignment, line spacing, spell checking, displaying the Finished button, displaying the Welcome dialog, and setting the number of Undos and Redos.


To check spelling

To protect a diagram

To run an iDiagram

To add custom data fields to a shape

To insert an iGrid


Arrange menu

The Arrange menu contains the following commands:

Command	Description
Align	Aligns shapes vertically and horizontally.
Make Same Size	Makes selected shapes the same size.
Space Evenly	Spaces selected shapes evenly.
Grid	Snaps a selected object to the grid, displays or hides grid dots, or snaps all objects to the grid.
Guidelines	Displays or hides vertical or horizontal guidelines or snaps selected objects to the guidelines.
Connect Shapes	Uses a connector line to connect selected shapes.
Replace Shape	Replaces the selected shape(s) with the shape in the Shape Library, Shared Media, or the Clipboard.
Reverse Ends	Reverses the ends of the selected line. This changes the direction of the flow for that line.
Fit to Text	Resizes the selected object or objects based on their text.
Rotate/Flip	Rotates or flips the selected object.
Order	Moves objects in your diagram. You can send objects to the back, bring objects to the front, send an object one level backward, or bring an object one level forward.
Layers	Provides a submenu of commands that opens the Layer Manager, edits all layers, adds layers, selects a layer to move to, moves the layer back one layer, and moves the layer forward one layer.
Convert To	Converts a shape to a graphic or a graphic to a shape.
Combine	Connects and disconnects closed and open objects. Also, forms new shapes from different combinations of operations that you can perform with shapes.


To snap objects to the grid

To add a horizontal guideline

To add a vertical guideline

To connect two shapes using the Connect Shapes command

To replace shapes

To reverse line ends between shapes

To fit shapes to text

To group objects


Model menu

The Model menu contains the following commands. Use these commands with iGrafx Process.

Command	Description
Run	Runs a check, or test, on the simulation. You can also start, stop, or trace a simulation.
Run Setup	Modifies run setup data.
Generators	Modifies generator attributes.
Resources	Creates or modifies resources used for the simulation.
Schedules	Creates or modifies schedules used for the simulation.
Events	Creates or modifies events used for the simulation.
Attributes	Creates, modifies, or initializes attributes used for the simulation.
Functions	Creates or modifies functions used for the simulation.
Monitors	Creates, modifies, or finds monitors used for the simulation.
Types	Defines the types associated with the simulation.
Transaction Groups	Defines the transaction groups associated with the simulation.
Find Start	Finds the start point for your simulation.


Window menu

The Window menu contains the following commands:

Command	Description
New Window	Creates a new window for the active diagram.
Tile Vertically	Tiles windows vertically.
Tile Horizontally	Tiles windows horizontally.
Cascade	Cascades windows for minimizing or maximizing.
Split	Divides the active window into four panes. You can then view more than one window at the same time.
Window List	Displays the names of the windows open currently. The numbers indicate the order in which the windows were opened. A check mark indicates which window is active.


Help menu

The Help menu contains the following commands:

Command	Description
iGrafx Professional Help	Displays the help file for finding specific information about using the program.
Learn About Help	Describes the advantages of using help.
Tip of the Day	Displays program tips.
Using Help	Describes how to use the help file.
iGrafx Professional Home Page	Displays the home page for the iGrafx Professional product in the Micrografx Internet site.
Micrografx Home Page	Displays the Micrografx Internet home page.
About iGrafx Professional	Displays the program’s version number, copyright, and licensing information.


Creating New Documents

This manual refers to both documents and diagrams. These concepts are different because:

Documents are containers—They can be a single component such as a Basic Diagram or a Process, or contain more than one Basic Diagram or Process. When you create a document, it includes one diagram by default. You create, open, save, and distribute documents.

Diagrams are components of the document—In diagrams, you can place shapes and draw graphics. You can also view, edit, print, and link diagrams to other diagrams in a document. Collecting and linking multiple diagrams to one document keeps corresponding information in one place.

iGrafx Professional offers two ways to create documents. You can create documents using:

•	Welcome dialog

•	New command on the File menu

Welcome dialog

The Welcome dialog is the first entry point into iGrafx Professional. This dialog offers a graphical point of reference for creating new documents and opening existing ones.

Note
You can bypass the Welcome dialog by clicking the Don’t Show This Startup Screen Again box in the lower left-hand corner of this dialog.

If you decide later that you want to see the Welcome dialog, use the Options command on the Tools menu to make this change.

New command

The New command creates a new document with or without using a template. You can use the New command on the File menu during any part of your session, including startup.

iGrafx Professional includes a manager for templates. Clicking Template on the File menu opens the Template dialog box. Use this box to apply templates, check the dates of template updates, and synchronize an opened document with the most up-to-date template.


To create a new document from the Welcome dialog

To create a new document using the New command

To create a document from a template

To create a new template


To create a new document from the Welcome dialog

1	On the Windows Start menu, point to iGrafx, and click Professional.

2	In the Welcome Dialog, click New Document, and then click Process or Basic Diagram.


To create a new document using the New command

To create a document from a template

Creating New Documents


To create a new document using the New command

1	On the Windows Start menu, point to iGrafx, and click Professional.

2	On the File menu, click New. You can select:

•	Process to open a process diagram with a default department lane.

•	Basic Diagram to open a new, blank diagram window.

•	From Template to open the New dialog box to select a template file.


To create a new document from the Welcome dialog

To create a document from a template

To create a new template

Creating New Documents


To create a document from a template

1	On the File menu, point to New, and click From Template.

2	Click the template you want.

3	Click OK.

4	On the File menu, click Save As.

5	In the Save as type box, select iGrafx Professional (*.igx).

6	Save the document under a new name.


To create a new template

Creating New Documents


To create a new template

1	On the File menu, point to New, and click Basic Diagram.

2	Make changes to the document settings and styles.

3	On the File menu, click Save As.

4	In the Save as type box, select iGrafx Professional Template (*igt).

5	Give a name to the template in the File name text box.

6	In the Save in box, click the drive where you want to save the template.

7	Select the folder where you want to save the template.

8	Click Save.

Note
You cannot use templates created in iGrafx Professional in FlowCharter 7. Instead you must save them as FLO files and convert them to templates within FlowCharter 7.


To create a document from a template

Creating New Documents


Templates dialog box

Element	Description
Template	Browse for the template you want to use.
Update Status	Date template was last updated - Lists the date of the last template update. Date of template to which this document type is synchronized - Lists the date to which the document type is synchronized.
Notification	Notifies when the template is updated.
Options button	Opens the Options dialog box where you can change the template path.


To create a document from a template

To create a new template


Opening Documents

iGrafx Professional offers two ways to open documents:

•	Welcome dialog- Use the Welcome dialog to open documents that you have already created.

•	File menu- Use the Open command on the File menu.


To open a document using the Welcome dialog

To open a document using the Open command


To open a document using the Welcome dialog

1	On the Windows Start menu, point to iGrafx, and click Professional.

2	On the Welcome Dialog, click New Document, and then click Process or Basic Diagram.


To open a document using the Open command

To open a FLO file

To open a PFD file

To open a DRW file

Opening Documents


To open a document using the Open command

1	On the File menu, click Open.

2	In the Look in box, choose the drive where the document resides.

3	Double-click on the folders to open the folder where your document resides.

4	If necessary, choose the type of file you want to open in the Files of type box.

5	Click the document you want to open.

Tips

   You can also use the shortcut key: CTRL+O or the Open button on the Standard toolbar.


To open a document using the Welcome dialog

To open a FLO file

To open a PFD file

To open a DRW file

Opening Documents


Importing Other Formats

You can take a FlowCharter chart, an Optima file, or an Optima Express file, and convert the data into an iGrafx Professional document.

Shapes and lines are automatically converted along with text and graphical information. All linked FlowCharter subcharts can be imported optionally so that the design maintains the hierarchy of processes.

FlowCharter Charts

When importing FlowCharter charts, you may notice a few things:

•	Horizontal swimlanes are converted automatically to iGrafx Professional departments, and their shapes are converted into activities within the appropriate departments.

•	If iGrafx Professional finds links to other FlowCharter charts in the file, you will receive an Import Options message.

•	If you choose Yes, the shapes are converted to Process activities and the contents of the linked files are converted into subprocesses.

•	If you choose No, the documents remain separate.

The following table will help you understand the conversion of Process elements:

Element	Description
Shapes	During conversion, any shape that is connected by a line to another shape is automatically converted to an activity.
Graphics and lines	Any shape that is not connected to another shape is converted to a graphic. Also, any line that does not connect shapes is converted to a graphic. Any line that connects shapes is automatically converted to a connection line.
Decisions and Splits	A shape that has more than one labeled output is converted to a Decision activity. A shape that has more than one unlabeled output, and is not a diamond shape, is converted to an implicit Split activity.
Text	Any text object, other than text that labels an output line from a symbol, is converted to a text graphic.
OLE	Any OLE object is converted to an OLE graphic.


To open a FLO file

To open a PFD file

To open a DRW file


To open a FLO file

1	On the File menu, click Open.

2	In the Look in box, choose the drive where the file resides.

3	In the box, double-click the folders until you open the folder where your file resides.

4	In the Files of type box, click Micrografx FlowCharter 7.0 File (FLO).

5	Click the FLO file you want to open.


To open a PFD file

To open a DRW file

Importing Other Formats


To open a PFD file

1	On the File menu, click Open.

2	In the Look in box, choose the drive where the file resides.

3	Double-click the folders to open the folder where your file resides.

4	Click the PFD file you want to open.


To open a FLO file

To open a DRW file

Importing Other Formats


To open a DRW file

1	On the File menu, click Open.

2	In the Look in box, choose the drive where the file resides.

3	Double-click on the folders to open the folder where your file resides.

4	In the Files of type box, click Micrografx Draw 6.0 File (DRW).

5	Click the DRW file you want to open.


To open a FLO file

To open a PFD file

Importing Other Formats


Viewing Diagrams

iGrafx Professional offers several ways to view new diagrams you are creating, or view documents you have already created. Before using a view, ask yourself the following questions:

•	What type of diagram do I want to create?

•	How will I be using a diagram already created?

Normal View

Normal is the most popular view for editing diagrams. In Normal view you work with a diagram space, or the area containing shapes, graphics, text, and lines. This space is set by default at 100%. Use the Zoom Control to change the view percentage to view more or less of the diagram space.

Tabular View

The Tabular view can be used for viewing data contained within the diagram. This includes departments, shapes, and connector lines.

Note
You can edit data in both the Normal and Tabular view.

Full Screen View

Use the Full Screen view to show someone the diagram and do a chalk talk about it. While in full-screen mode, draw on the screen. When you finish, press ESC to return to the previous view. In the Full Screen view, use the mouse buttons to draw using different colors.

•	To draw in red, click the left mouse button and drag.

•	To draw in green, click the right mouse button and drag.

•	To draw in yellow, click both mouse buttons and drag.

•	You can use the following keys when working in Full Screen view.

•	DEL, Spacebar, E - Erase diagram annotations

•	TAB, PAGE DOWN, N - Go to the next diagram window

•	SHIFT+TAB, PAGE UP, P - Go to the previous diagram window

Master Page View

Master Page view shows you what elements appear on the Master Page. Anything placed on the Master Page appears on every page of the diagram when printing or using the Print Preview command.


To use Normal view

To use Tabular view

To use Full Screen view

To view the Master Page


To use Normal view

On the View menu, click Normal.


To use Tabular view

To use Full Screen view

To view the Master Page

Viewing Diagrams


To use Tabular view

On the View menu, click Tabular.


To use Normal view

To use Full Screen view

To view the Master Page

Viewing Diagrams


To use Full Screen view

1	On the View menu, click Full Screen.

2	To draw in red, click the left mouse button and drag.

or

To draw in green, click the right mouse button and drag.

or

To draw in yellow, click both mouse buttons and drag.

3	Click ESC to leave the full-screen view.


To use Normal view

To use Tabular view

To view the Master Page

Viewing Diagrams


To view the Master Page

On the View menu, click Master Page.


To use Normal view

To use Tabular view

To use Full Screen view

Viewing Diagrams


Zooming Diagrams

Changing the zoom percentage on a diagram helps you get a better view of a shape or a group of shapes. Zoom in to see text and notes on a few shapes, or zoom out to see the layout of all shapes.


To choose a zoom percentage


To choose a zoom percentage

1	Click the object you want centered in the window.

2	   Click the down arrow in the Zoom box on the Standard toolbar.

3	Click the viewing percentage at which you want to view the diagram.

4	To scale the diagram to fit in the current window, use Best Fit.

or

To always view the entire diagram, use View All.

Tips

You can also use the Zoom command on the View menu to change the zoom percentage.


Viewing Diagrams


Zoom dialog box

Element	Description
Zoom To	Select how large or small the diagram should appear as a percentage of its normal size.
Percent box	Type a percentage between 5 and 1600.


To choose a zoom percentage


Using iGrafx Professional Tools

Several tools and commands exist in iGrafx Professional to help you change the appearance of diagram components, give you information about performing tasks, and split up the visible diagram space.

These tools include:

•	Gallery

•	Notes

•	Output Window

•	Status Bar

•	Rulers, Page Breaks, and Hidden Lines

•	Window commands


To show or hide the Gallery

To place a shape using the Shape Library

To place a shape using the Gallery

To attach a note to a shape

To open the Output window

To use the Status Bar

To turn rulers on or off

To turn page breaks on or off

To turn hidden lines on or off


To show or hide the Gallery

On the View menu, click Gallery.


Using iGrafx Professional Tools


To open iGrafx Share Media

On the Windows Start menu, point to iGrafx, and click Share Media.


To open the Note window

On the View menu, click Note.

Tip

You can press F6 to open and close the Note window.


To attach a note to a shape

To delete text in the Note window

To print a note

Using iGrafx Professional Tools


To attach a note to a shape

1	If the Note window is not displayed, click Note on the View menu.

2	Select the shape to which you want to attach a note.

3	Click in the Note window, and type the information you want.

4	Close the Note window.


To open the Note window

To delete text in the Note window

To print a note

Using iGrafx Professional Tools


To delete text in the Note window

1	If the Note window is not displayed, click Note on the View menu.

2	Select the shape to which the note is attached.

3	Point inside the Note window. The pointer changes to the I-beam pointer.

4	Select the text you want to delete.

5	On the Note menu, click Clear or press the DELETE key.


To open the Note window

To attach a note to a shape

To print a note

Using iGrafx Professional Tools


To print a note

1	On the View menu, click Note.

2	Select the shape to which the note is attached.

3	On the Note menu, click Print.

4	Choose Current Note.

5	Choose the print options you want.

6	Click OK.

Tip

In the Note window, wrapped text moves onto one line. To rewrap the text, point to the Note window border, press and hold the left mouse button, and drag the border out until the entire line of text appears (or drag the window border out and back to its former size).


To open the Note window

To attach a note to a shape

To delete text in the Note window

Using iGrafx Professional Tools


To choose indicators for shapes

1	On the Format menu, click Diagram.

2	In the Format Diagram dialog box, click the Indicators tab.

3	To set the indicator type for a shape with a link, click the down arrow in the Link area, and click the type you want to use.

4	If you want to use a text symbol to indicate a shape with a link, type up to three characters in the box in the Note area.

5	If you want to use a shadow to indicate a shape with a note, click the Shadow check box.

6	If you want to change the indicator style for nodes or intersections, choose a new style and color.

7	Click OK.


Using iGrafx Professional Tools


To open the Output window

On the View menu, click Output.


Using iGrafx Professional Tools


To use the Status Bar

Move the cursor over any toolbar tool or menu command.

A description of the tool or command appears in the lower left-hand corner of the iGrafx Professional window.


Using iGrafx Professional Tools


To turn rulers on or off

On the View menu, click Rulers.


To turn page breaks on or off

To turn hidden lines on or off

Using iGrafx Professional Tools


To turn page breaks on or off

On the View menu, click Page Breaks.


To turn rulers on or off

To turn hidden lines on or off

Using iGrafx Professional Tools


To turn hidden lines on or off

On the View menu, click Hidden Lines.


To turn rulers on or off

To turn page breaks on or off

Using iGrafx Professional Tools


To tile windows vertically or horizontally

On the Window menu, click Tile Vertically or Tile Horizontally.


To cascade windows

To split windows

Using iGrafx Professional Tools


To cascade windows

On the Window menu, click Cascade.


To tile windows vertically or horizontally

To split windows

Using iGrafx Professional Tools


To split windows

On the Window menu, click Split.


To tile windows vertically or horizontally

To cascade windows

Using iGrafx Professional Tools


Editing Diagrams

You can find most of the editing functions in iGrafx Professional on the Edit menu. On this menu, you can do things like duplicate objects and find text. Editing is different from formatting in that you are working with existing components, and not changing the size, or applying new colors, lines, and text.

Through editing, you can do things like:

•	Change an open diagram and save it under a new name. This saves you from creating a new one.

•	Paste special text and graphics from other applications into iGrafx Professional.

•	Find text occurrences in diagram shapes or notes, and replace them with a different word or phrase.


To undo an action

To redo (reverse) your last undo

To cut objects

To paste objects

To use the Paste Special command

To select diagram components

To delete objects

To duplicate objects

To find text

To replace text in a diagram

To check spelling

To protect a diagram


To undo an action

On the Edit menu, click Undo.

or

   Click the Undo tool.


To redo (reverse) your last undo

Editing Diagrams


To redo (reverse) your last undo

On the Edit menu, click Redo.

or

   Click the Redo tool.


To undo an action

Editing Diagrams


To cut objects

1	Select the object or objects to cut.

2	On the Edit menu, click Cut.

or

   Click the Cut tool.

Tips

The keyboard shortcut for cutting an object is CTRL+X.

Shapes or text cut or copied from the diagram window cannot be pasted into the Note window.


To copy objects

To paste objects

To use the Paste Special command

Editing Diagrams


To copy objects

1	Select the object or objects you want to copy.

2	On the Edit menu, click Copy.

or

   Click the Copy tool.

Tips

You can also press CTRL+C to copy a selected object.

Shapes or text copied or cut from the diagram window cannot be pasted into the Note window.


To cut objects

To paste objects

To use the Paste Special command

Editing Diagrams


To paste objects

On the Edit menu, click Paste.

or

   Click the Paste tool.

Tips

You can also press CTRL+V to paste the object.

You can paste notes into the active diagram window using the Paste command. Before you can paste something from the Note window, you must select a shape or click the left mouse button on the active diagram.


To cut objects

To copy objects

To use the Paste Special command

Editing Diagrams


To use the Paste Special command

1	Select the object(s) or text in another application.

2	On the Edit menu, click Paste Special.

3	Select the paste type (as text, picture) from the list.

4	Click OK.

Note
If you have copied a linked object or text from another application, the Paste Link option is selected on the Paste Special dialog box. This keeps this object or text linked back to its original application.


To cut objects

To copy objects

To paste objects

Editing Diagrams


To select diagram components

1	On the Edit menu, click Select.

2	Click one or more of the check boxes to select all objects of that type.

Tips

In the Name box, you can click a shape name to select all shapes of that kind.

You can also select all objects using the Select All command on the Edit menu.

You can select multiple objects. Press and hold SHIFT as you click each object.


To delete objects

To duplicate objects

Editing Diagrams


Select dialog box

Element	Description
Shapes check box	Click to select shapes.
Name list	Choose the name of a shape you want to select.
Lines check box	Click to select lines.
Text and Graphics check box	Click to select text and graphics.
OLE Objects check box	Click to select OLE Objects.
All and None buttons	Click All to select all diagram objects. Click None to clear all check boxes.


To select diagram components

To delete objects

To duplicate objects


To delete objects

1	Select the object you want to delete.

2	On the Edit menu, click Clear.

Tips

You can also press DELETE to delete the selected object.

When you choose the Clear command, objects are deleted permanently. They are not placed on the Clipboard.

Use the Undo command to recover a cleared object.


To select diagram components

To duplicate objects

Editing Diagrams


To duplicate objects

1	Select the object or objects you want to duplicate.

2	On the Edit menu, click Duplicate.

Note
You can also press and hold the CTRL key and drag the selected objects to duplicate them.


To select diagram components

To delete objects

Editing Diagrams


To find text

1	On the Edit menu, click Find.

2	Enter the text to find.

Note
The search finds text only in the diagram. It cannot search inserted OLE objects from other programs. To find text in inserted objects, open the object and search for the text within its program.

Tip

You can search the diagram (including shapes, lines, and master items), in notes, in data fields, or in all of these elements.


To replace text in a diagram

Editing Diagrams


Find dialog box

Element	Description
Find what box	Type the text
Match whole word only box	Finds only whole words. For example, if you type computer in the Find what box, the search does not find computerized.
Match case box	Finds variations of the case. For example, if you type computer in the Find what box, the search finds computerized.
Look in list	Diagram- Searches for text in the diagram only. Custom Data- Searches for text in custom data fields. Notes- Searches for text in notes attached to shapes. All- Searches for all three of the above instances.
Find Next button	Click to find the next occurrence of the word.


To find text

To replace text in a diagram


To replace text in a diagram

1	In the Edit menu, click Replace.

2	Type the text you want to find in the Find box.

3	Type the text you want to use as replacement text in the Replace box.


To replace text in a diagram

Editing Diagrams


Replace dialog box

Element	Description
Find what box	Type the text you want to find.
Replace with	Type the text that you want to replace the found text.
Match whole word only box	Finds only whole words. For example, if you type computer in the Find what box, the search does not find computerized.
Match case box	Finds variations of the case. For example, if you type computer in the Find what box, the search finds computerized.
Look in list	Diagram- Searches for text in the diagram only. Custom Data- Searches for text in custom data fields. Notes- Searches for text in notes attached to shapes. All- Searches for all three of the above instances.
Find Next button	Finds the next occurrence of the word.
Replace button	Replaces the word.
Replace All button	Replaces all occurrences of the searched word with the text in the Replace with box.


To find text

To replace text in a diagram


To choose spelling options

1	On the Tools menu, click Options.

2	Click the Spelling tab.

3	Type the path and file name of the dictionary to be used for spell checking.

4	To ignore words with numbers, click Ignore Words with Numbers.

5	Click OK.


To check spelling

Editing Diagrams


To check spelling

1	Select the elements you want to spell check. If no elements are selected, the entire diagram is spell checked.

2	On the Tools menu, click Spelling.

or

   Click the Spelling tool.

Note
Misspelled words are displayed in the Not in Dictionary box. A suggested replacement is shown in the Change To box.

3	You can type in a replacement or choose another replacement from the list.

4	To correct the word, click Change or Change All.

5	If the word is not misspelled, click Add to add the word to the user dictionary and continue, or click Ignore or Ignore All to ignore the word or every instance of the word.


To choose spelling options

Editing Diagrams


Spelling dialog box

Element	Description
Not in Dictionary	Non-editable field that shows the word that is in your diagram, but is not in the dictionary being used by the program.
Change To	Type the word you want to replace the word displayed in the Not in Dictionary field.
Suggestions	List of suggested spellings for the word displayed. If no words are suggested, “(No Suggestions)” appears.
Ignore and Ignore All buttons	Ignore allows this occurrence of the word as spelled in the diagram. Ignore All allows all occurrences of the word as spelled in the diagram.
Add button	Adds the word to the dictionary used by the program. Useful if you are using an acronym or an industry-specific term
Info button	Provides additional information on the word, for example, that the word is not found in the dictionary.
Change and Change All buttons	Change replaces this occurrence of the word in the diagram with the word you typed in the Change To field. Change All replaces all occurrences of the word in the diagram with the word you typed in the Change To field.
Options button	Opens the Options dialog box to the Spelling tab.


To check spelling


To protect a diagram

1	On the Tools menu, click Protect Diagram.

2	In the Password field, type a password.

3	In the Verify field, type the same password again.

4	Click OK.

Note
If you open a protected diagram a message reminds you that you have to type the password before you can make changes to the diagram.


To unprotect a diagram

Editing Diagrams


To unprotect a diagram

1	On the Tools menu, click Unprotect Diagram.

2	Type the correct password.

3	Click OK.

Note
If you enter the wrong password, a message appears telling you that the password is incorrect. Click OK and enter the correct password. If you do not know the password, click Cancel. You can change the diagram after you enter the correct password.


To protect a diagram

Editing Diagrams


Protect Document dialog box

Element	Description
Password box	Type a password in the Password text box. The password is not case-sensitive. For example, flowchrt is recognized as the same password as FlowChrt. As you type, the password appears as a series of asterisks (****).
Verify box	Type the password in the Verify text box exactly as you typed it in the Password text box.


To protect a diagram

To unprotect a diagram


Unprotect Document dialog box

To unprotect the document, type your password in the Password box, and click OK.


Printing Diagrams

When you print a diagram, you can choose several options such as including or excluding diagram components, queuing just the active diagram or the entire document set, or printing to a file. You can also choose the option to print all of the diagrams and components within a document.

Check the following commands and dialog boxes for printing options:

•	The Print command on the File menu. This opens the Print dialog box where you can select or change options.

•	The Page Setup command on the File menu. This opens the Page Setup dialog box where you can select the Options tab to find other print options.


To print a diagram

To see a print preview of your diagram


To print a diagram

1	On the File menu, click Print. Information about the printer appears at the top of the dialog box. (The printer information applies to the printer to which the next print job is sent.) You can also choose another printer.

2	Choose a Print Range option.

3	In the Copies text box, type the number of copies you want.

4	In the Print What box, select the active diagram or the entire document.

5	To send the output to a file instead of a printer, click the Print to File box if you want.

6	Click OK.

Tips

You can also use the shortcut key: CTRL+P.

If you choose the Print to File option, a dialog box opens. Type the file name you want and click OK. The diagram information is saved in a file in the current directory.

To print Notes or blank pages, choose the print order, and fit the diagram to the page, click Page Setup on the File menu, then click the Print Options tab.


To see a print preview of your diagram

Printing Diagrams


To see a print preview of your diagram

On the File menu, click Print Preview.

Tip

You can zoom in by clicking the diagram area you want to see in more detail.


To print a diagram

Printing Diagrams


Saving and Closing Documents

You can save a document by naming it or renaming it, and clicking the following commands on the File menu:

•	Save and Save As - Save a document as an iGrafx Professional document or template, older FLO files, or a DRW file.

•	Save Workspace - Saves your document as an iGrafx Professional Workspace (*.igw)

•	Save as Web Page - Saves your document(s) for publishing on the Web.

If you plan on distributing documents to others, save them as Web pages or as older FLO files. Before sharing these documents with others, ask if they have a Web browser or an older version of FlowCharter installed.

You can close a document or documents using the Close, Close All, or Exit commands on the File menu.


To save a document or template

To save a copy of a document

To save a workspace

To save documents in FlowCharter 7 format

To save a diagram as a Web page


To save a document or template

1	On the File menu, click Save. If you are saving a file for the first time, the Save As dialog box opens. If you have already saved the file, your changes are saved in the file you named earlier.

2	Type the file name in the File Name box.

3	Choose the drive and directory in which you want to store the file.

4	Choose the file format (document or template) in the Save as type box.

Tips

You can also use the shortcut key: CTRL+S.

A template includes all document settings and styles.

You cannot use templates created in iGrafx Professional in earlier versions of FlowCharter. Instead you must save them as FLO or AF3 files and convert them to templates within those applications.


To save a copy of a document

To save a workspace

To save documents in FlowCharter 7 format

To save a diagram as a Web page

Saving and Closing Documents


To save a copy of a document

1	On the File menu, click Save As.

2	Type a file name for the document copy. Use a different name to distinguish between the copy and the original.

3	Choose the drive and directory in which you want to store the copy.

4	Click OK.


To save a document or template

To save a workspace

To save documents in FlowCharter 7 format

To save a diagram as a Web page

Saving and Closing Documents


To save a workspace

1	On the File menu, click Save Workspace.

2	Type a name for the workspace file in the File Name text box.

3	Choose the drive and directory in which you want to store the workspace file.

4	Click OK.

Note
Only saved documents are included in the workspace file. If any of the documents in the workspace have not been saved, the Save File dialog box opens to save them.


To reopen the workspace

Saving and Closing Documents


To reopen the workspace

1	On the File menu, click Open.

2	Choose Workspace in the Files of Type box.

3	Choose the drive and directory that contain the workspace file you want.

4	Click the file you want to open.

5	Click OK.


To save a workspace

Saving and Closing Documents


To save documents in FlowCharter 7 format

1	On the File menu, click Save As.

2	Choose the Micrografx FlowCharter 7.0 File (FLO) format in the Save as type box.

3	Type the file name you want in the File name box.

4	Choose the drive and directory where you want to store the file.

5	Click OK.


Saving and Closing Documents


To save a diagram as a Web page

1	On the File menu, click Save as Web Page.

2	Choose the folder location to save the page(s).

3	Select the diagram(s) and components to save.

4	Choose if you want to output diagrams as Java applets.

5	Click OK.

The Save As Web Page- Finished dialog opens.

6	Click Close or click View to view the page(s) in your Web browser.


Saving and Closing Documents


Save as Web Page dialog box

Element	Description
Save to Folder	Type the folder name where the files for the page are to be stored.
Diagram Select list	All Components. Choose from an alphabetically ordered list of all the diagrams in the file. Diagram Hierarchy. Choose from a tree describing the relationships between different diagrams. If you check or clear a parent diagram, all of its children are checked or cleared. You can override this by holding Shift when clicking an item. Diagrams, by Contained Departments. Choose from the list of diagrams arranged by departments that are used within the set. This helps determine all the processes that involve a given department. The departments are shown for organizational purposes only and cannot be edited.
Scale Diagrams by percent	Changes the diagrams HTML output by the percentage you type.
Output charts as Java applets	Converts the diagram into a Java applet that you can use in a browser.
All button	Checks all diagrams and diagram components in the selected view.
None button	Clears all diagrams and diagram components in the selected view.


To save a diagram as a Web page


Distributing Documents

Distributing documents to team members, departments, and even other companies is a great way to communicate ideas and tasks. With iGrafx Professional, you have three ways to do this:

•	Using iGrafx Share

•	Sending documents as e-mail attachments

•	Sending documents as HTML or Java applets


To open iGrafx Share Viewer

To send a document as an e-mail attachment


To open iGrafx Share Viewer

On the Windows Start menu, point to iGrafx, and click Share Viewer.


Distributing Documents


To send a document as an e-mail attachment

1	Open the document to attach to an e-mail message.

2	On the File menu, click Send.

3	Address the e-mail and create a message as you usually do.

Notes
This feature works with any MAPI E-mail system. MAPI e-mail systems include Microsoft Mail, Microsoft Exchange, and Lotus cc:Mail.

If the mail system is not running, it starts when you click the Send command.


Distributing Documents


Options dialog box - Alignment tab

Element	Description
Snap to Grid check box	Select to snap shapes and lines to the grid.
Grid Spacing	Select a measurement in inches. This is the amount of space appearing between grid dots.
Channel Alignment	Horizontal Spacing - Select the minimum space for shapes dropped or placed above or below one another. Vertical Spacing - Select the minimum space for shapes dropped or placed next to one another.


To turn on grid snapping

To snap objects to the grid


Options dialog box - Connector Lines tab

Element	Description
Line Spacing	Horizontal - Space between lines appearing above or below one another. Vertical - Space between lines appearing next to one another.
Default Line Text Style	On the line -Text appears on the connector line. Next to the line - Text appears next to the connector line.
Allow lines to connect to other lines check box	Connector lines can connect to other connector lines.
Allow unconnected lines check box	Connector lines can remain separate from other connector lines.


To add manual off-page connectors to a line

To set the line spacing between shapes and lines

To format lines


Options dialog box - Spelling tab

Element	Description
User Dictionary	The path where the custom dictionary is stored.
Ignore Words with Numbers check box	Select if you want the dictionary to ignore words with numbers.


To choose spelling options

To check spelling


Options dialog box - Files tab

Element	Description
File Types	Shows both Templates and Documents.
Locations	Where these files are stored on your hard disk.


To create a document from a template

To create a new template


Options dialog box - General tab

Element	Description
General	Display Finished button - Check to always display the Finished button. Display Welcome dialog - Check to always display the Welcome dialog.
Undos and Redos possible	Type the number of undos and redos possible. The maximum number of undos and redos possible is 50.
Reset button	Turns on or off the Don’t Display This Message Again message boxes.


Setting Up the Diagram Page

With almost unlimited diagram space on the screen, you can create very large, in-depth diagrams without getting a clear idea of where page breaks occur, the placement of headers and footers, or the size of your margins.

This becomes important when you need to print diagram pages. Use the Page Setup dialog box to adjust page options such as scaling and page order so a diagram prints correctly.


To define the page setup

To select the diagram orientation

To set diagram scaling

To set the paper size

To set page margins

To set diagram titles

To set the Print Notes option

To set the page order for printing


To define the page setup

1	On the File menu, click Page Setup.

2	Click each tab, and select the page setup options you want.

3	Click OK.


Setting Up the Diagram Page


To select the diagram orientation

1	On the File menu, click Page Setup.

2	Select Portrait or Landscape.

3	Click OK.


To set diagram scaling

To set the paper size

Setting Up the Diagram Page


To set diagram scaling

1	On the File menu, click Page Setup.

2	Select Adjust to, and type a percentage in the normal size box.

or

Select Fit to, and type a number of pages wide by a number of pages tall.

3	Click OK.


To select the diagram orientation

To set the paper size

Setting Up the Diagram Page


To set the paper size

1	On the File menu, click Page Setup

2	Select a paper size from the Paper Size list.

or

Type a paper width in the Width box, and a paper height in the Height box.

3	Click OK.


To select the diagram orientation

To set diagram scaling

Setting Up the Diagram Page


To set page margins

1	On the File menu, click Page Setup.

2	Click the Margin tab.

3	Select each of the Margin boxes individually and type the margin you want.

4	Click OK.

Notes
iGrafx Professional rounds the numbers to the nearest hundredth of an inch or tenth of a centimeter. To switch between inches and centimeters, right mouse click on the ruler, and click either Inches or Centimeters.


Setting Up the Diagram Page


To set diagram titles

1	On the File menu, click Page Setup

2	Click the Options tab.

3	To print out large multi-page diagrams that you can cut and tape together, select Per Diagram, and set the overlap for extra taping room.

or

To print out multi-page diagrams that you can bind in a book, select Per Page.


To set the Print Notes option

To set the page order for printing


To set the Print Notes option

1	On the File menu, click Page Setup.

Notes print after the pages of the diagram print. Notes use shape numbers to reference back to shapes in the diagram.

2	Click the Options tab.

3	Select the Notes box.

4	Click OK.


To set diagram titles

To set the page order for printing

Setting Up the Diagram Page


To set the page order for printing

1	On the File menu, click Page Setup.

2	Click the Options tab.

3	Select Down, Then Across to print top to bottom and left to right.

or

Select Across, Then Down to print left to right and top to bottom.

4	Click OK.


To set diagram titles

To set the Print Notes option

Setting Up the Diagram Page


Page Setup dialog box - Page tab

Element	Description
Orientation	Portrait - Prints diagram pages vertically. Landscape - Prints diagram pages horizontally. Tip To fit your diagram on the fewest pages, click Portrait if your diagram is vertically oriented or Landscape if your diagram is horizontally oriented.
Scaling	Adjust to - Sets the diagram size to a zoom percentage. Fit to - Sets diagram pages and their components to a number wide by a number tall.
Paper Size	Prints the diagram on a paper size of your choice. Many popular paper sizes are provided, including letter (8 ½" x 11"), legal (8 ½" x 14"), tabloid (11" x 17"), and C sheet (17" x 22").
Width and Height	To set the width and height for your print page, type the page dimensions you want (in inches or centimeters, depending upon your measure choice).


To define the page setup

To set the paper size

To select the diagram orientation

To set diagram scaling


Page Setup dialog box - Margins tab

Element	Description
Top select	Type or select a value (in inches) for the top margin.
Bottom select	Type or select a value (in inches) for the bottom margin.
Left select	Type or select a value (in inches) for the left margin.
Right select	Type or select a value (in inches) for the right margin.


To set page margins


Page Setup dialog box - Options tab

Element	Description
Titles	Per Diagram - Prints out large multi-page diagrams that you can to cut and tape together. Overlap - Sets the amount of overlap per page. Per Page - Prints out multi-page diagrams that you can bind in a book. Note This option is for printing and storyboarding. By setting the overlap at a quarter inch or more, you can print diagram pages and tape them together with headers and footers visible on each page.
Print Department Headers on Every Page	Shows department headers on every page.
Print	Frame - Prints Frames. Notes - Prints Notes appearing on shapes.
Page Order	Down, Then Across - Prints top to bottom and left to right. Across, Then Down - Prints left to right and top to bottom.


To set diagram titles

To set the Print Notes option

To set the page order for printing


Using Headers and Footers

Headers and footers help you and those who view your diagrams:

•	Get information about a diagram using names and page numbers.

•	Keep up with revisions and diagram opening and saving using date and time stamps.

With iGrafx Professional, you can insert default header and footer information or create custom headers and footers.


To insert a predefined header or footer

To create a custom header or footer


To insert a predefined header or footer

1	On the File menu, click Page Setup

2	Click the Header/Footer tab.

3	Select a style and position combination from the Header list.

4	Select a style and position combination from the Footer list.

5	Click OK.


To create a custom header or footer

Using Headers and Footers


To create a custom header or footer

1	On the File menu, click Page Setup.

2	Click the Header/Footer tab.

3	Click Custom Header or Custom Footer.

4	To insert the header or footer information you want in each section, click inside Left Section, Center Section, or Right Section, and then click the buttons.

Note
To add additional text to the header or footer, enter the text in the Left Section, Center Section, or Right Section box.


To insert a predefined header or footer

Using Headers and Footers


Page Setup dialog box - Header/Footer tab

.

Element	Description
Header list	Sets header formatting and position combinations from this list.
Footer list	Sets footer formatting and position combinations from this list.
Custom Header and Footer buttons	Sets your own custom header and footer combinations.


To insert a predefined header or footer

To create a custom header or footer


Using Guidelines and Grids

You can use guideline and grid options in iGrafx Professional to improve the look of your diagram.

Guidelines

You can use guidelines to align objects. When you drag a shape near a guideline, the shape’s sides and center snap into alignment with the guideline. Guidelines help you align shapes of different sizes to achieve an attractive, organized look. Guidelines do not appear in the printed diagram.

Grids

Grids also help you with alignment by snapping shapes to a series of snap points on the diagram space. When grid snapping is turned on, every shape that you move locks on to these points. If you open a diagram and see that objects are not organized and neat, this could be an indication that grid options were not used. Use the Snap Objects to Grid command on the Arrange menu to organize these objects in the diagram.


To add a horizontal guideline

To add a vertical guideline

To move a guideline

To delete a guideline

To turn on grid snapping

To show grid dots

To snap objects to the grid


To add a horizontal guideline

On the Arrange menu, point to Guidelines, and click Add Horizontal Guideline.

or

Click the horizontal ruler, and drag a guideline down to the desired position in the diagram.

Tip

You can add a guideline with a right-mouse click. Right-mouse click in the ruler area, and click Add Horizontal Guideline.


To add a vertical guideline

To move a guideline

To delete a guideline

Using Guidelines and Grids


To add a vertical guideline

On the Arrange menu, point to Guideline, and click Add Vertical Guideline.

or

Click the vertical ruler, and drag a guideline across to the desired position in the diagram.

Tip

You can add a guideline with a right-mouse click. Right-mouse click in the ruler area, and click Add Vertical Guideline.


To add a horizontal guideline

To move a guideline

To delete a guideline

Using Guidelines and Grids


To move a guideline

1	Point to the guideline you want to move.

2	Press and hold the left mouse button, and drag the guideline where you want it.

3	When you are finished, release the mouse button.


To add a horizontal guideline

To add a vertical guideline

To delete a guideline

Using Guidelines and Grids


To delete a guideline

1	Click the guideline you want to delete.

2	Press and hold the left mouse button.

3	Drag horizontal guidelines to the horizontal ruler, or off the bottom edge of the window. Drag vertical guidelines to the vertical ruler, or off the right edge of the window.

4	When the guideline pointer is positioned over the appropriate ruler, release the mouse button.


To add a horizontal guideline

To add a vertical guideline

To move a guideline

Using Guidelines and Grids


To turn on grid snapping

On the Arrange menu, point to Grid, and click Snap to Grid.


To show grid dots

To snap objects to the grid

Using Guidelines and Grids


To show grid dots

On the Arrange menu, point to Grid, and click Show Grid Dots.


To turn on grid snapping

To snap objects to the grid

Using Guidelines and Grids


To snap objects to the grid

On the Arrange menu, point to Grid, and click Snap Objects to the Grid.

Tip

To set the grid spacing, click the Options command on the Tools menu, and then click the Alignment tab.


To turn on grid snapping

To show grid dots

Using Guidelines and Grids


Setting Up Departments

You can use departments to display the flow of information and materials between different roles, groups or organizational units. In process diagramming, departments help show how tasks flow through groups such as manufacturing and customer service toward a final outcome or creation of a product. Many processes contain subprocesses that appear in their own departments.

Shapes behave the same in departments as they do on a normal diagram page. You can still connect lines, edit points, size, move, delete, change the text, or change the color of shapes. In addition, you can:

•	Name departments

•	Set the vertical or horizontal orientation of departments

•	Expand or shrink departments

•	Reorder departments

•	Move the location of department names

When you create departments for the first time in a diagram, you can set the department orientation and text orientation for headers. After you have created your departments, you edit them in the diagram space.

Note
When you create a process diagram, iGrafx Professional inserts one department and a starting point by default.


To insert a department

To edit text in department headers

To delete a department

To reorder departments

To set the lane orientation of departments

To set the text orientation of department labels

To move the location of department names

To add a color, pattern, or gradient to departments

To add borders and dividers to department lanes

To change lane margins and minimum lane size


To insert a department

1	On the Insert menu, click Department.

or

   Click the Department tool.

2	In the Insert Departments dialog box, click Add.

3	In the Insert Department dialog box, type a name for the department in the New Department Name field.

4	Click OK.


To edit text in department headers

To delete a department

To reorder departments

Setting Up Departments


To set the lane orientation of departments

1	   Click the Department tool.

2	Under Department Orientation, select Horizontal or Vertical.

3	Click OK.

Note
You can only set the lane orientation of departments the first time you add departments to a diagram.


To set the text orientation of department labels

To move the location of department names

To add a color, pattern, or gradient to departments

To add borders and dividers to department lanes

To change lane margins and minimum lane size

Setting Up Departments


To set the text orientation of department labels

1	   Click the Department tool.

2	Under Text Orientation, select Horizontal or Vertical.

3	Click OK.

Note
You can only set the text orientation of department labels the first time you add departments to a diagram.


To set the lane orientation of departments

To move the location of department names

To add a color, pattern, or gradient to departments

To add borders and dividers to department lanes

To change lane margins and minimum lane size

Setting Up Departments


To move the location of department names

1	In an active diagram, click a department label.

2	Click the right mouse button, and click Format Diagram.

3	In the Process tab, select a name location from the Department Name Area list.

4	Click OK.


To add a color, pattern, or gradient to departments

To set the lane orientation of departments

To set the text orientation of department labels

To add borders and dividers to department lanes

To change lane margins and minimum lane size

Setting Up Departments


To add a color, pattern, or gradient to departments

1	In an active diagram, click a department label.

2	In the Gallery, click the Fill tab, select Fill Color, Fill Pattern, or Fill Gradient, and then click a color, pattern, or gradient.

3	Repeat the same procedure for lines and shadows/3D.


To move the location of department names

To set the lane orientation of departments

To set the text orientation of department labels

To add borders and dividers to department lanes

To change lane margins and minimum lane size

Setting Up Departments


To add borders and dividers to department lanes

1	In an active diagram, click a department label.

2	Click the right mouse button, and click Format Diagram.

3	Click the Borders and Dividers tab, and select the area you would like to apply borders or dividers from the list.

4	Select from the various line types, styles, widths, and colors available.

5	Click OK.


To set the lane orientation of departments

To set the text orientation of department labels

To move the location of department names

To add a color, pattern, or gradient to departments

To change lane margins and minimum lane size

Setting Up Departments


To edit text in department headers

1	Click the department header.

The cursor changes to a text cursor.

2	Delete the text, and type a new name.


To insert a department

To delete a department

To reorder departments

Setting Up Departments


To delete a department

Click the department header, and press DELETE.


To insert a department

To edit text in department headers

To reorder departments

Setting Up Departments


To reorder departments

1	Click the department header that you want to move.

2	Click any area between the black squares.

The cursor changes to four arrows.

•	For horizontal departments, drag the department up or down to the desired position.

•	For vertical departments, drag the department left or right to the desired position.


To insert a department

To edit text in department headers

To delete a department

Setting Up Departments


To change lane margins and minimum lane size

1	In an active diagram, click a department label.

2	Click the right mouse button, and click Format Diagram.

3	Click the Lanes tab, and change the bottom margin, end margin, and minimum lane size.

4	Click OK.


To set the lane orientation of departments

To set the text orientation of department labels

To move the location of department names

To add a color, pattern, or gradient to departments

To add borders and dividers to department lanes

Setting Up Departments


Insert Departments dialog box

.

Element	Description
Department Orientation	Horizontal -Select to display departments left to right. Vertical - Select to display departments up and down.
Text Orientation	Horizontal -Select to display text left to right in the department header. Vertical - Select to display text bottom to top.
Departments box	Displays the names of existing departments.
Add, Remove, and Edit buttons	Use to add or remove departments, and edit department names.
Move Up and Move Down buttons	Use to move a selected department up or down.


To insert a department

To edit text in department headers

To delete a department

To set the lane orientation of departments


Insert Department dialog box

.

Element	Description
New Department Name	Type a new department name here.
Departments box	Displays the names of existing departments.


To insert a department


Format Diagram dialog box - Process tab

Element	Description
Department Name Area	Sets the department names to appear on the left, right, or both sides.
Process Fill Style	None - Department lanes are white. Solid - Fills department lanes with a selected foreground color. Pattern - Fills department lanes with selected foreground and pattern colors. Gradient - Fills departments with selected foreground and end colors.
Pattern and Gradient Style	Adds patterns or gradients to your departments. Use the Sample window to view various styles.


To move the location of department names

To add a color, pattern, or gradient to departments


Format Diagram dialog box - Borders and Dividers tab

.

Element	Description
Apply to	Department Frame - The area around all of the departments. Department Divider - The line dividing department headers from lanes. Lane Divider - The lines dividing one lane from another.
Line Type	None - Sets diagram so no lines appear in the location you selected in the Apply to list. Hairline - Shows hairlines. Wideline - Shows Widelines.
Line Style	Sets line style when choosing Hairline or Wideline.
Line Width	Sets line width.
Line Color	Sets line color.


To add borders and dividers to department lanes


Format Diagram dialog box - Lanes tab

.

Element	Description
Bottom Margin	Lets you enter a bottom margin size in inches.
End Margin	Lets you enter an end margin size in inches.
Minimum Lane Size	Lets you enter a minimum lane size in inches.


To change lane margins and minimum lane size


Format Diagram dialog box - Off-Page Connectors tab

Element	Description
Automatic Connectors	Inserts a connector when a line crosses a page boundary.
Shared Destination Connector	Inserts a connector if more than one line is connected to the same attachment point on a symbol.
View Page Breaks	Shows page breaks.
Directional Symbols	Points to a corresponding connection.
Include Page Numbers	Prints page numbers with connectors.
Reference Numbering	Shows Numeric references as numbers. Shows Alphabetic references as letters.


Format Diagram dialog box - Indicators tab

Element	Description
Link	Field that lets you know there is a link. The box to the right sets the type of indicator you want to appear when there is a link.
Note	The text box lets you set text symbols (up to three) to indicate there is a note. Clicking the Shadow box to indicate a shape with a note.
Nodes or Intersections	Style - sets the style for a node or intersection. Color - sets the color of a node or intersection.


To choose indicators for shapes


Format Diagram dialog box - Defaults tab

Element	Description
Select Defaults For	Selects the object types that you want to set defaults for.
Format	Sets styles.


To set shape and line defaults using the Defaults tab

To set text defaults using the Defaults tab


Using the Shape Library

The Shape Library is a custom collection of shapes that you can select. In the Shape Library, you can store shapes that you use most often. By default, the Shape Library has the Process shape already in it.

In the Shape Library you can:

•	Add additional shapes

•	Modify the properties of the shapes

•	Remove shapes

•	Duplicate shapes

•	Change the order of the shapes (move up or down)

•	Update shape properties

Any shapes defined with attributes and formatting that you add to a diagram become part of the Shape Library. Shapes that you add to the Shape Library using the Toolbox toolbar are also unique to each diagram. Saving a diagram saves the shapes that you add to the Library. Also, saving a diagram as a template is a good way to use an extensive Library more than once.

Tip

You can always copy shapes to the Shape Library directly from Share Media.

As you work with a saved diagram, you might find that you use some shapes more than others. In this case, you can have these shapes appear in the most convenient areas of the Shape Library. You also might want to organize related shapes together in the Library. You can easily arrange shapes any way you want by moving them up or down.

After you have added shapes to the Library, you can modify them by editing connect points, adding text layouts, adding VBA code, adding modeling properties, and changing default formats and fields.


To add a shape to the Shape Library

To add a shape to the Toolbox toolbar

To remove a shape from the Shape Library

To edit a shape in the Shape Library

To duplicate a shape in the Shape Library

To arrange shapes in the Shape Library


To add a shape to the Shape Library

1	On the Toolbox toolbar, click the More Shapes tool   , and then click the arrow to display other shapes in the More Shapes flyout menu.

Note
This tool appears under the last shape you added in the Toolbox toolbar.

2	To open the Shape Library dialog box, click the Shape Library command.

3	In the Shape Library box, click Add.

4	Select a subject from the Share Media list.

5	Click the Shape Palette.

6	Use the scroll bar in the Share Media area to scroll through the shapes in the subject.

7	Click the shape you want to add, and then click Add.

8	To add more shapes, repeat steps 2 through 5.

9	Click Close.


To remove a shape from the Shape Library

To edit a shape in the Shape Library

To duplicate a shape in the Shape Library

To arrange shapes in the Shape Library

Using the Shape Library


To add a shape to the Toolbox toolbar

1	On the File menu, click Shape Library.

2	In the Shape Library dialog box, click the box to the left of the shape you want to add to the Toolbox toolbar.

3	Click Close.


To add a shape to the Shape Library

To remove a shape from the Shape Library

To edit a shape in the Shape Library

To duplicate a shape in the Shape Library

To arrange shapes in the Shape Library

Using the Shape Library


To remove a shape from the Shape Library

1	On the File menu, click Shape Library.

2	In the Shape Library, click the shape you want to remove.

3	Click Remove.

4	Click Close.

Notes
You can only remove a shape from the Shape Library if it is not being used by the document.


To add a shape to the Shape Library

To edit a shape in the Shape Library

To duplicate a shape in the Shape Library

To arrange shapes in the Shape Library

Using the Shape Library


To edit a shape in the Shape Library

1	On the File menu, click Shape Library.

2	In the Shape Library, click the shape you want to edit.

3	Click Edit.

Tip

After you have added shapes to the Library, you can modify them by editing connect points, adding text layouts, adding VBA code, adding modeling properties, and changing default formats and fields.

4	In the Edit Shape dialog box, click Symbol.

5	In the Edit Symbol dialog box, click the tabs and make the changes.

6	Click OK.


To add a shape to the Shape Library

To remove a shape from the Shape Library

To duplicate a shape in the Shape Library

To arrange shapes in the Shape Library

Using the Shape Library


To duplicate a shape in the Shape Library

1	On the File menu, click Shape Library.

2	In the Shape Library, click the shape you want to duplicate.

3	Click Duplicate.

You can duplicate shapes to edit the attributes and formatting so shapes that might look similar behave differently.

4	Click Close.


To add a shape to the Shape Library

To remove a shape from the Shape Library

To edit a shape in the Shape Library

To arrange shapes in the Shape Library

Using the Shape Library


To arrange shapes in the Shape Library

1	Click the shape you want to move.

2	Click Move Up or Move Down.

3	Repeat steps 1 and 2 until the shapes are in the order you want.

4	Click Close.


To add a shape to the Shape Library

To remove a shape from the Shape Library

To edit a shape in the Shape Library

To duplicate a shape in the Shape Library

Using the Shape Library


Shape Library dialog box

Element	Description
Shape box	Contains shapes that you add from Share Media subjects.
Edit button	Makes changes to shape formats, fields, symbols, properties, and VBA code.
Duplicate button	Duplicates the selected shape in the Shape box. For example, you might want to create two Process shapes that look similar, but perform different functions.
Move Up and Move Down buttons	Changes the order of shapes in the Shape box.
Update Shapes	Updates shapes containing VBA code. For example, if you change the VBA code for one Process shape in the diagram, clicking Update Shapes updates the code for similar Process shapes stored in Share Media.


To add a shape to the Shape Library

To remove a shape from the Shape Library

To edit a shape in the Shape Library

To duplicate a shape in the Shape Library

To arrange shapes in the Shape Library


Edit Shape dialog box

Element	Description
Shape Defaults	Displays the formatting and field defaults for the current shape. To change the default settings, clear the boxes and click Format or Field.
Symbol button	Opens the Edit Symbol dialog box so you can change the format, edit the text layout, and edit the connect points for a shape.
Add VBA button	Opens Visual Basic.
Properties button	Opens the Format Shape dialog box where you can change shape information stored in Shape Media.


Edit Symbol dialog box - Graphic tab

Element	Description
Fill Protect box	Protects the selected shape from any global formatting changes.
Line Protect box	Protects lines originating from the selected shape from any global line changes.
Replace Graphic button	Opens the Replace Graphic dialog box. In this box, you can replace the current shape with another shape from Share Media, the Shape Library, or a shape copied to the Clipboard.
Width and Height boxes	Changes the size of the selected shape.


To replace shapes


Edit Symbol dialog box - Text Layout tab

Element	Description
Shape Margins	Sets the distance from the edges of text to the edge of the shape as a fixed measure or a percentage.
Selected Text Area	Sets the fill, border, and font for text appearing in the selected shape.
Secondary Text Area	Sets or removes secondary text areas inside the selected shape.
Size box	Sets the size of added secondary text areas.


To set text margins inside shapes

To add secondary text areas to a shape

To delete secondary text areas from a shape


Edit Symbol dialog box - Connect Points tab

Element	Description
Mode	Select mode moves any of the four default points on the selected shape. Add mode places new connect points on the shape displayed in the box.
Actions	Delete removes a selected connect point from the shape. Reset returns the connect points to their original default settings.
Snap to Grid	Snaps the selected shape to the diagram grid.


To edit connect points between shapes


Placing Shapes in a Diagram

Because you use many shapes when creating a diagram, several methods exist for placing shapes.

•	Placing multiple shapes of the same type—You can place multiple shapes of the same type without having to select the same shape in the Shape Library again. To do this, place a shape in the diagram space, click anywhere in the diagram, and then place another shape.

•	Placing multiple types of shapes—You can select each shape in the Shape Library one at a time to place in the diagram space.

You can place shapes in a diagram two ways:

•	Using the Shape Library

•	Using the Share Media Subject tabs

Note
Double-clicking on a shape in the Toolbox toolbar lets you place multiple shapes of the selected type without having to place a shape, click in the diagram space, and then place another shape. You can point and click. This also makes the Finished button appear.

Shape Library

Placing shapes using the Shape Library requires using two toolbars:

Toolbox toolbar- This toolbar contains the process shape by default and any shapes you designated in the Shapes Library dialog box to appear on the toolbar. Click the arrow below the last shape to open the More Shapes flyout menu.

More Shapes toolbar- This toolbar contains the rest of the shapes you added to the diagram using the Shape Library dialog box. It also contains the Shape Library command for opening the Shape Library dialog box.

Share Media Subject tabs

The Gallery contains Share Media Subject tabs. You can place shapes in a diagram using these tabs. After you open Share Media and select a subject to create a tab, click the shapes and drag them to the diagram space. To open the Share Media, click the Shape Palettes tool on the Standard toolbar.


To place a shape using the Shape Library

To place a shape using the Gallery


To place a shape using the Shape Library

1	Click the shape on the Toolbox toolbar or the More Shapes flyout menu that you want to place.

2	Click in the diagram where you want to place the shape.


To place a shape using the Gallery

To add a shape to the Toolbox toolbar

To add a shape to the Shape Library

Placing Shapes in a Diagram


To place a shape using the Gallery

1	Click a Share Media Subject tab in the Gallery.

2	Click a shape in the palette.

3	Click in the diagram.


To place a shape using the Shape Library

To add a shape to the Toolbox toolbar

To add a shape to the Shape Library

Placing Shapes in a Diagram


Connecting Shapes with Lines

The type of line that you draw is indicated by the Connector Lines tool selected in the Toolbox toolbar. Select the line type that you want to draw by clicking the arrow under the Connector Lines tool, and then selecting the line from the flyout menu.

You can use any of the six line (routing) tools to connect shapes:

•	Direct Line

•	Right Angle Line

•	Curved Line

•	Org Chart Line

•	Cause and Effect Line

•	Lightning Bolt Line

You can connect lines by dragging or clicking, and connect two shapes with a line. When you connect the shapes with a line, the end points of the line snap to the nearest connect points in the shapes.

Using Connector Lines

Connector lines automatically display and snap to points on closed shapes. After placing a connector line, you can easily detach it and reattach it at a different snap point. When you attach connector lines to a shape, you can move the shape and the lines remain attached.

The boxes in this chart are connected with connector lines.	The line remains connected to the box when the box is moved.
Setting Off-Page Connectors on Connector Lines

When working with large diagrams spanning many pages, you might want to use off-page connectors to keep shapes and lines organized. You can add an off-page connector to a line manually by using a right mouse on the line, and then clicking the Format command. In the Format Line dialog box, click the Arrows and Crossovers tab, and select the Connectors box.

Note
In the Format Line dialog box, you can change the color and line style for a selected line.

You can also set automatic off-page connectors for all lines that break between pages. On the Format menu, click the Format command, and then click the Off-Page Connectors tab. In the Off-Page Connectors tab, you can set automatic connectors and choose options such as directional symbols and page numbering.


To connect two shapes by dragging

To connect two shapes by clicking

To connect two shapes using the Connect Shapes command

To choose line routing types

To reverse line ends between shapes

To add a vertex to a line

To restore automatic line routing

To add manual off-page connectors to a line


To connect two shapes by dragging

1	Make sure that you select the desired connector line tool in the Toolbox toolbar.

2	Point inside the first shape, press and hold the left mouse button, then drag the pointer to the side of the first shape where you want the line to begin.

3	Trace the path you want the line to follow by dragging the pointer to the side of the second shape where you want the line to end.

4	Release the mouse button.

Note
Double-clicking on a line in the Toolbox toolbar lets you connect multiple lines of the selected type without having to click a line, connect a line, and then connect another line. You can point and draw. This also makes the Finished button appear.

You can also draw lines that connect to other lines or lines that remain unconnected. On the Tools menu, click Options, and then click the Connector Lines tab. Select the Allow lines to connect to other lines box and Allow unconnected lines box.


To connect two shapes by clicking

To connect two shapes using the Connect Shapes command

To choose line routing types

To add manual off-page connectors to a line

Connecting Shapes with Lines


To connect two shapes by clicking

1	   Click the Connector Lines tool.

2	Click the side of the shape from which you want to start the line.

3	Without clicking the mouse, move the pointer to a connect point on the shape to which you want to connect the line.

4	Click the connect point.

A red box on both shapes indicates the connect points that you selected on each shape.


To connect two shapes by dragging

To connect two shapes using the Connect Shapes command

To choose line routing types

To add manual off-page connectors to a line

Connecting Shapes with Lines


To move a line end from one connect point to another on a shape

1	Select a line connected to a shape.

Two red boxes appear on each end of the line.

2	Move the cursor over the line end that you would like to move to another point.

3	Click and hold the left mouse button down, and then move the line end to a new connect point

4	Release the left mouse button.


To edit connect points between shapes

Connecting Shapes with Lines


To edit connect points between shapes

1	In the Shape Library dialog box, select the shape you want to edit.

2	Click Edit.

3	Click Symbol.

4	In the Edit symbol dialog box, click the Connect Points tab.

5	Use the Mode or Actions options to add or delete connect points.


To connect two shapes by dragging

To connect two shapes by clicking

To connect two shapes using the Connect Shapes command

Connecting Shapes with Lines


To connect two shapes using the Connect Shapes command

1	Click and hold the left mouse button down, and draw a bounding box around the shapes you want to connect.

2	Click the line type you want.

3	On the Arrange menu, click Connect Shapes.


To connect two shapes by clicking

To choose line routing types

To add manual off-page connectors to a line

Connecting Shapes with Lines


To reverse line ends between shapes

1	Click and hold the left mouse button down, and draw a bounding box around the shapes with a line you want to reverse.

2	On the Arrange menu, click Reverse Ends.


To choose line routing types

To add manual off-page connectors to a line

Connecting Shapes with Lines


To choose line routing types

1	   Click the Connector Lines tool.

2	Click the type of line you want. There is a tool for each type.

	Direct Line	Right Angle Line	Curved Line
	Org Chart Line	Cause and Effect Line	Lightning Bolt
Tip

To define a frequently used line type and style combination, add a preset style.


To connect two shapes by clicking

To connect two shapes by dragging

To add a preset shape style

Connecting Shapes with Lines


To add a vertex to a line

1	Click either the direct line or the right angle line between two shapes.

2	Click the right mouse button, and then click Add Vertex.

An X appears on the line.

3	Slide the X on the line to the position you want.

4	Click the line.

A black box appears at the vertex point.

5	To create the new line bend, click and move the black box.

6	Release the left mouse button.

Note
If you move connector lines manually, you can also restore them automatically to their original position. To move lines back to their original position, use a right mouse click on the line, and then click Route Line.


To connect two shapes by dragging

To connect two shapes by clicking

To connect two shapes using the Connect Shapes command

To choose line routing types

To reverse line ends between shapes

To restore automatic line routing

To add manual off-page connectors to a line

Connecting Shapes with Lines


To restore automatic line routing

1	Right mouse click the right angle connector line.

2	Click Route Line.

3	To finish the line move, click in the diagram space.


To connect two shapes by dragging

To connect two shapes by clicking

To connect two shapes using the Connect Shapes command

To choose line routing types

To reverse line ends between shapes

To add a vertex to a line

To add manual off-page connectors to a line

Connecting Shapes with Lines


To add manual off-page connectors to a line

1	Click on a line.

2	Click the right mouse button, and click Format.

3	In the Format Line dialog box, click the Arrows and Crossovers tab, and then select the Connectors box.

4	Click OK.

Note
You can also set automatic off-page connectors for all lines that break between pages. On the Format menu, click the Diagram command. In the Format Diagram dialog box, click the Off-Page Connectors tab to set automatic connectors and choose options such as directional symbols and page numbering.


To connect two shapes by dragging

To connect two shapes by clicking

To connect two shapes using the Connect Shapes command

To choose line routing types

To reverse line ends between shapes

To add a vertex to a line

To restore automatic line routing

Connecting Shapes with Lines


Formatting Shapes and Lines

Using the formatting options in iGrafx Professional helps you create diagrams that look professional and communicate the message that you are trying to send.

Formatting options for shapes and lines appear on the Format menu, the Formatting toolbar, and the Gallery. You can also use the Shape Library, Share Media, and the Defaults tab on the Format Diagram dialog box to set formatting options. See Working with Default and Preset Shape and Line Styles on page 188.


Applying Fill Formats

Applying Line and Border Formats for Shapes

Applying Line Formats for Lines

Applying Arrow and Crossover Formats

Applying Shadow/3D Formats

Using iGrafx Professional Tools


To add a color, pattern, or gradient to a shape fill

To format lines for shape borders

To format lines

To choose arrowhead styles

To choose a line crossover

To add a shadow or 3D effect to a shape


Applying Fill Formats

You can use different colors and fill patterns to differentiate flows and to identify individual shapes. For example, you could use a cross-hatched gray fill to identify incomplete processes and a solid yellow fill to identify completed processes.


Applying Line and Border Formats for Shapes

Applying Line Formats for Lines

Applying Arrow and Crossover Formats

Applying Shadow/3D Formats

Formatting Shapes and Lines


To add a color, pattern, or gradient to a shape fill


To add a color, pattern, or gradient to a shape fill

1	Click the shape you want to fill in.

2	On the Format menu, click Fill.

3	In the Format Shape dialog box, click the Fill tab.

4	Select a solid, pattern, or gradient from the available styles.

5	Click OK.

Tip

You can also use the Gallery to apply colors and styles.


Applying Line and Border Formats for Shapes

Applying Line Formats for Lines

Applying Arrow and Crossover Formats

Applying Shadow/3D Formats

Formatting Shapes and Lines


Format Shape dialog box - Fill tab

Element	Description
Fill Style	None - Shapes have no fill. Solid - Fills shapes with a selected foreground color. Pattern - Fills shapes with selected foreground and pattern colors. Gradient - Fills shapes with selected foreground and end colors.
Pattern and Gradient Style	Adds patterns or gradients to your shapes. Use the Sample window to view various styles.


Formatting Shapes and Lines


To add a color, pattern, or gradient to a shape fill


Applying Line and Border Formats for Shapes

You can choose different line styles for shape outlines. Shape lines include not only the outside part of a shape, but also any interior lines used in the shape and any exterior lines connected to a shape. There are many useful line styles for outlines, including solid, dashed, and center lines.


Applying Fill Formats

Applying Line Formats for Lines

Applying Arrow and Crossover Formats

Applying Shadow/3D Formats

Formatting Shapes and Lines


To format lines for shape borders


To format lines for shape borders

1	In an active diagram, click the shape you want to format.

2	On the Format menu, click Line and Border.

3	Select from the various line types, styles, widths, and colors available.

4	Click OK.

Tip

You can also use the Gallery to apply lines and borders.


Applying Fill Formats

Applying Line Formats for Lines

Applying Arrow and Crossover Formats

Applying Shadow/3D Formats

Formatting Shapes and Lines


Format Shape dialog box - Line and Border tab

Element	Description
Line Size	Sets the line size. You must enter a number between 0 and 5.
Line Style	Sets the line style.
Line Color	Sets the color for the line.
Rounding	Sets the style for the corners of the shape.
Sample	Shows a sample of the selected choices to view before accepting them.


To format lines for shape borders


Formatting Shapes and Lines


Applying Line Formats for Lines

You can use a number of styles for lines, including solid and dashed lines. Line styles are commonly used in flowcharts to convey the following information:

Line Style	Meaning
Solid lines with arrows	Show data flow
Dashed lines	Represent multiple transitions and optional steps
Center lines	Heavier weight lines that represent enclosure outlines or draw attention to a specific diagram element
You can choose different line weight and colors for each line and arrowhead. Varying line weights distinguish data flows and draw attention to certain transitions or data transfers in a diagram.


Applying Fill Formats

Applying Line and Border Formats for Shapes

Applying Arrow and Crossover Formats

Applying Shadow/3D Formats


To format lines


To format lines

1	In an active diagram, click the line you want to format.

2	On the Format menu, click Line and Border.

3	Select from the various line types, styles, widths, and colors available.

4	Click OK.


Applying Fill Formats

Applying Line and Border Formats for Shapes

Applying Arrow and Crossover Formats

Applying Shadow/3D Formats

Formatting Shapes and Lines


Applying Arrow and Crossover Formats

Arrowheads help indicate direction. iGrafx Professional provides two ways to use directional line arrows:

•	Source Arrows

•	Destination Arrows

Many beginning and ending arrow styles exist for both source and destination ends. Try using color to enhance your diagram. You could use one color for all beginning arrowheads and another for all ending arrowheads.

With crossovers, you can set the style and size when lines cross over each other. You can choose from five different styles of crossovers. If you do not choose a crossover style, the lines cross with no indication, which can make it difficult to tell which lines connect to which shapes.

Bunny hops	If the line is on top, it shows the hop; if it is on the bottom, it shows as a solid line.
Broken lines	If the line is on top, it shows as a solid line; if it is on the bottom, it shows as a broken line.
Solid lines	If the line is on top, it shows as a solid line; if it is on the bottom, it shows as a solid line. These cross with no indication.
You can specify the crossover style of individual lines. If you have a bunny-hop line over a broken line, both the bunny hop and the gap appear. If you have a bunny-hop line under a broken line, two solid lines appear. In general it is best to use one crossover style throughout your diagram.

Tip

When you draw a line that crosses any existing lines or shapes it goes over the lines or shapes. To send the line to the back, click it, click the Arrange tool on the Draw toolbar, point to Order, and then click Send To Back.

You set the style and size of crossovers by clicking Line and Border on the Format menu, clicking the Arrows and Crossovers tab, and then selecting the type and size you want. You also can choose the crossovers style by clicking the Crossovers tool on the Draw toolbar, and then clicking the type you want.


Applying Fill Formats

Applying Line and Border Formats for Shapes

Applying Line Formats for Lines

Applying Shadow/3D Formats


To choose arrowhead styles

To choose a line crossover


To choose arrowhead styles

1	Click the line you want to add arrowheads to.

2	On the Format menu, click Line and Border.

3	In the Format Line dialog box, click the Arrows and Crossovers tab.

4	Choose either a Source Arrow line end, a Destination Arrow line end, or both.

5	Click OK.

Note
You cannot change arrowhead styles on filled lines.


To choose a line crossover

Applying Fill Formats

Applying Line and Border Formats for Shapes

Applying Line Formats for Lines

Applying Shadow/3D Formats

Formatting Shapes and Lines


To choose a line crossover

1	Click the line you want to cross over another line.

2	On the Format menu, click Line and Border.

3	In the Format Line dialog box, click the Arrows and Crossovers tab.

4	Select a crossover style and size.

5	Click OK.


To choose arrowhead styles

Applying Fill Formats

Applying Line and Border Formats for Shapes

Applying Line Formats for Lines

Applying Shadow/3D Formats

Formatting Shapes and Lines


Format Shape dialog box - Arrows and Crossovers tab

Element	Description
Source Arrow box	Sets the starting arrow.
Destination Arrow box	Sets the ending arrow.
Crossover Box	Selects the crossover style.
Repeat on each segment box	Select to repeat the crossover style on each line segment.
Connectors box	Adds connector ends to each line.


To format lines for shape borders


Formatting Shapes and Lines


Applying Shadow/3D Formats

You can use shadows and 3D formats as indicators for shapes. For example, shapes with shadows can indicate that a linked diagram exists from a shape. You can choose over ten positions for the 3D appearance of your shape.


Applying Fill Formats

Applying Line and Border Formats for Shapes

Applying Line Formats for Lines

Applying Arrow and Crossover Formats


To add a shadow or 3D effect to a shape

To color a shadow

To change a shadow depth

To change a shadow direction


To add a shadow or 3D effect to a shape

1	Click the shape you want to add an effect to.

2	On the Format menu, click Shadow/3D.

3	Select Shadow or 3D.

4	Select from the various styles, depths, and colors available.

5	Click OK.

Tip

You can also use the Gallery to apply shadows and 3D effects.


To color a shadow

To change a shadow depth

To change a shadow direction

Applying Fill Formats

Applying Line and Border Formats for Shapes

Applying Line Formats for Lines

Applying Arrow and Crossover Formats


To color a shadow

1	Click a shape.

2	On the Format menu, click Shadow/3D.

3	Select Shadow.

4	Select a color from the Color list.

5	Click OK.

Tip

Click Apply to see the results of your changes without closing the dialog box.


To add a shadow or 3D effect to a shape

To change a shadow depth

To change a shadow direction

Applying Fill Formats

Applying Line and Border Formats for Shapes

Applying Line Formats for Lines

Applying Arrow and Crossover Formats


To change a shadow depth

1	Click a shape.

2	On the Format menu, click Shadow/3D.

3	Select Shadow.

4	Select a new depth from the Depth list.

5	Click OK.

Tip

Click Apply to see the results of your changes without closing the dialog box.


To add a shadow or 3D effect to a shape

To color a shadow

To change a shadow direction

Applying Fill Formats

Applying Line and Border Formats for Shapes

Applying Line Formats for Lines

Applying Arrow and Crossover Formats


To change a shadow direction

1	Click a shape.

2	On the Format menu, click Shadow/3D.

3	Select Shadow.

4	Scroll through the Style box and select a new direction.

5	Click OK.

Tips

Click Apply to see the results of your changes without closing the dialog box.

You also can use the Shadow tool on the Draw toolbar to change the shadow direction.


To add a shadow or 3D effect to a shape

To color a shadow

To change a shadow depth

Applying Fill Formats

Applying Line and Border Formats for Shapes

Applying Line Formats for Lines

Applying Arrow and Crossover Formats


Format Shape dialog box - Shadow/3D tab

Element	Description
Effect	None - Sets no effect for the shape. Shadow - Sets a shadow for the shape. 3D - Sets a 3D look for the shape.
Style	Sets the style for the effect.
Color	Sets the color for the effect.
Depth	Sets the depth for the effect. Enter a number between 1 and 5.
Sample	Shows a sample of the selected choices to view before you accept them.


Formatting Shapes and Lines


To add a shadow or 3D effect to a shape

To color a shadow

To change a shadow depth


Manipulating Shapes and Lines Together

iGrafx Professional uses several commands to organize the look and position of shapes in a diagram. You can find the following commands on the Arrange menu and in the Draw toolbar.

•	Align command

•	Make Same Size command

•	Space Evenly command

•	Rotate/Flip command

•	Order command

•	Combine command

The Arrange menu also contains time-saving commands that turn multiple step operations into one step.

Command	Description
Connect Shapes	Connects selected shapes with a connector line.
Replace Shapes	Replaces a selected shape with a shape from Share Media or the Shape Library.
Reverse Ends	Reverses the line ends between two selected shapes.
Fit to Text	Fits a select shape to text typed in the shape.


To connect two shapes using the Connect Shapes command

To replace shapes

To reverse line ends between shapes

To fit shapes to text


To replace shapes

1	Click the shapes in the diagram you want to replace.

2	On the Arrange menu, click Replace Shapes.

3	In the Replace Shape dialog box, find and click the shape you want to use as a replacement.

4	Click Replace.

5	Click OK.

Notes
Any manually resized shape or shape that has been fitted to text must be resized after you replace the shape.

When you replace shapes, the new shapes connect to the lines on the old shapes. The program automatically chooses the closest connect point on the new shapes.

iGrafx Professional automatically preserves shape numbers, colors, borders, patterns, and text size when it replaces the shape.


To connect two shapes using the Connect Shapes command

To reverse line ends between shapes

To fit shapes to text

Manipulating Shapes and Lines Together


Replace Shape dialog box

Element	Description
Paste from Clipboard button	Pastes a copied shape to the Clipboard.
Copy button	Copies a selected Shape from Share Media or the Shape Library.
Share Media tab	Choose a shape from Share Media.
Shape Library tab	Choose a Shape from the Shape Library.


Manipulating Shapes and Lines Together


To replace shapes


To fit shapes to text

1	Click the text block or the shape that contains the text.

2	On the Arrange menu, click Fit to Text.

Tip

Press F8 to fit a shape or a text block to text.


To connect two shapes using the Connect Shapes command

To replace shapes

To reverse line ends between shapes

To fit shapes to text

Manipulating Shapes and Lines Together


Align command

Command	Draw toolbar	Description
Left		Aligns the selected object or objects vertically based on their left edges.
Center		Aligns the selected object or objects vertically based on their centers.
Right		Aligns the selected object or objects vertically based on their right edges.
Top		Aligns the selected object or objects horizontally based on their top edges
Middle		Aligns the selected object or objects horizontally based on their centers.
Bottom		Aligns the selected object or objects horizontally based on their bottom edges.


Manipulating Shapes and Lines Together


To align objects


To align objects

1	Click the objects you want to align.

2	On the Arrange menu, point to Align, and click Left, Center, Right, Top, Middle, or Bottom.

Tips

You can use the following shortcut keys for aligning shapes: Align Top (CTRL+SHIFT+4), Align Middle (CTRL+SHIFT+6), Align Bottom (CTRL+SHIFT+8), Align Left (CTRL+SHIFT+ 3), Align Center (CTRL+SHIFT+ 5), and Align Right (CTRL+SHIFT+ 7).

You can also use the align tools (Align Left, Align Center, Align Right, Align Top, Align Middle, or Align Bottom) on the Draw toolbar.


Manipulating Shapes and Lines Together

Align command


Make Same Size command

:

Command	Draw toolbar	Description
Width		Makes the selected object(s) the same size based on their width.
Height		Makes the selected object(s) the same size based on their height.
Both		Makes the selected object(s) the same size based on their width and height.
Fit to Text		Makes the selected object(s) the same size based on their text.


Manipulating Shapes and Lines Together


To make objects the same size


To make objects the same size

1	Click the objects you want to make the same size.

2	On the Arrange menu, point to Make Same Size, and click Width, Height, Both, or Fit to Text.

You can also use the Make Same Size tools on the Draw toolbar.

Tool	Description
	Makes the selected object(s) the same size based on their width.
	Makes the selected object(s) the same size based on their height.
	Makes the selected object(s) the same size based on their width and height.
	Makes the selected object(s) the same size based on their text.


Manipulating Shapes and Lines Together

Make Same Size command


Space Evenly command

Command	Draw toolbar	Description
Across, Centers		Spaces the selected object or objects evenly across the diagram based on their centers.
Down, Centers		Spaces the selected object or objects evenly down the diagram based on their centers.
Across, Edges		Spaces the selected object or objects evenly across the diagram based on their edges.
Down, Edges		Spaces the selected object or objects evenly down the diagram based on their edges.


Manipulating Shapes and Lines Together


To space objects evenly


To space objects evenly

1	Click the objects you want to space evenly.

2	On the Arrange menu, point to Space Evenly, and click Across, Centers; Down, Centers; Across, Edges; or Down, Edges.

You also can use the Space Evenly Across, Centers; Space Evenly Down, Centers; Space Evenly Across, Edges; and Space Evenly Down, Edges tools.

Tool	Description
	Spaces the selected object or objects evenly across the diagram based on their centers.
	Spaces the selected object or objects evenly down the diagram based on their centers.
	Spaces the selected object or objects evenly across the diagram based on their edges.
	Spaces the selected object or objects evenly down the diagram based on their edges.


Manipulating Shapes and Lines Together

Space Evenly command


Rotate/Flip command

Command	Draw toolbar	Description
Rotate Right		Rotates the selected object or objects 90 degrees to the right.
Rotate Left		Rotates the selected object or objects 90 degrees to the left.
Angle		Selects the angle and direction for the object you want to rotate.
Flip Horizontal		Flips the selected object or objects horizontally.
Flip Vertical		Flips the selected object or objects vertically.


Manipulating Shapes and Lines Together


To rotate an object

To rotate an object by angle

To select the angle and direction for rotating an object

To flip an object


To rotate an object

1	Click the object you want to rotate.

2	On the Arrange menu, point to Rotate/Flip, and click either Rotate Right or Rotate Left.

You can also rotate the object by clicking the Rotate Right tool or the Rotate Left tool on the Draw toolbar.

Tool	Description
	Rotates the selected object or objects 90 degrees to the right.
	Rotates the selected object or objects 90 degrees to the left.


To rotate an object by angle

To select the angle and direction for rotating an object

To flip an object

Manipulating Shapes and Lines Together

Rotate/Flip command


To rotate an object by angle

1	Click the object you want to rotate.

2	On the Arrange menu, point to Rotate/Flip, and click Angle.


To rotate an object

To select the angle and direction for rotating an object

To flip an object

Manipulating Shapes and Lines Together

Rotate/Flip command


To select the angle and direction for rotating an object

1	On the Arrange menu, point to Rotate/Flip, and click Angle.

2	Type a number to determine how much your object is rotated.

3	Select either clockwise or counter-clockwise for the rotation direction.

4	Click OK.


To rotate an object

To rotate an object by angle

To flip an object

Manipulating Shapes and Lines Together

Rotate/Flip command


To flip an object

1	Click the object you want to flip.

2	On the Arrange menu, point to Rotate/Flip, and click either Flip Horizontal or Flip Vertical.

On the Draw toolbar, click either the Flip Horizontal tool or the Flip Vertical tool.

Tool	Description
	Flips the selected object or objects horizontally.
	Flips the selected object or objects vertically.


To rotate an object

To rotate an object by angle

To select the angle and direction for rotating an object

Manipulating Shapes and Lines Together

Rotate/Flip command


Rotate by Angle dialog box

Element	Description
Angle	Enter the number of degrees that you want to rotate the object.
Direction	Clockwise - Rotates the object clockwise by the angle selected. Counter-Clockwise - Rotates the object counter-clockwise by the angle selected.


To rotate an object

To rotate an object by angle

To select the angle and direction for rotating an object


Order command

Command	Draw toolbar	Description
Bring to Front		Moves the selected object or objects in front of other objects in the diagram.
Send to Back		Moves the selected object or objects behind other objects in the diagram.
Send Backward		Moves the currently selected object one level toward the back.
Bring Forward		Moves the currently selected object one level toward the front.


Manipulating Shapes and Lines Together


To bring an object to the front

To send an object to the back


To bring an object to the front

1	Click the object you want to bring to the front.

2	On the Arrange menu, point to Order, and click Bring to Front.

3	The selected object appears in front of all overlapping objects.

Tips

To select an object that is beneath other objects, press and hold CTRL, and click the top object. As you continue to click, the objects below the top object are selected.

You can also bring the object to front by clicking the Bring to Front tool on the Draw toolbar.


To send an object to the back

Manipulating Shapes and Lines Together

Order command


To send an object to the back

1	Click the object you want to move to the back.

2	On the Arrange menu, point to Order, and click Send to Back. The selected object appears behind all overlapping objects.

Tips

To select an object that is beneath other objects, press and hold CTRL, and click the top object. As you continue to click, the objects below the top object are selected.

You can also send the object to back by clicking the Send to Back tool on the Draw toolbar.


To bring an object to the front

Manipulating Shapes and Lines Together

Order command


Combine command

Command	Draw toolbar	Description
Group		Groups selected objects.
Ungroup		Ungroups selected objects
Connect Closed		Connects the selected closed objects.
Connect Open		Connects the selected open objects and closes them.
Disconnect		Disconnects the selected connected objects.
Join		Creates a new shape by joining the selected objects together.
Intersect		Creates a new shape from the intersection of the selected objects.
Outline		Creates a new shape from the outline of the selected shapes.
Slice		Slices the selected closed shape with the selected open shape.


Manipulating Shapes and Lines Together


To group objects

To ungroup objects

To connect closed objects

To connect open objects

To disconnect objects

To join objects

To outline objects

To intersect objects

To slice objects


To group objects

1	Click the shapes you want to group.

2	On the Arrange menu, point to Combine, and click Group.


To ungroup objects

Manipulating Shapes and Lines Together

Combine command


To ungroup objects

1	Click the shapes you want to ungroup.

2	On the Arrange menu, point to Combine, and click Ungroup.


To group objects

Manipulating Shapes and Lines Together

Combine command


To connect closed objects

1	Click the closed objects you want to connect.

2	On the Arrange menu, point to Combine, and click Connect Closed.

Tip

You can also use the Connect Closed tool on the Draw toolbar.


To connect open objects

To disconnect objects

To join objects

To outline objects

To intersect objects

To slice objects

Manipulating Shapes and Lines Together

Combine command


To connect open objects

1	Click the open objects you want to connect.

2	On the Arrange menu, point to Combine, and click Connect Open

Tip

You can also use the Connect Open tool on the Draw toolbar.


To connect closed objects

To disconnect objects

To join objects

To outline objects

To intersect objects

To slice objects

Manipulating Shapes and Lines Together

Combine command


To disconnect objects

1	Click the object you want to disconnect.

2	On the Arrange menu, point to Combine, and click Disconnect.

Tip

You can also use the Disconnect tool on the Draw toolbar.

.


To connect closed objects

To connect open objects

To join objects

To outline objects

To intersect objects

To slice objects

Manipulating Shapes and Lines Together

Combine command


To join objects

1	Click the objects you want to join.

2	On the Arrange menu, point to Combine, and click Join.

Tip

You can also use the Join tool on the Draw toolbar.


To connect closed objects

To connect open objects

To disconnect objects

To outline objects

To intersect objects

To slice objects

Manipulating Shapes and Lines Together

Combine command


To outline objects

1	Click the objects you want to use to form your outline.

2	On the Arrange menu, point to Combine, and click Outline.

Tip

You can also use the Outline tool on the Draw toolbar.


To connect closed objects

To connect open objects

To disconnect objects

To join objects

To intersect objects

To slice objects

Manipulating Shapes and Lines Together

Combine command


To intersect objects

1	Click the objects you want to intersect.

2	On the Arrange menu, point to Combine, and click Intersect.

Tip

You can also use the Intersect tool on the Draw toolbar.


To connect closed objects

To connect open objects

To disconnect objects

To join objects

To outline objects

To slice objects

Manipulating Shapes and Lines Together

Combine command


To slice objects

1	Click the open object and the closed object you want to use for the slice process.

2	On the Arrange menu, point to Combine, and click Slice.

Note
The Slice command is used only when you are using an open object to slice through a closed object. The Slice command is not available if you select two open objects.

Tip

You can also use the Slice tool on the Draw toolbar.


To connect closed objects

To connect open objects

To disconnect objects

To join objects

To outline objects

To intersect objects

Manipulating Shapes and Lines Together

Combine command


To set the line spacing between shapes and lines

1	On the Tools menu, click Options.

2	If necessary, click the Connector Lines tab.

3	Click the Horizontal box, and enter the distance you want between the shape and the first right angle of a horizontal line.

4	Click the Vertical box, and enter the distance you want between the shape and the first right angle of a vertical line.

Tips

The measurements used (inches or centimeters) are displayed next to the box. These measurements apply to the whole diagram. To change the type of measurement used, click the ruler with your right mouse button, select Measurement, and click the measurement type you want.

You can also create a toolbar with the inches and centimeters buttons. To do this, click Tools, click Customize, and click the View category. Click the buttons, drag them outside of the Customize dialog box, and drop them. (When you drop the second button, be sure it is more or less on top of the first button. That way, it gets added to the same toolbar instead of creating a second toolbar with one button in it.) Now that you have a toolbar with the inches and centimeter buttons, you can click them to change the unit of measurement.


Manipulating Shapes and Lines Together


Working with Default and Preset Shape and Line Styles

As you create diagrams, you can reuse the same shape and line styles. For example, you can use the same border style and fill pattern for decision shapes in a certain flow. You can choose the styles you want to reuse and store them in a list. These styles are called preset styles. After saving new preset shape and line styles, you can open them by clicking the Shape Style or Line Style lists on the Preset Styles toolbar.

You can set and apply shape and line defaults three ways:

•	Defaults tab on the Format Diagram dialog box

•	Preset shape and line styles

•	Shape Library and Share Media

This list is arranged in order of override capabilities: Preset shape and line styles you create using the Preset Styles toolbar override shape and line settings you create using the Defaults tab. Defaults you create for individual shapes appearing in the Shape Library and Share Media override styles you create using the Preset Styles toolbar and defaults you create using the Defaults tab.


To set shape and line defaults using the Defaults tab

To add a preset shape style

To choose a preset shape style

To rename a preset shape style

To delete a preset shape style

To add a preset line style

To choose a preset line style

To rename a preset line style

To delete a preset line style

To set shape and line defaults using the Shape Library

To set shape and line defaults using Share Media


To set shape and line defaults using the Defaults tab

1	On the Format menu, click Diagram, and then click the Defaults tab.

Note
You can set several defaults in this tab. This procedure explains how to set one type.

2	Click the Shapes box, and then click Fill.

3	In the Format Fill dialog box, choose a fill style or a foreground color.

4	Click OK.

5	In the Defaults tab, click OK.

All shapes that you place in the diagram appear with the fill style and color you selected.


To set shape and line defaults using the Shape Library

To set shape and line defaults using Share Media

Working with Default and Preset Shape and Line Styles


To create a new preset shape style

1	   Click the Edit Shape Styles tool on the Preset Styles toolbar.

2	In the Preset Styles dialog box, click New

3	In the Format Fill dialog box, select the shape options that you want.

4	Click OK.

5	In the Preset Styles dialog box, click Rename.

6	Type a new name for the shape style.

7	Click OK.

8	Click OK.


To rename a preset shape style

To choose a preset shape style

To delete a preset shape style

Working with Default and Preset Shape and Line Styles


To add a preset shape style

1	Click the shape in the diagram.

2	   Click the Add Shape Style tool on the Preset Styles toolbar.

The shape is added to the Shape Style list.

Tips

Click Toolbars on the View menu, and then click Preset Styles to display the Preset Styles toolbar.


To create a new preset shape style

To rename a preset shape style

To choose a preset shape style

To delete a preset shape style

Working with Default and Preset Shape and Line Styles


To choose a preset shape style

1	Select the shape(s) to which you want to apply the style.

2	Click the Shape Styles list on the Preset Styles toolbar.

3	Click the shape style you want.

Note
If no shape is selected, the preset style appears in the Sample tool and becomes the current shape style.

If you select a shape before you choose a shape style, the style is applied to the selected shape and to future shapes.

Tip

Click Toolbars on the View menu, and then click Preset Styles to display the Preset Styles toolbar.


To create a new preset shape style

To add a preset shape style

To rename a preset shape style

To delete a preset shape style

Working with Default and Preset Shape and Line Styles


To rename a preset shape style

1	   Click the Edit Shape Styles tool on the Preset Styles toolbar.

2	In the Preset Styles dialog box, click the preset shape style you want to rename, and click Rename

3	Type a new name.

4	Click OK.

5	Click OK.

Tip

Click Toolbars on the View menu, and then click Preset Styles to display the Preset Styles toolbar.


To create a new preset shape style

To add a preset shape style

To choose a preset shape style

To delete a preset shape style

Working with Default and Preset Shape and Line Styles


To delete a preset shape style

1	   Click the Edit Shape Styles tool on the Preset Styles toolbar.

2	In the Preset Styles dialog box, click the shape style you want to delete.

3	Click Remove.

4	Click OK.

Tip

Click Toolbars on the View menu, and then click Preset Styles to display the Preset Styles toolbar.


To create a new preset shape style

To add a preset shape style

To rename a preset shape style

To choose a preset shape style

Working with Default and Preset Shape and Line Styles


To create a new preset line style

1	   On the Preset Styles toolbar, click the Edit Line Style tool.

2	In the Preset Styles dialog box, click the Line tab.

3	Click New.

4	In the Format Line dialog box, select the line options that you want.

5	Click OK.

6	In the Preset Styles dialog box, click Rename.

7	Type a new name for the line style.

8	Click OK.

9	Click OK.


To add a preset line style

To choose a preset line style

To rename a preset line style

To delete a preset line style

Working with Default and Preset Shape and Line Styles


To add a preset line style

1	Click the line in the diagram.

2	Click the Add Line Style tool on the Preset Styles toolbar.

The line style is added to the Line Style list.


To create a new preset line style

To choose a preset line style

To rename a preset line style

To delete a preset line style

Working with Default and Preset Shape and Line Styles


To choose a preset line style

1	Select the line(s) to which you want to apply the style.

2	Click the Line Styles drop down list on the Preset Styles toolbar.

3	Click the line style you want.

Tips

If no line is selected, the preset style becomes the current line style.

If you select a line before you choose a line style, the style is applied to the selected line and to future lines.

You can also apply a new line style using the Preset Styles command on the Format menu.


To create a new preset line style

To add a preset line style

To rename a preset line style

To delete a preset line style

Working with Default and Preset Shape and Line Styles


To rename a preset line style

1	   On the Preset Styles toolbar, click the Edit Line Style tool.

2	In the Preset Styles dialog box, click the Line tab, and then click the preset style you want to rename.

3	Click Rename

4	Type a new name.

5	Click OK.

6	Click OK.


To create a new preset line style

To add a preset line style

To choose a preset line style

To delete a preset line style

Working with Default and Preset Shape and Line Styles


To delete a preset line style

1	   Click the Edit Line Styles tool on the Preset Styles toolbar

2	In the Preset Styles dialog box, click the line style that you want to remove.

3	Click Remove.

4	Click OK.


To create a new preset line style

To add a preset line style

To choose a preset line style

To rename a preset line style

Working with Default and Preset Shape and Line Styles


To set shape and line defaults using the Shape Library

1	On the File menu, click Shape Library.

2	In the Shape Library dialog box, select a shape in the Shapes list.

3	Click Edit.

4	In the Edit Shape dialog box, clear the Use Diagram Default Format box under Shape Defaults.

5	Click Format.

Note
You can select several formatting options in the Format Shape dialog box. This procedure explains how to set one type.

6	On the Fill tab, select a fill style, and then click OK.

7	In the Edit Shape dialog box, click OK.

8	In the Shape Library, click Close.


To set shape and line defaults using Share Media

To set shape and line defaults using the Defaults tab

Working with Default and Preset Shape and Line Styles


To set shape and line defaults using Share Media

1	Click on a Share Media subject tab in the Gallery.

2	Right mouse click on a shape, and then click Properties.

3	In the Shape Properties dialog box, click Edit.

4	In the Edit Shape dialog box, clear the Use Diagram Default Format box under Shape Defaults.

5	Click Format.

6	On the Fill tab, select a fill style, and then click OK.

7	In the Edit Shape dialog box, click OK.

8	In the Shape Properties dialog box, click OK.


To set shape and line defaults using the Shape Library

To set shape and line defaults using the Defaults tab

Working with Default and Preset Shape and Line Styles


Preset Styles dialog box - Shape tab

Element	Description
New button	Opens the Format Fill dialog box where you can select new options for a preset shape.
Remove button	Removes the selected style from the Preset Shape Styles list.
Rename button	Opens the Rename Style dialog box where you can rename the selected shape style.


To add a preset shape style

To choose a preset shape style

To rename a preset shape style

To delete a preset shape style


Preset Styles dialog box - Line tab

Element	Description
New button	Opens the Format Line dialog box where you can select new options for a preset line.
Remove button	Removes the selected style from the Preset Line Styles list.
Rename button	Opens the Rename Style dialog box where you can rename the selected line style.


To add a preset line style

To choose a preset line style

To rename a preset line style

To delete a preset line style


Working with Shape Fields

In iGrafx Professional you can use shape fields to expand the power of any selected shape. Inserting a field in a shape helps you attach extra functionality to a shape. It also helps users of your diagram understand that shapes with fields included give more information or perform special functions.

A shape field can be something simple like a date and time, or something more complex, like a Visual Basic expression. The New Field dialog box contains all the field type functions that you can include with a shape. This dialog box is dynamic. Depending on what field type you choose, more information appears on the right side of the dialog for selecting or changing. After choosing a field type, you can also position it at different places inside the shape or outside the shape’s border.


To add a field to a shape

To move a shape field in or around a shape

To include a shape field description with a shape

To set the text orientation for a shape field

To set advanced shape field options

To delete a shape field


To add a field to a shape

1	Click the shape you want to add a field to.

2	On the Format menu, click Fields.

3	In the Shape Fields dialog box, click New Field.

4	In the Field Type list, click the plus signs next to the field types, and click the field you want to insert.

5	Click OK.

6	In the Shape Fields dialog box, move the mouse pointer over the Location box. A black dot follows the pointer.

7	Click the field box within the outline of the shape.

8	While holding the left mouse button down, move the field box to the desired position.

9	Release the left mouse button.

10	Click OK.


To move a shape field in or around a shape

To include a shape field description with a shape

To set the text orientation for a shape field

To set advanced shape field options

To delete a shape field


To move a shape field in or around a shape

1	Click the shape that contains the shape field.

2	On the Format menu, click Fields.

3	In the Shape Fields dialog box, move the mouse pointer over the Location box. A black dot follows the pointer.

4	Click the field box within the outline of the shape.

5	While holding the left mouse button down, move the field box to the desired position.

6	Release the left mouse button.

7	Click OK.


To add a field to a shape

To include a shape field description with a shape

To set the text orientation for a shape field

To set advanced shape field options

To delete a shape field


To include a shape field description with a shape

1	Click the shape that contains the shape field.

2	On the Format menu, click Fields.

3	In the Shape Fields dialog box, select Include Description.

This places the name of the shape field you use before the actual shape field. For example, if you include a field code for page number, PageNumber: appears prior to the page number with the selected shape.

4	Click OK.


To add a field to a shape

To move a shape field in or around a shape

To set the text orientation for a shape field

To set advanced shape field options

To delete a shape field


To set the text orientation for a shape field

1	Click the shape that contains the shape field.

2	On the Format menu, click Fields.

3	In the Shape Fields dialog box, select one of the text orientations under the Location box.

4	Click OK.


To add a field to a shape

To move a shape field in or around a shape

To include a shape field description with a shape

To set advanced shape field options

To delete a shape field


To set advanced shape field options

1	Click the shape that contains the shape field.

2	On the Format menu, click Fields.

3	In the Shape Fields dialog box, click Advanced.

•	To wrap the shape field description, select Limit Text Width and change the Width.

•	To hide the shape field from view in or around the shape, select Hide Text.

•	To prevent moving the shape field text from its set position in or around the shape, select Freeze Text.


To add a field to a shape

To move a shape field in or around a shape

To include a shape field description with a shape

To set the text orientation for a shape field

To delete a shape field


To delete a shape field

1	Click the shape that contains the shape field.

2	On the Format menu, click Fields.

3	In the Shape Fields dialog box, click Delete.


To add a field to a shape

To move a shape field in or around a shape

To include a shape field description with a shape

To set the text orientation for a shape field

To set advanced shape field options

To delete a shape field


Shape Fields dialog box

Element	Description
Current Fields	Provides the name of any current field assigned to the selected shape.
Location	Sets the location of the field information within the shape. Move the mouse pointer over this box. A black dot follows the pointer.
New Field button	Opens the New Field dialog box where you can choose and insert a new field code.
Delete Field button	Removes the selected field.
Include Description box	Includes field code descriptions with the field code. For example, if you include a field code for page number, PageNumber: 1 appears with the selected shape.
Field Alignment options	Sets the text orientation for inserted field codes.
Font button	Lets you change the field code font options.
Advanced button	Opens the Advanced Options dialog box. • Select Limit Text Width and change the Width to wrap the shape field description.  • Select Hide Text to hide the shape field from view in or around the shape.  • Select Freeze Text to prevent moving the shape field text from its set position in or around the shape.


Working with Shape Fields


To add a field to a shape

To move a shape field in or around a shape

To include a shape field description with a shape

To set the text orientation for a shape field

To set advanced shape field options

To delete a shape field


New Field dialog box

Element	Description
Field Type	Select the field type by clicking the plus signs next to a category.
Description	Click a field type to see its description


Working with Shape Fields


To add a field to a shape


Advanced Field Options dialog box

Element	Description
Limit Text Width box	Limits the text width of the shape field, allowing it to wrap.
Hide Text box	Hides shape field text from view in or around the shape.
Freeze Text box	Prevents moving the shape field text from its set position in or around the shape.


Working with Shape Fields


To set advanced shape field options


Numbering Shapes

iGrafx Professional has several options for numbering and renumbering shapes in a diagram. You can apply numbering commands to individual shapes, all shapes in a diagram, new shapes that you place, or existing shapes in a diagram.

Using numbering commands you can:

•	Show or hide shape numbers

•	Automatically number shapes

•	Manually number shapes

•	Change the default number format

•	Set an area in a shape where you would like the number to appear

Note
Shape numbering is turned off by default. Before you can make any changes to shape numbers, you must select a shape and show its shape number, or for all shapes, show all shape numbers.


To show or hide numbers on selected shapes

To show or hide numbers on all shapes

To renumber selected shapes automatically

To renumber all shapes automatically

To renumber shapes manually

To set the default number format for new shapes

To change the number format for existing shapes

To set the numbering position in a shape


To show or hide numbers on all shapes

On the Format menu, point to Numbering, and click Show All Shape Numbers or Hide All Shape Numbers.

Note
This feature only affects shapes numbered with the Numbering feature. If you type a number as text in the shape, the number will not be shown or hidden using this method.


To show or hide numbers on selected shapes

To renumber selected shapes automatically

To renumber all shapes automatically

To renumber shapes manually

To set the default number format for new shapes

To change the number format for existing shapes

To set the numbering position in a shape

Numbering Shapes


To show or hide numbers on selected shapes

1	Select the shapes whose number you want to show or hide.

2	   On the Toolbox toolbar, click the Shape Numbering tool.

3	Click Show Shape Number or Hide Shape Number.


To show or hide numbers on all shapes

To renumber selected shapes automatically

To renumber all shapes automatically

To renumber shapes manually

To set the default number format for new shapes

To change the number format for existing shapes

To set the numbering position in a shape

Numbering Shapes


To renumber all shapes automatically

1	On the Format menu, point to Numbering, and click Auto Renumber.

2	In the Automatic Renumber dialog box, select All Shapes.

3	Type a starting number in the Starting Number dialog box.

4	Select a renumber style.

5	Click OK.


To show or hide numbers on selected shapes

To show or hide numbers on all shapes

To renumber selected shapes automatically

To renumber shapes manually

To set the default number format for new shapes

To change the number format for existing shapes

To set the numbering position in a shape

Numbering Shapes


To renumber selected shapes automatically

1	Select the shapes in the diagram you want to renumber.

2	On the Format menu, point to Numbering, and click Auto Renumber.

3	In the Automatic Renumber dialog box, select Selected Shapes.

4	Type a starting number in the Starting Number box.

5	Click OK


To show or hide numbers on selected shapes

To show or hide numbers on all shapes

To renumber all shapes automatically

To renumber shapes manually

To set the default number format for new shapes

To change the number format for existing shapes

To set the numbering position in a shape

Numbering Shapes


To renumber shapes manually

1	On the Format menu, point to Numbering, and click Manual Renumber. The pointer changes to the Number pointer when you move it into the drawing area.

2	In the Renumber dialog box, type the next number you want displayed.

3	Click the first shape in the diagram you want to renumber.

4	Click the other shapes in the order you want them renumbered.

5	In the Renumber dialog box, click Finished.


To show or hide numbers on selected shapes

To show or hide numbers on all shapes

To renumber selected shapes automatically

To renumber all shapes automatically

To set the default number format for new shapes

To change the number format for existing shapes

To set the numbering position in a shape

Numbering Shapes


To set the default number format for new shapes

1	On the Format menu, point to Numbering, and click Default Number Format.

2	In the Shape Fields dialog box, click Format.

3	In the Numbering Format dialog box, select a new example number from the Example Number list.

Note
You can also type your own numbering schemes directly in this list.

4	If you selected a two-part example number, click either the left or right number or letter to increment.

5	Click OK to close the Numbering Format dialog box.

6	Click OK.


To show or hide numbers on selected shapes

To show or hide numbers on all shapes

To renumber selected shapes automatically

To renumber all shapes automatically

To renumber shapes manually

To change the number format for existing shapes

To set the numbering position in a shape

Numbering Shapes


To change the number format for existing shapes

1	On the Format menu, point to Numbering, and click Number Format.

2	In the Shape Fields dialog box, click Format.

3	In the Numbering Format dialog box, select a new example number from the Example Number list.

4	If you selected a two-part example number, click either the left or right number or letter to increment.

5	Click OK to close the Numbering Format dialog box.

6	Click OK.


To show or hide numbers on selected shapes

To show or hide numbers on all shapes

To renumber selected shapes automatically

To renumber all shapes automatically

To renumber shapes manually

To set the default number format for new shapes

To set the numbering position in a shape

Numbering Shapes


To set the numbering position in a shape

1	On the Format menu, point to Numbering, and click Default Number Format.

2	In the Shape Fields dialog box, move the mouse pointer over the Location box. A black dot follows the pointer.

3	Click the field box within the outline of the shape.

4	While holding the left-mouse button down, move the field box to the desired position.

5	Release the left-mouse button.

6	Click OK.


To show or hide numbers on selected shapes

To show or hide numbers on all shapes

To renumber selected shapes automatically

To renumber all shapes automatically

To renumber shapes manually

To set the default number format for new shapes

To change the number format for existing shapes

To set the numbering position in a shape

Numbering Shapes


Automatic Renumber dialog box

Element	Description
Renumber	All Shapes - Renumbers all shapes in the active diagram. Selected Shapes - Renumbers only those shapes selected.
Starting Number	Type the number you that you want to use to begin the renumbering.
Renumber Style	By Flow Through Diagram - Renumbering follows the flow in the active diagram. Left to Right by Department - Renumbering follows the departments in the active diagram.


To renumber selected shapes automatically

To renumber all shapes automatically


Numbering Format dialog box

Element	Description
Example number	Type the number that you want to use to begin numbering shapes. Note You can also type your own numbering schemes directly in this list.
Increment which part	If you selected a two-part number or letter, select the left or right for incrementing.


To set the default number format for new shapes

To change the number format for existing shapes


Creating and Manipulating Text

Five types of text exist in iGrafx Professional:

•	Shape - Text that you type directly in a shape. As you type text, the shape automatically resizes to fit the text. You can use the shape text to describe only that shape.

•	Department Name - Text that you type directly in department headers.

•	Connector Line

•	Decision - Text generated from selections in the Properties dialog box. You cannot delete this text in the diagram space.

•	Direct - Text that you create by selecting a line and typing on it.

•	General

•	Graphic - Text that you type directly in graphic.

•	Direct - Text that you create by clicking the Text tool on the Toolbox toolbar, clicking in the diagram space, and then typing.

•	Field - Text that appears as a field in or around a shape.

You can:

•	Create freeform text, shape text, and text on lines.

•	Create and format callout lines.

•	Set the formatting style for text.

•	Set the alignment of a text block.

•	Create and set tab sizes.

•	Set the text orientation.

•	Align text.

•	Make text a bulleted list and set the bullet style and spacing.

•	Rotate text.

•	Make text opaque.

•	Set tab spacing.

•	Modify line spacing between paragraphs, and set the spacing units.

•	Increase or decrease text indention.

New Text Features

iGrafx Professional includes the following new text manipulation features:

•	Shapes automatically adjust to the text you type.

•	When you click a shape, you can automatically begin entering text into the shape.

•	You can add multiple text fields to a shape.

•	You have more formatting options for text in a diagram. You can:

•	Make the text a bullet list.

•	Set tab spacing.

•	Modify line spacing between paragraphs.

•	Increase or decrease text indention.

•	Set the text orientation.

•	You have more formatting features that you access directly from the Formatting toolbar. You can:

•	Rotate text blocks.

•	Make text opaque.

•	Increase and decrease indents and line spacing in text blocks.


To create shape text

To edit text in department headers

To create text in the diagram space

To add text to a graphic

To create text on lines

To select text

To place the text cursor in text

To select text by dragging

To move the text cursor using the keyboard

To select text using the keyboard

To delete text


To create shape text

1	Click within the shape that you want to add text to.

2	Type the text you want in the shape. To start a new line, press ENTER.

3	When you finish typing, click outside the shape.


To edit text in department headers

To create text in the diagram space

To add text to a graphic

To create text on lines

Creating and Manipulating Text


To edit text in department headers

1	Click the department header.

The pointer changes to a text cursor.

2	Delete the text, and type a new name.


To create shape text

To create text in the diagram space

To add text to a graphic

To create text on lines

Creating and Manipulating Text


To create text in the diagram space

1	   Click the Text tool on the Toolbox toolbar.

2	Click in the diagram space, and type.

3	When you finish typing, click away from the text.


To create shape text

To edit text in department headers

To add text to a graphic

To create text on lines

Creating and Manipulating Text


To add text to a graphic

1	Double-click the graphic.

2	Type the text in the graphic.

3	To make the text appear in the graphic, click outside of the text box.

Tip

You can also use the right mouse menu and click Add Text.


To create shape text

To edit text in department headers

To create text in the diagram space

To create text on lines

Creating and Manipulating Text


To create text on lines

1	Select the line.

2	Type the text you want in the text block. To start a new line, press ENTER.

3	When you finish typing, click outside the text block.

Note
You can have text appear next to lines instead of on lines. On the Tools menu, click Options, and then click the Connector Lines tab. Under Default Text Line Style, click Next to the line. Text typed on a line will appear next to it.


To create shape text

To edit text in department headers

To create text in the diagram space

To add text to a graphic

Creating and Manipulating Text


To select text

Click the shape or text block you want.

Tips

To select more than one object, Press SHIFT and click.

iGrafx Professional applies any text options you choose to all the text in the selected objects.


To place the text cursor in text

To select text by dragging

To move the text cursor using the keyboard

To select text using the keyboard

To delete text

Creating and Manipulating Text


To place the text cursor in text

1	Click the shape (including the text block) that contains the text you want to change.

2	Point the cursor inside the text you want to change.


To select text

To select text by dragging

To move the text cursor using the keyboard

To select text using the keyboard

To delete text

Creating and Manipulating Text


To select text by dragging

1	Click the shape (including the text block) that contains the text you want to change.

2	Click at the beginning of the text you want to select.

3	Click and hold the left mouse button, and drag across the text you want. To select multiple lines of text, drag up or down.

4	Release the mouse button when you are finished.


To select text

To place the text cursor in text

To move the text cursor using the keyboard

To select text using the keyboard

To delete text

Creating and Manipulating Text


To move the text cursor using the keyboard

1	Select the object containing the text.

2	Click to place the text cursor where you want.

3	Press the right or left arrow keys to move the text cursor one character at a time. Press CTRL+ right arrow or CTRL+left arrow to move the cursor one word at a time. To move the cursor one line, press the up or down arrow keys.


To select text

To place the text cursor in text

To select text by dragging

To select text using the keyboard

To delete text

Creating and Manipulating Text


To select text using the keyboard

1	Select the object containing the text.

2	Click to place the text cursor at the beginning of the text you want.

3	Press and hold the SHIFT key.

4	Press the right or left arrow keys to select one character at a time. Press CTRL+right arrow or CTRL+left arrow to select one word at a time. To select one line up or down from the text cursor, press the up or down arrow keys.

5	Release the SHIFT key when you are finished.


To select text

To place the text cursor in text

To select text by dragging

To move the text cursor using the keyboard

To delete text

Creating and Manipulating Text


To delete text

1	Select the object containing the text.

2	Click to place the text cursor where you want to begin deleting text.

3	To delete text to the left of the text cursor, press BACKSPACE. To delete text to the right of the cursor, press DELETE.


To select text

To place the text cursor in text

To select text by dragging

To move the text cursor using the keyboard

To select text using the keyboard

Creating and Manipulating Text


Formatting Text

You can choose styles for text in a diagram. Diagram text consists of anything you type in the diagram space, in a shape, in a department, in a graphic, or on a line.

Text Appearance

Formatting text includes changing the way the text looks. By changing a font size or color, you change the way text appears on the screen or in a printed diagram.

Text Functionality

Formatting text also determines how text relates to other text. Adding bullets and line indents to a text block helps it look different from other text in a diagram. Secondary text areas in shapes create space for separate pieces of information.

Text formatting commands appear on the Format menu. You can also find formatting tools and options on the Formatting toolbar and in the Gallery.


To choose text styles

To set bullet styles for text

To set the line spacing for text

To set text margins inside shapes

To add secondary text areas to a shape

To delete secondary text areas from a shape

To align text blocks

To set text orientation

To rotate text without the shape

To rotate text with a shape


To choose text styles

1	Select the text you want to change.

2	On the Format menu, click Font.

3	In the Format Text dialog box, scroll through the font list, and select the font you want.

4	To change the font size, scroll through the size list and select the size you want.

5	To turn text effects on or off, select the box next to Bold, Italic, Underline, and Strikethrough. (You can select more than one.)

6	To change the text color, select the Color list and select a color.

7	To set the background of the text to opaque, select the Opaque box.

8	Click OK.

Note
To format field text, click the Fields command on the Format menu, select the field, and click Font.


To set bullet styles for text

To set the line spacing for text

To set text margins inside shapes

To add secondary text areas to a shape

To delete secondary text areas from a shape

To align text blocks

To set text orientation

To rotate text without the shape

To rotate text with a shape

Formatting Text


To set bullet styles for text

1	On the Format menu, click Text Alignment.

2	In the Format Text dialog box, click the Paragraph tab, and select the bullet style from the Bullet Style list.

3	Type the number of tabs for the bulleted text list to move to the right in the Indents box.

Notes
You can also use the Bullets tool on the Formatting toolbar.

Bullets Tool

Set the tab spacing (size) in the Block tab.

4	Click OK.


To choose text styles

To set the line spacing for text

To set text margins inside shapes

To add secondary text areas to a shape

To delete secondary text areas from a shape

To align text blocks

To set text orientation

To rotate text without the shape

To rotate text with a shape

Formatting Text


To set the line spacing for text

1	On the Format menu, click Text Alignment.

2	In the Format Text dialog box, click the Paragraph tab.

3	Under Interline Spacing, select the number of lines to space in the Spacing box, and select Lines or Points from the Spacing Units list.

4	Click OK.

You can also use the Decrease Line Spacing and Increase Line Spacing tools on the Formatting toolbar.

Tool	Description
	Decreases the spacing between lines of text.
	Increases the spacing between lines of text.


To choose text styles

To set bullet styles for text

To set text margins inside shapes

To add secondary text areas to a shape

To delete secondary text areas from a shape

To align text blocks

To set text orientation

To rotate text without the shape

To rotate text with a shape

Formatting Text


To set text margins inside shapes

1	Click the shape.

2	On the Format menu, click Text Layout.

3	Select Shape Default, Fixed, or Percentage from the Shape Margins list.

4	Type the shape margins for the top, bottom, left, and right.

5	Click OK.


To choose text styles

To set bullet styles for text

To set the line spacing for text

To add secondary text areas to a shape

To delete secondary text areas from a shape

To align text blocks

To set text orientation

To rotate text without the shape

To rotate text with a shape

Formatting Text


To add secondary text areas to a shape

1	Click the shape.

2	On the Format menu, click Text Layout.

3	In the Format Text Layout dialog box, click Add.

4	Click Left, Top, Right, or Bottom.

The secondary text area is highlighted in blue in the preview shape.

5	In the Size box, select the size of the text area.

6	Click OK.

Note
Note: You can also format secondary areas in the Format Text Area dialog box by clicking Format under Selected Text Area.


To choose text styles

To set bullet styles for text

To set the line spacing for text

To set text margins inside shapes

To delete secondary text areas from a shape

To align text blocks

To set text orientation

To rotate text without the shape

To rotate text with a shape

Formatting Text


To delete secondary text areas from a shape

1	Click the shape.

2	On the Format menu, click Text Layout.

3	In the Format Text Layout dialog box, click the secondary text area in the preview shape you want to remove.

4	Click Remove.

5	Click OK.


To choose text styles

To set bullet styles for text

To set the line spacing for text

To set text margins inside shapes

To add secondary text areas to a shape

To align text blocks

To set text orientation

To rotate text without the shape

To rotate text with a shape

Formatting Text


To align text blocks

1	On the Format menu, click Text Alignment.

2	In the Format Text dialog box, click the Block tab

3	To change the horizontal block alignment, click Left, Center, or Right.

4	To change the vertical block alignment, click Top, Middle, or Bottom.

5	Click OK.


To choose text styles

To set bullet styles for text

To set the line spacing for text

To set text margins inside shapes

To add secondary text areas to a shape

To delete secondary text areas from a shape

To set text orientation

To rotate text without the shape

To rotate text with a shape

Formatting Text


To set text orientation

1	On the Format menu, click Text Alignment.

2	In the Format Text dialog box, click the Block tab.

3	Under Text Orientation, click the direction you want your text oriented.

4	Click OK.


To choose text styles

To set bullet styles for text

To set the line spacing for text

To set text margins inside shapes

To add secondary text areas to a shape

To delete secondary text areas from a shape

To align text blocks

To rotate text without the shape

To rotate text with a shape

Formatting Text


To rotate text without the shape

1	Click the text block or shape that contains the text you want to rotate.

2	   Click the Rotate Text Left or Rotate Text Right tool on the Formatting toolbar.

3	Repeat step 2 to continue rotating the text until it is in the position you want.

4	Click outside the text area.


To choose text styles

To set bullet styles for text

To set the line spacing for text

To set text margins inside shapes

To add secondary text areas to a shape

To delete secondary text areas from a shape

To align text blocks

To set text orientation

To rotate text with a shape

Formatting Text


To rotate text with a shape

1	Select the text you want to rotate.

2	On the Arrange menu, click Rotate/Flip, and then click Rotate Right, Rotate Left, or Angle.


To choose text styles

To set bullet styles for text

To set the line spacing for text

To set text margins inside shapes

To add secondary text areas to a shape

To delete secondary text areas from a shape

To align text blocks

To set text orientation

To rotate text without the shape

Formatting Text


Working with Default and Preset Text Styles

As you create diagrams, you can reuse the same text defaults and styles. For example, you can set a default for text appearing only in shapes, and another default for text appearing on connector lines. Setting defaults for different types of text helps the creator and users of a diagram understand that text can be used for more than labeling purposes.

You can set and apply text defaults three ways:

•	Defaults tab on the Format Diagram dialog box

•	Preset text styles

•	Shape Library and Share Media

This list is arranged in order of override capabilities: Preset text styles you create using the Preset Styles toolbar override text settings you create using the Defaults tab. Defaults you create for individual shapes appearing in the Shape Library and Share Media override styles you create using the Preset Styles toolbar and defaults you create using the Defaults tab.


To set text defaults using the Defaults tab

To add a preset text style

To apply a preset text style

To delete a preset text style

To rename a preset text style

To set text defaults using the Shape Library

To set text defaults using Share Media


To set text defaults using the Defaults tab

1	On the Format menu, click Diagram, and then click the Defaults tab.

Note
You can set several defaults in this tab. This procedure explains how to set one type.

2	Click the Shapes box, and then click Font.

3	In the Format Text dialog box, choose a font from the Font list.

4	Click OK.

5	In the Defaults tab, click OK.

All new shapes created will have the default font style applied.


To set text defaults using the Shape Library

To set text defaults using Share Media

Working with Default and Preset Text Styles


To add a preset text style

1	Select the text with the styles you want (font, size, style, and color).

2	   On the Preset Styles toolbar, click the Add Text Style tool.

Tips

To display the Preset Styles toolbar, use a right mouse click in a toolbar area, and click Preset Styles.


To apply a preset text style

To rename a preset text style

To delete a preset text style

Working with Default and Preset Text Styles


 To apply a preset text style

1	Select the text you want to apply the style to.

2	On the Preset Styles toolbar, select a style from the Text Styles list.


To add a preset text style

To rename a preset text style

To delete a preset text style

Working with Default and Preset Text Styles


To rename a preset text style

1	   Click the Edit Text Style tool on the Preset Styles toolbar.

2	In the Preset Styles dialog box, click the style you want to rename.

3	Click Rename.

4	In the Rename Style dialog box, type the new name.

5	Click OK.

6	In the Preset Styles box, click OK.


To add a preset text style

To apply a preset text style

To delete a preset text style

Working with Default and Preset Text Styles


To delete a preset text style

1	   Click the Edit Text Style tool on the Preset Styles toolbar.

2	In the Preset Styles dialog box, click the text style you want to delete.

3	Click Remove.

4	Click OK.


To add a preset text style

To apply a preset text style

To rename a preset text style

Working with Default and Preset Text Styles


To set text defaults using the Shape Library

1	On the File menu, click Shape Library.

2	In the Shape Library, select a shape in the Shapes list.

3	Click Edit.

4	In the Edit Shape dialog box, clear the Use Diagram Default Format box under Shape Defaults.

5	Click Format, and select Font.

Note
You can select several formatting options in the Format Text dialog box. This procedure explains how to set one type.

6	On the Font tab, select a font from the Font list, and then click OK.

7	In the Edit Shape dialog box, click OK.

8	In the Shape Library, click Close.

Note
Note: New shapes added to the diagram space using this shape will default to this text style.


To set text defaults using Share Media

To set text defaults using the Defaults tab

Working with Default and Preset Text Styles


To set text defaults using Share Media

1	Click on a Share Media subject tab in the Gallery.

2	Right mouse click on a shape, and then click Properties.

3	In the Shape Properties dialog box, click Edit.

4	In the Edit Shape dialog box, clear the Use Diagram Default Format box under Shape Defaults.

5	Click Format, and select Font.

6	On the Font tab, select a font from the Font list, and then click OK.

7	In the Edit Shape dialog box, click OK.

8	In the Shape Properties dialog box, click OK.

Note
Note: New shapes added to the diagram space using this shape will default to this text style.


To set text defaults using the Shape Library

To set text defaults using the Defaults tab

Working with Default and Preset Text Styles


Format Text dialog box - Font tab

Element	Description
Font	Displays available fonts for text.
Size	Displays the font sizes available for the selected font.
Font Style	Lets you pick a font attribute for your text.
Color	Displays the colors you can use for your text.
Background	Lets you make the background for your text opaque or transparent.
Preview	Displays what the text will look like with the changes.


Formatting Text


To choose text styles


Format Text dialog box - Block tab

Element	Description
Block Alignment	Horizontal - Aligns the text horizontally within the shape or text block. You can have the text in the center or flush left or right. Vertical - Aligns the text vertically within the shape or text block. You can have the text in the middle or at the top or bottom of the text block.
Text Orientation	Sets the text to appear horizontally, vertically to the left or right, or upside down.
Tabs	Sets the tab size for your text.
Preview	Displays what the text will look like with the changes.


Formatting Text


To align text blocks

To set text orientation


Format Text dialog box - Paragraph tab

Element	Description
Paragraph Alignment	Alignment - Sets the paragraph alignment for the center of the text block or the right or left side.
Interline Spacing	Spacing - Sets the spacing between lines based on the units you set in the Spacing Units field. Spacing Units - Sets the spacing units to use lines or points.
Bullets	Bullet Style - Displays the available bullet style. Indent - Sets the tab spacing between the bullet and following text.
Preview	Displays what the text will look like with the changes.


Formatting Text


To set bullet styles for text

To set the line spacing for text


Preset Styles dialog box - Text tab

Element	Description
Preset Style List	Lists all preset text styles and includes a preview of the text.
New button	Creates a new preset text style.
Remove button	Removes the selected preset text style.
Rename button	Renames the selected preset text style.


Working with Default and Preset Text Styles


To add a preset text style

To rename a preset text style

To delete a preset text style


Format Text Layout dialog box

Element	Description
Shape Margins	Shape Default - Applies no margins. Fixed - Applies shape margins as a fixed, inch measurement. Percentage - Applies shape margins as a percentage.
Selected Text Areas	Click the Format button to change the border, fill, and font.
Secondary Text Areas	Add button - Adds secondary text areas to the left, top, right, and bottom of the selected shape. Delete button - Removes added secondary text areas to a selected shape. Size box - Sets the size of the secondary text area.


Formatting Text


To set text margins inside shapes

To add secondary text areas to a shape

To delete secondary text areas from a shape


Understanding Differences between Graphics and Shapes

Understanding the differences between a graphic and a shape helps you use shapes more effectively. In iGrafx Professional, graphics and shapes serve different purposes: Shapes are intelligent and graphics serve as helpers.

The following table describes some differences between graphics and shapes:

Graphics	Shapes
Draw using Draw Tool options.	Place using the Toolbox toolbar or the Gallery.
Do not use connector lines. Use callout lines to attach graphics to other objects.	Use connector lines to connect between shapes. Connect lines from other shapes to them.
Not intelligent. Cannot add fields, custom data, VBA code, and other shape properties.	Intelligent. Add fields, custom data, and VBA code.
Things you can do with graphics include:

•	Adding text

•	Reshaping

•	Rotating

•	Attaching to shapes using callout lines

•	Converting to a shape

As helpers, graphics can add value to shapes by describing what the shape is and why it is in the diagram. For example, you can use callout lines to attach a note (a graphic with text) to a shape. Callout lines attached to shapes from graphics move together as one unit. If you move the shape, the graphic moves with it.


Drawing Graphics

iGrafx Professional contains several options for drawing graphical shapes and lines. These options include:

•	Square

•	Rounded Square

•	Rectangle

•	Rounded Rectangle

•	Circle

•	Ellipse

•	Polygon

•	Smoothed Polygon

•	Jointed Line

•	Curved Line

All graphics have the same attributes. After drawing a graphic, handles (black boxes) appear around it and a red square appears inside of it.

To open the Draw toolbar, click the Draw tool on the Standard toolbar.

To view drawing options, click the Draw Tool on the Draw toolbar.

When you click a graphic option from the Draw Tool, the pointer changes to intersecting lines with a small icon of the graphic. You can draw as many graphics as you want while the pointer is displayed.

Tip

You can also tear off the Draw Tool and move it into the diagram space by clicking the Draw Tool and moving the pointer to the gray bar at the top of the flyout. When the bar changes from gray to your system-defined color, click and hold down the left mouse button and drag the flyout to the diagram space. After you tear off the Draw tool, you can double click a graphic to draw multiple graphics of the same type. When you finish drawing the graphics, click the Finished button.


To draw a graphic


To draw a graphic

1	   On the Draw toolbar, click the Draw Tool.

2	Click a draw option.

3	Move the pointer to the diagram space, press the left mouse button and drag down and to the right.

4	Release the left mouse button.


Drawing Graphics


Manipulating Graphics

After drawing a graphic, you can move it or resize it. You can also arrange and combine a series of graphics. Graphics share some of the same features as shapes such as adding text and rotating. You can also reshape a graphic using points and convert a graphic to a shape.


To add text to a graphic

To move a graphic

To resize a graphic

To rotate a graphic

To reshape a graphic

To convert a graphic to a shape


To add text to a graphic

1	Double-click the graphic.

2	Type the text in the graphic.

3	To make the text appear in the graphic, click outside of the text box.

Tip

You can also use the right mouse menu and click Add Text.


To move a graphic

To resize a graphic

To rotate a graphic

To reshape a graphic

To convert a graphic to a shape

Manipulating Graphics


To move a graphic

1	Click the graphic.

2	Move the pointer to the gray hatched area surrounding the graphic.

The pointer changes to four arrows.

3	Click the gray hatched area and drag the graphic to a new position.

4	Release the mouse button.


To add text to a graphic

To resize a graphic

To rotate a graphic

To reshape a graphic

To convert a graphic to a shape

Manipulating Graphics


To resize a graphic

1	Click the graphic.

2	Click any of the black squares surrounding the graphic.

Note
To resize the graphic proportionally, click any one of the corner squares.

3	Without releasing the mouse button, drag the square.

4	Release the mouse button.

5	Click outside of the graphic.


To add text to a graphic

To move a graphic

To rotate a graphic

To reshape a graphic

To convert a graphic to a shape

Manipulating Graphics


To rotate a graphic

1	Click the graphic.

2	   On the Draw toolbar, click the Rotate tool.

The pointer changes to four arrows in a circle and four green circles appear on each corner of the graphic.

3	Click one of the green circles.

4	Without releasing the left mouse button, rotate the graphic to the desired position.

5	Release the left mouse button, and then click the Finished button.


To add text to a graphic

To move a graphic

To resize a graphic

To reshape a graphic

To convert a graphic to a shape

Manipulating Graphics


To reshape a graphic

1	Select the graphic.

2	   On the Draw toolbar, click the Reshape tool.

The pointer changes to a white arrow. When you move the pointer over a reshape point (white circle), it changes to a black arrow.

3	Click one of the white circles.

4	Without releasing the left mouse button, drag the reshape point to a new position.

5	Release the left mouse button, and then click the Finished button on the Reshape toolbar.

Note
When you click the Reshape tool, the Reshape toolbar opens. You can use the tools on the Reshape toolbar to edit the curve of the shape, add reshape points to the shape, or remove reshape points from the shape.


To add text to a graphic

To move a graphic

To resize a graphic

To rotate a graphic

To convert a graphic to a shape

Manipulating Graphics


To convert a graphic to a shape

1	Click the graphic.

2	On the Arrange menu, point to Convert to, and click Shape.

Note
You can also convert a shape to a graphic. When you convert a shape to a graphic, any data attached to the shape, such as field codes VBA, or other shape properties, is lost.


To add text to a graphic

To move a graphic

To resize a graphic

To rotate a graphic

To reshape a graphic

Manipulating Graphics


Drawing Callout Lines

Graphics used as notes or descriptions help highlight important information about shapes in a diagram. You can attach graphics as notes to shapes using callout lines. You can also attach graphics to connector lines or other graphics. After you attach a graphic to a shape using a callout line, its position is relative to the shape. If you reposition the shape in the diagram, the graphic moves with it.


To connect a callout line to a shape from a graphic

To format a callout line


To connect a callout line to a shape from a graphic

1	Click the graphic.

2	Move the pointer over the red square in the graphic

The pointer changes to a white arrow.

3	Click the red square.

4	Without releasing the left mouse button, drag the line from the red box to the shape.

5	Release the left mouse button.

A red box appears on the shape where the callout line is connected.

6	Click outside of the shape.


To draw a graphic

To format a callout line

Drawing Callout Lines


To format a callout line

1	Click the graphic with a callout line attached to it.

2	On the Format menu, click Callout Line.

3	In the Format Callout Line dialog box, select formatting options in the Line tab.

4	To add an arrow to the line and change arrow formatting, click the Arrow tab.

5	Click OK.

Tip

If you want to view lines connecting graphics to shapes, click Hidden Lines on the View menu.


To connect a callout line to a shape from a graphic

To draw a graphic

Drawing Callout Lines


Working with Diagram Types and Components

Creating multiple components and saving them in a document is a good way to organize, package, and store similar information. You can create three separate component types using iGrafx Professional:

•	Diagrams

•	Basic Diagrams contain shapes, lines, graphics, and text describing ideas or functions.

•	Process Diagrams contain shapes, connector lines, departments, other graphics and text. In process diagrams you can add modeling data that can be used with iGrafx Process when simulating a process.

•	Scenario- Contains set up information for simulating a process using iGrafx Process.

•	Report- Contains the results of simulating a process using iGrafx Process.

Note
Scenario and Report components are used with iGrafx Process. If you used iGrafx Process to run a simulation, you can select and view scenario and report data in iGrafx Professional.

For any diagram, you can create or add, view, delete, rename or copy/paste components. You can also add a component using a saved template.


To create a new component

To create a new component from a template

To view a component

To delete a component

To rename a component

To copy and paste a component from one document to another

To convert a basic diagram to a process


To create a new component

1	On the File menu, click Components.

2	In the Components dialog box, click New, and click Process, Basic Diagram, Scenario, or Report.

3	Note You can only create a scenario or report if you have one process in your document.

4	Click Close.


To create a new component from a template

To view a component

To delete a component

To rename a component

To copy and paste a component from one document to another

To convert a basic diagram to a process

Working with Diagram Types and Components


To create a new component from a template

1	On the File menu, click Components.

2	In the Components dialog box, click New, and click New From Template.

3	In the New Component From Template dialog box, browse for the template you want to use.

4	In the Template Component box, click the component.

5	If necessary, type a new name in the Name box, and then click OK.

6	In the Components dialog box, click Close.


To create a new component

To view a component

To delete a component

To rename a component

To copy and paste a component from one document to another

To convert a basic diagram to a process

Working with Diagram Types and Components


To view a component

1	On the File menu, click Components.

2	In the Components dialog box, click All Components, Diagram Hierarchy, or Diagrams by Contained Departments.

3	In the tree hierarchy, click the “+” symbol to expand the components.

4	Click the component you want to view.

5	Click View.

6	Click Close.

Tip

All Components lists diagrams, reports, and scenarios. Diagram hierarchy lists only diagrams. Diagrams by Contained Departments lists diagrams within departments.


To create a new component

To create a new component from a template

To delete a component

To rename a component

To copy and paste a component from one document to another

To convert a basic diagram to a process

Working with Diagram Types and Components


To delete a component

1	On the File menu, click Components.

2	In the Components dialog box, click All Components, Diagram Hierarchy, or Diagrams by Contained Departments.

3	If necessary, click the “+” symbol to expand the components.

4	Click the component you want to delete.

5	Click Delete.

6	Click Close.


To create a new component

To create a new component from a template

To view a component

To rename a component

To copy and paste a component from one document to another

To convert a basic diagram to a process

Working with Diagram Types and Components


To rename a component

1	On the File menu, click Components.

2	In the Components dialog box, click All Components, Diagram Hierarchy, or Diagrams by Contained Departments.

3	If necessary, click the “+” symbol to expand the components.

4	Click the component you want to rename.

5	Click Rename.

6	Type the new name over the existing name.

7	Click outside of the text box.

8	Click Close.


To create a new component

To create a new component from a template

To view a component

To delete a component

To copy and paste a component from one document to another

To convert a basic diagram to a process

Working with Diagram Types and Components


To copy and paste a component from one document to another

1	On the File menu, click Components.

2	In the Components dialog box, click All Components, Diagram Hierarchy, or Diagrams by Contained Departments.

3	In the tree hierarchy, click the “+” symbol to expand the components.

4	Click the component you want to copy, and then click Copy.

Note
You can select multiple components for copying by pressing SHIFT and clicking the components.

5	Click Close.

6	On the File menu, click Open, navigate to another document, and then click OK.

7	On the File menu, click Components.

8	In the Components dialog box, click Paste.

The original copied components now appear in the dialog box.

9	Click Close.


To create a new component

To create a new component from a template

To view a component

To delete a component

To rename a component

To convert a basic diagram to a process

Working with Diagram Types and Components


To convert a basic diagram to a process

With a basic diagram open, point to Change Diagram Type on the Tools menu, and click Process.

Note
If you convert a process to a basic diagram, you will lose modeling data.


To create a new component

To create a new component from a template

To view a component

To delete a component

To rename a component

To copy and paste a component from one document to another

Working with Diagram Types and Components


Components dialog box

Element	Description
Diagram Select list	All Components-Alphabetically orders all the components (diagrams, reports, and scenarios) in the active file. Diagram Hierarchy- Alphabetically orders only the diagram components in the active file. Diagrams by Contained Departments-Alphabetically orders the diagram components by departments in the active file.
New	Creates a new component in the same file.
View	Displays the selected component.
Delete	Deletes the selected component.
Rename	Renames an existing component.
Copy	Makes a copy of the selected component.
Paste	Pastes the contents of the copied component into a new component.


To create a new component

To view a component

To delete a component

To rename a component

To copy and paste a component from one document to another


New Component dialog box

Element	Description
Template	Browse the template that you want to use.
Template Component box	Select the component from the browsed template file.
Name box	Type a new name for the template component.


To create a new component

To create a new component from a template


Working with Layers

With iGrafx Professional, you can organize your diagrams in layers. You can place some objects on one layer and others on another layer such as layering several overhead transparencies.

Layers help you do the following:

•	Manage complex diagrams with many overlapping objects.

•	Categorize objects that logically belong together by layer.

•	View certain objects in your drawing while hiding others.

•	Easily select and change objects.

•	Protect objects from accidental changes.

•	Trace from a template on another layer.

•	Print certain objects only.

By default, each diagram has one layer. The default name of each layer is Layer1, Layer2, and so forth. Layer1 is the back layer.

The Layers command on the Arrange menu contains the following commands:

•	Layer Manager- Opens the Layer Manager that lists the layers defined for the active diagram and lets you perform layer operations. In Layer Manager, you can change the visible, print, and lock properties of layers. It also lets you select the current layer; add, delete, and rename layers; change the order of layers; and specify whether you want to change the current or all layers.

•	Edit All Layers- Selects, moves, and changes all objects in the active diagram, regardless of the layer on which they are located. When changing all layers, you cannot move an object on a lower layer in front of an object on a higher layer.

•	Add Layer- Adds a layer to the active diagram.

•	Move to Layer- Moves the selected objects to another layer.

•	Move Back One Layer- Moves the layer back one layer.

•	Move Forward One Layer- Moves the active layer forward one layer.

The Layers command also lets you switch between changing the current layer and changing all layers. Changing all layers lets you select, move, and change all objects in the active diagram, regardless of the layer on which they are located. When changing all layers, you cannot move an object on a lower layer in front of an object on a higher layer.

At the bottom of each diagram window is a layer tab bar that shows a tab for each layer defined for that diagram. The tabs show the names of the layers and the order for the layers. A white tab indicates the current layer. When you hide or lock a layer, the name on that tab is gray. When the tab bar contains more tabs than can be shown at once, scroll arrows appear at the left of the layer tab bar.

Note
If you add markups to a diagram using iGrafx Viewer, a markup tab appears next to other layer tabs in iGrafx Professional.


To change the current layer

To add a layer to the active diagram

To delete a layer

To rename a layer

To change the order of a layer

To show or hide a layer

To make a layer printable or nonprintable

To lock or unlock a layer


To change the current layer

On the layer tab bar at the bottom of the diagram window, click the tab of the layer you want to make the current layer. You may need to scroll the layer tab bar to locate the tab.

Note
When a layer is hidden or locked, the name of the layer on the tab is unavailable. You cannot make a hidden or locked layer the current layer.


To add a layer to the active diagram

To rename a layer

To change the order of a layer

To show or hide a layer

To make a layer printable or nonprintable

To lock or unlock a layer

Working with Layers


To add a layer to the active diagram

On the Arrange menu, point to Layers, and click Add Layer.

The new layer is added in front of the current layer and becomes the new current layer.

Tips

To display a shortcut menu that lets you add a layer, click a layer tab with the right mouse button.


To change the current layer

To add a layer to the active diagram

To rename a layer

To change the order of a layer

To show or hide a layer

To make a layer printable or nonprintable

To lock or unlock a layer

Working with Layers


To change all layers

On the Arrange menu, point to Layers, and click Edit All Layers.

Edit All Layers lets you select, move, and change all objects in the active diagram, regardless of the layer on which they are located. When changing all layers, you cannot move an object on a lower layer in front of an object on a higher layer.

Note
New objects are always placed on the current layer, even when you are changing all layers.

Tips

To switch back to changing just the current layer, clear Edit All Layers.

To display a shortcut menu that lets you edit all layers, use the right mouse button and click a layer tab.


To change the current layer

To add a layer to the active diagram

To rename a layer

To change the order of a layer

To show or hide a layer

To make a layer printable or nonprintable

To lock or unlock a layer

Working with Layers


To delete a layer

1	On the Arrange menu, point to Layers, and click Layer Manager.

2	Click the name of the layer you want to delete.

3	Click Delete.

Note
When you delete a layer, all objects on the layer are deleted.

Tips

You also can use the Layer Manager button on the Draw toolbar.

To display a shortcut menu that lets you delete a layer, use the right mouse button and click the layer tab for the layer you want to delete.


To change the current layer

To add a layer to the active diagram

To rename a layer

To change the order of a layer

To show or hide a layer

To make a layer printable or nonprintable

To lock or unlock a layer

Working with Layers


To rename a layer

1	On the Arrange menu, point to Layers, and click Layer Manager.

2	Click the name of the layer you want to rename.

3	Click Rename.

4	Type the new name.

5	Click OK.

6	Click OK.

Tips

You also can use the Layer Manager button on the Draw toolbar.

To display a shortcut menu that lets you rename a layer, use the right mouse button and click the layer tab for the layer you want to rename.


To change the current layer

To add a layer to the active diagram

To change the order of a layer

To show or hide a layer

To make a layer printable or nonprintable

To lock or unlock a layer

Working with Layers


To change the order of a layer

1	On the Arrange menu, point to Layers, and click Layer Manager.

2	Click the name of the layer you want to reorder.

3	Click Move Up or Move Down as necessary to position the layer in the list where you want it.

4	Click OK.

Tip

To display a shortcut menu that lets you change the order of the layers, use the right mouse button and click the layer tab for the layer you want to change the order of.


To change the current layer

To add a layer to the active diagram

To rename a layer

To show or hide a layer

To make a layer printable or nonprintable

To lock or unlock a layer

Working with Layers


To move an object to a different layer

1	Click the object.

2	On the Arrange menu, point to Layers, and click Move To Layer.

3	Click the layer to which you want to move the object.

4	Click OK.

Tips

When you move objects to another layer, you can make that layer the current layer.

To display a shortcut menu that lets you move a selected object to another layer, use the right mouse button and click the layer tab for the layer you want to move.


To change the current layer

To add a layer to the active diagram

To rename a layer

To change the order of a layer

To make a layer printable or nonprintable

Working with Layers


To move an object back one layer

1	Click the object.

2	On the Arrange menu, point to Layers, and click Move Back One Layer.

Tips

You can also press CTRL+F9 to move the selected object back one layer.


To change the current layer

To add a layer to the active diagram

To rename a layer

To change the order of a layer

To show or hide a layer

To lock or unlock a layer

Working with Layers


To move an object forward one layer

1	Click the object.

2	On the Arrange menu, point to Layers, and click Move Forward One Layer.

Tips

You can also press CRTL+F10 to move the selected object forward one layer,


To change the current layer

To add a layer to the active diagram

To rename a layer

To change the order of a layer

To show or hide a layer

Working with Layers


To show or hide a layer

1	On the Arrange menu, point to Layers, and click Layer Manager.

2	To hide a layer, clear the box under the bulb icon for the layer. To show a layer, select the box under the bulb icon for the layer.

3	Click OK.

Note
You cannot hide the current layer. If you try to hide the current layer, the Layer Manager does not close until you make the layer visible or change the current layer to a visible layer.

Tips

To speed up the redraw of complicated drawings, hide the layers that you are not currently working with.

To display a shortcut menu that lets you show or hide a layer, use the right mouse button and click the layer tab for the layer you want to show or hide, and then click Visible.

Hiding a layer does not affect its print property.


To change the current layer

To add a layer to the active diagram

To rename a layer

To change the order of a layer

Working with Layers


To make a layer printable or nonprintable

1	On the Arrange menu, point to Layers, and click Layer Manager.

To make a layer nonprintable, clear the box under the printer icon for the layer.

To make a layer printable, select the box under the printer icon for the layer.

2	Click OK.

Note
You can print hidden layers unless they are also nonprintable.

Tips

To display a shortcut menu that lets you show or hide a layer, use the right mouse button and click the layer tab for the layer you want to make printable or nonprintable.

You also can use the Layer Manager button on the Draw toolbar.


To change the current layer

To add a layer to the active diagram

To rename a layer

To change the order of a layer

To lock or unlock a layer

Working with Layers


To lock or unlock a layer

1	On the Arrange menu, point to Layers, and click Layer Manager.

2	To lock a layer, select the box under the lock icon for the layer.

3	To unlock a layer, clear the box under the lock icon for the layer.

4	Click OK.

When a layer is locked, it can be displayed or hidden, but it cannot be changed, reordered, or deleted.

Note
You cannot lock the current layer. If you try to lock the current layer, the Layer Manager does not close until you unlock the layer or change the current layer to an unlocked layer.

Tips

To display a shortcut menu that lets you lock or unlock a layer, use the right mouse button and click the layer tab for the layer you want to lock or unlock.

You also can use the Layer Manager button on the Draw toolbar.


To change the current layer

To add a layer to the active diagram

To rename a layer

To change the order of a layer

To show or hide a layer

Working with Layers


Layer Manager dialog box

The Layer Manager dialog box lists the layers defined for the active diagram and lets you perform operations for each layer and all layers.

You can:

•	Select whether a layer is hidden or visible

•	Select whether a layer is printable or nonprintable

•	Select whether is layer is locked or unlocked

•	Edit all layers at the same time

•	Add a layer

•	Delete a layer

•	Rename a layer

•	Move a layer up

•	Move a layer down


To change the current layer

To add a layer to the active diagram

To rename a layer

To change the order of a layer

To show or hide a layer

To make a layer printable or nonprintable

To lock or unlock a layer

Working with Layers


Name Layer dialog box

The Name Layer dialog box displays the name of the layer you selected or added. You can change this name by typing a new one in the box under the text.


Working with Layers


Linking and Embedding from Other Applications

OLE is a protocol that is used by many Windows applications to exchange information. iGrafx Professional acts as an OLE container application. You use OLE to include information from other programs into your diagrams.

When you include OLE information, you choose whether to embed or link it. The main difference between linking and embedding is where the data is stored.

Embedding Objects

The advantage to embedding is that one diagram contains all the information. If you copy the file to a floppy disk or another computer system, all of the objects are stored within it. The disadvantage is that size and performance are affected as the number of embedded objects increases.

Linking Objects

The advantage to linking is that you ensure that the most recent information prepared by other users or computer systems can be kept up-to-date in your file. The disadvantage is that the linked objects could be moved or become unavailable.

Note
You can create an OLE link to any Windows application that acts as an OLE server. To link to other iGrafx documents, use the Link command on the Insert menu.


Inserting an Embedded Object


To insert a new embedded object

To edit an embedded object

To convert an embedded object to a different format

To embed an object into a diagram

To use Paste Special for OLE objects

To create a link to an object

To edit linked information


Inserting an Embedded Object

When you create a new object, it is automatically an embedded object because there is no file to link it to. An embedded object becomes part of the iGrafx Professional diagram.

When you embed an object, you can specify either that its contents appear in the diagram or that an icon be displayed. For example, you can put the contents of a Microsoft Excel chart in the diagram, or you can display the Excel icon.

Insert Object dialog box

Element	Description
Create New	Invokes an application and creates a new occurrence of one of its objects. For example, you can open a package like Microsoft Equation, design a formula, and insert it beneath a symbol in the diagram.
Object Type	Displays a list of all applications registered on your computer as OLE objects. The list varies from installation to installation, depending on the software that is available.
Create from File	Inserts an object that already exists. This option changes the dialog box. Type the full path name for the object or use the Browse button to locate the file. If you choose Link, the object is linked; otherwise, the object is embedded.
Display as Icon	Represents the object in the diagram as an icon. This option changes the dialog box so that it displays the current icon. You can change it by clicking on the Change Icon button.
Convert To dialog box

Element	Description
Convert To	Permanently converts the object to the new object type, and displays a list of valid types for your computer system. For example, if the object is a graphic, then the list includes the graphic editors that recognize the current type (and therefore can be used to edit it).
Activate As	Temporarily activates all embedded objects of the selected type. For example, converts all PowerPoint drawings to a different graphic editor. When you edit the object, you use the application you choose, but changes are saved in the PowerPoint format. This option is available only if there are two or more embedded objects of the same type.
Display as Icon	Displays the object as an icon. You may want to change the icon at this point to correlate to the new format.


To insert a new embedded object

To edit an embedded object

To convert an embedded object to a different format

To embed an object into a diagram

To use Paste Special for OLE objects

To create a link to an object

To edit linked information

To control how links are updated

To view as an icon


To insert a new embedded object

1	On the Insert menu, click OLE Object.

Note
The registration database is the source of information used by applications that support OLE. This is the database used by iGrafx Professional to determine which objects are registered on your computer for OLE purposes.

The database (called reg.data) is set up and maintained by Windows and Windows applications and is located in the Windows directory. If iGrafx Professional does not recognize an application object, it may be due to a problem in this database. Do not move or delete this file, since doing so may result in a loss of functionality in applications that support OLE.

2	In the Insert Object dialog box, select the object type, and then click OK.

3	When you finish creating or editing the object that you want, close the application.

Note
Some applications ask you to confirm that you want to close and update the diagram; others do not. If you are satisfied with the object, be sure to choose Yes or OK to update the diagram.


To edit an embedded object

To convert an embedded object to a different format

To embed an object into a diagram

To use Paste Special for OLE objects

To create a link to an object

Linking and Embedding from Other Applications

Inserting an Embedded Object


To edit an embedded object

On the Edit menu, point to [Type] Object, and click Edit.

(The [Type] of object may appear in the menu. For example, the menu item for a document might be Document Object.)

This opens the application that created the object. For example, if you have embedded a CorelDraw drawing, you can open CorelDraw and edit the drawing by double-clicking on it in the iGrafx Professional diagram.


To insert a new embedded object

To convert an embedded object to a different format

To embed an object into a diagram

To edit linked information

Linking and Embedding from Other Applications

Inserting an Embedded Object


To convert an embedded object to a different format

1	On the Edit menu, point to [Type] Object, and click Convert.

The current type of object is listed at the top of the Convert dialog box.

2	In the Convert dialog box, select a new object type from the list, and click OK.


To insert a new embedded object

To edit an embedded object

Linking and Embedding from Other Applications

Inserting an Embedded Object


Dragging and Dropping

If you have a source application that supports drag and drop and OLE, you can create an embedded object by copying from a source file and pasting into a diagram. You can either drag and drop a selected area or use the Paste Special menu.

Links dialog box

Element	Description
Update Now	This updates the linked object. If the source has changed since you opened the diagram or last updated the link, this option loads the new version.
Open Source	This opens the source file in its source application.
Change Source	This opens the Change Source dialog box so you can change the source file. You can choose a different file by entering a new path or using the Network button to set the location.
Break Link	This breaks the link and disconnects from the application. When you break a link, the linked information remains in your diagram. However, it can no longer be updated. The link becomes a standard graphic. Once you break a link, you cannot reconnect it.


To insert a new embedded object

To edit an embedded object

To convert an embedded object to a different format

To embed an object into a diagram

To use Paste Special for OLE objects

To create a link to an object

To edit linked information

To control how links are updated


To embed an object into a diagram

1	Open both the source file and the iGrafx Professional diagram, and adjust the window sizes so that both applications are fully displayed on the screen.

2	Select the area in the source file that you want to link.

3	Drag the area into the diagram.

•	To move the area, use the mouse to drag the area into the diagram. The cursor indicates that the selected area is being moved.

•	To copy the area, press and hold the CTRL key while you use the mouse. The cursor changes to indicate that a copy is made of the selected area.

4	Release the mouse button.

Note
If you drop an area directly over an activity symbol, the area is embedded in the symbol.


To insert a new embedded object

To edit an embedded object

To convert an embedded object to a different format

Linking and Embedding from Other Applications

Inserting an Embedded Object


To use Paste Special for OLE objects

1	Make sure that you save the source file before you link the information.

2	Open the source file and select the information that you want to link.

3	On the Edit menu. click Copy.

4	Switch to iGrafx Professional, and click Paste Special on the Edit menu.

5	In the Paste Special dialog box, select Paste or Paste Link.

Paste- Embeds the object.

Paste Link- Links the object.

6	Select the Format in the As box.

7	To display the link as an icon, select Display as Icon.

8	Click OK.


To insert a new embedded object

To edit an embedded object

To embed an object into a diagram

To create a link to an object

To edit linked information

To control how links are updated

Linking and Embedding from Other Applications

Inserting an Embedded Object


To create a link to an object

1	On the Edit menu, click OLE Object.

2	In the Insert Object dialog box, select Create from File.

3	Type the path to the object or use the Browse button to locate it.

4	Select the Link box.

5	If you want to display the contents of the object as an icon, select Display as Icon.

Note
If you do not display as an icon, then the contents of the object are shown. For example, the first page of a Word document is displayed.


To insert a new embedded object

To embed an object into a diagram

To use Paste Special for OLE objects

To edit linked information

To control how links are updated

Linking and Embedding from Other Applications

Inserting an Embedded Object


To edit linked information

Click the shape, and click OLE Links on the Edit menu.

The Links dialog box opens, and each link is displayed with its path, type, and update method.


To insert a new embedded object

To edit an embedded object

To control how links are updated

To create a link to an object

Linking and Embedding from Other Applications

Inserting an Embedded Object


To control how links are updated

1	On the Edit menu, click OLE Links.

2	Select the link that you want to update.

Note
You can select multiple links by holding down the CTRL key while you click each link.

3	For Update, select one of the following:

Automatic- Updates linked information every time there is a change in the source file.

Manual- Updates linked information only when you save the source file yourself.


To create a link to an object

To edit linked information

Linking and Embedding from Other Applications

Inserting an Embedded Object


To view as an icon

1	Click a linked object.

2	On the Edit menu, point to [Type] Object, and click Convert.

3	In the Convert dialog box, select the Display as Icon box.

4	To change the type of icon displayed, click Change Icon.

5	Click OK.


To insert a new embedded object

To embed an object into a diagram

To create a link to an object

To control how links are updated

Linking and Embedding from Other Applications

Inserting an Embedded Object


Linking Shapes to Other Diagrams or Web Pages

You can link shapes to other diagrams or Web pages using iGrafx Professional. Linking lets you disclose information in levels by linking shapes in one diagram to a group of related diagrams.

Linking Shapes to Other Diagrams

Linking shapes to other diagrams helps people in organizations of all sizes deliver several diagrams from one source. For example, a diagram containing marketing goals can have linked shapes to more in-depth diagrams explaining sales divisions and the goals of each person within the division.

Use the General and Inputs tabs on the Properties dialog box to:

•	Add links to a new diagram

•	Add descriptions and key modifiers to linked shapes

•	Edit and delete existing links

•	Add advanced link settings

•	Activate links

Linking Shapes to Web Pages

Linking shapes to Web pages is another way to distribute diagrams to a larger audience. A sales manager using the example above could take the same diagram source and post it to the company Intranet page. Travelling sales people can then browse the company Intranet to get the latest information on goals and what other sales divisions are doing.


To link a shape to a new diagram

To link a shape to a file or Web page

To edit a linked shape

To activate a linked shape

To delete a linked shape

To add advanced link settings


To link a shape to a new diagram

1	In the active diagram, click Components on the File menu.

2	In the Components dialog box, click New, and then click Basic Diagram or Process.

A new Basic Diagram or Process is created.

3	Click Close.

4	On the Windows menu, click the name of your initial diagram.

5	Use the right mouse button to click the shape that you want to link the new diagram to, and then click Properties.

6	In the Properties dialog box, click the General tab, and then click New.

7	In the Add Link dialog box, select the new diagram from the Name box.

8	To add a key modifier, click the Key Modifiers box, and then press CTRL, ALT, SHIFT, or any combination of the three.

Key modifiers let you modify the linked shape without activating the link. For example, if you select CTRL as a key modifier you can do two things:

•	Double-click the shape- This opens the Properties dialog box so you can edit the link.

•	Press CTRL and double-click the shape- This activates the link.

Note
If you are using hotkeys to move around in the Add Link Dialog box, ALT will replace any key modifiers you have set.

9	To add a description for the link, type a description in the Description box.

10	Click OK.

11	In the Properties dialog box, click OK.


To link a shape to a file or Web page

To edit a linked shape

To activate a linked shape

To delete a linked shape

To add advanced link settings

Linking Shapes to Other Diagrams or Web Pages


To edit a linked shape

1	Use the right mouse button to click the linked shape, and then click Properties.

2	In the Properties dialog box, select the link in the Links box.

3	Click Edit.

4	In the Change Link dialog box, make any changes.

5	Click OK.

6	In the Properties dialog box, click OK.


To link a shape to a new diagram

To link a shape to a file or Web page

To activate a linked shape

To delete a linked shape

To add advanced link settings

Linking Shapes to Other Diagrams or Web Pages


To activate a linked shape

Double-click or use the assigned key modifier on a shape.

or

Use the right mouse button to click the linked shape, and then click the named link at the bottom of the menu.

or

Use the right mouse button to click the linked shape. In the Properties Dialog box, click the General tab, select the link in the Links box, and then click Activate.


To link a shape to a new diagram

To link a shape to a file or Web page

To edit a linked shape

To delete a linked shape

To add advanced link settings

Linking Shapes to Other Diagrams or Web Pages


To delete a linked shape

1	Use the right mouse button to click the linked shape, and then click Properties.

2	In the Properties dialog box, select the link in the Links box.

3	Click Delete.

4	Click OK.

5	In the Properties dialog box, click OK.


To link a shape to a new diagram

To link a shape to a file or Web page

To edit a linked shape

To activate a linked shape

To add advanced link settings

Linking Shapes to Other Diagrams or Web Pages


To add advanced link settings

1	Open the diagram that you want to link to.

2	Use the right mouse button to click the shape that you want to be the starting point of the diagram, and then click Properties.

3	In the Properties dialog box, click the Inputs tab.

4	Select the Start Point box, and click OK.

5	Open the diagram that contains the shape you want to link.

6	Use the right mouse button to click the shape, and then click Properties.

7	Click the General tab, and then select the link in the Links box.

8	Click Edit.

9	In the Change Link dialog box, click Advanced.

10	In the Advanced Link Settings dialog box, select Start from the Start Point box.

11	To accumulate custom data attached to the shape, select Accumulate Custom Data.

12	Click OK.

13	In the Change Link dialog box, click OK.

14	In the Properties dialog box, click OK.


To link a shape to a new diagram

To link a shape to a file or Web page

To edit a linked shape

To activate a linked shape

To delete a linked shape

Linking Shapes to Other Diagrams or Web Pages


To link a shape to a file or Web page

1	Click the shape that you want to link.

2	On the Insert menu, click Link.

3	In the Add Link dialog box, select File or Web Page.

4	To link a shape to a file, type the path in the Path or URL box.

5	To link a shape to a URL, type the relative path in the Path or URL box.

6	To add a key modifier, click the Key Modifiers box, and then press CTRL, ALT, SHIFT, or any combination of the three.

Key modifiers let you modify the linked shape without activating the link. For example, if you select CTRL as a key modifier you can do two things:

•	Double-click the shape- This opens the Properties dialog box so you can edit the link.

•	Press CTRL and double-click the shape- This activates the link.

Note
If you are using hotkeys to move around in the Add Link Dialog box, ALT will replace any key modifiers you have set.

7	To add a description for the link, type a description in the Description box.

8	Click OK.


To link a shape to a new diagram

To edit a linked shape

To activate a linked shape

To delete a linked shape

To add advanced link settings

Linking Shapes to Other Diagrams or Web Pages


Add Link dialog box

Element	Description
Add to a buttons	Diagram- Links to a new diagram. File or Web Page- Links to an existing diagram or URL.
Name box	Lists the name(s) of the new diagram(s) you created.
Key Modifier box	Modifies the linked shape without activating the link. For example, if you select CTRL as a key modifier you can do two things: • Double-click the shape- This opens the Properties dialog box so you can edit the link.  • Press CTRL and double-click the shape- This activates the link.
Description box	Adds a description to the link.
Advanced button	Opens the Advanced Link Settings dialog box where you can select a start point and accumulate data for the link.


To link a shape to a new diagram

To link a shape to a file or Web page

To edit a linked shape

To activate a linked shape

To delete a linked shape


Advanced Link Settings dialog box

Element	Description
Start Point list box	Lists the name of the start point set on the Inputs tab in the Properties dialog box.
Accumulate Custom Data box	When selected, accumulates custom data attached to the shape.


To add advanced link settings


Working with Custom Data

iGrafx Professional lets you add custom data fields to individual shapes in a diagram. Each data field for a shape has its own name and function. For example, you can accumulate data using selections in the Setup Custom Data dialog box for a shape labeled Test. You can use this feature to analyze the cost of activities along the critical path of a process:

Field	Elements
Cost	Name - Type Cost. Type - Select Currency. Format - Select $###0.00. Accumulation Method - Select Sum.
Duration	Name - Type Duration. Type - Select Duration. Format - Select #hrs. Accumulation Method - Select Sum.
After applying these selections, type the dollar amount for Cost and the time for Duration in the Custom Data tab on the Properties dialog box. If you have fields set up to display at the bottom of the shape, this is what the shape looks like in the diagram:

Note
Any information that you change in these fields at a later time will automatically update in the diagram.


To add custom data fields to a shape

To delete custom data fields from a shape

To add advanced custom data field options to a shape

To insert a legend displaying custom data


To add custom data fields to a shape

1	Right mouse click the shape that you want to add fields to.

2	Click Properties.

3	Click the Custom Data tab, and then click Setup.

4	In the Setup Custom Data dialog box, type a name for the field in the Name box.

5	Select a type, format, and accumulation method for the field in each of these lists.

To add more fields, clear the Name box and repeat steps four and five.

6	Click OK.

7	In the Custom Data tab, click the field next to the name, and then type the field information.

For example, if you have a field labeled Cost, type 15.00.

8	Click OK.

Note
You can display fields in or around the shape. See Working with Shape Fields on page 198.


To delete custom data fields from a shape

To add advanced custom data field options to a shape

To insert a legend displaying custom data

Working with Custom Data


To delete custom data fields from a shape

1	Right mouse click the shape that you want to delete a field from.

2	Click Properties.

3	In the Custom Data tab, click Setup.

4	In the Setup Custom Data dialog box, click the field in the Custom Data box, and then click Delete.

5	Click OK.

6	In the Properties dialog box, click OK.


To add custom data fields to a shape

To add advanced custom data field options to a shape

To insert a legend displaying custom data

Working with Custom Data


To add advanced custom data field options to a shape

1	Right mouse click on a shape containing field(s).

2	Click Properties.

3	In the Custom Data tab, click Setup.

4	In the Setup Custom Data dialog box, click Options.

5	Edit hours per day and days per week, and then click OK.

6	In the Setup Custom Data dialog box, click OK.

7	In the Properties dialog box, click OK.


To add custom data fields to a shape

To delete custom data fields from a shape

To insert a legend displaying custom data

Working with Custom Data


To insert a legend displaying custom data

On the Tools menu, point to Custom Data, and click Insert Legend.

The Legend displays custom data added to shapes.


To add custom data fields to a shape

To delete custom data fields from a shape

To add advanced custom data field options to a shape

Working with Custom Data


Setup Custom Data dialog box

Element	Description
Custom Data	Displays the custom data fields you create.
Name box	Type a name for the custom data field.
Type list	Displays data types.
Format list	Displays format types.
Accumulation Method list	Displays accumulation method types.
Hidden box	Hides Custom Data assigned to shapes in the diagram.
Options button	Changes defaults for hours per day and days per week.


To add custom data fields to a shape

To delete custom data fields from a shape


Custom Data Options dialog box

Element	Description
Hours per Day box	Changes the hours per day for data accumulation.
Days per Week box	Changes the days per weeks for data accumulation.


To add advanced custom data field options to a shape


Working with Visual Basic for Applications

iGrafx Professional contains Microsoft’s Visual Basic for Applications (VBA), version 6.0 as its integrated development environment. VBA provides a programming interface to the powerful features that comprise iGrafx Professional. Used with iGrafx System, you get a powerful graphics engine and a development environment that lets you quickly extend the capabilities of applications. For more information on iGrafx System, see Developing Custom Solutions with iGrafx System included in your box.

VBA is a widely used programming language and is integrated into Microsoft’s Office products. If you have any experience customizing or extending these applications, then you have a head start in developing with iGrafx System. Even without prior experience, you have the advantage of using a widely accepted and standardized development tool.


To run a VBA macro

To open a VBA Extension Project

To modify VBA security settings


To run a VBA macro

1	On the Tools menu, point to Visual Basic, and click Macros.

2	In the Macros dialog box, select a macro from the list.

3	Click Run.

Note
This procedure assumes that you opened a document containing VBA macros. If no macros exist in the document you are creating or opening, the Macros command on the Tools menu will not be active.


To open a VBA Extension Project

To modify VBA security settings

Working with Visual Basic for Applications


To open a VBA Extension Project

1	On the Tools menu, point to Visual Basic, and click Extension Projects.

2	Click Open.

3	Navigate to a iGrafx Extension Project (*.flx), and click Open.

The project is added to list in the Extension Project dialog box.

4	Select the box next to the project, and click Open.


To run a VBA macro

To modify VBA security settings

Working with Visual Basic for Applications


To modify VBA security settings

1	On the Tools menu, point to Visual Basic, and click Security.

2	In the Security dialog box, select:

•	High- Prevents any unsigned macros from automatically running.

•	Medium- Lets you choose whether or not to run macros. This is the recommended setting.

•	Low- Lets all macros run. This is not a recommended setting.

3	Click OK.


To run a VBA macro

To open a VBA Extension Project

Working with Visual Basic for Applications


Working with iDiagrams

An iDiagram is a diagram that runs like a program. iDiagrams walk you through shapes containing VBA code, letting you make the decisions as you go. These decisions move you along a path from shape to shape where custom data is collected.

After you place shapes in an iDiagram, you can add code to them using Visual Basic. Using the iDiagram Entity Manager, you can step though, stop, and pause an iDiagram. You can also add or delete entities from shapes using the Manager.

For more information about developing custom code for use with shapes, view the help file provided with Visual Basic.


To create a new entity

To add an entity to a shape

To delete an entity from a shape

To run an iDiagram


To create a new entity

1	On the Tools menu, point to iDiagram, and click Entity Manager.

2	   Click the Add Entity tool.


To add an entity to a shape

To delete an entity from a shape

To run an iDiagram

Working with iDiagrams


To add an entity to a shape

1	On the Tools menu, point to iDiagram, and click Entity Manager.

2	Select an existing entity, or create a new entity.

3	Click the shape that you want to add the entity to.


To create a new entity

To delete an entity from a shape

To run an iDiagram

Working with iDiagrams


To delete an entity from a shape

1	On the Tools menu, point to iDiagram, and click Entity Manager.

2	Select an entity.

3	Press DELETE.


To create a new entity

To add an entity to a shape

To run an iDiagram

Working with iDiagrams


To run an iDiagram

On the Tool menu, point to iDiagram, and click Execute.


To create a new entity

To add an entity to a shape

To delete an entity from a shape

Working with iDiagrams


Working with SPC Charts

iGrafx Professional lets you create different kinds of charts that support quality and process re-engineering. To implement these processes, quality charts are needed for relaying complex data in easy to understand formats.

With SPC charts, you can:

•	Identify unstable processes

•	Visualize extent of variation in a process

•	Improve decision-making

•	Identify special cause variation in a process

•	Predict progress of a process

•	Determine current ability of a process

•	Analyze processes over time

•	Compare data

•	Organize data into recognizable categories

•	Set priorities of a process

•	Illustrate impacts of individual affects

•	Show relationship between paired data

To select and place SPC charts in a diagram, use the DataAnalyzer Chart wizard. After selecting which chart you want to use, you can type information into an active spreadsheet in the diagram space. DataAnalyzer then graphically converts the data for display in the diagram.

For more information on specific SPC chart types, select a chart in the DataAnalyzer Chart wizard, and click More. To get information on DataAnalyzer functions, view datalyzer.hlp located in iGrafx\Pro\8.0.

You can create the following charts using iGrafx Professional and DataAnalyzer:

•	Process charts

•	Cause-and-effect (Ishikawa or fishbone) charts

•	Organization charts

•	Deployment charts

•	Pareto charts

•	Histograms

•	Run charts (trend charts)

•	Control charts

•	Scatter charts

•	Pie charts


To insert a SPC chart in a diagram

To add data to a SPC chart

To delete a SPC chart from a diagram


To insert a SPC chart in a diagram

1	On the Insert menu, click SPC Chart.

2	In the DataAnalyzer Chart wizard, click Next.

3	Select a chart type, and click Finish.


To add data to a SPC chart

To delete a SPC chart from a diagram

Working with SPC Charts


To add data to a SPC chart

1	Insert an SPC chart in the diagram.

2	In the active spreadsheet, type x and y axis labels in the cells.

3	   Click the Data Import Wizard tool.

4	Follow the steps in the Data Import wizard.

5	After you have imported the data, click outside of the SPC chart.

The SPC chart is inserted in the diagram.


To insert a SPC chart in a diagram

To delete a SPC chart from a diagram

Working with SPC Charts


To delete a SPC chart from a diagram

1	Click the Selector Tool on the Toolbox toolbar.

2	Click the SPC chart.

3	Press DELETE.


To insert a SPC chart in a diagram

To add data to a SPC chart

Working with SPC Charts


Working with iGrids

iGrids are graphical templates that you can use to diagram hierarchies, matrices, comparisons, schedules, timelines, and checklists. Each iGrid has corresponding options for adding or removing elements, sizing, placing, and aligning. After choosing from these options, the iGrid appears in the diagram space.

Depending on which iGrid you select, a Share Media subject tab will appear in the Gallery. Use the clip art in these tabs to add graphics and color to your iDiagrams

The following chart describes the iGrid templates in iGrafx Professional:

iGrid	Description
Pyramid	Shows hierarchical lists, such as those illustrating business values and goals or customer requirements.
Basic	Shows a grid of squares in the diagram. The grid enables you to place objects in precise positions.
Block	Shows a graphical matrix or gives a brief overview of a process.
Cascade	Shows items in a sequence, such as steps in a process.
Process	Shows the details of a process so that it can be readily understood.
Deployment	Shows the flow of information and materials among different organizational units.
Comparison	Shows comparisons of items in columns and rows, such as products and features.  These charts can represent yes/no relationships (using check marks or thumbs up/down) or multiple-value relationships (using filled bullets).
Timeline	Shows schedules for tasks, projects, and procedures.
Circle-Spoke	Shows items in a circular arrangement, connected to a center shape.  Spoke charts are useful for illustrating business principles, the key benefits of a product, or a product line.
Target	Shows concentric rings of focus, such as with increasingly focused customer groups and business objectives.
DrawBar	Shows general relationship and conceptual quantitative relationships (for example, something is smaller than or larger than something else).
Checklist	Shows single or multiple-column visual checklists.


To insert an iGrid

To edit an iGrid in the diagram space


To insert an iGrid

1	On the Insert menu, click Insert iGrid.

2	In the Insert iGrid dialog box, click the iGrid icon that you want to insert.

3	Edit the options you want to change.

4	Click OK.


To edit an iGrid in the diagram space

Working with iGrids


To edit an iGrid in the diagram space

1	Right mouse click the iGrid.

2	Click Edit iGrid.

Yellow sizing diamonds appear on edges of the iGrid in the diagram.

3	To change the size of the iGrid, click the diamonds and drag the iGrid to a new position.

4	To finish the positioning, click the Selector tool, and then click outside the diagram space.


To insert an iGrid

Working with iGrids


Modeling Activities

From airplanes to railroads, most of the models in everyday life are physical models. You can hold them in your hand. When we talk about models in iGrafx Process, we refer to a software model of a process, not a physical one.

Building a process model in iGrafx Process means describing a number of things about the process. This includes how long the different steps take, their inputs and outputs, operating schedules, the cost and availability of resources, and so on.

Each activity in a process diagram has several different steps associated with it, for example, all of the characteristics that can be assigned on the Properties dialog box are available.


About Process Modeling

Properties dialog box

Defining Activity Inputs

Defining Activity Resources

Defining Activity Attributes

Defining Activity Tasks

Defining Activity Outputs

Reviewing Activity Statistics Summary

Reviewing General Activity Settings

Reviewing and Defining Activity Custom Data

About Activity Processing


To prepare a model

To create an activity and define the activity properties


About Process Modeling

Process modeling is one of the most cost-effective and rewarding ideas to come along in years. It can help identify improvements and pinpoint errors before they occur. Statistics generated by process modeling can provide accurate numbers about cycle time, costs, problem areas, and bottlenecks. Some of the benefits of having these statistics available include gaining insight into processes, facilitating change, and enhancing communication within organizations.


Modeling Activities

Properties dialog box

A Process in Action

About Models

About Transactions

About the Transaction Flow

About a Transaction Family

About Queues in a Model

About Departments as Containers


To prepare a model

To create an activity and define the activity properties


A Process in Action

If you picture a busy train station, you can imagine many of the dynamics of a process in action. As trains arrive and depart, the stationmasters are busy making routing and timing decisions. Meanwhile, passengers wait in line to buy tickets or to board.

Over time, the train operators gather and examine statistics. This includes such things as the average travel time between cities, the length of time that a train typically waits before departing, and how much fuel is used per mile. These types of statistics help guide future decisions.

When you use modeling and simulation software, you simulate several weeks or months of activities within a matter of seconds. The results can help you make decisions to improve your processes or recommend changes. Of course, you can study the same choices by direct experimentation or by building prototypes. But a computer simulation can identify potential obstacles, problems, and threats to business opportunities in an efficient and effective way.

The process diagram is a series of activities, drawn as symbols, linked together with directed lines. An activity is an individual step of a process diagram. iGrafx Process represents an activity as a symbol in a flowchart.


Modeling Activities

Properties dialog box

About Process Modeling

About Activity Processing

About Models

About Transactions

About the Transaction Flow

About a Transaction Family

About Queues in a Model

About Departments as Containers


To prepare a model

To create an activity and define the activity properties

To find where the transaction splits and joins - Now Try This

To create a batch activity

To define a start point

To add or delete a transaction group

To define resource characteristics

To add a resource to an activity

To set an attribute value


To prepare a model

1	Create a description or graphic of the process by drawing a process diagram.

2	Follow the connecting lines between symbols to trace the process flow. Each symbol represents an activity.

3	Set the different properties for each activity using the Properties dialog box.


About Models

To create an activity and define the activity properties


About Models

Process activities have many different variations. The most common process activity is a duration, or time, that the activity takes. For example, an activity may take four hours (constant duration) or between one and two days (distributed duration).

Another typical activity is a decision point. If the process branches into different paths based on some percentage or a specification or production value, you set decision outputs for the activity.

Many models contain only activities that have duration and decision criteria. Often, you do not need anything more complex. In the following example, the activities labeled Duration take a set amount of time and the Decision activity branches depending on a set percentage.

Simple Process Model

You can begin with models using the basic activity categories and then progress into more complex models.


Properties dialog box

A Process in Action

About the Transaction Flow

About Queues in a Model


To prepare a model


About Transactions

In a process, activities occur in a series of individual steps. These steps are invoked by the movement of a number of tokens called transactions. A transaction is a token or object that flows through the process.

Because a transaction is generic, it can represent any number of things, such as an application in a loan process, a component in a manufacturing line, or a customer at a restaurant.

Transactions are introduced into the process flow by means of one or more generators. A generator issues transactions at a specified rate and quantity.

A generator can also initialize attributes for each transaction. This provides the method for customizing and initializing data about each transaction. For example, a transaction attribute value can be set or evaluated at any activity.


Properties dialog box

Using Generators

About Transaction Attributes


To find where the transaction splits and joins - Now Try This

To join the transactions - Now Try This


About the Transaction Flow

The path by which transactions flow through the process consists of the connection lines between activities. A transaction enters an activity through an incoming connection line. Likewise, a transaction is sent on to the next activity through the outgoing path.

A connection line is directed and has an origin and a destination. This provides an unambiguous path for transactions during simulation. However, depending on the inputs and outputs of different activities, the transaction can split down several paths, join back into one, stop, or reach a decision point. A transaction splits when an activity divides the transaction into multiple outputs that are active simultaneously. Transactions join when an activity takes multiple transactions as inputs and collects them into one transaction.


Modeling Activities

Properties dialog box

Using Trace Mode with Process Diagrams


To prepare a model

To call or create a subprocess


About a Transaction Family

A transaction family is a set of transactions that originated from the same transaction. The family is not named. When a transaction is split, all of the newly created transactions are assigned to the same family as the original transaction. This designation lets you identify the members of a family.

After there is a family, any split in the process flow creates new members of the original transaction family. In other words, a transaction has only one family.

For example, when an order comes into an audio equipment manufacturer, one copy of the order is sent to the Shipping department and another is sent to the Order Entry department. (This splits the transactions to perform parallel work.) If the order is not approved, the corresponding shipment is halted by stopping all members of the transaction family.

When to Use Family Designations

•	Joining all family members back together (Inputs tab)

•	Setting transaction attributes for all family members (Attributes tab)

•	Stopping all members of a family when one member reaches an activity that stops output (Outputs tab)

Transaction attributes that have a family designation are identified by a special prefix.


Using Attribute Prefixes


To find where the transaction splits and joins - Now Try This

To join the transactions - Now Try This


About Queues in a Model

There are two categories of queues in iGrafx Process: resource queues and activity queues. These queues are created and managed automatically. As a result, transactions that reach any activity are processed only when the necessary resources are available and the activity constraints are met.

The queue method and the priority of each transaction determine the order in which the transactions leave the queue. Queues have the same default queue method, which is first in, first out (FIFO).

All transactions also have the same default priority. You can change the priority on an individual transaction so that it is processed ahead of other transactions.

A transaction waits in only one queue at a time.


Properties dialog box

When to Join Inputs

Queue Methods

Properties dialog box - Inputs tab: Collection Types and Other Information

Properties dialog box - Inputs tab: Queue Methods options


To join inputs


About Departments as Containers

A department is a container of activities. Resources can also be allocated per department. When activities request resources, the resources are acquired from resources pools allocated to that department. For example, you can compare the transaction times between two departments, or find organizational bottlenecks by monitoring activity time by department. You can use departments to represent any type of group, such as manufacturing or customer service.


Properties dialog box

About Activity Processing


To use resources by department

To exclude departments


Defining Activity Inputs

The inputs to an activity convey transactions from other activities. Every transaction entering an activity, using one or more connecting lines, is an input to that activity. If you do not set the input collection, then the transaction continues at the activity for further processing.

You can specify two types of input collections: joining or batching.


About Process Modeling

Properties dialog box

Properties dialog box - Inputs tab: Collection Types and Other Information


To join the transactions - Now Try This

To find where the transaction splits and joins - Now Try This

To create a batch activity

To locate the batch activities - Now Try This

To define a start point

To locate the start point

To add or delete a transaction group


To create an activity and define the activity properties

1	Draw any symbol.

2	Double-click the symbol.

or

Select the symbol, and click Properties on the Edit menu.

The Properties dialog box appears.


Properties dialog box

To prepare a model

To create a batch activity


Properties dialog box

Use this dialog box to define the properties for an activity. Each tab in the Properties dialog box corresponds to the activity data.

The order of the tabs indicates the general order in which different aspects of the activity occur.

Tab	Description
Inputs	An activity can have one or many inputs that arrive by way of incoming connection lines. The inputs are then processed or acted upon by the activity. The inputs may be handled sequentially or batched by some other scheme. For example, people drop interoffice memos (the inputs) into a collection box all morning. The memos stay in the box until noon, when a mail clerk collects them all (batching by time).
Resources	A resource is a person, machine, or other asset that may be required to perform the activity. An activity can use several resources or more than one kind of resource simultaneously. For example, when a new order is entered into a database of products to be shipped, it requires a worker and a computer (the resources). If either is busy, the new order is not entered until the resources are available.
Attributes	An attribute is a variable that keeps track of custom information. This lets you use custom terminology, calculate your own statistics, or make a decision in the flowchart depending on a custom value. For example, if an Inspection activity is performed, it sets an attribute named Checked to a value of True. Later in the flowchart, when a transaction has a Checked value equal to True, a decision may flow around another Inspection activity.
Task	The task information covers the duration the activity takes to complete, its associated costs, activity base, and schedule. For example, at an accounting firm that uses activity-based costing methods, an audit takes eight hours (the duration) at $15 an hour (the cost) and is considered to be Business Value Added (the activity base).
Outputs	The outgoing connection lines from an activity attach to other activities for further processing. You specify how the outputs are sent, such as a decision point with multiple paths. For example, a company makes three types of ball-point pens: blue, black, and red (the outputs). Blue pens add an extra step. The company makes fifty percent blue pens, and twenty-five percent each of the others.
Summary	A summary page lets you see information about previous simulation results, as well as enter comments associated with the activity. For example, a summary page shows that a clothing inspection activity inspected 40 pairs of jeans.
General	The General tab displays the settings for the selected activity.
Custom Data	This tab lists the currently defined fields and data for the shapes in the process model. The order of the fields in this list shows the order in which the process model displays them.
Tip

This dialog box is modal, so you can keep it up on the screen while you use other menus or interact with the process diagram. For example, you can select more activities and change their data without closing the dialog box. You can also create and modify modeling information, such as schedules or attributes, by using other toolbars and menus while the Properties dialog box is open.


Properties dialog box - Inputs tab: Collection Types and Other Information

Properties dialog box - Resources tab: Type of Resource

Properties dialog box - Attributes tab: Before and After Duration

Properties dialog box - Task tab

Properties dialog box - Outputs tab

Properties dialog box - General tab

Properties dialog box - Custom Data tab


To create an activity and define the activity properties


Properties dialog box - Inputs tab: Collection Types and Other Information

When a transaction enters an activity, depending on the type of input collection, the activity either begins processing the transaction or waits for other inputs or resources.

Element	Description
Collection Types	Joining. Collects multiple transactions into one transaction. Batching. Collects transactions for processing when a batch condition is met
Other Information	Queue Methods. Sets the order in which transactions wait. Start Point. Defines a point in the process where transactions are introduced. Assign to Group. Creates collections of transactions. Wait Time. Sets the wait time as Blocked or Inactive.
Use this tab to specify the following input collection types:


Properties dialog box

Properties dialog box - Inputs tab: Collection Types and Other Information

Properties dialog box - Inputs tab: Join options

Properties dialog box - Inputs tab: Batch Collection options

Properties dialog box - Inputs tab: Queue Methods options

Properties dialog box - Inputs tab: Wait Time options

Properties dialog box


To join inputs

To create a batch activity

To locate the batch activities - Now Try This

To define a start point

To locate the start point

To add or delete a transaction group


Joining

When inputs join, the system collects and combines multiple transactions into a single transaction. Joining is primarily used to merge split transactions.

Examples

•	Combine related work back together

•	Submit all completed items at one time

•	Collate all approved documents back into one

When to Join Inputs

You join inputs:

•	After parallel work has been performed by split outputs.

•	When you want only one transaction to be considered as complete. If the split transactions represent a single product or outcome, then you join the transactions back together.

For example, at a plastic die company, an order arrives with a payment. The order is split to different workers for processing. When this work is complete, the order is approved.

•	Joining inputs is different from batching that all of the transactions are joined into one and not kept separately.


Properties dialog box

Defining Activity Outputs

Joining by Family


To join inputs

To join the transactions - Now Try This


To join inputs

1	Double-click a symbol.

The Properties dialog box appears.

2	Choose the Inputs tab.

3	In the Collection area, select Join from the list.

Another list appears with options.

4	Select one of the join options.

5	To join transactions of the same family, select Same Family.


Properties dialog box

Joining

When to Join Inputs

Joining by Family

To find where the transaction splits and joins - Now Try This


Properties dialog box - Inputs tab: Join options

The Inputs Join options define the input paths, and whether the inputs are recognized as members of a family, the whole family, or members of an attribute type, and the number of transactions to join.

Element	Description
Input Paths	One transaction must come from each input path (connection line) into the activity. Use this option if the activity has individual connection lines for each of the necessary inputs. (Use other joining options if the number of connection lines does not match the number of required joining transactions.) For example, an office furniture supplier sells file cabinets. Each cabinet has a custom frame, a hanging drawer, and a top file drawer. When a customer buys a cabinet, the supplier requests each component from a different area in the warehouse. When the three components have all arrived, the cabinet can be assembled.
Entire Family	All transactions that are members of the family are joined together.  For example, an electronics store receives a television set for repair. Because there are several models in the shop at any time, the parts are always labeled so that they are not mixed up with some other television parts. After repairs are made, the television is reassembled.
Count	Sets the number of transactions to join. Enter a number (for example, 3), or use the Expression Builder toolbar.  For example, a marketing fulfillment agency receives several boxes of blank floppy disks in the mail. Each box has 100 disks in it. A machine is set up to make promotional disks from the blank disks. Every time 100 disks are done, they are packaged back into the original boxes and sent to the warehouse.
Attr Member	Joins a transaction for each of the members of its attribute type. The transaction attribute must have a type other than Number because the type must have a finite list of members. If one member does not show up, the activity continues to wait. For example, at a loading dock, workers take a sales receipt and retrieve an item from stock. The workers need two things to complete the order: the item and the receipt. This is modeled using an attribute named Product. Its custom type has two members: Item and Receipt. If transactions are joined using the Product attribute, two transactions join: one with an Item value and another with Receipt.
Same Family	Further narrows the range of transactions to only family members. (The option is available if you are joining by input paths, count, or attribute member.) For example, a family of five goes to the store. The parents split up their grocery shopping while the three kids look at toys. At the check-out stand, the parents meet back together to combine and buy their groceries. The Same Family option ensures that the parents meet their original spouse and not someone else’s.


Properties dialog box

Properties dialog box - Inputs tab: Collection Types and Other Information

Properties dialog box - Inputs tab: Batch Collection options

Properties dialog box - Inputs tab: Queue Methods options

Properties dialog box - Inputs tab: Wait Time options


To join inputs

To find where the transaction splits and joins - Now Try This

To join the transactions - Now Try This


Joining by Family

A transaction family is an unnamed set of transactions that originate from the same transaction. When a transaction is split, all of the newly created transactions are assigned to the same family as the original transaction. This designation identifies the members of a family.

After you create a family, a split in the process flow creates new members of the original transaction family. A transaction has only one family.

If you join transactions with the Same Family option, you guarantee that the same family members combine. If other transactions come through the same activity before family members, they are not joined to that family (in other words, they wait for their own family).

For example, when an order comes into an audio equipment manufacturer, one copy of the order is sent to the Shipping department and another is sent to the Order Entry department. (This splits the transactions to perform parallel work.) If the order is not approved, the corresponding shipment is halted by stopping all members of the transaction family.


Properties dialog box

Defining Activity Outputs

Joining


To join inputs

To join the transactions - Now Try This


Joining - Now Try This

A manufacturing company, CD Unlimited, produces compact discs. As part of their quality efforts, they are documenting the manufacturing process. They have created a simple process diagram and gathered information about each step.


Properties dialog box - Inputs tab: Collection Types and Other Information

Properties dialog box - Inputs tab: Join options

Joining

Joining by Family


To join inputs

To open the exercise data for joining - Now Try This

To find where the transaction splits and joins - Now Try This

To use trace mode to view joining - Now Try This


To open the exercise data for joining - Now Try This

1	On the File menu, click Open.

2	Select iGrafx\Pro\8.0\Exercise\Ex3join.igx, and click Open.

3	If necessary, click Maximize on the Ex3join - Process1 window.

During the manufacturing process, three departments work in parallel. While Customer Service is approving the work order, the Graphic Design department begins preparing the label artwork and the Laser Engraving Lab begins adding error correction codes. This parallel work is modeled by splitting the transaction.


Properties dialog box - Inputs tab: Collection Types and Other Information

Properties dialog box - Inputs tab: Join options

Joining

Joining by Family

To join inputs

To find where the transaction splits and joins - Now Try This

To use trace mode to view joining - Now Try This


To find where the transaction splits and joins - Now Try This

1	Locate the Start activity.

(You do not need to edit it.) This is where the transaction is split. Notice the three connection lines coming out of the activity.

2	Locate the activity labeled Everything ready? in the Stamping Department.

This is where the transaction is joined back together. Notice the three connection lines coming into the activity.

3	Double-click the Everything ready? activity.

The Properties dialog box appears.

4	Choose the Inputs tab and verify that this is a Join activity.

(You do not need to edit it.) This activity joins input paths by family, so each individual disc project is kept separate from others.


About Transactions

About a Transaction Family

Joining

Joining by Family

When a Transaction Enters a Subprocess

Splitting Activity Outputs

Member Split

Stop Transaction

Transaction Flow Constraints

Options For Splitting By Member

To join inputs

To join the transactions - Now Try This

To open the exercise data for joining - Now Try This

To use trace mode to view joining - Now Try This


To use trace mode to view joining - Now Try This

This exercise introduces a few basic concepts of simulation, specifically a trace simulation, to demonstrate how a transaction can be split and joined. During a trace simulation, you watch an animation of the transactions following the process flow. Furthermore, different colors are used to indicate the state of each transaction, for example, if they are working or moving.

Note
Trace and simulation only work in iGrafx Process while working in a Process document.

1	   On the Model menu, point to Run, and then click Trace.

or

On the Model toolbar, click the Trace tool.

The process diagram is now in trace mode.

The Transaction window appears. While a process diagram is in trace mode, this window displays the status of the transactions as they are traced through the process diagram.

Note
When a Trace is still in progress, the Trace tool and menu item are not active. You can have only one trace running at a time.

2	On the Control menu, click Trace Colors, and review the trace color settings.

Note
The Trace Colors dialog box, defines the colors used to trace the process diagram. Review the Blocked setting. This color, usually red, appears when an activity is waiting to join transactions. The time is classified as blocked.

3	Click Cancel to close the Trace Colors dialog box.

4	   On the Model toolbar, click the tool.

One transaction is run through the simulation.

When the Everything ready activity is blocked (a red color), this signals that the activity is waiting for all family members to arrive.

Tip

You can use the trace tools on the Trace toolbar to step, pause, go to pause, stop, or start the simulation again.

When the trace is completed, the report window displays the results of the simulation.

Note
When trace model is enabled for a process diagram, several windows containing trace data appear. During a simulation, the transactions window displays the transactions, the transaction attributes, the status of the transaction, and the status of resources. The Simulator Progress window appears when a simulation starts, and displays simulation statistics. If the process diagram contains errors, the Output window appears with the error. You can also display the Pause Points window to review, add, delete, enable, and disable pause points in your process model. While in trace mode, you can display or close these windows using the commands on the View menu.

5	On the File menu, click Close.

This is the end of this exercise. You can save your changes.


Defining Activity Inputs

Properties dialog box - Inputs tab: Collection Types and Other Information

Properties dialog box - Inputs tab: Join options

Stop Transaction

Using Trace Mode with Process Diagrams

To join inputs

To open the exercise data for joining - Now Try This

To find where the transaction splits and joins - Now Try This

To define a start point

To remove a resource from an activity

To call or create a subprocess


Batching

You use a batch activity to collect transactions. As transactions collect, the activity does not do any further processing until the batch condition is met. A batch job differs from joining the transactions in that the transactions remain separate.

Examples

•	Hold all money orders until they are processed once a week

•	Send all orders only after twenty are accumulated

•	Collect six cans into each carton

When to Use Batching

You use batching

•	To group incoming transactions and process them when a condition or timed event occurs.

In the following illustration, invoices, packets and letters are prepared by different activities. They are put in the mailbox together, at different times, and then the mail is picked up.

Note
Before you create a batch activity, consider that the group of batched transactions may just as easily be modeled as a single transaction.


Defining Activity Inputs


To create a batch activity

To locate the batch activities - Now Try This


To create a batch activity

1	Double-click a symbol to display the Properties dialog box.

2	Choose the Inputs tab.

3	Click the Collection drop-down list, and select batch.

4	Select the batch options.


Batching

To create an activity and define the activity properties

To locate the batch activities - Now Try This


Properties dialog box - Inputs tab: Batch Collection options

The Inputs batch collection options define whether activities are collected by time, by gate, by count, or whether the entire group is collected.

Element	Description
By Time	Choose from the list of events, for example, a Weekly event processes all transactions every Monday morning of every week.  For example, a branch bank in San Francisco receives money orders from customers throughout the day. Once a week, at 4:00 pm every Friday, it sends the money orders to a central bank in Los Angeles.
By Gate	Delays processing of a transaction until a condition is met. The condition is an expression. When the expression is true, the gate is open. For example, at a home and garden store, vouchers are given to customers when an advertised product is not available. The customer can redeem the voucher later when the product is back in stock. A purchasing agent flags the product as In Stock to notify the clerks.
	When the value of the InStock scenario attribute is Yes, the clerks start accepting vouchers.  A gate creates a queue as transactions are delayed. A subtle point about the queue is that it is set up differently depending on attributes. If only transaction attributes are used in the expression, the transactions go into separate queues by family. This means that transactions from several families can all be evaluated by the queue. However, if the expression has any other non-transaction attributes, all transactions are placed sequentially in one queue.
Count	Transactions are gathered until a count is reached. The number can be a constant. When the count is reached, the transactions can proceed. You can further modify this choice by specifying: At Most. The count is the maximum instead of the total. Lesser amounts also gather. For example, librarians handle as many requests as they can, up to five. They take less than five if there are fewer book requests waiting. Assign to Group. Creates a group of transactions. You can use the system default name (Default) or the same name for several groups of similar transactions. Available to all batch methods except By-Gate. For example, for a bottling operation, every six cans are collected into a group called Carton.
Entire Group	Specify if all transactions that are members of a group are batched. Choose the group name from the scrolling list. If you choose to batch an existing group, you can assign the transactions to another group at this point. This creates a new group of transactions.


Properties dialog box

Properties dialog box - Inputs tab: Collection Types and Other Information

Properties dialog box - Inputs tab: Join options

Properties dialog box - Inputs tab: Queue Methods options

Properties dialog box - Inputs tab: Wait Time options


To create a batch activity

To locate the batch activities - Now Try This


Queue Methods

When inputs collect, you can choose the order in which the transactions wait in line at the activity. The queue method determines the order in which transactions leave the activity queue.


Defining Activity Inputs

About Queues in a Model

Properties dialog box - Inputs tab: Queue Methods options

Setting a Priority on a Transaction

Setting a Preempt on a Transaction


To set an attribute value


Properties dialog box - Inputs tab: Queue Methods options

The Inputs queue methods options define the order in which the transactions are sent through the activity.

Element	Description
Resource queues	If a resource is not available, the transaction waits in a queue for that resource. One reason that a required resource might be unavailable is that the resource allocation is too low to handle the rate of transactions to be processed. You set the number of resources required for an activity as part of its activity data.  You set the resource allocation and the order in which transactions leave a resource queue (for example, first in, first out) as part of the scenario’s resource definition.
Activity queues	If a transaction has to wait because of activity constraints such as joining, batching, or capacity limits, it waits in a queue for that activity. You set activity constraints and the order in which transactions leave the activity queue as part of the input description for the activity.
First in, first out	First queued transactions are sent through first. For example, when people arrive at a box office to purchase tickets, they wait at the back of the line.
Last in, first out	Last queued transactions are sent through first. For example, the last person to enter a crowded elevator is the first person out.
Minimum of attribute	Transactions that have the lowest value for the specified attribute are sent through first. The attribute can be of any type. For example, a printer checks the number of pages in a document by using an attribute called NumberPages. The smallest documents always print first, so if a document has a NumberPages value of 3, it is printed before a document with a NumberPages value of 10.
Maximum of attribute	Transactions that have the highest value for the specified attribute are sent through first. The attribute can be of any type.
Note
System transaction attributes can affect the order of transactions in the queue, regardless of queue method.


Properties dialog box

Properties dialog box - Inputs tab: Collection Types and Other Information

Properties dialog box - Inputs tab: Join options

Properties dialog box - Inputs tab: Batch Collection options

Properties dialog box - Inputs tab: Wait Time options


To join inputs

To set an attribute value

To add a resource to an activity


Batching - Now Try This

An Order Reporting department submits reports throughout the day. The reports are picked up by Delivery every day at 8:30 am and delivered to Weekly Reporting. Using the data from the daily reports, they prepare another report. This report is picked up weekly by Administration. In this exercise, two batching activities are used to deliver the reports.


Batching

Properties dialog box

Properties dialog box - Inputs tab: Batch Collection options


To open the exercise data for batching - Now Try This

To locate the batch activities - Now Try This

To look up the time that an event happens - Now Try This

To use trace mode to view batching - Now Try This

To create a batch activity


To open the exercise data for batching - Now Try This

1	On the File menu, click Open.

2	Select iGrafx\Pro\8.0\Exercise\Ex1batch.igx, and click Open.

3	If necessary, click Maximize on the Ex1batch - Process 1 window.


To locate the batch activities - Now Try This

To look up the time that an event happens - Now Try This

To use trace mode to view batching - Now Try This


To locate the batch activities - Now Try This

1	Double-click the activity labeled Pick up all updates every morning in the Delivery department.

2	On the Properties dialog box, choose the Inputs tab, and verify that the input collections are batched, by time, on an Every_Morning basis. Also, note that the Wait Time is Blocked; this state will show up later in the exercise.

Do not change the activity.

3	Without closing the Properties dialog box, select the activity labeled Pick up reports every week in the Administration department. (You may need to move the dialog box.)

The data on the Inputs tab is updated for the selected activity.

4	Verify that the input collections are batched, by time, on a Weekly basis. Also, note that the Wait Time is Blocked.

5	Click Cancel to close the Properties dialog box without making changes.


Batching

To open the exercise data for batching - Now Try This

To look up the time that an event happens - Now Try This

To use trace mode to view batching - Now Try This

To create an activity and define the activity properties


To look up the time that an event happens - Now Try This

The time that an Every_Morning or Weekly batching activity occurs is defined in the event schedule.

1	On the Model menu, click Events.

The Define Event dialog box appears.

2	For Existing Events, select Every_Morning.

The Time Line indicates Standard_Days and Morning. The calendar for Standard_Days displays as Monday through Friday.

3	Under Hours (with Morning selected), click Define.

The Define Hours dialog box appears.

4	Check the time that is defined for Morning.

This model sets the time at 10:30 am. (The default is 8:00 am.)

5	Click Cancel to close the Define Hours dialog box.

6	For Existing Events, select Weekly and note its definition.

For this model, Weekly is defined as Fridays in the afternoon. (More precisely, the Define Hours dialog box for Afternoon defines it as 4:00 pm.)

7	Click Cancel to close the Define Event dialog box.


Defining Event Schedules

A Process in Action

About Transactions

About Queues in a Model

Wait Time

Start Points and Generators

When a Transaction Enters a Subprocess

Overtime Behavior

To open the exercise data for batching - Now Try This

To locate the batch activities - Now Try This

To use trace mode to view batching - Now Try This


To use trace mode to view batching - Now Try This

This exercise uses trace mode to graphically display how transactions are collected and batched by time.

1	If necessary, click Maximize on the Ex1batch.igx - Process1 window.

2	   On the Model menu, point to Run, and then click Trace.

The Ex1batch.igx - Process1 diagram is now in trace mode.

3	   On the Model toolbar, click the Start tool.

Transactions enter the process every two hours. Watch for the batch activities to be blocked (indicated by red) as they wait for a batching time. When the batch activities turn green, they process the transactions. The numbers on an activity show how many transactions are waiting, and in what state.

Tip

You can use the trace tools on the Trace toolbar to step, pause, stop, or start the simulation again. After the run is complete, the report window appears with the results of the simulation.

4	On the File menu, click Close.

This is the end of this exercise. You can save your changes.


Using Trace Mode with Process Diagrams

About Transactions

To open the exercise data for batching - Now Try This

To locate the batch activities - Now Try This

To look up the time that an event happens - Now Try This


Wait Time

When transactions wait at an activity because of input collection constraints (for example, because of joining or batching), you can specify whether the waiting time is categorized as blocked or inactive for the report results. The default is blocked.


Using the Report Window to Review Transaction Statistics

Delay


To look up the time that an event happens - Now Try This


Properties dialog box - Inputs tab: Wait Time options

The Inputs wait time options define when the activity’s wait time is blocked or inactive.

Element	Description
Blocked	Waiting time is categorized as blocked.
Inactive	Waiting time is categorized as inactive.


Properties dialog box

Properties dialog box - Inputs tab: Collection Types and Other Information

Properties dialog box - Inputs tab: Join options

Properties dialog box - Inputs tab: Batch Collection options

Properties dialog box - Inputs tab: Queue Methods options


To look up the time that an event happens - Now Try This

To call or create a subprocess

To specify a delay


Start Points

The terminus shape is the default start symbol. It is commonly used in flowcharting for beginning and ending symbols.

A start is a position in the process diagram where transactions are introduced. When you open a new process, a symbol labeled Start automatically appears as the first activity in Dept. 1. There is nothing unique or different about this symbol except that it has been defined as the starting point for the process (in other words, transactions enter the process at the start). You can move the start to a different department or location, or, like other symbols, you can change its text, shape, or activity data.

Examples

•	Modify the place where transactions start the process

•	Specify multiple places in a process where transactions can begin

•	Use one process diagram as a way of drawing multiple processes


Start Points and Generators

Stopping Activity Outputs

Stop Transaction

Stop Family


To define a start point

To locate the start point

To stop outputs


To define a start point

If you have not changed the initial Start activity, the start point is already defined. But if you deleted it, you must define a new Start activity before you can simulate.

1	Double-click the activity that represents the start.

2	Choose the Inputs tab.

3	Click to mark the Start Point box.

This displays a list of start points that are already defined. To add a new name, type to replace the current name. If you choose a name already in use, the old start point is no longer used.

4	Select the name of the start point.


A Process in Action

Start Points

Start Points and Generators

To locate the start point


Start Points and Generators

When you define a generator or create a subprocess, you choose a start point to introduce the transactions. There must be a starting point for every generator, although more than one generator can use the same starting point. When a simulation is run, each generator is checked to make sure that it is connected to a valid start point.


Start Points

Using Generators

Stopping Activity Outputs

Stop Transaction

Stop Family


To define a start point

To locate the start point

To stop outputs


To locate the start point

Often the start is the first symbol in the first department, although any symbol or activity can be a start. A process can have multiple start points.

If you have previously defined the start, or if you have not cut or deleted the default start, you can verify its location with these steps.

1	On the Model menu, click Find Start.

The Find Start Point dialog box appears with a list of names.

2	Select the name of the starting point that you are verifying.

3	Click OK.

This selects the starting symbol.


Start Points

Start Points and Generators

Stopping Activity Outputs

Stop Transaction

To find where the transaction splits and joins - Now Try This

To locate the batch activities - Now Try This

To define a start point


Transaction Groups

A group is a named collection of transactions typically used to share a common resource. The transactions are still separate transactions, but you can identify them by a group name. You create a group name first by following these steps, and then you can assign it members when you specify a batch job.


About Transactions


To add or delete a transaction group


To add or delete a transaction group

1	On the Model menu, click Transaction Groups.

The Define Transaction Groups dialog box appears.

2	To create a group, type a name (up to 32 characters), and click Add.

3	To delete a group name, select the name from the list, and click Delete.


Transaction Groups


Defining Activity Resources

A resource is a person, machine, or other asset used to process a transaction. More specifically, in an iGrafx Process process diagram, a resource provides the mechanism used by an activity to process transactions. When multiple transactions are processed, they can contend for resources.

You use the Resources Tab to set an activity’s resource usage. An important distinction to make is that resource usage, which is specific to an activity, is different from resource allocation, which is the total number of resources available to a department.

For example, Dept. 1 has been allocated two worker resources (the default is one). To process a transaction, each activity requests some number of resources. If the resources are available, the transaction is processed. Otherwise, the transaction waits at the activity until the resources become available.

Examples

•	Acquire a laser printer to print a job

•	Assign five workers to a task

•	Specify that an operator is working on one job. If required equipment is not available, the operator has to wait for it.


Modeling Activities

Properties dialog box

Using Resources

If a Resource Is Not Required

If a Resource Is Not Required

Defining Activity Resources

Resource Assignment Type

Resource Quantity

Resource Behavior

Resource Schedule

Resources and Overtime

Resources Waiting


To add or delete a transaction group

To define resource characteristics

To add a resource to an activity

To remove a resource from an activity

To use resources by department


Resource Considerations

•	By default, one worker resource is defined for every department.

To use any resources other than workers, you first create them and then assign the resources in an activity. To create a resource, you give it a name, quantity, schedule, hourly rate, and so on.

•	A resource often works on one activity and then moves to a different activity when it is needed.

The guidelines that control the movement of resources are the results of defining pools, or clusters of resources, in one or more departments.

•	A resource can be requested to work on any activity in its assigned department(s).

A resource is not restricted to one activity. To restrict a resource, you can create the resource and only request it from one activity or you can place the activity in its own department.

•	Each department is created with its own pool that contains one worker. This quantity is only adequate enough to process a single transaction through the department at a time.

There must always be enough workers in the pool to cover the resource quantity that is requested by an activity. An activity cannot acquire two workers if only one worker is defined in the pool.


Properties dialog box - Resources tab: Type of Resource

Resource Assignment Type

Resource Quantity

Resource Behavior

Resource Schedule

Resources and Overtime

Resources Waiting

If a Resource Is Not Required


To define resource characteristics


If a Resource Is Not Required

When you create an activity, the system assumes one worker is needed to process a transaction for the activity. However, some activities do not require any resources. If so, remove the entry from the resource page.


To define resource characteristics

To add a resource to an activity

To remove a resource from an activity


To define resource characteristics

1	Choose from the list of available resources, for example, worker.

2	Specify if the activity uses, acquires, or releases a resource.

3	Specify how the model acts if the resource is unavailable.

4	Set the number of resources required by the activity.

5	Define the active times during which the activity can use the resource.

6	Describe the different behaviors available if a resource encounters overtime conditions.

7	Describe what happens if the resource has to wait, for example, for a transaction or other resources to become available.

8	Describe how to use resource assignments for groups of transactions.

9	Give a method for releasing resources for all members of a family of transactions.


Modeling Activities

Using Resources

Defining Activity Resources

Resource Assignment Type

Resource Quantity

Resource Behavior

Resource Schedule

Resources and Overtime

Resources Waiting

To add a resource to an activity

To remove a resource from an activity

To use resources by department


To add a resource to an activity

To use workers or any of the resources that you have defined,

1	Double-click a symbol to display the Properties dialog box.

2	Choose the Resources tab.

3	To use an additional resource for this activity, press Add.


Defining Activity Resources

Resource Assignment Type

Resource Quantity

Resource Behavior

Resource Schedule

Resources and Overtime

Resources Waiting

To define resource characteristics

To remove a resource from an activity

To use resources by department


To remove a resource from an activity

1	Make the resource active by clicking in a field.

2	Press Remove.

You can use this feature to specify an activity that does not require any resources.


Defining Activity Resources

Resource Assignment Type

Resource Quantity

Resource Behavior

Resource Schedule

Resources and Overtime

Resources Waiting

To define resource characteristics

To add a resource to an activity

To use resources by department


Properties dialog box - Resources tab: Type of Resource

The Resources tab lists workers, resources that you defined, and other resource factors.

Element	Description
Worker	A predefined labor resource. By default, one worker is listed. Most activities use one worker, at a minimum, to process each transaction.  For example, in a data entry department, one worker is used to perform and complete an activity labeled Update File.
(User-defined resources.)	Resources that you have defined.  For example, a consulting engagement uses the following resources: one consultant, an overhead projector, and a laptop computer.
Other	Lets you break out cost independently from other resources. You can enter the cost as a value or expression. Use Other if you do not want to model a specific resource but want to track a resource cost. Also, if an activity crosses more than one department, use Other to further break out the costs by department.  For example, when 1,000 copies of an in-house newspaper are published, each copy is stapled in three places and mailed. This uses a lot of staples, but, in terms of this model, it is not important to create a Staple resource. Instead, the Other category has a cost of $5 for staples.


Properties dialog box

Properties dialog box - Resources tab: Assignment Type

Properties dialog box - Resources tab: Resource Behavior

Properties dialog box - Resources tab: Overtime options

Properties dialog box - Resources tab: Group option


To define resource characteristics

To add a resource to an activity

To remove a resource from an activity

To use resources by department


To use resources by department

If an activity crosses more than one department, select either the individual department or all departments to assign the resource.

For example, at an advertising firm, a meeting is held with two account representatives from Major Accounts, one graphic designer, one writer, and the manager of the Writers department.


Using Resources

To define resource characteristics

To add a resource to an activity

To remove a resource from an activity


Setting the Cost Category

This function accumulates costs by activity base (the value-added categories).


Activity Base

Example of Setting the Cost Category

Properties dialog box - Resources tab: Cost Category


Properties dialog box - Resources tab: Cost Category

The Resources cost category defines activities with various costs associated with them.

Element	Description
Base	The cost category is inherited from the activity base.
VA	Value Added. The resource is contributing to the creation or delivery of a product or service.
BVA	Business Value Added. The resource is useful to the business but does not contribute directly to the product or service.
NVA	No Value Added.


Properties dialog box

Properties dialog box - Resources tab: Type of Resource

Properties dialog box - Resources tab: Assignment Type

Properties dialog box - Resources tab: Resource Behavior

Properties dialog box - Resources tab: Overtime options

Properties dialog box - Resources tab: Group option


To set a fixed cost


To set a fixed cost


Example of Setting the Cost Category

For example, a recording clerk, a records administrator, and a supervisor at the Records Department are all required to record an order. The recording clerk enters the policy and records the claim. The records administrator updates the records and prepares reports. The supervisor reviews and approves each order. Although the activity itself is VA (Value Added), only the recording clerk is performing a VA activity. The records administrator is BVA (Business Value Added) and the supervisor is NVA (No Value Added).


Resource Assignment Type

You can specify that a resource is used for the duration of an activity, that it is acquired, or that it is released.


Forcing From Family

Setting a Preempt on a Transaction

Resource Quantity

Resource Behavior

Resource Schedule

Resources and Overtime

Resources Waiting


To define resource characteristics

To add a resource to an activity

To remove a resource from an activity

To use resources by department


Properties dialog box - Resources tab: Assignment Type

The Resources assignment type defines whether the activities are acquired or released.

Element	Description
Activity	Every time a transaction enters the activity, the resource is used and released. The activity uses the resource for the single task. For example, a worker writes a report. After the report is finished, the worker can be used by other activities.
Acquire	Every time a transaction enters the activity, the resource is used and remains acquired with the transaction as the transaction moves to other activities. This lets you get the resource and hold it until you explicitly release it later. A resource remains acquired until  • The transaction leaves an activity that releases it.  • The transaction reaches the end of the process flow.  or   • The transaction splits and the resource is released by other family members of the transaction.
Release	A resource that was previously acquired is now released and can be used by other transactions. For example, at a print shop, the printing machine is cleaned regularly. When it is time to clean (for example, a transaction enters the activity), a worker sets up and then remains acquired until all the cleaning tasks are done. The printing machine is acquired to have its rollers cleaned and toner changed, and then both resources are released.
	In the same example, if two transactions enter the activity, then two workers and two printing machines are acquired and released. Furthermore, if a third transaction enters the activity and that transaction has previously acquired a printing machine, the third transaction still acquires and releases a worker and a printing machine. If either resource is not available, the transaction waits.


Properties dialog box

Properties dialog box - Resources tab: Type of Resource

Properties dialog box - Resources tab: Cost Category

Properties dialog box - Resources tab: Resource Behavior

Properties dialog box - Resources tab: Overtime options

Properties dialog box - Resources tab: Group option


To create an activity and define the activity properties


Resource Quantity

An activity specifies the number, or count, of each resource that is required. Each transaction that enters the activity requires this number of resources.

The number is subtracted from the total number of available resources after each transaction enters this activity. The count can be an expression.


Resource Assignment Type

Resource Behavior

Resource Schedule

Resources and Overtime

Resources Waiting

Using Expressions


To define resource characteristics

To add a resource to an activity

To remove a resource from an activity

To use resources by department


Resource Behavior

The resource behavior determines how the model acts if a resource becomes unavailable, typically for scheduling reasons.


Defining Activity Resources

Resource Considerations

If a Resource Is Not Required

Resource Schedule


To define resource characteristics

To remove a resource from an activity

To add a resource to an activity


Properties dialog box - Resources tab: Resource Behavior

Element	Description
Changeable	A changeable resource can be exchanged with another resource when the resource becomes unavailable. The transaction takes any resource of the same type that is available. A resource becomes unavailable if it is out of schedule, preempted, or it is not waiting.
	For example, the receiving clerks at a large university bookstore can be changeable resources. Some work part-time shifts and others work in the evenings. At the end of their work schedule, the clerks stop unpacking books and go home. The next shift of clerks comes in and continues working where the last clerks stopped.
Dedicated	A dedicated resource is not exchanged when it is unavailable. The transaction waits until the dedicated resource is available to finish the activity.
	For example, at the university bookstore, the purchasing agents work with their own vendors who specialize in sciences, languages, or art. When a purchasing agent goes home for the day or meets with someone, they finish the job when they return.
Department (dedicated)	A department resource operates like a dedicated resource, except that if an activity uses a resource in a department, all other activities in the department that the transaction goes through use the same resource.
	This resource is not exchanged with another resource when it is not available. The transaction waits until another department-dedicated resource is available.
	For example, the clerks at the Registration Department issue vehicle registrations. When a clerk takes your application, he or she looks up the record, checks your application, takes the fee, and issues the registration. In other words, a clerk always follows an application through to completion.
Overtime Dedicated	Behaves the same as changeable when the resource is not in overtime. Behaves like dedicated when the resource is in overtime.
Out of Service	A dedicated resource that accumulates time specifically as out of service. This lets you track when resources are out of service for such things as maintenance or unscheduled downtime.
The Resource behavior is defined as changeable, dedicated, or out of service.


Properties dialog box

Properties dialog box - Resources tab: Type of Resource

Properties dialog box - Resources tab: Cost Category

Properties dialog box - Resources tab: Assignment Type

Properties dialog box - Resources tab: Overtime options

Properties dialog box - Resources tab: Group option


To define resource characteristics

To add a resource to an activity

To remove a resource from an activity

To use resources by department


Resource Schedule

A resource’s schedule is a list of times that determines when each resource is available. Every resource has its own schedule assigned to it as part of the scenario data. For example, some resources might be available only during the afternoon or evening shifts. Others can be available twenty-four hours.

Activities can also have schedules assigned to them. This lets activities take place only between certain times.

Many schedules have been defined for you. These include swing shift, night shift, or standard days with US holidays. You can choose a schedule that makes sense for each resource depending on your process. For example, you could create a schedule in which a resource is available between 8:00 am and 12:00 midnight, excluding US holidays.

If an activity tries to acquire a resource when no resource is available (for example, not in schedule), then all transactions arriving at the activity must wait until the resource is back in schedule again.

For example, a screening machine is always available daily between the hours of 8:00 am and noon. If an activity such as Print Labels uses the machine, the activity will process transactions (and therefore use the machine) only between the hours of 8:00 and 10:00 am.


Resource Assignment Type

Resource Quantity

Resource Behavior

Resources and Overtime

Resources Waiting


To define resource characteristics

To add a resource to an activity

To remove a resource from an activity

To use resources by department


Resources and Overtime

When labor or other resources are used, overtime costs and schedules often have to be addressed. The iGrafx Process overtime capability was designed to be very flexible to accommodate the different ways that overtime can be instituted in a company. When a resource is created, a schedule is attached to it. This schedule determines when the resource is available. Any hours or days outside the schedule are potential time frames for overtime.

The activity itself limits whether a resource is eligible for overtime. Some activities do not allow overtime at all. Other activities do, but have rules about when overtime is used and which resources are used.

If overtime is allowed on the activity, and a resource is about to go out of schedule but has not finished the activity, it can have one of several different behaviors. These are determined on an individual use basis.


Resource Assignment Type

Resource Quantity

Resource Behavior

Resource Schedule

Resources Waiting

Defining Activity Tasks


To define resource characteristics

To add a resource to an activity

To remove a resource from an activity

To use resources by department


Properties dialog box - Resources tab: Overtime options

The Resource overtime attributes are changeable, dedicated, and out of service.

Element	Description
Changeable	If there are no resources to exchange with, then overtime is allowed up to the maximum overtime set for the resource currently acquired. If other resources have overtime available when the maximum overtime is reached, the resource is exchanged and uses its available overtime. This is true until there are no other resources of the same type that have overtime available.
	If another resource becomes available (that is, it comes into schedule) then the overtime resource is exchanged to avoid overtime.
Dedicated and Department (Dedicated)	Overtime is allowed until the maximum overtime for the resource is reached. The transaction waits until the resource comes into schedule again.
Overtime Dedicated	Behaves like a changeable resource until overtime is required. The resource that enters overtime is dedicated even if others become available. This happens up to the maximum overtime, then the activity waits until other resources are available.
Out of Service	A resource that is out of service behaves like a dedicated resource for the purposes of overtime.


Properties dialog box

Properties dialog box - Resources tab: Type of Resource

Properties dialog box - Resources tab: Cost Category

Properties dialog box - Resources tab: Assignment Type

Properties dialog box - Resources tab: Resource Behavior

Properties dialog box - Resources tab: Group option


To define resource characteristics

To add a resource to an activity

To remove a resource from an activity

To use resources by department


Resources Waiting

When a transaction waits to be processed by an activity, the resources already acquired by that transaction can either wait or be released until the transaction can be processed.

An activity can acquire resources for one transaction or all members of a group. A group is a set of transactions created by batching inputs.

If the first member of a group acquires a resource for the entire group, then all subsequent transactions in the group ignore the acquire request.


Resource Assignment Type

Resource Quantity

Resource Behavior

Resource Schedule

Resources and Overtime


To define resource characteristics

To add a resource to an activity

To remove a resource from an activity

To use resources by department


Properties dialog box - Resources tab: Group option

The Resources group options define whether a resource waits or not.

Element	Description
Wait	The resource is not released while the transaction waits to be processed. Waiting time is accumulated for the resource.
	For example, a printing press requires a setup for each printing job. The setup includes information about the type of paper stock being run, its dimensions, and the ink distribution. If the paper stock has not arrived for that particular job, then the printing press must wait until the paper arrives and cannot be used for other printing jobs.
Don't wait	The resource is released and can work on other transactions. When this transaction can be processed, a resource is automatically acquired again.
	For example, when a sales order arrives at an Order Entry department, a copy is always made for their permanent records. If a sales order is received but the information is not correct, the copier machine can still be used to make other copies until the corrected order arrives again.


Properties dialog box

Properties dialog box - Resources tab: Type of Resource

Properties dialog box - Resources tab: Cost Category

Properties dialog box - Resources tab: Assignment Type

Properties dialog box - Resources tab: Resource Behavior

Properties dialog box - Resources tab: Overtime options


To add or delete a transaction group


Forcing From Family

This is used if a transaction has acquired a resource and then has been split (creating a family of transactions). In that case, the split transactions share the same resource. The Forcing From Family option forces the release for all family members.


About a Transaction Family

Joining by Family

Stop Family


To create split outputs


Defining Activity Attributes

An attribute can define characteristics of transactions and other variables within a process, department, or scenario. It can be highly specific to the process that you are documenting.

Examples

•	Keep track of different quantities of two products, by name

•	Check the product type and perform different steps based on the results

•	Count how many times an assembly is reworked

When to Use Attributes

Use attributes as variables in activities and to specify modeling data.

An attribute has four characteristics: its name, type, location, and value. The name must be unique for every attribute within a location. The attribute type is the range of values that the attribute can have. The location provides a scope, or boundary, for the attribute.

For example, a scenario attribute, called Items, is incremented. Every time a transaction enters the activity, the attribute value increases by one.

For example, an attribute named Burden is the total of two attributes, Workers and Overhead, added together and divided by the value of a third attribute, Rate.


Modeling Activities

Properties dialog box

Describing Model Behavior Using the Model Commands

Using Expressions

Setting a Priority on a Transaction


To set an attribute value

To define a transaction attribute

To initialize a transaction attribute by distribution

To initialize a transaction attribute by constant value and multiple generators


To set an attribute value

1	Double-click a symbol to display the Properties dialog box.

2	Choose the Attributes tab.

3	Click Add to define attribute settings before or after the task.

4	On the Set Attribute dialog box, select a location, select an existing attribute, and click OK.

Note
Click Define Attribute to add a new attribute.

5	On the Set Attribute value dialog box, specify the attribute value, and click OK.


Defining Activity Attributes

To add a resource to an activity


Properties dialog box - Attributes tab: Before and After Duration

Use this tab to define when an attribute value is set as the transaction flows through the activity.

Element	Description
Before Duration	The value is set before the duration is taken. (Note that multiple attribute settings can occur both before and after the duration.)
After Duration	The value is set after the duration is taken.


Properties dialog box


To look up the time that an event happens - Now Try This


Defining Activity Tasks

The Task tab contains information about how transactions are processed. The type of task can be specified as work, process, or delay.


Modeling Activities

Properties dialog box

Work

Process

Delay

Activity Base

Capacity

Limited Schedule

Overtime Behavior


To view a subprocess


Properties dialog box - Task tab

The Task tab defines the type of task, activity base, capacity, overtime behavior, and limited schedule.

Element	Description
Task Type	Work	Causes transactions to be processed for a specific amount of time.
	Process	Connects the current process to another process for purposes of hierarchy or subprocessing.
	Delay	Halts processing for a specific amount of time.
Activity Base	Includes a fixed cost and a value category.
Capacity	Limits the number of transactions that can be processed at one time.
Overtime Behavior	Specifies how the activity behaves if resources go out of schedule.
Limited Schedule	Specifies whether the time frame of the activity is limited to a schedule.


Properties dialog box

Properties dialog box - Task tab: Work options

Properties dialog box - Task tab: Process options

Properties dialog box - Task tab: Delay options

Properties dialog box - Task tab: Cost categories

Properties dialog box - Task tab: Capacity options

Properties dialog box - Task tab: Overtime Behavior


To specify work

To call or create a subprocess

To view a subprocess

To specify a delay


Work

A task that is defined as a work activity has a specified duration. The duration can be in seconds, minutes, or hours, or larger units of days, weeks, months, or years. You can mix different time units on different activities (for example, one activity can take three days and another four seconds) and they will be calculated correctly. By default, the duration is zero.

Examples

•	Set the time for film to develop to one hour

•	Set the time for shirts to be dry-cleaned between four and six days


Options For Work


To specify work


To specify work

1	Double-click an activity to display the Properties dialog box.

2	Choose the Task tab.

3	Define the Duration and Activity Base.


Properties dialog box

Defining Activity Tasks

Options For Work


Options For Work

The duration is the amount of working time required to complete the activity on a single transaction. Choose whether the duration is a constant, a distributed value, or an expression.


Overtime Behavior

Work


To specify work


Properties dialog box - Task tab: Work options

The Task work options define a duration as constant or distributed and enable you to set the duration as an expression.

Element	Description
Constant	Fill in a duration value and the unit of time. For example: 20 hours.
Distributed	Set the range and the unit of time (for example, between 5 and 10 weeks). In a uniform distribution, all values have an equal chance of occurring. A normal distribution follows a normal distribution curve.
Expression	Enter the expression.
	For example, when an electric heat pump company plans an installation, they know it takes three hours to set up a single package and five hours for a split system. The following expression sets the duration equal to three hours if the value of Installation is SinglePackage. Otherwise, the duration equals five hours.
Note
If you set a duration to be the result of an expression, particularly using a distribution function, it is possible to generate a negative duration. In this case, iGrafx Process sets the duration to zero.

Also, any duration that is specified as a fractional second uses a floor function. For example, 1.3 seconds is 1 second; 5.6 seconds is 5 seconds.


Properties dialog box

Properties dialog box - Task tab

Properties dialog box - Task tab: Process options

Properties dialog box - Task tab: Delay options

Properties dialog box - Task tab: Cost categories

Properties dialog box - Task tab: Capacity options

Properties dialog box - Task tab: Overtime Behavior


To specify work


To exclude departments

If the activity crosses departments, use the scrolling list to exclude one or more departments the activity applies to.


To use resources by department

About Departments as Containers

Excluding Departments

To use resources by department


Process

You add hierarchy or concurrence to a model by using process activities. This connects the current process to another process that can run concurrently or as a subprocess.

Examples

•	Document a maintenance cycle as part of a larger business process

•	Run two different product lines at the same time

•	Create multiple independent processes on the same process diagram and link them together

A good rule of thumb is to organize activities into separate processes if they have essentially different outcomes or produce different products.


A Process in Action

About the Transaction Flow

When a Transaction Enters a Subprocess

Using Multiple Processes


To call or create a subprocess

To view a subprocess


To call or create a subprocess

1	Double-click any symbol to display the Properties dialog box.

2	Click the Task tab.

3	Click the Work category to choose Process.

4	Click Sub Process to choose process type.

5	Choose the process.

To modify the selected process, click New Process or Rename Process.

Specify the start point that you selected.

6	Define the Activity Base and Capacity, and click OK.


Defining Activity Tasks

About the Transaction Flow

When a Transaction Enters a Subprocess

To view a subprocess


Properties dialog box - Task tab: Process options

The Task process options define the subprocess, the concurrent process, and the private subprocess.

Element	Description
Subprocess	A subprocess starts and then completes, at which point the flow returns to the process that called it. A subprocess can be called by more than one process, as shown in the following illustration. Both Processes 1 and 2 share Process 3 as a subprocess, and the transactions from both processes can interact in the subprocess.
Concurrent Process	A separate process runs to the end of its own process flow. The process that called the concurrent process continues executing concurrently.
Private Subprocess	Similar to a subprocess, in that a subprocess completes and the flow returns to the process that called it. The difference between a regular subprocess and a private subprocess is that a private subprocess keeps track of transactions from the calling processes separately.


Properties dialog box

Properties dialog box - Task tab

Properties dialog box - Task tab: Work options

Properties dialog box - Task tab: Delay options

Properties dialog box - Task tab: Cost categories

Properties dialog box - Task tab: Capacity options

Properties dialog box - Task tab: Overtime Behavior


To call or create a subprocess

To connect to a subprocess

To connect to a concurrent process

To connect to a private subprocess

To view a subprocess


To connect to a subprocess

1	Set the name of the process and a start point.

2	If the process does not exist, create it by clicking New Process.

For example, in a land-use planning agency, both the commercial and residential land-use departments must submit their permits for approval by a planning council. No additional work can happen on the permit until it has been approved or rejected. After the review is complete, the permits are returned to the original departments for further processing.


A Process in Action

About the Transaction Flow

Process

To call or create a subprocess

To connect to a concurrent process

To connect to a private subprocess

To view a subprocess


To connect to a concurrent process

1	Set the name of the process and a start point.

2	If the process does not exist, create it by clicking New Process.

For example, several departments at an engineering firm rely on their Purchasing department to make arrangements for buying new computers. The departments give their specifications to Purchasing to place the order.


A Process in Action

About the Transaction Flow

Process

To call or create a subprocess

To connect to a subprocess

To connect to a private subprocess

To view a subprocess


To connect to a private subprocess

1	Set the name of the process and a start point.

2	If the process does not exist, create it by clicking New Process.

Note
Each process separately maintains any counts that are being kept (for example, an activity that collects inputs in the private subprocess) for each process. The process also keeps family designations separate, except for Join by Family. In other words, a private subprocess behaves more as if it were pasted into the process that called it, rather than as a regular subprocess.

For example, a microbrewery sells small quantities of their own brands of bottled beers. When each batch of new beer has fermented, it is sent to be bottled into six-packs. It is important for them to keep bottle counts for each batch separate.


A Process in Action

About the Transaction Flow

Process

To call or create a subprocess

To connect to a concurrent process

To connect to a subprocess

To view a subprocess


To view a subprocess

Press the Shift key and double-click the activity.


A Process in Action

About the Transaction Flow

Process

To call or create a subprocess

To connect to a concurrent process

To connect to a private subprocess

To connect to a subprocess


When a Transaction Enters a Subprocess

•	A new transaction is issued into the specified process. The transaction does not have any family membership or siblings.

•	The new transaction has the same attribute values as the original transaction.

•	If the subprocess runs concurrently, both transactions continue along their respective paths.

If the subprocess does not run concurrently, only the subprocess transaction continues. The transaction in the main process waits until the transaction in the subprocess reaches an endpoint. An endpoint is an activity that does not have an outgoing connection line.

•	Any transaction attribute values or family assignments set in a subprocess are in effect when the transaction returns from the subprocess.

•	Any transaction attributes set with the Family option modifies that attribute in all siblings regardless of which process they are in.


About Transactions

About a Transaction Family

Stop Transaction

Transaction Flow Constraints


To find where the transaction splits and joins - Now Try This

To call or create a subprocess

To view a subprocess


Delay

You can use an activity to specify that transaction processing is delayed by a specific amount of time. Delay time is categorized as blocked time during simulation.


Using the Report Window to Review Transaction Statistics

About Queues in a Model

Queue Methods

Wait Time

Resources Waiting

Limited Schedule

Using Expressions

Using System-Defined Functions


To look up the time that an event happens - Now Try This

To specify a delay

To stop outputs


Properties dialog box - Task tab: Delay options

Specifies the duration of the delay as a constant, distributed, or expression.

Element	Description
Constant	Fill in a delay value and the unit of time. For example: 10 minutes.
Distributed	Set the range and the unit of time (for example, between 1 and 4 hours). In a uniform distribution, all values have an equal chance of occurring. A normal distribution follows a normal distribution curve.
Expression	Enter the expression.


Properties dialog box

Properties dialog box - Task tab

Properties dialog box - Task tab: Work options

Properties dialog box - Task tab: Process options

Properties dialog box - Task tab: Cost categories

Properties dialog box - Task tab: Capacity options

Properties dialog box - Task tab: Overtime Behavior


To specify a delay


To specify a delay

1	Double-click an activity to display the Properties dialog box.

2	Choose the Task tab.

3	Click on the task type, and select Delay.

4	Define the Duration and Activity Base.

5	Click OK.


Defining Activity Tasks

Wait Time

Delay


Excluding Departments

If the activity crosses departments, you can use the scrolling list to exclude one or more departments the activity applies to.


About Departments as Containers


To use resources by department

To exclude departments


Activity Base

Each activity can have a fixed cost and a value category. You can choose different colors to represent the value classes for a visual representation of which activities are designated Value Added and which are not.

The activity base is also useful for categorizing statistics. This is done after simulation by sorting the report results into different activity bases.


Properties dialog box - Resources tab: Type of Resource


To assign colors to different value activity classes

To create an activity and define the activity properties

To locate the batch activities - Now Try This

To locate the decision activities - Now Try This

To review activities - Now Try This


Properties dialog box - Task tab: Cost categories

The Task cost categories define the activity values.

Element	Description
VA	Value Added.	The activity contributes to the creation or delivery of a product or service.
BVA	Business Value Added	The activity is required by the business but does not contribute directly to the product or service.
NVA	No Value Added.

This becomes the value base for the activity. A resource can have its own value base or inherit this base.

For example, in a manufacturing process, when materials must be reworked, the activity is labeled NVA.


Properties dialog box

Properties dialog box - Task tab

Properties dialog box - Task tab: Work options

Properties dialog box - Task tab: Process options

Properties dialog box - Task tab: Delay options

Properties dialog box - Task tab: Capacity options

Properties dialog box - Task tab: Overtime Behavior


To set a fixed cost

To assign colors to different value activity classes


To set a fixed cost

Enter a cost that is accrued each time a transaction is processed by the activity. The default is 0.

For example, a Sales department has an Annual Review activity. The review has a fixed cost of $2000.

The total cost of an activity is the sum of its fixed cost and the costs associated with resources used by the activity.

For example, you hire a limousine service to take a new client out to dinner. This incurs two costs, one for the activity and one for the resources. For the activity, the fixed cost of the dinner is $100. For the resources, the limousine has a per-use cost of $45 for the evening and a $10 an hour cost for the driver. After a three-hour evening, the total cost for the activity is $175.


Setting the Cost Category

About Resource Costs

To assign colors to different value activity classes


To assign colors to different value activity classes

1	On the View menu, click Value Class.

2	In the View Value Classifications dialog box, select a classification color.

•	View VA. Set a color for all Value Added activities.

•	View BVA. Set a color for all Business-Value Added activities.

•	View NVA. Set a color for all No Value Added activities.

The default color classification is white.

3	Click OK.


Activity Base

To create an activity and define the activity properties

To set a fixed cost


Capacity

You can set the capacity of an activity to limit the number of transactions that can be processed at one time. This limit is enforced even if the necessary resources and transactions are available. The capacity can also be set to unlimited.


Defining Activity Tasks

Properties dialog box - Task tab: Capacity options


To open the exercise data for Transaction Splits - Now Try This


Properties dialog box - Task tab: Capacity options

The Task capacity options define a limit or specify no limit on the number of transactions that can be processed at the same time.

Element	Description
Unlimited (default)	The activity places no limits on the number of transactions that can be processed simultaneously.
Number	Enter a number for the limit on transactions.  For example, an office has four phones. The most calls the office ever handles concurrently is four, regardless of how many workers are available.


Properties dialog box

Properties dialog box - Task tab

Properties dialog box - Task tab: Work options

Properties dialog box - Task tab: Process options

Properties dialog box - Task tab: Delay options

Properties dialog box - Task tab: Cost categories

Properties dialog box - Task tab: Overtime Behavior


To create an activity and define the activity properties


Limited Schedule

The schedule defines the time frame in which the activity can be processed. You can choose from the many schedules that are already defined, or create a new schedule.

Although schedules can be applied to separate activities, they are more often applied to the resources used by the activities.


Resource Schedule


To set an attribute value


Overtime Behavior

The overtime behavior specifies how the activity behaves if resources go out of schedule while the transaction is being processed. This behavior interacts with the way overtime is specified for the resource.


Resources and Overtime

Resources Waiting

Resource Schedule

Resource Behavior


To look up the time that an event happens - Now Try This


Properties dialog box - Task tab: Overtime Behavior

The Task overtime behavior options define whether overtime is suspended or allowed for an activity or whether an activity is not started unless it can be completed in the scheduled time.

Element	Description
Suspend	If a resource goes out of schedule, it stops work. Processing starts again when a resource is available.  If the activity goes out of schedule, work is stopped and resumed when the activity is again in schedule. For example, a tax preparation service is available from 8:00 am until 8:00 pm, with a half-hour break in the afternoon. The morning shift works from 8:00 am to 2:30 pm and the afternoon shift works from 3:00 pm to 8:30 pm. The morning shift leaves at 2:30. Therefore, no work happens between 2:30 pm and 3:00 pm because resources are out of schedule. The next shift picks up until 8:30 pm. At this time, work stops for the night because the activity is out of schedule.
Don’t Start	The activity is not started unless it can be completed in the activity schedule.  Resources must be in schedule and available for the length of the activity.  For example, the doctors in a community hospital perform a four-hour operation. The surgery room is available only between 7:00 am and 4:00 pm. If an operation is not started before noon, or the doctors are delayed by other activities that make them unavailable, then the patient must wait until 7:00 am the next morning, at the earliest.  Resource availability can be affected by preemptive transactions.
OK If Started	The activity allows overtime for resources if the activity has started working on a transaction and a resource or activity goes out of schedule. For example, customers leave their cars at an automobile repair shop and return after 6:00 pm to pick them up. The mechanics work from 8:00 am to 4:00 pm. However, if a repair takes longer than expected, the mechanic can work overtime to complete the repairs
Always OK	Overtime is always allowed for resources when a transaction reaches this activity. For example, when an alarm goes off at a power substation, the emergency workers are always authorized to work overtime to locate the problem.
Finish Queue	The activity allows overtime for resources to finish processing all of the transactions that are currently waiting in the queue.


Properties dialog box

Properties dialog box - Task tab

Properties dialog box - Task tab: Work options

Properties dialog box - Task tab: Process options

Properties dialog box - Task tab: Delay options

Properties dialog box - Task tab: Cost categories

Properties dialog box - Task tab: Capacity options


To specify a delay

To set a fixed cost


Defining Activity Outputs

The output options on an activity controls if and how a transaction exits an activity. Every transaction leaving an activity, through a connection line, is an input to another activity; otherwise, the transaction stops.

Examples

•	Create a decision point where there is a Yes path when a proposal is approved and a No path when it is not

•	Stop processing an order because its credit was not approved

•	Set four different path choices depending on the type of product


Properties dialog box - Outputs tab: Case Text options

Modeling Activities

Decision

Splitting Activity Outputs

Member Split

Stopping Activity Outputs


To locate the decision activities - Now Try This

To stop outputs

Options For Splitting By Member


Properties dialog box - Outputs tab

The Outputs tab defines how the transactions behave.

Element	Description
Decision	Branches the transaction into different paths based on percentages, attribute values, or expressions.
Split	Divides a transaction into multiple transactions.
Member Split	Splits the transaction into a count equal to the number of members of an attribute type.
Stop	Terminates the transaction.


Properties dialog box

Properties dialog box - Outputs tab: Case Text options

Properties dialog box - Outputs tab: Decision options

Properties dialog box - Outputs tab: Stopping Outputs options

Properties dialog box - Outputs tab: When Transactions Are Complete


To find where the transaction splits and joins - Now Try This

To create split outputs

To stop outputs


Decision

A decision is a point at which transactions can take one of several possible paths based on criteria that you set. The connection lines from a decision are automatically labeled in the process diagram. The first line correlates to the first decision (usually labeled No or False); the second line correlates to the second decision (Yes or True) and so on.


Properties dialog box - Outputs tab: Case Text options

Modeling Activities

Using Expressions

Defining Activity Outputs


To locate the decision activities - Now Try This


Properties dialog box - Outputs tab: Case Text options

The Output case text options define the possible outputs for a decision.

Element	Description
Yes/No	Number of cases is 2: No (equal to 0) and Yes (1).
True/False	Number of cases is 2: False (equal to 0) and True (1).
User-defined types	Custom types that you have previously defined. (The name of the actual type appears in the list.) Valid members of the type are displayed as outputs and cannot be edited.
Other	Case labels can be edited. You set the # Cases to equal the number of output paths. This causes the Output list to add or subtract cases. The default is 2. For example, three wires are color coded red, blue, or yellow. Whenever a transaction is processed by the activity, the red wire is chosen 50% of the time, blue is chosen 11%, and yellow, 39%.


Properties dialog box

Properties dialog box - Outputs tab

Properties dialog box - Outputs tab: Decision options

Properties dialog box - Outputs tab: Stopping Outputs options

Properties dialog box - Outputs tab: When Transactions Are Complete


To create a decision

To locate the decision activities - Now Try This


To create a decision

1	Double-click any symbol to display the Properties dialog box.

2	Choose the Outputs tab.

3	Define the Case Text and Outputs.

4	Click Apply.


Defining Activity Outputs

Decision

To locate the decision activities - Now Try This


Properties dialog box - Outputs tab: Decision options

The Output decision options define percentages or an expression for output distribution.

Element	Description
Statistical	You set percentages for the output distribution.
Expression	Enter an expression for the output distribution. The expression returns a value, for example, an attribute returns its value or the expression evaluation returns false (equal to 0) or true (1).
	A return value of 0 uses the first path; 1 uses the second path, 2 uses the third path, and so on. If the expression value is less than 0, it uses the first path. If the value is greater than the number of paths, it uses the last path. Expression values in between are rounded up to the nearest integer.
	For example, in a Quality Assurance department, three quality tests are performed, depending on the software module. To create outputs for each test, an attribute called QualityTest is created with a user-defined type called Test. Test has three members: Alpha, Beta, and Gamma. Whenever a transaction enters this activity, the QualityTest attribute is evaluated and its value determines the path.


Properties dialog box

Properties dialog box - Outputs tab

Properties dialog box - Outputs tab: Case Text options

Properties dialog box - Outputs tab: Stopping Outputs options

Properties dialog box - Outputs tab: When Transactions Are Complete


To create a decision

To locate the decision activities - Now Try This


Decision Activities - Now Try This

The process diagram for a Decision Phone Tree shows the path that an incoming phone call takes. Depending on the type of call, it is routed as a voice or data call. Furthermore, the data calls are answered either by a modem or a fax line. A fax is routed as an Office, Staff, or Report fax.

For this exercise, each Decision activity is drawn using a different symbol (a diamond, box, or circle).


Decision


To open the exercise data for decision activities - Now Try This

To locate the decision activities - Now Try This

To use trace mode to view decision activities - Now Try This


To open the exercise data for decision activities - Now Try This

1	On the File menu, click Open.

2	Select iGrafx\Pro\8.0\Exercise\Ex2dec.igx, and click Open

3	If necessary, click Maximize on the Ex2dec.igx - Process1 window.


Defining Activity Outputs

Properties dialog box - Outputs tab: Case Text options

To create a decision

To locate the decision activities - Now Try This

To use trace mode to view decision activities - Now Try This


To locate the decision activities - Now Try This

1	Double-click the activity labeled Incoming line.

2	In the Properties dialog box, choose the Outputs tab, and review the Decision text to verify that a transaction takes the Voice path 50% of the time and Data the other 50%.

Do not change the activity.

3	Without closing the dialog box, click to select the activity labeled Data line. (You might have to move the Properties dialog box.)

The Outputs tab is updated for the selected activity.

4	Review the Decision text to verify that a transaction takes the Modem 1 path 33% of the time, the Modem 2 path 33%, and the Fax path 33%.

5	Without closing the dialog box, click to select the activity labeled 1.

6	Review the Decision text to verify that a transaction takes the unlabeled path 50% of the time and the Office path the other 50%.

7	Without closing the dialog box, click to select the activity labeled 2.

8	Review the Decision text to verify that a transaction takes the Report path 50% of the time and the Staff path the other 50%.

9	Click Cancel.


Properties dialog box - Outputs tab: Case Text options

Defining Activity Outputs

Decision

To create a decision

To open the exercise data for decision activities - Now Try This

To use trace mode to view decision activities - Now Try This


To use trace mode to view decision activities - Now Try This

In this exercise, use the trace mode to graphically display how a decision activity determines the path of a transaction.

1	If necessary, click Maximize on the Ex2dec.igx - Process1 window.

2	   On the Model toolbar, click the Trace tool.

or

On the Model menu, point to Run, and then click Trace.

The Ex2dec.igx - Process1 diagram is now in trace mode.

3	   On the Model toolbar, click the Start tool.

This starts the simulation. Transactions enter the process on a regular basis whenever a resource is available to process them. Watch as a transaction enters one of the Decision activities and is routed down one of the output paths.

Tip

Use the trace tools on the Trace toolbar to step, pause, stop, or start the simulation.

After the simulation run is complete, the report window appears with the results of the simulation.

4	On the File menu, click Close.

This is the end of this exercise. You can save your changes.


Properties dialog box - Outputs tab: Case Text options

Defining Activity Outputs

To open the exercise data for decision activities - Now Try This

To locate the decision activities - Now Try This


Splitting Activity Outputs

You can split the transaction in the output of an activity to model work performed simultaneously by different departments or resources. The split transactions can be further processed and joined back together, then a single transaction can continue.

The new transactions are created with the same attribute values as the original.

For example, after a software product has been developed, it is written to three floppy disks. An installation test is performed on each disk. After all three disks have passed, the product is joined together and ready to ship.


Explicit and Implicit Splits

You can model parallel activities using an explicit Split activity, or, more commonly, you create multiple paths from any single symbol (this is called an implicit split). If you draw multiple paths from one activity to create an implicit split, you do not need to set an explicit Split activity.


When a Transaction Splits

•	One or more duplicate transactions are created.

•	All of the transactions are assigned to the same family.

•	The new transactions have the same attribute assignments of the original transaction. (An exception is when they are split by attribute member.)

•	The new transactions share the same resource acquisitions (those that were explicitly acquired) as the original transaction.

Split transactions can be recombined by joining inputs at other activities. A join can collect the transactions by family so that only members of the same split family are joined. This ensures that members of other families are not joined with the split transactions.


Options For Splitting By Count

Member Split

Options For Splitting By Member


To find where the transaction splits and joins - Now Try This

Properties dialog box - Outputs tab: Case Text options

To locate the decision activities - Now Try This

To create split outputs


To create split outputs

1	Double-click any symbol to display the Properties dialog box.

2	Choose the Outputs tab.

3	Select Split and type in a number of transactions created by the split in the Count text box.

4	Click Apply.


Defining Activity Outputs

Splitting Activity Outputs

Options For Splitting By Count

Member Split

To join inputs

To find where the transaction splits and joins - Now Try This

To join the transactions - Now Try This


Options For Splitting By Count

The count is the number of transactions created by the split. The count can be a simple number or an expression. You can use the Expression toolbar to create the expression.

Note
A split is created implicitly by having multiple connection lines from one activity.


Using Expressions

Splitting Activity Outputs

Member Split

Options For Splitting By Member


To find where the transaction splits and joins - Now Try This

Properties dialog box - Outputs tab: Case Text options

To create split outputs


Member Split

An alternate method for splitting is to split the transaction into a count equal to the number of members of an attribute type. The split transactions can later be joined by attribute member.


Options For Splitting By Member

When an activity splits outputs by member, you choose or create an attribute to specify the count. If you choose this option, the number of transactions created is equal to the number of members in the type. Furthermore, each transaction has its own unique value set for the attribute. This option is only valid with transaction attributes whose type is other than Number, so the list of transaction attributes is limited to valid attributes.

For example, an attribute named Flag has a type of YesNo. When you split by this attribute, two transactions are created; the first has a Flag attribute set to No, the second Yes.


Splitting Activity Outputs

Options For Splitting By Count


To find where the transaction splits and joins - Now Try This

To create split outputs


Transaction Splits - Now Try This

An editor divides a document into individual chapters for review by three different reviewers. (This splits the transaction.) The reviewers work in parallel. Afterwards, the editor completes the review. In this exercise, review some of the effects when a transaction splits.


Transaction Groups

Splitting Activity Outputs

Options For Splitting By Count

Options For Splitting By Member


To review activities - Now Try This

To join the transactions - Now Try This

To run the simulation again - Now Try This


To open the exercise data for Transaction Splits - Now Try This

1	On the File menu, click Open.

2	Select iGrafx\Pro\8.0\Exercise\Ex4split.igx, and click OK.

3	If necessary, click Maximize on the Ex4split.igx - Process1.


To review activities - Now Try This

To join the transactions - Now Try This

To run the simulation again - Now Try This


To review activities - Now Try This

1	Review the activity labeled Assign reviews.

Do not change the activity.

The activity explicitly splits outputs to three departments. The three outgoing connection lines automatically split the transaction.

2	Review the activity labeled Compile comments.

3	This activity implies that the transactions are being joined, because of the incoming lines. However, there is not any implicit join so the transactions continue individually.


Defining Activity Outputs

Activity Base

To create an activity and define the activity properties

To assign colors to different value activity classes

To locate the decision activities - Now Try This

To open the exercise data for Transaction Splits - Now Try This

To join the transactions - Now Try This

To run the simulation again - Now Try This


To join the transactions - Now Try This

1	On the Window menu, select Ex4split.igx - Process1.

2	Double-click the activity labeled Compile comments.

3	On the Properties dialog box, choose the Inputs tab.

4	For Collection, use the scrolling list to choose Join.

5	For the type of join, select Entire Family.

6	Click OK.

This changes the activity so that it joins inputs instead of processing them individually.


About Transactions

About a Transaction Family

Joining

When to Join Inputs

Joining by Family

When a Transaction Enters a Subprocess

Transaction Flow Constraints

To open the exercise data for Transaction Splits - Now Try This

To review activities - Now Try This

To find where the transaction splits and joins - Now Try This

To run the simulation again - Now Try This


To run the simulation again - Now Try This

1	On the Model toolbar, click the Start tool.

or

On the Model menu, point to Run, then click Start.

Tip

You can also enable trace mode by first clicking Trace and then clicking Start.

2	Verify that the field containing the number of transactions has changed.

The field shows that only 1 transaction has been processed, instead of the previous 3. This is because of the Join activity.

Note
On the File menu, click Close.

This is the end of this exercise. You can save your changes.


About Activity Processing

To open the exercise data for Transaction Splits - Now Try This

To review activities - Now Try This

To join the transactions - Now Try This


Stopping Activity Outputs

If you stop processing, this can terminate the current transaction and some or all of the transaction’s family members. You can use this feature to synchronize or coordinate parallel paths.


Stop Transaction

Stop Family


To remove a resource from an activity

To stop outputs


Properties dialog box - Outputs tab: Stopping Outputs options

The Stopping Outputs options define when and how transactions stop.

Element	Description
Always	Stops all transactions reaching this activity. For example, if credit is not approved, all of the orders from that company are stopped.
Expression	Stops only transactions whose values equal this expression. For example, in a catsup bottling plant, the catsup must be bottled and capped within twenty minutes. As each batch of catsup is processed for bottling, its preparation time is examined. If any batch is older than twenty minutes, it is stopped.


Properties dialog box

Properties dialog box - Outputs tab

Properties dialog box - Outputs tab: Case Text options

Properties dialog box - Outputs tab: Decision options

Properties dialog box - Outputs tab: When Transactions Are Complete


To stop outputs


To stop outputs

1	Double-click any symbol to display the Properties dialog box.

2	Choose the Outputs tab.

3	Select Stop and define the criteria Always or Expression.

4	If necessary, click Stop Transaction or Stop Family.

5	Click Apply.


Defining Activity Outputs

Stop Transaction

Stop Family

To remove a resource from an activity

To create split outputs

To run the simulation again - Now Try This


Stop Transaction

The current transaction is stopped if it matches the criteria that you set for Always or Expression. The transaction is stopped regardless of any connection lines that might be drawn as outputs from the symbol. If this box is not checked, the current transaction continues.

For example, when a job application is submitted to an employment agency, it is evaluated by the admissions clerk. If there is not a job opening, the clerk sends a letter to the applicant and files the application. At this point, the application (the current transaction) stops.


About Transactions

About a Transaction Family

When a Transaction Enters a Subprocess

Stopping Activity Outputs

Stop Family

Transaction Flow Constraints


To find where the transaction splits and joins - Now Try This

To join the transactions - Now Try This

To stop outputs


Stop Family

All transaction family members are stopped if they match the criteria that you set for Always or Expression. If this box is not checked, only the current transaction can be stopped.

For example, petitions are submitted to an assembly to be placed on an upcoming docket.

A petition is rejected:

•	If the signatures on the petition are not valid.

•	If the petition does not meet basic criteria.

•	If the petition was not circulated legally.

Different committees examine the petitions for these three criteria. If any committee rejects a petition, it is automatically pulled from consideration by the other committees.


About a Transaction Family

Joining by Family

Forcing From Family

Stopping Activity Outputs

Stop Transaction


To remove a resource from an activity

To stop outputs


Reviewing Activity Statistics Summary

The summary tab contains comments and statistics about the activity.


Modeling Activities

Properties dialog box

Reviewing Simulation Report Results

Using the Report Window to Review Transaction Statistics

Using the Report Window to Review Activity Statistics

Using the Report Window to Review Resource Statistics

Creating Custom Statistics in the Report Window

Using Department Statistics


To display activity statistics


Properties dialog box - Summary tab

The Properties Summary tab displays statistics about the activity. These statistics are specific to the activity you selected and are from the last simulation that you ran.

Tip

To display selected activity statistics in the process diagram, use the Fields command on the Format menu.


Properties dialog box

Reviewing Activity Statistics Summary

About Transaction Attributes

Reviewing Simulation Report Results

Using the Report Window to Review Transaction Statistics

Using the Report Window to Review Activity Statistics

Using the Report Window to Review Resource Statistics

Creating Custom Statistics in the Report Window

Using Department Statistics


To display activity statistics


To display activity statistics

1	Double-click any symbol to display the Properties dialog box.

2	Choose the Summary tab.

3	Choose Statistics from the scrolling list.

A list of available statistics is displayed. These statistics are specific to this activity for the last simulation that has been run. The statistics are only available after the model is run.


Reviewing Activity Statistics Summary


About Activity Processing

The simulation generator sends transactions through the process at predetermined times. A transaction follows the process diagram through the paths that you draw to connect symbols.

As a transaction enters an activity, a number of actions happen. (All of these actions are optional and have smart defaults.) The actions, which always happen in the same order, are shown in the following illustration.

When a transaction arrives at an activity, the simulator performs the following actions, in order:

1	Acquires waiting resources

The simulator acquires the resources that are assigned to the transaction for the activity, even if the transaction has to wait for any reason.

This happens only for resources that you have defined to wait until the transaction can be processed. The resource’s time can therefore be classified as waiting if the transaction is held up because of other constraints.

2	Receives or waits on input collection constraints

Next, the simulator waits for any input collection constraints to be met. These are collection constraints that you have set.

3	Acquires non-waiting resources

The simulator acquires any resources that will automatically release if the transaction has to wait for any reason. They will be reacquired when the transaction can continue.

These are called non-waiting resources because you have defined them to not wait if the transaction is held up.

4	Sets before duration attributes

The simulator calculates any duration expressions and sets any attribute values that you have defined to happen before the duration.

5	Takes duration or calls subprocess

The simulator accrues the amount of time that you set for its duration. Also at this point, it increments the cost for the activity. The cost is determined by the combination of resources used and the activity cost that you set.

6	Sets after duration attributes

The simulator sets any attribute values that you have defined to happen after the duration.

7	Releases resources

The simulator releases all resources that you have set to be released, including ones that are used only for this activity.

8	Sends outputs

The simulator dispatches any output transactions. At this point the transaction takes different routes depending on decision or case criteria, or it can split or stop.

9	Updates summary and field text

The simulator adds time, cost, and other information for this transaction into the summary page.


A Process in Action

About the Transaction Flow


To create an activity and define the activity properties

To define resource characteristics

To add a resource to an activity

To remove a resource from an activity

To use resources by department


Transaction Flow Constraints

A transaction ordinarily moves as far along the flow from activity to activity as it can. However, transactions can be held up due to any of the following conditions.

Transactions follow the process flow created by the different activities in the process diagram. Imagine that the transaction is a marker in a board game. At each turn, you move one marker with your index finger as far as that marker can go, based on the roll of the die. As long as the marker is moving, you keep your finger on it. When the marker must stop, you remove your finger and go to another marker. Transactions work the same way. Your index finger represents the simulator.

The simulator moves the transaction until one of these occurs:

•	The transaction completes, or

•	The transaction has work to do (at an activity, for example), or

•	The transaction must wait for a resource to continue, or

•	A transaction must wait for some other constraint (see above).

A transaction is complete (for example, it no longer exists) when one of these conditions is met:

•	A transaction reaches an endpoint. A transaction moves until it reaches an activity that does not have any outgoing connection lines. (In the case of a transaction that is in a subprocess, the transaction returns to its original process until it reaches an endpoint.)

•	The simulation time runs out. (This is the amount set in the Run Setup dialog box.) After the simulation time is over, the generator cannot create any more transactions, even if it is not finished. Any transactions left in the middle of the process flow are stopped and do not count as completed transactions in the report statistics. However, a stopped transaction is still counted as part of the statistical calculations for any activity or resource that processed it before the simulation time ran out.


About Activity Processing


To join the transactions - Now Try This


Properties dialog box - Outputs tab: When Transactions Are Complete

The Outputs options that apply when transactions are complete define the input collection constraints, resources availability, activity schedule, and capacity.

Element	Description
Input collection constraints	These constraints include batching by time, batching by gate, and any batching or joining that collects inputs.
Resource availability	A resource can be unavailable if it has schedule or acquisition limits. This occurs when the resource is busy or out of service. If resources are unavailable, the transaction must wait until they become available again.
Activity schedule	Activity schedules provide constraints. For example, the activity can process transactions only during certain time periods.
Capacity	Capacity limits are set by the number of transactions that the activity can process at the same time. This includes physical constraints and other resources.


Properties dialog box

Properties dialog box - Outputs tab

Properties dialog box - Outputs tab: Case Text options

Properties dialog box - Outputs tab: Decision options

Properties dialog box - Outputs tab: Stopping Outputs options


To find where the transaction splits and joins - Now Try This

To join the transactions - Now Try This


Reviewing General Activity Settings

This tab displays general settings for the activity.


Properties dialog box - General tab

The General Properties tab describes the name and object ID and enables you to resize the shape and add links.

Element	Description
Name	Provides the name of the selected shape.
Object ID	Provides the uneditable, system-generated ID number for the object.
Resize Proportionally	Resizes a shape proportionally.
Grow to Fit Text	Resizes a shape as text is typed.
Links	Lets you add a link to a shape or edit, delete, or activate a link.
Subprocess	Displays links that you can assign as subprocesses to links in the Links list.


Properties dialog box


To create an activity and define the activity properties


Reviewing and Defining Activity Custom Data

This tab displays the fields and the data in the fields for the shapes in the process model. It lists the currently defined fields for diagrams.

The order of the fields in this list shows the order in which the fields are displays in the diagram.

The Custom Data displays in reports and diagrams.


Properties dialog box

Properties dialog box - Custom Data tab


To set up a custom data field

To change the order of a custom data field

To change a custom data field

To delete a custom data field

To change the hours per day and days per week


Properties dialog box - Custom Data tab

The Custom Data tab lets you add data fields to the activities.

Element	Description
Custom data field	The data field name is provided on the left. The text box on the right lets you add or modify the data in the field.
Text in lower left corner	Shows what the data format for that field is.
Setup	Opens the Setup Custom Data dialog box to let you create or modify a data field for the selected shape.


Properties dialog box


To set up a custom data field

To change the order of a custom data field

To change a custom data field

To delete a custom data field

To change the hours per day and days per week


To set up a custom data field

1	On the Edit Menu, click Properties, and then click the Custom Data tab.

or

Right-click the activity, click Properties, and then click the Custom Data tab.

2	Click Setup.

The Custom Data dialog box appears.

3	Type a name in the Field Name box (for example, Cost or Cycle Time).

4	Click the down arrow beside the Field Type box.

5	Scroll through the field types, and select one.

6	Click the down arrow beside the Accumulation Method box.

7	Scroll through the methods and select one.

8	Click the down arrow beside the Field Format box.

9	Scroll through the formats and select one.

10	Select the Hidden Field option to hide the field in the chart.

11	Click Add.

12	Click OK.


Properties dialog box

Reviewing General Activity Settings

To change the order of a custom data field

To change a custom data field

To delete a custom data field

To change the hours per day and days per week


To change the order of a custom data field

1	On the Edit Menu, click Properties, and then click the Custom Data tab.

or

Right-click the activity, click Properties, and then click the Custom Data tab.

2	Click Setup

3	Highlight the field name to select it, and drag the selection to its new position.

4	Click OK.


Properties dialog box

Reviewing General Activity Settings

To set up a custom data field

To change a custom data field

To delete a custom data field

To change the hours per day and days per week


To change a custom data field

1	On the Edit Menu, click Properties, and then click the Custom Data tab.

or

Right-click the activity, click Properties, and then click the Custom Data tab.

2	Click Setup

3	Select the field name.

4	Modify the Name, Type, Format, or Accumulation Method, and click Change.

5	Click OK.


Properties dialog box

Reviewing General Activity Settings

To set up a custom data field

To change the order of a custom data field

To delete a custom data field

To change the hours per day and days per week


To delete a custom data field

1	On the Edit Menu, click Properties, and then click the Custom Data tab.

or

Right-click the activity, click Properties, and then click the Custom Data tab.

2	Click Setup.

3	Select the field name.

4	Click Delete.

5	Click OK.

6	In the warning box, click Yes if you want to continue.


Properties dialog box

Reviewing General Activity Settings

To set up a custom data field

To change the order of a custom data field

To change a custom data field

To change the hours per day and days per week


To change the hours per day and days per week

1	On the Edit Menu, click Properties, and then click the Custom Data tab.

or

Right-click the activity, click Properties, and then click the Custom Data tab.

2	Click Setup.

3	Click Options.

The Custom Data Options dialog box appears.

4	Modify the Hours Per Day and Days Per Week, and click OK.

5	Click OK.


Properties dialog box

Reviewing General Activity Settings

To set up a custom data field

To change the order of a custom data field

To change a custom data field

To delete a custom data field


Using the Tabular View

Process diagrams can be viewed using the normal (graphical) view or the tabular view. Both views contain the same data and can be used to define a process diagram. Use the tabular view for the following:

•	If you prefer entering or editing data using tables instead of graphics

•	If you have a large amount of data to enter


About Tables in the Tabular View

Using the Tabular View to Enter Model Data - Now Try This

Connecting Symbols in Tables

Changing Styles in Tables

Moving, Copying, and Deleting Cells


To edit process data using the tabular view

To switch to normal (graphical) view

To switch to tabular view

To choose which columns to display in the tabular view

To create a process diagram and add data using the tabular view

To connect symbols (activities) using the tabular view

To create connections between cells - Now Try This

To select one or more cells in the tabular view

To move one or more cells in the tabular view

To copy and paste a cell in the tabular view

To cut or delete cells in the tabular view

To change the font, fill, or border in the tabular view

To change the line or arrow in the tabular view

To change the line and arrow style in the tabular view

To change the font, and add a shadow in the tabular view


About Tables in the Tabular View

Select the Tabular command on the View menu to change the view of the active process diagram from normal to tabular. The tabular view consists of a process table that contains the process diagram data. A unique cell name (row name) is assigned for each department and activity) in the table. Connections to other symbols appear in the last column of the table as references to other cell names (A1 to B3).

A monitor appears in the tabular view as a small clock character to the left of the cell name. A start point appears as rounded rectangle inside the cell name.


Using the Tabular View

Viewing Columns in Tabular View

Using the Tabular View to Enter Model Data - Now Try This

Connecting Symbols in Tables

Changing Styles in Tables

Moving, Copying, and Deleting Cells


To edit process data using the tabular view

To switch to normal (graphical) view

To switch to tabular view

To choose which columns to display in the tabular view

To create a process diagram and add data using the tabular view

To connect symbols (activities) using the tabular view

To create connections between cells - Now Try This

To delete a connection

To move a connection

To add a department and copy in activities in the tabular view - Now Try This


To switch to normal (graphical) view

On the View menu, click Normal.

The process diagram is represented by symbols and directed lines.


To switch to tabular view

To create a process diagram and add data using the tabular view

About Tables in the Tabular View

Using the Tabular View to Enter Model Data - Now Try This


To switch to tabular view

On the View menu, click Tabular.

The process diagram is represented in a process table.


To switch to normal (graphical) view

To create a process diagram and add data using the tabular view

About Tables in the Tabular View

Using the Tabular View to Enter Model Data - Now Try This


To edit process data using the tabular view

1	Open an existing process diagram.

2	On the View menu, click Tabular.

The process diagram is represented in a process table.


To create a process diagram and add data using the tabular view

To select one or more cells in the tabular view

About Tables in the Tabular View

Using the Tabular View to Enter Model Data - Now Try This

Connecting Symbols in Tables

Changing Styles in Tables

Moving, Copying, and Deleting Cells


Using the Tabular View to Add Data to a Process Diagram

You can create a process diagram by entering all the data in the tabular view. You can switch back and forth between the tabular and normal (graphical) views using the Normal and Tabular commands on the View menu.


Using the Tabular View

Viewing Columns in Tabular View

About Tables in the Tabular View

Connecting Symbols in Tables

Changing Styles in Tables

Moving, Copying, and Deleting Cells


To create a process diagram and add data using the tabular view

To connect symbols (activities) using the tabular view

To create connections between cells - Now Try This

To delete a connection

To move a connection

To switch to normal (graphical) view

To switch to tabular view

To add a department and copy in activities in the tabular view - Now Try This


To create a process diagram and add data using the tabular view

1	On the File menu, point to New, and click Process.

2	On the View menu, choose Tabular.

An arrow appears after the first symbol to indicate where the next activity that you create will be placed. The first cell is A1.

3	Press Enter to create a new row for an activity.

The dark border indicates that an activity is selected. The second cell is A2.

4	Enter the text that you want placed in the symbol.

5	After you finish entering text, press Enter to create a new activity.

The placement of the symbols is automatically set for a connection line between symbols. You can change the symbol placement in the normal view.

6	To edit the activity properties, double-click in the selected activity area.

7	On the Properties dialog box, change the activity type, set attributes, or specify functions in the same way as in normal view. You can switch back to normal view while you are editing.


Using the Tabular View


Using the Tabular View to Enter Model Data - Now Try This

Friendly Bank, a small local company, has recently installed four bank machines and a central computer. They want to optimize the use of their machines so they are documenting the process. Begin by opening a blank process.


Using the Tabular View

Creating Connections Between Cells - Now Try This

Changing Fonts and Shadows - Now Try This

Using Copy and Paste in the Tabular View - Now Try This


To open a blank process, and switch to the tabular view - Now Try This

To document a process using the tabular view - Now Try This

To create a process diagram and add data using the tabular view

To switch to normal (graphical) view


To open a blank process, and switch to the tabular view - Now Try This

1	On the File menu, click Close to close any iGrafx Process files that are open.

2	On the File menu, point to New, and click Process.

3	On the View menu, choose Tabular.

4	On the View menu, choose Columns.

The Columns command is not available unless you are in Tabular view.

5	Clear any columns that are checked.

This removes optional columns and leaves the core information about the activities, their connections, and formats.


Viewing Columns in Tabular View

Properties dialog box

Using the Tabular View to Enter Model Data - Now Try This


To document a process using the tabular view - Now Try This

1	Press Enter, and type this text in A2: Verify code

2	Press Enter and type this text in A3: Get request

3	Press Enter and type this text in A4: Interpret request

4	Press Enter and type this text in A5: Approve

5	On the View menu, choose Normal.

The activities have the default symbol and do not connect at this point. The default symbol is either the rectangle or a symbol that you have defined as the default symbol.

6	If you cannot see all of the symbols, use the Zoom tool to adjust the view (a good choice is All).

7	On the View menu, click Tabular to view the table again.


To open a blank process, and switch to the tabular view - Now Try This


Connecting Symbols in Tables

You can connect symbols in a table by using the mouse to choose the source and destination symbols. The appropriate attachment point is automatically selected.


Using the Tabular View

About Tables in the Tabular View

Using the Tabular View to Enter Model Data - Now Try This

Changing Styles in Tables

Moving, Copying, and Deleting Cells

Creating Connections Between Cells - Now Try This


To connect symbols (activities) using the tabular view

To delete a connection

To move a connection

To create connections between cells - Now Try This


To connect symbols (activities) using the tabular view

1	On the View menu, click Tabular.

2	Cancel the selection of any cells.

Place the arrow cursor in the source symbol.

3	Press and drag the mouse button to the destination symbol.

4	Release the mouse button.

The connection remains selected until you perform an action such as pressing Enter to create another activity. The attachment point and the symbol placement are automatic.


Connecting Symbols in Tables


To delete a connection

1	On the View menu, click Tabular.

2	Click the connection that you want to delete.

3	On the Edit menu, click Delete.

or

Press the Delete key.


Connecting Symbols in Tables

To move a connection

To create connections between cells - Now Try This


To move a connection

To move a connection line, delete the old connection and create a new one.


To connect symbols (activities) using the tabular view

To delete a connection


Creating Connections Between Cells - Now Try This

In the previous exercise you learned about Friendly Bank's efforts to document a standard process for their new bank machines. You created a basic table to model some of the actions of the bank machine.


About Tables in the Tabular View

Using the Tabular View to Enter Model Data - Now Try This

Using the Tabular View to Enter Model Data - Now Try This

Changing Fonts and Shadows - Now Try This

Using Copy and Paste in the Tabular View - Now Try This


To create connections between cells - Now Try This


To create connections between cells - Now Try This

1	Connect the A1 cell with A2.

2	Connect the A2 cell with A3.

3	Connect the A3 cell with A4.

4	Connect the A4 cell with A5.

5	Deselect.

6	On the View menu, click Normal to view the connection lines.

7	On the View menu, choose Tabular to view the table again.


To create a process diagram and add data using the tabular view

To connect symbols (activities) using the tabular view

To move a connection

To delete a connection

To move one or more cells in the tabular view

To copy and paste a cell in the tabular view

To cut or delete cells in the tabular view


Viewing Columns in Tabular View

The information is stored in columns sorted by modeling topics such as inputs, outputs, and so on. Each topic can have multiple columns (for example, the Task topic display has nine columns of data). You can choose which topics to display using the Columns command on the View menu. This makes it easier to find the information that you need.


About Tables in the Tabular View

Using the Tabular View to Enter Model Data - Now Try This

Connecting Symbols in Tables

Changing Styles in Tables

Moving, Copying, and Deleting Cells

Modeling Activities


To choose which columns to display in the tabular view

To create connections between cells - Now Try This

To select one or more cells in the tabular view

To move one or more cells in the tabular view

To copy and paste a cell in the tabular view

To cut or delete cells in the tabular view


Show/Hide Columns dialog box

Use this dialog box to choose the activity data that is displayed in the tabular view.


Properties dialog box

Modeling Activities

About Tables in the Tabular View

Using the Tabular View to Enter Model Data - Now Try This

Connecting Symbols in Tables

Changing Styles in Tables

Moving, Copying, and Deleting Cells


To choose which columns to display in the tabular view

To create connections between cells - Now Try This

To select one or more cells in the tabular view

To move one or more cells in the tabular view

To copy and paste a cell in the tabular view

To cut or delete cells in the tabular view


To choose which columns to display in the tabular view

1	On the View menu, choose Columns.

The Show/Hide Columns dialog box appears.

Note
The Columns command is not available unless you are in Tabular view.

2	Select the columns of tabular information that you want to view.


Viewing Columns in Tabular View

Properties dialog box

Modeling Activities

To switch to normal (graphical) view


Changing Styles in Tables

Most menus are available in either normal or tabular view, and the method for editing is usually the same after items are selected.


Using the Tabular View

About Tables in the Tabular View

Connecting Symbols in Tables

Moving, Copying, and Deleting Cells

Changing Fonts and Shadows - Now Try This


To change the font, fill, or border in the tabular view

To change the line or arrow in the tabular view

To change the line and arrow style in the tabular view

To change the font, and add a shadow in the tabular view


To change the font, fill, or border in the tabular view

To change the fill or border, select the cell area, click the right mouse button, and click Format.

To change the font, select the cell area, click the right mouse button, and click Font.


To change the line and arrow style in the tabular view

To change the font, and add a shadow in the tabular view


To change the line or arrow in the tabular view

Select the connection area., click the right mouse button, and click Format.


To change the font, fill, or border in the tabular view

To change the line and arrow style in the tabular view

To change the font, and add a shadow in the tabular view


To select one or more cells in the tabular view

1	Click a single cell to select it.

The heavier border indicates that the cell is selected.

or

Drag and release the mouse button to select a range of cells.

2	Hold the Shift key, and click to select additional cells.

3	To cancel a selection, click in an empty place outside the table.


To create connections between cells - Now Try This


To change the line and arrow style in the tabular view

Select a connection area, right click the mouse button, and click Format.


To change the font, fill, or border in the tabular view

To change the line or arrow in the tabular view

To change the font, and add a shadow in the tabular view


To change the line or arrow in the tabular view

To change the line and arrow style in the tabular view

To change the font, and add a shadow in the tabular view


Changing Fonts and Shadows - Now Try This

In this exercise, your task is to change the font style and add a shadow.


Using the Tabular View to Enter Model Data - Now Try This

Creating Connections Between Cells - Now Try This

Using Copy and Paste in the Tabular View - Now Try This


To change the line and arrow style in the tabular view


To change the font, and add a shadow in the tabular view

1	Select all the cells.

2	On the Format menu, click Fonts.

3	For Font Style, choose Italic.

4	For Size, choose 12, and click OK.

5	Without canceling the selection, on the Format menu, click Line and Border.

6	For Border, click Custom.

7	For Shadow Color, choose the light gray (the last color in the list), and click OK.

8	Cancel the selection by clicking outside the table.

The text is in an italic font face and the symbols have a gray shadow.


To change the line or arrow in the tabular view

To change the line and arrow style in the tabular view


Moving, Copying, and Deleting Cells

After you create a cell, you can move it by selecting it, and then cutting and pasting it using the Clipboard. Connections between symbols that are moved using the Clipboard have to be redrawn after the symbol is moved.


Using the Tabular View

About Tables in the Tabular View

Using the Tabular View to Enter Model Data - Now Try This

Using Copy and Paste in the Tabular View - Now Try This


To move one or more cells in the tabular view

To copy and paste a cell in the tabular view

To cut or delete cells in the tabular view

To add a department and copy in activities in the tabular view - Now Try This


To move one or more cells in the tabular view

1	Select the cell(s).

Selected cells have a heavier or highlighted border.

2	On the Edit menu, choose Cut.

3	Move the cursor to the cell directly above the new location and click.

4	On the Edit menu, choose Paste.

The cells are renumbered.

5	Create a new connection for the pasted cell.


To copy and paste a cell in the tabular view

To cut or delete cells in the tabular view

To select one or more cells in the tabular view


To copy and paste a cell in the tabular view

1	Select the cell.

2	On the Edit menu, choose Copy.

3	Move the cursor to the cell above the new location and click the cursor.

4	On the Edit menu, choose Paste.


To cut or delete cells in the tabular view


To cut or delete cells in the tabular view

1	Select one or more cells.

2	On the Edit menu, choose Cut or Delete

or

Press Delete.


To copy and paste a cell in the tabular view

To move one or more cells in the tabular view

To create connections between cells - Now Try This


Using Copy and Paste in the Tabular View - Now Try This

The program for the cash machine has two separate routines that process each request. The first routine verifies the code and the second routine interprets the request. In this exercise, your task is to create the second department and copy several activities into it.


Using the Tabular View


To add a department and copy in activities in the tabular view - Now Try This


To add a department and copy in activities in the tabular view - Now Try This

1	Cancel any selection by clicking outside the table.

2	On the Toolbox toolbar, click the Insert Department tool.

3	In the Insert Department dialog box, type the name of the second department: Dept. 2

4	Click OK.

A new department is created below the first department.

5	Select the A3, A4, and A5 cells.

6	On the Edit menu, choose Cut.

7	Click in the name area (Dept. 2) for the second department.

8	On the Edit menu, click Paste.

9	Draw connections between cells B1 and B2, and cells B2 and B3.

10	Clear any selected items.

11	On the View menu, click Normal to view the process diagram.

This is the end of this exercise. You can save the process diagram.


Value Class dialog box

Use this dialog box to set the cost classifications for an activity. A value class can be Value Added (VA), Business Value Added (BVA) and No Value Added (NVA).


Activity Base

Setting the Cost Category

About Resource Costs

Properties dialog box - Resources tab: Cost Category


To assign colors to different value activity classes

To create an activity and define the activity properties

To set a fixed cost


Describing Model Behavior Using the Model Commands

Use the commands on the Model menu and the Model toolbar to add attributes, expressions, schedules, events, and functions to your model to analyze process inputs, outputs, and events.

Tip

The commands on the Model menu are also found on the Model toolbar. On the View menu, click Toolbars to display the Toolbars dialog box. Use this dialog box to display the Model toolbar, to add, and to remove tools from the toolbar.


About Transaction Attributes

Using Global Attributes

Using Expressions

Using Functions

Using System-Defined Functions

Creating Your Own Functions

Describing Modeling Behavior - Now Try This


About Transaction Attributes

Transactions are the tokens that flow through a process. A transaction attribute is a variable that can have a unique value for each transaction. Each transaction can have its own set of attribute values that describe the transaction.

Transaction attribute values are similar to cells in a spreadsheet or a table column. For example, the Priority attribute, a predefined (default) attribute, can have a different value at each transaction (Priority=3 for the first transaction, Priority=1 for the second transaction, and Priority=4 for the third transaction).


Describing Model Behavior Using the Model Commands

Common Uses for Transaction Attributes

Defining a Transaction Attribute

About Transaction Attributes

Setting a Value When the Transaction Is Created

Setting a Value in the Process Flow

Common Uses for Transaction Attributes

Setting a Priority on a Transaction


Common Uses for Transaction Attributes

Transaction attributes have the following common uses:

•	Setting the duration of an activity based on the specifics of a transaction.

For example, an activity duration is measured in seconds and uses an expression that contains the attribute PageCount multiplied by 5 (if PageCount is 100, then the duration is 500 seconds).

•	Controlling the flow of specific transactions through a decision output.

For example, as each transaction is processed by the activity, the value of Color determines whether the transaction takes the Blue, Red, or Yellow path.


About Transaction Attributes

Defining a Transaction Attribute

Properties dialog box - Task tab


To define a transaction attribute

To initialize a transaction attribute by distribution

To initialize a transaction attribute by constant value and multiple generators


Defining a Transaction Attribute

When you define a transaction attribute, you specify its name, location, and type. For example, you can create and define transaction attributes for Color and PageCount. You can set the value for an attribute for each transaction.


About Transaction Attributes

Common Uses for Transaction Attributes

Properties dialog box - Task tab


To define a transaction attribute

1	On the Model menu, click Attributes.

or

On the Model toolbar, click the Attributes tool.

The Define Attributes dialog box appears, and displays a list of existing attributes sorted by Location.

2	To view the attributes for another location, select another location.

The attributes for the selected location appear in the dialog box.

3	To add an attribute, click Add.

The Add New Attribute dialog box appears.

4	To modify an attribute, click Modify.

The Modify Attribute dialog box appears.

Note
You can change only the attribute type or definition.

5	Use this dialog box to define the attribute name, type, location, initial values, and associate the attribute type departments, and processes.

6	To add or modify an attribute type, click Define Types.

The Define Types dialog box appears.

7	Type the attribute Type Name, and type the Members, and click Add or Modify.

The new or modified attribute type appears in the Existing list.

8	Click OK to return to the Add New Attribute dialog box.

9	Click OK to return to the Define Attributes dialog box.

10	Click OK.


About Transaction Attributes

Add New Attribute and Modify Attribute dialog box

Common Uses for Transaction Attributes

To define a transaction attribute

To initialize a transaction attribute by distribution

To initialize a transaction attribute by constant value and multiple generators


Add New Attribute and Modify Attribute dialog box

Use this dialog box to add or modify a transaction attribute.

Element	Description
Location	The location sets the scope, or extent, of an attribute. If you create an attribute with a Transaction location, for example, the attribute definition extends to all transactions. Each transaction can carry its own unique value for the attribute.
Attribute name	The name must be 32 characters or less, and contain alphanumeric characters. The name can contain an underscore character but no spaces.
Attribute type	The type of an attribute determines its range of possible values. A Number type indicates the value can be any floating point number, up to 15 digits of precision. Other predefined types are TrueFalse and YesNo. You can also create your own types.
Define Types	Click to define attribute types using the Define Attributes dialog box.


About Transaction Attributes

Using Global Attributes

Using Expressions

Setting Global Attribute Values

Defining Attribute and Function Types


To define a transaction attribute

To initialize a transaction attribute by distribution

To initialize a transaction attribute by constant value and multiple generators


Setting a Value When the Transaction Is Created

You can initialize the value of a transaction attribute when the transaction is created or at individual activities as transactions flow through the process. For example, after you define transaction attributes named Color, PageCount, and Fruit, their values can be initialized.

A generator is typically used to initialize transaction attributes. When you set the scenario data for simulation, you define the generator. By default, the value of an attribute is initialized to be its first member. If the value is defined as number type, the default initial value is 0.


Initializing a Transaction Attribute

About Transaction Attributes

Using Generators


Initializing a Transaction Attribute

There are two common methods of initializing a transaction attribute:

•	By distribution

•	Using constant value and multiple generators


About Transaction Attributes

Defining Attribute and Function Types

Using Generators

Creating Your Own Functions


To define a transaction attribute

To initialize a transaction attribute by distribution

To initialize a transaction attribute by constant value and multiple generators


To initialize a transaction attribute by distribution

For example, you can use a generator to set an initial value based on a range of values.

1	On the Model menu, click Attributes.

or

On the Model toolbar, click the Attributes tool.

The Define Attributes dialog box appears and displays a list of existing attributes sorted by Location.

2	Use this dialog box to add the transaction attribute Fruit and the type name FruitDist.

3	Add the following members to FruitDist: Apple, Banana, and Orange.

4	On the Model menu, click Functions.

or

On the Model toolbar, click the Functions tool.

5	Define the function FruitDistribution. This function is the same type, FruitDist, as the Fruit attribute. Thirty percent of the time that FruitDistribution is called, Apple is returned; forty-five percent of the time, Banana; and twenty-five percent, Orange.

6	On the Model menu, click Generators.

or

On the Model toolbar, click the Generators tool.

7	Define a generator to initialize Fruit with a value returned by FruitDistribution.


Setting a Value in the Process Flow

Setting a Value When the Transaction Is Created

To define a transaction attribute

To initialize a transaction attribute by constant value and multiple generators


To initialize a transaction attribute by constant value and multiple generators

You can use a constant to set the same value for any transaction created by a generator by defining a separate generator to initialize different values for the transaction attribute.

1	On the Model menu, click Generators.

or

On the Model toolbar, click the Generators tool.

The Define Generators dialog box appears.

2	Use this dialog box to define Generators.

For example, one generator issues transactions in which Fruit is set to Apple, a second generator sets Fruit to Banana, and the third generator sets Fruit to Orange.


Setting a Value When the Transaction Is Created

To define a transaction attribute

To initialize a transaction attribute by distribution


Setting a Value in the Process Flow

The value of a transaction attribute can be set or changed on an activity. This method works particularly well if there is a decision in the process flow that identifies specific transactions. Every transaction that reaches the activity is assigned the attribute values.

The Attributes tab on the Properties Dialog box defines the value of attributes for any specific activity.


Defining Activity Attributes

Defining Activity Tasks

Setting a Value When the Transaction Is Created

Using Monitors and Transaction Attributes


Using Monitors and Transaction Attributes

You can place monitors to track statistics based on transaction attributes. This is useful for looking at cycle time, waiting time, or any transaction statistics for specific transactions.


Using Monitors to Collect Data

Setting a Value in the Process Flow

Setting a Priority on a Transaction


Setting a Priority on a Transaction

You can use the Priority transaction attribute to specify the order in which transactions are transacted. When transactions are queued (for example, waiting for a worker or at a batch activity), the highest priority transactions are always transacted first.

•	A higher priority transaction is processed before all lower priority transactions that are waiting.

•	Two transactions with the same level of priority are processed in the order that they arrive.

•	A higher priority transaction never acquires resources away from transactions that are already in process unless preempt is set.See Setting a Preempt on a Transaction on page 451.

The Priority transaction attribute is a predefined attribute for all activities and generators. You can set the following values for the Preempt transaction attribute:

•	Constant. The value can be between 0 and 127 where 0 is the lowest priority.

By default, transactions have a priority of 0.

•	Expression. You can define the priority value with an expression that uses different attributes, functions, and arithmetic operators.

The Family option extends the priority value to all members of the transaction’s family. For example, in an Order Processing model, when the Sales department establishes a priority for an order, then all of the related family members (for example, the credit check and the work order) also receive the same priority value.


Using Expressions

Setting a Value in the Process Flow

Setting a Preempt on a Transaction

About a Transaction Family


Setting a Preempt on a Transaction

You can use the Preempt transaction attribute to specify the order in which transactions are transacted. A preemptive transaction takes resources away from other, non-preemptive transactions. It also works with the priority attribute to create two tiers of order.

•	A preemptive transaction can acquire resources away from all equal or lower-priority transactions, even if the resource is already in use.

•	If two transactions have the same priority, a preemptive transaction is transacted first.

•	If two transactions have the same priority and are both preemptive, then the transactions are transacted in the order in which they arrive.

The Preempt transaction attribute is a predefined attribute for all activities and generators. You can set the following values for Preempt transaction attribute:

•	Constant. Choose True to turn on preemption or False to turn it off.

•	Expression. You can define the preemption value with an expression that uses different attributes, functions, and arithmetic operators.


Using Expressions

Setting a Value in the Process Flow

Setting a Priority on a Transaction

About a Transaction Family


To define a transaction attribute

To initialize a transaction attribute by distribution

To initialize a transaction attribute by constant value and multiple generators

To set global attribute values

To define an attribute type


Using Global Attributes

The three global attributes are department, process, and scenario. These attributes are considered separately from transaction attributes because of their different purposes. A transaction attribute provides individual values for transactions; a global attribute sets a value that all transactions can access.

•	Scenario attributes have one global value at any time. This is the most commonly used global attribute.

•	Department attributes have separate values for each defined department. A department can exist in multiple processes.

•	Process attributes have unique or separate values for each process.


Describing Model Behavior Using the Model Commands

Using Global Attributes

Using Global Scenario Attributes

Using Global Process Attributes

Using Global Department Attributes

Setting Global Attribute Values

About Transactions and Report Results

Using Attribute Prefixes

Defining Attribute and Function Types

Opening Multiple Scenarios


To find the location of an attribute

To set global attribute values

To define an attribute type


To find the location of an attribute

1	On the Model menu, click Attributes

or

On the Model toolbar, click the Attributes tool.

2	In the Define Attributes dialog box, click the Location designation that you want for the attribute.

The dialog box displays the attributes sorted by location. The active location is indicated by the shaded button.


To set global attribute values

To define an attribute type

Using Global Attributes


Using Global Scenario Attributes

Scenario attributes are available to all activities. If a model has two scenarios, then the attribute values in Scenario1 are not available to activities in Scenario2. The scenario attribute prefix is S.

For example, a Review Committee keeps track of the number of times that a document is reviewed during its entire revision cycle. This uses a scenario attribute called ReviewCount. Any activity that reviews the document increments the count by 1.


Using Global Process Attributes

The value of a process attribute is available to activities in the process. The process encompasses the model and its activities. Activities in Process1, for example, can check or set process attribute values only in Process1. The process attribute prefix is P.


Using Global Attributes

About Transactions and Report Results

Using Attribute Prefixes

Using Global Department Attributes

Setting Global Attribute Values


Using Global Department Attributes

Department attributes are available to any activity in the same department, regardless of process. The department attribute prefix is D.

For example, each department in a Tax Office has its own tax rate. The fixed cost for an activity is multiplied by the specific department’s tax rate. A department attribute, Tax, is defined, with a different initial value for each department.

The individual activities use Tax as a multiplier for the fixed cost. For example, the following activity has a fixed cost of 25 multiplied by the department’s tax rate. In other words, if this activity is in Dept. 3, the fixed cost is 72.5. If the activity is in Dept. 2, it is 70.


Using Global Attributes

Setting Global Attribute Values

Using Attribute Prefixes


Setting Global Attribute Values

You can set the initial value for a global attribute as part of the simulation data.


Using Global Attributes

Getting Started With Simulation


To set global attribute values


To set global attribute values

1	On the Model menu, click Attributes

or

On the Model toolbar, click the Attributes tool.

The Define Attributes dialog box appears.

For example, a scenario attribute called Item is initialized to 5. The S prefix indicates that the attribute has a scenario location.

2	Select a location (Process, Scenario, or Department).

3	Add or modify an existing attribute.

4	For Initial Value, choose how the value is expressed and the value.

•	Constant. Insert or choose a value from the list. The value must be of the defined type for the attribute. For example, if the type is Number, you can enter only a number.

•	Expression. Create the expression using attributes, functions, and arithmetic operators.


Using Global Attributes

Using Attribute Prefixes

About Transactions and Report Results

Edit Report Element dialog box - Statistic tab


About Transactions and Report Results

Report statistics contain information gathered about global transactions.


Using Global Attributes

Using Attribute Prefixes

Edit Report Element dialog box - Statistic tab


Using Attribute Prefixes

An attribute prefix is assigned to all attributes that are not located at the transaction level to indicate their location. After you define an attribute, this prefix appears in the Attribute Settings list. You must enter the prefix when using the attribute name in an expression.

Type of attribute	Prefix
Transaction attribute	No prefix (for example attribute_name)
Process attribute	P. (for example P.attribute_name)
Scenario attribute	S. (for example S.attribute_name)
Department attribute	D. (for example D.attribute_name)
The prefix F. (for example F.attribute_name) assigns a value to a transaction attribute for each of the individual members of the transaction’s family. A transaction family is created the first time a transaction is split. For example, a transaction attribute is assigned a value with the expression: F.layer = 3. This assigns 3 to layer for all other transactions that are family members of the transaction that has the assignment.


Defining Attribute and Function Types

Using Global Attributes

Edit Report Element dialog box - Statistic tab


Defining Attribute and Function Types

The type for an attribute or function defines its range of values. The default types are Number, YesNo, and TrueFalse. You can create your own type and specify the range for the type by adding members to the type. For example, create the type Reports, and assign the members Daily, Weekly, Monthly, EndOfYear.

•	Number type sets the attribute value to any real number (to fifteen-digit precision).

•	A YesNo type has a value of either No (equal to 0) or Yes (1).

•	A TrueFalse type specifies that the attribute can either have a value of False (equal to 0) or True (1).

Types are also used to create Decision paths and as case text labels.


Using Global Attributes

Decision


To define an attribute type


To define an attribute type

1	On the Model menu, click Types.

2	In the Define Types dialog box, type a name for the type.

The name must have fewer than 32 characters and contain only alphanumeric characters. The name can contain the underscore character but no spaces. Types are case-sensitive.

3	Move the cursor into the Members box and click.

4	Type each of the members, pressing Enter to start a new line.

For example, define the type Color with members Yellow and Red.

5	To define another type, click Add.


Using Global Attributes

Decision

Defining Activity Inputs

Defining Activity Outputs

Defining a Transaction Attribute


Using Expressions

When a count or simple number is used in a model (for example, to set the duration for an activity or the length of time for simulation), you can substitute an expression or choose from the library of system functions.

An expression is a mathematical statement that equals a value or distribution. The values that you can set for modeling include simple and complex expressions.

Expressions can combine functions, attributes, numbers, and members with different mathematical operators.

For example, on a Test activity, the first time a printed circuit board is tested, the test duration is 15 minutes. All subsequent tests take 25 minutes. The expression uses a function called If. The first argument of the function is an attribute, First_Time. For example, If(First_Time = True, 15, 25).

The advantage to using either the Expression builder or the Expression toolbar to create an expression is that you can often avoid common syntax errors.


Describing Model Behavior Using the Model Commands

Using Expression Builder

About the Expression Toolbar

Adding Operators to Expressions

Using System-Defined Functions

Creating Your Own Functions

Defining Attribute and Function Types


To add a function

To define a function

To add attributes to expressions

To add members to expressions


Using Expression Builder

The Expression builder provides a useful interface for creating expressions. At many places where an expression is valid, you can either enter the expression manually or use the Expression builder.


Using Expressions

About the Expression Toolbar

Adding Operators to Expressions

Using System-Defined Functions

Creating Your Own Functions


To add attributes to expressions

To add members to expressions

To define a function


About the Expression Toolbar

Use the Expression toolbar to edit and create expressions for the Properties dialog box. This toolbar appears at the bottom of the windows when you use an expression to define the work duration on the Task tab of the Properties dialog box. Select the Properties command to display this dialog box.

Tip

Place your curson over each tool to display a tool tip that describes the tool.

The Expression toolbar has a tool for each standard operator. Click these tools to insert the character into the expression, or enter the character by typing it. The tools labeled Paste members, Paste functions, and Paste operators display dialog boxes containing defined items from which you can choose. You can also enter the item by typing it in. The tools provide a convenient shortcut for choosing the correct name.

Spaces are ignored in expressions but you can use them to make the expression more readable.


Using Expressions

Using Expression Builder

Adding Operators to Expressions

Using System-Defined Functions

Creating Your Own Functions

To add a function

To define a function


To add attributes to expressions

To add members to expressions

To add a function


Adding Operators to Expressions

You can use the following valid operators in an expression.

Operator	Description
+	Added to
-	Subtracted from
*	Multiplied by
/	Divided by
=	Equal to
!	Not (logical negation)
<	Less than
>	Greater than
<=	Less than or equal to
>=	Greater than or equal to
&	Logical and. Both statements must be true to return True.
|	Logical or. Either statement can be true to return True.
(  )	Parentheses
%	Mod operator. Returns a remainder after a number is divided by a divisor.
,	Comma. Used to separate members of a list of arguments.

Expressions are evaluated according to the operators used and the placement of parentheses. The operations are performed from left to right in the following order.

Operator	Description
( )	Parentheses
* /	Multiplication and division
+ -	Addition and subtraction
< > <= >= !=	Comparisons
& and |	Logical and and or


Using Expressions

Using Expression Builder

Adding Operators to Expressions

Using System-Defined Functions

Creating Your Own Functions


To add attributes to expressions

To add members to expressions

To add a function

To define a function


To add attributes to expressions

If you know the name of the attribute, you can type it in as the expression. Otherwise, follow these steps to choose from the list of defined attributes.

1	On the Expression toolbar or builder, click Paste Attribute.

The Paste Attribute dialog box appears.

2	Select the attribute location.

Only attributes that have been defined for the selected location appear in the scrolling list.

3	Double-click the attribute that you want to paste.

4	When you finish using the Paste Attributes dialog box, click OK.

The attribute is pasted into the expression.

Note
Attribute names are case sensitive. If you type an attribute into an expression, use the correct lowercase and uppercase characters.


About Transaction Attributes

Using Expression Builder

Adding Operators to Expressions

Using System-Defined Functions

Creating Your Own Functions

To add members to expressions

To add a function

To define a function


To add members to expressions

If you know the name of the member, for example, True or False, you can type it into the expression. Otherwise, follow these steps to choose from the list of valid members.

1	On the Expression toolbar or builder, click the Paste Member tool.

2	In the Paste Member dialog box, click the type.

3	Double-click the member.

The function is pasted into the expression.


Using Functions

Although you can often use a simple number or a distributed value for things such as durations, you use a function for a non-constant value or a range of numbers. Functions are also convenient for creating a single place to change a value used in multiple places.

A function is a mathematical correspondence that returns a value for every value passed to it or generated by the system. You cannot edit the system-defined functions but you can create new functions.

A function has one or more arguments. For example, the Between function returns a value that is uniform in the range between a minimum and maximum value. It has two arguments: min and max. You insert a minimum value, which is the lowest value that the function returns, and a maximum value, which is the highest. In the following expression, the duration of an activity is a uniform number between 5 and 15.

For example, Between(5,15)

Other system-defined functions map a number to a unit of time. For example, the following expression returns a value of 2, because there are 7200 seconds in two hours.

For example, Hours(7200)


Describing Model Behavior Using the Model Commands

Using System-Defined Functions

List of System-Defined Functions

Using Expressions

Creating Your Own Functions

Using System-Defined Functions

Creating Your Own Functions


To add a function

To define a function


Using System-Defined Functions

The graphs for the probability distribution functions in this section were created by running 5,000 transactions through a single activity whose duration was defined to be the specific distribution function. All 5,000 transactions were generated at the start of simulation.

All simulations were run for 200 seconds and snapshots were taken every 10 seconds. The number of transactions completed during each snapshot time was graphed versus the time of the snapshot.

The graphs are not smooth curves because the amount of transactions is sampled every ten seconds. Also, not enough transactions are run to completely smooth out the effects of randomness from the random number generator.


Using Expressions

Using Functions

Using System-Defined Functions

List of System-Defined Functions

Creating Your Own Functions


To add attributes to expressions

To add members to expressions

To add a function


List of System-Defined Functions

Abs(Number)

BernoulliDist(Probability)

BetaDist(A,B,Min,Max)

Between(Min,Max)

BetweenNorm(Min,Max)

BinomDist(N,Probability)

Ceiling(Num)

Cost(Value, Labor/Equipment/Other, Standard/Overtime)

Days(Seconds)

DaysToSec(Days)

ElapsedTime()

ErlangDist(N,B)

Exp(Num)

ExponDist(Mean)

Floor(Num)

GammaDist(A,B)

Hours(Seconds)

HoursToSec(Hours)

If(Test,True,False)

Ln(Num)

Log10(Num)

LogNormDist(Mean,Deviation)

Max(Num,Num)

Min(Num,Num)

Minutes(Seconds)

MinutesToSec(Minutes)

Months(Seconds)

MonthsToSec(Months)

NormDist(Mean,Deviation)

NormSDist()

PercentYes(Num)

PoissonDist(Mean)

Power(Num,Exp)

Random()

Round(Num,Numdigits)

Sqrt(Num)

Time(Timetype)

TransServiceTime()

TransWaitingTime()

TriangleDistribution(Min,Max,Mean)

Trunc(Num,Numdigits)

Weeks(Seconds)

WeeksToSec(Weeks)

WeibullDist(A,B)

Years(Seconds)

YearsToSec(Years)


Using System-Defined Functions

Creating Your Own Functions

Using Expressions


Abs(Number)

This returns the absolute value of a number. The absolute value is the number without a sign.

For example: Abs(-4) = 4, Abs(9) = 9


BernoulliDist(Probability)

The Bernoulli distribution returns a value of 1 or 0; the argument indicates how frequently the value of 1 is returned on a percentage basis.

For example: BernoulliDist(0.7) implies a value of 1 is returned 70% of the time


BetaDist(A,B,Min,Max)

This returns the cumulative Beta probability density function between the minimum and maximum values that you supply. The BetaDist function is commonly used to study variation in a percentage across samples.


Between(Min,Max)

This provides a uniformly-distributed number between the minimum and maximum values that you supply.

For example, if you use Between(10,20), the value returned has an equal probability of being any real number from 10 to 20, both numbers inclusive. For example: 12.5 or 16.413


BetweenNorm(Min,Max)

This provides a Normal random variable between a minimum and maximum value.

For example, if you use BetweenNorm(10,20), the value returned is more likely to be 14, 15, or 16, and seldom 10 or 20.

This function is the same as the NormDist function except that the mean and standard deviation are calculated automatically according to the minimum and maximum values that you provide. Also, the value returned will always be inside the specified range.


BinomDist(N,Probability)

The Binomial distribution models drawing or selecting items from a pool, where N is the number of items in the pool and Probability is the probability of each item being successfully drawn.


Ceiling(Num)

This returns a number rounded up to a whole number. The number can be zero or negative.

For example: Ceiling(2.5) = 3, Ceiling(0) = 0, Ceiling(-4.37) = -4


Cost(Value, Labor/Equipment/Other, Standard/Overtime)

This returns the costs accumulated on a transaction in the different cost categories. The cost is calculated up to the point in time in the simulation when the function is called. A value of zero returns all cost categories.

•	Value
1 = Value Added
2 = Business Value Added
3 = Value Added + Business Value Added
4 = No Value Added
5 = Value Added + No Value Added
6 = Business Value Added + No Value Added
7 = Value Added + Business Value Added + No Value Added (same as using 0)

•	Labor/Equipment/Other
1 = Labor
2 = Equipment
3 = Labor +Equipment
4 = Other
5 = Labor + Other
6 = Equipment + Other
7 = Labor + Equipment + Other (same as using 0)

•	Standard/Overtime
1= Standard cost (non-overtime)
2 = Overtime
3 = Standard + Overtime (same as using 0)

For example, Cost(0,0,0) returns total costs in all categories. Cost(1,1,2) returns value-added, overtime labor costs. Cost(4,0,0) returns non-value added costs.


Days(Seconds)

This converts the argument from seconds to days. The Days function uses the run setup information to calculate how many hours are in a day.

For example, if there are 8 hours in a day, then Days(201600) = 7.


DaysToSec(Days)

This converts the argument from days to seconds. This is the inverse function for Days().


ElapsedTime()

This returns the amount of time that has elapsed since the start of the simulation, in seconds.

For example, ElapsedTime() after four hours of simulation = 14400.


ErlangDist(N,B)

The Erlang distribution generates random values where N is the mean distribution and B is the variance. Both N and B must be greater than zero and N is an integer. (The Erlang distribution is a subset of the Gamma distribution.)


Exp(Num)

This returns e raised to the power of Num. The constant e equals 2.71828182845904, the base of the natural logarithm.

For example: Exp(1) = 2.71828


ExponDist(Mean)

This provides an exponential random variable. The variable is described completely by specifying a single property, the mean.

For example, if you specify ExponDist(15), the resulting value, over time, will be close to 15. Spikes of much larger or smaller numbers are always possible with the exponential distribution.


Floor(Num)

This rounds a number down to a whole number.

For example: Floor(4.3) = 4, Floor(.119) = 0, Floor(-5.4) = -6


GammaDist(A,B)

The Gamma distribution generates random values with the following density:


Hours(Seconds)

This converts the argument from seconds to hours by dividing by 3600.

For example: Hours(32400) = 9


HoursToSec(Hours)

This converts the argument from hours to seconds. This is the inverse function for Hours().


If(Test,True,False)

This provides an If function that checks the condition of Test. If Test is true, the value returned is set by the variable labeled True. If Test is false, the value is set by the variable labeled False. The True and False arguments can be expressions themselves.

For example, if you have an attribute named Apple whose value is Red, then the following expression returns 5. If the value of Apple is Green, the expression returns 10.

For example: If(Apple=Red,5,10)

If Apple is Red, then the following expression returns 5. If Apple is Green, the expression returns 10. If Apple is not Red or Green, the expression returns 15.

For Example: f(Apple=Red,5,(If(Apple=Green,10,15)))


Ln(Num)

This returns the natural logarithm (the inverse of the Exp function). The number must be positive.

For example, Ln(55) = 4.00733, Ln(Exp(4)) = 4, Ln(2.71828) = .9999.


Log10(Num)

This returns the base 10 logarithm of a number. The number must be positive.

For example, Log10(5) = .69897.


LogNormDist(Mean,Deviation)

This is the logarithmic normal distribution. The first parameter is the mean and the second is the deviation.


Max(Num,Num)

This returns the largest number of the two arguments.

For example, Max(4,9) = 9.


Min(Num,Num)

This returns the smallest number of the two arguments.

For example, Max(4,9) = 4.


Minutes(Seconds)

This converts the argument from seconds to minutes.

For example, Minutes(4500) = 75.


MinutesToSec(Minutes)

This converts the argument from minutes to seconds. This is the inverse function for Minutes().


Months(Seconds)

This converts the argument from seconds to months.

For example, for 8 hours in a day and 22 days in a month,
Months(1267200) = 2.


MonthsToSec(Months)

This converts the argument from months to seconds. This is the inverse function for Months().


NormDist(Mean,Deviation)

This provides a Normal random variable described by its mean and its standard deviation.


NormSDist()

This provides a standard normal random variable where the mean is 0 and the standard deviation is 1. This function does not take any arguments. The value is generated within the distribution curve.


PercentYes(Num)

The Num sets the percentage of the Yes path on a Decision activity.

For example, PercentYes(95) sets the Decision route through the Yes path 95% of the time.


PoissonDist(Mean)

The Poisson distribution is a limiting form of the Binomial distribution when, in the Binomial expression, N tends to infinity and Probability tends to zero at the same time. Exponential interarrivals are the same as Poisson arrivals.


Power(Num,Exp)

This returns Num to the power of Exp.

For example, Power(5,3) = 125, Power(1,5) = 1, Power(10,5) = 100000.


Random()

Provides a standard normal random variable between 0 and 1.


Round(Num,Numdigits)

This rounds the number to the number of specified digits. If NumDigits is greater than zero, it rounds to the specified decimal places. If NumDigits equals zero, it rounds to the nearest integer. If NumDigits is less than zero, it rounds to the left of the decimal.

For example, Round(3.45, 1) = 3.5, Round(11.5,-1) = 10.


Sqrt(Num)

This returns the positive square root. The number must be positive.

For example, Sqrt(25) =5.


Time(Timetype)

This returns the amount of time that has accumulated on a transaction, in different categories, since the start of the simulation. The time is given in seconds.

0 = Cycle time
1 = Work time
2 = Resource waiting time
3 = Blocked time
4 = Inactive time

For example, if ten minutes of inactive time has accumulated, Time(4) returns 600.


TransServiceTime()

This returns the accumulated service time of a transaction up until the point that the function is evaluated. This does not include the duration on the current activity if it is evaluated as Attribute Settings Before Duration.


TransWaitingTime()

This returns the accumulated waiting time of a transaction up until the point that the function is evaluated. This does not include the duration on the current activity if it is evaluated as Attribute Settings Before Duration.


TriangleDistribution(Min,Max,Mean)

This returns the value of a Triangle distribution.


Trunc(Num,Numdigits)

This rounds the number toward zero to the nearest integer or nearest NumDigits decimal place.

For example:

•	Trunc(9.765,0) = 9,

•	Trunc(9.765,2) = 9.76

•	Trunc(65, -1) = 60

•	Trunc (-9.765, 2) = -9.76


Weeks(Seconds)

This converts the argument from seconds to weeks. The function uses the run setup information to calculate how many days are in a week.

For example, if there are 5 days in a week and 8 hours in a day, then Weeks(6480000) = 45.


WeeksToSec(Weeks)

This converts the argument from weeks to seconds. This is the inverse function to Weeks().


WeibullDist(A,B)

The Weibull distribution is typically used for reliability analysis. It takes two parameters, A and B. Both must be greater than 0.

We(x) = ABx(B-1) e-AxB


Years(Seconds)

This converts the argument from seconds to years. The function uses the run setup to calculate the length of a year.

For example, if there are 22 days in a month and 8 hours in a day, then Years(7603200) = 1.


YearsToSec(Years)

This converts the argument from years to seconds. This is the inverse function to Years().


Creating Your Own Functions

You can use functions to describe durations or other expressions in individual activities, or to initialize variables in the simulation data. A key advantage to a function is that you can change its definition and have it affect the values in several activities or expressions that use the function.

The behavior of a function is set by the data that you provide and whether you pass an argument to the function or not.


Using Expressions

Using Functions

Using System-Defined Functions

Add New Attribute and Modify Attribute dialog box


To add a function

1	On the Model menu, click Functions.

or

   On the Model toolbar, click the Functions tool.

The Define Functions dialog box appears.

2	To add a new function, click Add.

The Add New Function dialog box appears.

3	Type a function name, select the function type, and the argument.


To define a function

Using Expressions

Using Functions

Using System-Defined Functions


Add New Function and Modify Function dialog box

Use this dialog box to add and modify functions.

Option	Description
Function name	Enter a name for the function. The name can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters, including underscore but not spaces.
Function type	Choose from the scrolling list. You can define a new type by clicking Define Type.
Argument (mapping)	The function matches one set of values to another set. You pass an argument to a mapping function and iGrafx Process maps it to a new value. A mapping function offers a method to convert data from one format to another. You specify the type of argument passed to the function and the type returned. You can also set argument text to provide a prompt for the argument when the function appears in a activity. Additional choices for the text and type appear. For text, enter the prompt text that you want with the function. For example, a function, called DyeCost, maps colors to numbers. Colors is a user-defined type. If Red is passed to this function, it returns a value of 5. Likewise, Blue returns 8 and Green returns 4.
No Argument (distribution)	The function returns a value that exists proportionally between two or more numbers, based on the range that is defined. In other words, values between 0 and 100 will be randomly assigned by iGrafx Process. When this function is called a certain percentage of times, it returns the specified set of values. Both distribution and mapping types of functions can have continuous or non-continuous values.


Add New Attribute and Modify Attribute dialog box

Define Functions dialog box

Defining Attribute and Function Types


To define a function

1	On the Model menu, click Functions

or

   On the Model toolbar, click the Functions tool.

The Define Functions dialog box appears. A list of existing functions is displayed and the current function is highlighted.

2	To define the values of a function, click the function name from the list of existing functions.


To add a function

Define Functions dialog box


Define Functions dialog box

Use this dialog box to add, modify, and delete functions.

Option	Description
Function name	Enter a name for the function. The name can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters, including underscore but not spaces.
Function type	Choose from the scrolling list. You can define a new type by clicking Define Type.
Argument (mapping)	The function matches one set of values to another set. You pass an argument to a mapping function and iGrafx Process maps it to a new value.
	A mapping function offers a method to convert data from one format to another. You specify the type of argument passed to the function and the type returned. You can also set argument text to provide a prompt for the argument when the function appears in a activity. Additional choices for the text and type appear. For text, enter the prompt text that you want with the function. For example, a function, called DyeCost, maps colors to numbers. Colors is a user-defined type. If Red is passed to this function, it returns a value of 5. Likewise, Blue returns 8 and Green returns 4.
No Argument (distribution)	The function returns a value that exists proportionally between two or more numbers, based on the range that is defined. In other words, values between 0 and 100 will be randomly assigned by iGrafx Process. When this function is called a certain percentage of times, it returns the specified set of values. Both distribution and mapping types of functions can have continuous or non-continuous values.
# Intervals	Enter the number of intervals, or areas, within the distribution range. The intervals define the range for each area. The dialog box automatically updates to allow room for editing the interval values.
	If the function takes an argument (for example, if it is a mapping function), the start and end values indicate the range of numbers that return another value. For example, an interval between 80 and 120 returns a value of 10. (You can change the end value of the last interval for a mapping function.)
	If the function does not take an argument (for example, if it is a distribution function), the intervals define a percentage of time that, when the function is called, it returns a value. The last interval always has an end value of 100 percent.
Continuous	Values are returned in a continuous range. The range of the arguments determines how often a value is returned. For example, 30% of the time that the function is called, it returns a number between zero and five. Likewise, 55% of the time it is called (between 30 and 85), the function returns a number between five and two. And 15% of the time it is called, the function returns a number between two and four.
Non-continuous	The return values are confined to specific numbers instead of a range. You use a non-continuous function to return certain numbers or members of a type. For example, 18% of the time that the function is called, it returns a value of 38. Likewise, 15% of the time (between 18 and 43), it returns 53, 19% of the time, it returns 22, and 38% of the time, it returns 58.
Values	Enter a return value to correspond to each interval. The type of the value, for example, if it is a number or other type, is specified when you define the function.
Visual Basic	Select if function is a VBA function. VBA functions can be used to retrieve modeling data. For example, a VBA function that retrieves duration data from a database and uses it as input for the simulation.


Defining Attribute and Function Types


Describing Modeling Behavior - Now Try This

Three different types of policy requests are received by the Data Processing department at the Policy Insurance Company. The processing times for entering the data and evaluating policies depends on the type of policy received. In this exercise, you will use expressions that use transaction attributes to specify durations. You will also review the report results and see how to view simulation data using transaction attributes.


Describing Model Behavior Using the Model Commands

Simulation data - Now Try This


To open the exercise data for transaction attributes - Now Try This

To review the transaction attribute settings - Now Try This

To review the generator settings - Now Try This

To review the duration expressions - Now Try This

To trace a process with the trace window - Now Try This


To open the exercise data for transaction attributes - Now Try This

1	On the File menu, click Open.

2	Select iGrafx\Pro\8.0\Exercise\Ex5trans.igx, and click Open.

The process map appears.

3	Click the Maximize icon to view the whole screen.


Describing Modeling Behavior - Now Try This


To review the transaction attribute settings - Now Try This

After opening the sample process map for the Policy Insurance Company, examine the definition of the Policy transaction attribute. The attribute uses a custom type to access members specific to this model. You will review the attribute settings; however, please do not modify the data.

1	On the Model menu, click Attributes.

or

On the Model toolbar, click the Attributes tool.

The Define Attributes dialog box appears.

2	For Location, click to select Transaction, if it is not already selected.

An attribute named Policy already exists.

3	Click to select Policy, if it is not already selected.

4	Click Modify.

The Modify Attribute dialog box appears.

5	Click Define Types.

The Define Types dialog box appears.

6	Click to select PolicyType.

This is where the members of PolicyType are defined to be Home, Auto, and Renters. Later in the exercise, you will use these members to set durations and decision paths.

7	Close all of the dialog boxes without making any changes.


To review the generator settings - Now Try This

After the transaction attribute is defined, you initialize a value for each transaction as it is introduced into the process by the generator. Remember that the list of values for the attribute is governed by the attribute’s type.

1	On the Model menu, click Generators.

or

On the Model toolbar, click the Generators tool.

The Define Generators dialog box appears.

2	Under Existing Generators, click each of the three generators, one at a time, and examine the changes in the dialog box.

Each generator introduces transactions at different rates. Also, under Initial Attribute Settings, each generator has different Policy and Priority values. For example, Generator 2 has a Policy value of Home and a Priority of 2.

3	Click Cancel to close the dialog box.


Describing Modeling Behavior - Now Try This

Using Generators


To review the duration expressions - Now Try This

In this part of the exercise, you will analyze three different activities that use the Policy transaction attribute and PolicyType members to specify the task’s duration.

1	Double-click the activity labeled Receive policy request.

The Properties dialog box appears.

2	Choose the Task tab and review the duration.

If (Policy = Home, 1, 2)

This uses the If system-defined function. When a transaction enters the activity, if the value of its Policy transaction attribute is Home, then the duration is 1 minute. For all other values, the duration is 2 minutes.

3	Without closing the Properties dialog box, move the dialog box so that you can see the activity labeled Enter data.

4	Click to select Enter data.

This updates the dialog box so that you can review the duration.

If (Policy = Home, 2, If (Policy = Auto, 3, 5))

This is similar to the previous expression. When the value of the Policy transaction attribute is Home, the duration is 2 minutes. Otherwise, if the value is Auto, the duration is 3 minutes. For all other values, the duration is 5 minutes.

5	Without closing the Properties Dialog box, move the dialog box so that you can see the activity labeled Evaluate policy.

6	Click to select Evaluate policy.

This updates the dialog box so that you can review the duration.

CustomDuration(Policy)

This uses a custom function, CustomDuration, which takes one argument, Policy. Every time a transaction is processed, the function returns a value that determines the duration of the activity.

7	To review the definition of CustomDuration, on the Model menu, click Functions.

The Define Functions dialog box appears. The CustomDuration function maps the PolicyType members, Home, Auto, and Renters, to numeric values. When the transaction attribute value is Home, the expression returns 12. Likewise, when it is Auto, the value is 15, and when it is Renters, 20.

8	Click Cancel to close all of the dialog boxes.


Describing Modeling Behavior - Now Try This

Creating Your Own Functions

Using System-Defined Functions


To trace a process with the trace window - Now Try This

Use the trace window to watch an animation of the transactions following the process flow during simulation.

1	On the Model menu, point to Run, and then click Trace.

The Trace window appears.

2	Click the Maximize icon in the trace window.

3	On the View menu, click Transactions.

This splits the window so that you can view information about transactions as they are processed. The process map appears in the top of the window and transaction information is displayed in the bottom.

4	Click the Step tool twice.

or

On the Model menu, point to Run, and then click Step twice.

5	In the Transactions area of the window, click the text: 1 Working, -Receive policy request.

For example, several transaction values are displayed. The value of Priority is 1 and the value of Policy is Auto.

6	Click Step twice.

This introduces more transactions into the process flow.

7	In the transaction area, click the text: 1 Working - Receive policy request.

The transaction values for this transaction are different from the first. The value of Priority is 3 and the value of Policy is Renters.

8	Continue to watch the trace to see how transactions with different Policy attribute values take different paths.

You can use the Trace toolbar to Step, Pause, Stop, or Start the simulation again.


Describing Modeling Behavior - Now Try This

Using Trace Mode with Process Diagrams

Using the Global Attributes Window

Creating Your Own Functions

Using System-Defined Functions

Simulation data - Now Try This


Simulation data - Now Try This

After a simulation is run, you can view Activity statistics on the Time tab in the report window. The #Trans statistic indicates how many transactions each activity processed.

You can also place monitors at the end of each path to gather statistics about things such as cycle time for transactions that follow one of the Home, Auto, or Renters paths. To view the data associated with the monitor, create a new report element using Monitors statistics.

This is the end of the self-paced exercises for this chapter. If you want to save the process map that you created, do so now.


Describing Modeling Behavior - Now Try This

Reviewing Simulation Report Results.

Using Monitors - Now Try This

Creating Your Own Functions

Using System-Defined Functions


Running a Simulation

After you create the process diagram and model, you can simulate it. When a process is simulated, it runs through a processor that takes the information in the process diagram, including the activities and accompanying logic, and runs it for a set amount of time. This produces statistical results based on the model.

The process for setting up the simulation environment includes determining the duration of the simulation run, the schedule, the inputs, and the resource availability and requirements.


Getting Started With Simulation

Setting Up a Simulation Run

Using Generators

Using Resources

Tracing the Model While Running the Simulation

Using Schedules

Opening Multiple Scenarios

Using the Scenario Window

Describing the iGrafx Process Simulation Methodology

Running a Simulation - Now Try This


To set up a simulation


Getting Started With Simulation

When setting up model data and running a simulation, you typically perform the preliminary steps to specify information about the simulation. After that, you may need to make few, if any, modifications to the settings as you run subsequent simulations.


Running a Simulation

Setting Up a Simulation Run

Using Generators

Using Resources

Using Schedules

Opening Multiple Scenarios

Using the Scenario Window

About the Model Toolbar

Describing the iGrafx Process Simulation Methodology


To set up a simulation


About the Model Toolbar

You can use the Model toolbar to access the simulation tools. If the toolbar is not displayed, you can display it by clicking Toolbars on the View menu.


To set up a simulation

Note
You can perform the first three steps in this process in any order.

1	On the Model menu, click Run Setup to set the start and length of the simulation.

or

On the Model toolbar, click the Run Setup tool.

2	On the Model menu, click Generators to set the rate at which transactions are introduced into the process.

3	Click Resources to set the resources available to the process. For example, 3 workers and 1 machine.

4	On the Model menu, point to Run, and then click Start to simulate the model


Getting Started With Simulation

About the Model Toolbar


Describing the iGrafx Process Simulation Methodology

The simulation method used by iGrafx Process is called discrete event simulation. In a discrete event system, the system changes from one distinct state to another as activities occur in a series of individual steps. This change in state can occur in any of the potentially thousands of variables in the model. For example, the number of transactions in a particular queue can decrease, or the status of a particular resource can change from busy to out of service. In other words, an iGrafx Process model changes state at discrete points in time as the result of simulation events.

A discrete system uses variables that can take on only particular values from among a finite (but potentially very large) set of alternatives. For example, the users of a telephone booth are engaged in a series of discrete activities. Customers arrive at the booth and wish to make a call. If the booth is busy, the caller creates or joins the waiting line. When the booth is available, the first person in line uses the phone for a certain amount of time. The person then leaves, making the booth available for the next caller.

At any time, the state of the telephone booth can be specified by a variable that indicates the activity in progress.


Opening Multiple Scenarios

About the iGrafx Process Environment

Setting Up a Simulation Run


About the iGrafx Process Environment

A scenario is a set of data about the simulation environment. It includes the run setup, generators, resources, schedule definitions, and other simulation options. A simulation run uses one or more process diagrams in association with a scenario. The combination of process diagrams and scenarios provides the environment within which to run a simulation.

You can have several scenarios in one file for running different variations. Also, a simulation can use activities from more than one process and the results from multiple reports can be compared side-by-side. The following illustration shows this relationship between multiple processes, scenarios, and reports. Each model file contains some or all of these elements.


Opening Multiple Scenarios

Describing the iGrafx Process Simulation Methodology

Setting Up a Simulation Run


Setting Up a Simulation Run

Setting up a simulation run requires you to define scenario data. For example you define the type of simulation time used, when the simulation ends, and the time conversion units.


Running a Simulation

Getting Started With Simulation

Run Setup dialog box

Taking Snapshots During a Simulation


To set up a simulation

To set the run initialization options (active limit and sequence)

To snapshot model data


Run Setup dialog box

Use this dialog box to set up the scenario data for your simulation.

Tab	Description
Simulation Time	Defines how the simulator views time, when simulation starts and ends, and any time conversion units. In addition to the type of simulation time, you also specify when the simulation ends. You can have the simulation end when all generated transactions have completed their journey through the process diagram or after a specific amount of time, for example, 2 weeks.
Initialization and Reports	Defines where report results are created and also sets active limit and sequence values.
Snapshots	Defines snapshots, or points in time during simulation when data accumulation occurs.


Getting Started With Simulation

Run Setup dialog box - Simulation Time tab

Run Setup dialog box - Initialization and Reports tab

Run Setup dialog box - Snapshots tab

Taking Snapshots During a Simulation


To set the simulation time

1	On the Model toolbar, click the Run Setup tool.

or

On the Model menu, click Run Setup.

2	On the Run Setup dialog box, click the Simulation Time tab.

3	Enter the simulation time parameters.


Run Setup dialog box - Simulation Time tab

Run Setup dialog box


Run Setup dialog box - Simulation Time tab

Use this dialog box to set the type of time used in the simulation. Simulations sometimes use compressed time because all of the activities are performed within a regular time span. However, if you want to analyze any time that falls outside regular time spans, use calendar time.

Element	Description
Compressed	A compressed model simulates only the active hours. The time is described as being compressed because the simulator only runs during the hours when activity occurs. For example, if an activity takes 10 hours, then one transaction completes in 10 hours.
Calendar	A calendar time model uses a twenty-four hour clock. This allows for regular activity time plus overtime or multiple shifts of resources. For example, if an activity takes 10 hours, and the resources are active for only 8 hours a day, then one transaction completes in 26 hours. This includes eight hours active time, 16 hours out of schedule, and two more hours active time to complete the activity.
Default schedule  (Calendar time only)	Choose a schedule during which the simulation is active. This schedule becomes the default schedule which can be referred to in any place in the model that uses a schedule. This capability lets you define (and change) the schedule in one place. All resources and generators are also initially set to the default schedule.
Simulator start  (Calendar time only).	By Weekday. The run starts on a Monday. You can change this to another day of the week by clicking Change. By Date. The run starts on the day listed in the dialog box, or you can change it by clicking Change.
Simulation end	Transactions complete. All transactions finish or at least advance as far as the process flow allows them. This option is useful for models in which you analyze the time that it takes individual transactions to run through the process. For example, you measure how long it takes to introduce a new product to the market or the average time to manufacture a printed circuit board.
	Custom. This is the length of time that the simulation runs. You can specify a number and a time unit. A custom end time is a good option for models in which you are analyzing resources because there is a set period of time in which many actions are occurring. (Compare this to a simulation that continues to run until all transactions are complete. After the generator finishes issuing transactions, then no new transactions vie for resources.) When you set an end time, some transactions may not finish processing. For example, if the run takes one year, then some work will likely be in progress at the end of the year.
Time conversion	Time conversion units are used to calculate the durations for activities, interarrival generators, and, in the case of compressed time, report elements. Compressed Time. The default units for a compressed time model are 8 hours a day, 5 days a week, and 22 days a month. If you change these units, it affects calculations of durations, interarrival generators, and report results. Calendar Time (standard). The standard time conversion units are 24 hours in a day, 7 days in a week. Calendar Time (custom). You set time conversion units for hours in a day and days in a week. If you change these units, it can affect calculations of durations and interarrival generators, but not report results. Report statistics are calculated using the standard time conversion units for calendar time models (24 hours in a day, 7 days in a week).
	Calendar Time (standard). The standard time conversion units are 24 hours in a day, 7 days in a week. Calendar Time (custom). You set time conversion units for hours in a day and days in a week. If you change these units, it can affect calculations of durations and interarrival generators, but not report results. Report statistics are calculated using the standard time conversion units for calendar time models (24 hours in a day, 7 days in a week).


Run Setup dialog box - Initialization and Reports tab

Run Setup dialog box


To set the simulation time

To set the run initialization options (active limit and sequence)

To snapshot model data


Run Setup dialog box - Initialization and Reports tab

When you run a simulation, by default, the data is automatically created in a report called Report1. Simulation reports are stored in a report component in the current iGrafx .igx file. Use this dialog to set the reporting options.

Element	Description
Report Options	Create New Report. A new report is created each time you run a simulation. Any existing information in the report is always deleted before the new report is created. Append to Report. The simulation results are added to the end of the report each time you run the simulator. This lets you compare results across multiple simulations. Replace Simulation Run. The results replace a single simulation run by name. (This option is available only if a report already exists.)
	Report name You can choose a name or create your own. If you have several report results, you can replace the results from a single simulation run. You can choose from a list of displayed names.  Active limits Sets an upper limit for the number of transactions that can be processed concurrently. The default is 1000. This sets a safety condition for the simulator in case you have accidentally created a loop or other oversight in the modeling logic that would cause the model to generate too many transactions to process at one time.
	Sequence The sequence number seeds the random number generator. iGrafx Process uses random number generators to create different values and events that occur in the process. Each random number generator uses a sequence. If the sequence number is the same, you can make exact comparisons across simulations. For example, a transaction follows the same path as it did in previous simulations. During modeling, it’s important that you generate enough transactions to ensure that the results are not skewed by a small sample. If you are only processing a small number of transactions, then you can run multiple simulations with different sequences to increase your sampling size.
	Per activity Specifies whether the set of numbers used by the random number generator is different for each activity. If all activities use the same random number generator, the randomness of each number is affected by other numbers that have already been generated. In other words, if the same numbers are used, one global change in the process affects other parts of the process. A different set of numbers for each activity (which is the default) allows numbers to be independently random. Either method allows for exact comparisons across simulations.


Run Setup dialog box

Run Setup dialog box - Simulation Time tab

Run Setup dialog box - Snapshots tab

Taking Snapshots During a Simulation


To set the run initialization options (active limit and sequence)

To set the simulation time

To snapshot model data


To set the run initialization options (active limit and sequence)

1	   On the Model toolbar, click the Run Setup tool.

or

On the Model menu, click Run Setup.

2	On the Run Setup dialog box, click the Initialization/Report tab.

3	Enter the run initialization options (for example, the active limit and the sequence).

4	Click another tab and enter additional data, or Click OK.


Taking Snapshots During a Simulation

A snapshot is a defined time when data accumulation occurs. By default, data is captured in the report at the end of simulation. Using snapshots enables you to capture data at other points during simulation.


Getting Started With Simulation

Setting Up a Simulation Run

Run Setup dialog box

Run Setup dialog box - Snapshots tab


To snapshot model data


Run Setup dialog box - Snapshots tab

Element	Description
Specific Time	A snapshot is taken at a set time. To add a snapshot, click Add and enter the time that you want the snapshot to take place and the unit of time. Note that there is some file overhead associated with each snapshot because a large amount of data is saved.
Scheduled Event	A snapshot is taken when the event occurs. You choose the event from the scrolling list.


Taking Snapshots During a Simulation

Getting Started With Simulation

Setting Up a Simulation Run


To snapshot model data


To snapshot model data

1	   On the Model toolbar, click the Run Setup tool.

2	In the Run Setup dialog box, choose the Snapshots tab.

3	Add, modify, or delete a snapshot interval.


Taking Snapshots During a Simulation

Run Setup dialog box - Snapshots tab

Setting Up a Simulation Run


Using Generators

A generator introduces transactions into the process at the first activity or at other entry points. It enables you to set a rate at which transactions enter the process. You can think of the generator as the driving force behind the process. For example, each generated transaction can represent a customer submitting an order or a new product being developed. Depending on the type of generator you choose, the transactions enter one at a time, in multiples, or whenever a resource is available.


Running a Simulation

Define Generators dialog box


To define a generator

To define the generators - Now Try This

To define the resources - Now Try This

To run the simulation - Now Try This


To define a generator

1	On the Model toolbar, click the Generators tool.

or

On the Model menu, click Generators.

The Define Generators dialog box appears.

•	For Existing Generators, click to select the generator name.

•	To create a new generator, click Add.

•	To delete a generator, select it and click Delete.


Using Generators

Define Generators dialog box


Define Generators dialog box

Element	Description
Start point	Choose the process name and the name of the starting point. A start point corresponds to an activity that labels a start point.
Generator type	Completion. The generator introduces a transaction into the process, and then introduces another transaction only after the previous one has completed its journey through the process. You set a count for the total number of consecutive transactions to be generated. A completion generator is useful for modeling how long a process takes, such as a product development cycle. There is seldom any resource contention between transactions in a completion generator model because one transaction always finishes before the next transaction starts. (One exception is, of course, if an activity splits a transaction and the family members compete for resources among themselves.)
	Demand. This generator sends a transaction to a start point every time a worker is available in the department containing the start point.  You can use a demand generator to find out such things as maximum throughput of a process (for example, the production capacity of a manufacturing line). Note The active limit sets the maximum number of transactions active in the process at any time. This places a limit on the generator.
	Interarrival. This generator issues transactions at a defined rate. You set the count and interarrival time. You can use this generator to model regular processes such as an order entry system where transactions occur on a regular basis.
Active	Choose if the generator is generating any transactions. By default, a process has an active generator. An active generator works during simulation. The most common reason for deactivating a generator is for a subprocess. A subprocess typically gets transactions from other processes and not from a generator.
Active period to generate transactions	By default, the active period is the same as when the simulation starts and ends. You can set a start time if you want elapsed time to occur between the point when the simulation begins and the generator starts. Likewise, you can specify an end time when the generator stops issuing transactions.
Schedule of active period	Choose the schedule for the generator. A generator issues transactions only during active time in the schedule.
Count (Completion generator only)	Set the total number of transactions introduced during the simulation.
Initial and subsequent count (Interarrival generator only)	Set the number of transactions introduced at the generator start time and the number issued after the starting time, at subsequent points when the generator is about to generate a new transaction.
Interarrival time (Interarrival generator only)	Choose how often transactions are introduced. Constant. Set a value and choose a unit of time. For example, a transaction is generated in the process every 2 hours. Distributed. Set the distribution range, function, and unit of time. For example, a transaction is generated in a normal distribution between every 5 and 25 minutes.  Expression. Set the expression. Its value determines how often a transaction is generated.
Attribute settings	This adds an “Initial Attribute Settings” area to the dialog box. These values are set for all newly generated transactions. You can initialize only transaction attributes in the generator.
Use this dialog box to add, modify, and delete generators.


Using Generators


To define a generator

To define the generators - Now Try This

To define the resources - Now Try This

To run the simulation - Now Try This


Using Resources

The resource list describes the number of workers and other resources available to the model.


Running a Simulation

Properties dialog box

Add New Resource dialog box

Resource Pools dialog box

About Resource Costs

Define Days dialog box

Define Hours dialog box

Edit Composite Schedule dialog box

Define Event dialog box


To define resources

To define resource pools

To create shared or unshared resource pools


To define resources

1	   On the Model toolbar, click the Resource tool.

or

On the Model menu, click Resources.

The Define Resources dialog box appears.

Under “Existing Resources,” the Worker resource is automatically defined for all models. This resource is automatically assigned a Labor resource type.

•	To add a resource, click Add.

In the Add New Resource dialog box, type a new name under Resource Name and choose a Resource Type.

•	To modify a resource, select its name from the Existing Resources list and click Modify.


Add New Resource dialog box

Using Resources

To define resource pools

To create shared or unshared resource pools


Add New Resource dialog box

Use this dialog box to add or modify resources.

Element	Description
Resource type	You can use the resource type to create categories of resources. These are used to organize report results. For example, you can view statistics that are sorted by labor, equipment, or other. Labor. This category typically describes human activity, such as people or positions that perform specific jobs. Equipment. This category describes physical resources such as machines, computers, or other equipment used in an operation.  Other. This category is used for all other types of resources.
Resource count	This assigns the quantity of resources available.
Schedule	The schedule determines the active times for the resource. When a resource is in schedule, activities can use it to process transactions. When the resource is not in schedule, the transactions wait.


Using Resources

About Resource Costs

Define Days dialog box

Define Hours dialog box

Edit Composite Schedule dialog box

Define Event dialog box


To define resources

To define resource pools

To create shared or unshared resource pools


About Resource Costs

Activities can accumulate costs during simulation to provide data about different expenses. You set the costs to accumulate in two different places.

•	A cost can be part of an activity base that includes fixed and value cost. A cost can be set as a result of resources used. The resource cost for an activity is the combination of its resources’ hourly rate, per use cost, and overtime hourly rate.

Different units of time are converted automatically; for example, a rate can be in hours while the duration is days.

•	Hourly Rate. The total hourly rate is calculated using the resource busy time. Per Use. This is a cost that accumulates each time the resource is used. For example, a duplicating machine accrues $.05 for every copy it makes.

•	Hourly Rate (Overtime). The overtime rate is calculated when a resource enters overtime. Whether a resource uses overtime depends on the resource behavior, the activity behavior, and the resource’s schedule.

•	Maximum Hours Per Day (Overtime). This sets the maximum overtime hours allowed for the resource on this activity. For example, a machine can run only two hours over its regular schedule.

For example, workers are responsible for manufacturing plastic disks. The workers have a standard schedule, and are paid $12.00 an hour, $18 overtime, and are authorized to work up to one hour overtime a day. The workers use a plastic extruding machine that is always available. The machine costs $100 an hour to run, plus there is a per use cost of $75. For example, for two hours, assume one hour of regular time and one hour of overtime. One worker uses the machine. For the first hour, $12 of the worker’s hourly rate is accumulated, plus $100 for the machine’s hour and $75 per use. For the second hour, $18 of the worker’s overtime rate is accumulated, plus another $100 for the machine’s hour. The total for the two hours is $305.


Using Resources

Using Schedules


To set up a simulation


Using Resource Pools

A pool is a group of identical resources. The resources in a pool are allocated and queued independently from other resources in other pools. You set the order that multiple pools are drawn from and the sequence for transactions to enter the queue. Each pool has its own allocation of resources.

iGrafx Process creates one pool for each department, even if the pool has only one worker. All other types of resources are combined into shared pools.


Using Resources

Add New Resource dialog box

About Resource Costs

Define Days dialog box

Define Hours dialog box

Edit Composite Schedule dialog box

Define Event dialog box

Using Schedules


To define resource pools

To define resources

To create shared or unshared resource pools


To define resource pools

1	In the Define Resources dialog box, click Advanced.

The resources are arranged by pool.

2	(Optional) For Resources, click to select a pool.

Newly created pools are appended after the selected pool.

3	Click Add Pool.

A new pool is created. The pool name is dimmed if there are no departments assigned to it. The pool name is a series set by the system, for example, Pool-B, Pool-C, and so on.

The report area displays the pool information. For example, Dept. 1 uses Pool-A exclusively and Dept. 2 uses Pool-B exclusively. Pool-C has a single worker but is not assigned to any department.

4	When more than one process is open, you can share the resource pools between processes.

To separate the pools by process, select the By Process check box.

To share the pools between processes, clear the By Process check box.


Using Resource Pools

Shared and Unshared Pools

Add New Resource dialog box

Resource Pools dialog box

About Resource Costs

Define Days dialog box

Define Hours dialog box

Edit Composite Schedule dialog box

Define Event dialog box

To define resources

To create shared or unshared resource pools


Shared and Unshared Pools

A pool can be unshared or shared. In an unshared pool, resources are allocated to one department. In a shared pool, multiple departments and processes draw from the same pool when they acquire a resource. You can view a diagram of shared pool allocations in the Scenario window under Resources.


Add New Resource dialog box

Resource Pools dialog box

About Resource Costs

Define Days dialog box

Define Hours dialog box

Edit Composite Schedule dialog box

Define Event dialog box


To create shared or unshared resource pools

To define resource pools

To define resources


To create shared or unshared resource pools

1	In the Define Resources dialog box, click Advanced.

The data in the dialog box is updated.

2	For Department, double-click the department name for which you are selecting one or more pools.

or

Click to select the department name and click Modify Pool.

The dialog box appears with the resource, department, and process data.


Resource Pools dialog box

Add New Resource dialog box

Resource Pools dialog box

About Resource Costs

Define Days dialog box

Define Hours dialog box

Edit Composite Schedule dialog box

Define Event dialog box

To create shared or unshared resource pools

To define resource pools

To define resources


Resource Pools dialog box

Use this dialog box to define resource pools.

Element	Description
Selected pools	Select the pools for the department. Selected pools are added to the department; pools that are not selected are removed. For example, Pool-A is selected and Pool-B and Pool-C are not.
Search Order	Use the up and down arrows and the First and Last buttons to list the pools in the order you want them searched from top to bottom.
Queuing method	Choose the order in which transactions wait before their resource requests are processed. First In, First Out. Transactions queue in the order that they arrive. First In, Last Out. Transactions queue in the reverse order. Min of Attribute. Choose the transaction attribute that you want to queue by its minimum value. Max of Attribute. Choose the transaction attribute that you want to queue by its maximum value.


Add New Resource dialog box

Resource Pools dialog box

About Resource Costs

Define Days dialog box

Define Hours dialog box

Edit Composite Schedule dialog box

Define Event dialog box


To create shared or unshared resource pools

To define resource pools

To define resources


Tracing the Model While Running the Simulation

You can start, stop, or run a trace simulation by pointing to Run on the Model menu and clicking Check, Start, Stop, Pause, or Trace. You can also click the Start, Stop, Pause, and Trace tools on the Model toolbar.


Setting Up a Simulation Run

Using Generators

Using Resources

Tracing the Model While Running the Simulation

Using Schedules

Opening Multiple Scenarios

Using the Scenario Window

About the Model Toolbar

Describing the iGrafx Process Simulation Methodology


To check the model

To start a trace

To start or stop a simulation

To set up a simulation


To check the model

On the Model menu, point to Run, and then click Check.

Errors in the Model data are displayed on the Model tab of the Output window.


To start a trace

On the Model menu, point to Run, and then click Trace.

The trace window appears and the simulation starts. If a process error or warning occurs, a message window appears. The trace of the simulation runs to completion so you generally do not need to manually stop it.


To start and stop the simulation while in trace mode

To start or stop a simulation

To set up a simulation

Tracing the Model While Running the Simulation


To start or stop a simulation

On the Model menu, point to Run, and then click Start or Stop.

•	On Model menu, point to Run, and then click Start.

This begins the simulation. If a process error or warning occurs, a message window appears. The simulation runs to completion so you generally do not need to manually stop it.

•	On Model menu, point to Run, and then click Stop.

You can stop a simulation at any point while it is running. Any warnings or error messages appear in the message window.

Note
If you double-click an error in the message window, the source of the error is displayed.


Using Schedules

When you create the simulation data for a scenario, you can set the simulation to begin Monday morning at 8:00 am (which is the default) or you can designate the exact days and hours during which the simulation takes place. The specification is given as a schedule. A schedule is a list of active hours and days. You can use schedules to set active times for the following:

•	Resources

A resource’s schedule determines the times that the resource is available. You set the schedule when you define a resource. For example, at a management consultant firm, the consultants are available Monday through Friday from 8:00 am to 5:00 pm. If a client has a consulting question during the evening, the question must wait until the morning when the consultants are back at work. Schedules can be applied directly to activities. However, they are more simply applied to the resources used by the activities.

•	Activities

An activity’s schedule determines the times that the activity can process transactions. You set the schedule when you define the activity. For example, at a testing laboratory, the assistants always have a department meeting on the first Tuesday of the month. During this meeting time, no testing takes place.

•	Generators

The schedule for a generator determines the active period during which the generator can issue transactions. You set a generator’s schedule when you define the generator. For example, at a hoist and crane-manufacturing warehouse, an order for a new crane comes in only during normal working hours. However, after an order is received, the workers work on building the crane during the night.

•	Events (Batch by time)

An activity can process transactions at the point when a schedule event happens. You set a batching event when you define the activity’s inputs. For example, a bank has an automatic cash machine in which customers can make deposits during the evening hours when the bank is closed. The bank processes the deposits at 9:00 am every morning.

You can choose from a large set of schedules that are provided with iGrafx Process or you define your own. A schedule consists of lists of the active days and hours.


Running a Simulation

Defining Schedules

Setting Up a Simulation Run

Using Generators

Tracing the Model While Running the Simulation

Using Schedules

Opening Multiple Scenarios

Using the Scenario Window

About the Model Toolbar

Describing the iGrafx Process Simulation Methodology


To define or edit a schedule

To add or edit a definition for days within a schedule

To add or edit a definition for hours within a schedule

To create a composite schedule

To define an event schedule


About Schedules and Overtime

When you define a resource, you assign it a schedule. The schedule describes the time the resource is either available for work or out of service. Any time outside the schedule is considered to be inactive time and is a potential span for overtime. For example, a resource can be assigned to work during the standard shift. Any time before 8:00 am and after 5:00 pm is potentially overtime.

A resource is assigned an overtime rate and a maximum amount of overtime that it can work. For example, if a resource has a maximum overtime of zero, the resource never works outside its schedule. If the maximum overtime is two, the resource is eligible to work two hours a day during its inactive hours.


Defining Schedules

When an activity or resource is described as being in schedule, it means that the current time is an active period. Likewise, when an activity or resource is out of schedule, it is not an active period. For example, if you choose the Always schedule on a generator, the generator can issue transactions at any time. If you choose the Swing schedule on a generator, the generator can issue transactions only during the hours of 4:30 pm to 12:30 am.


Using Schedules

Defining Days

Defining Hours

Defining Schedule Types

Defining Composite Schedules

Defining Event Schedules


To define or edit a schedule

To add or edit a definition for days within a schedule

To add or edit a definition for hours within a schedule

To create a composite schedule

To define an event schedule


Defining Schedule Types

You can use the following schedule types to define resource or activity schedules:

•	Always—All hours and all days.

•	Standard—Standard_Days and Standard_Hours.

•	Swing—Standard_Days and Swing_Hours.

•	Night—Standard_Days and Night_Hours.

•	Standard_With_Holidays—Standard_Days and Standard_Hours, with the exception of US_Holiday_Days.

•	Swing_with_Holidays—Standard_Days and Swing_Hours, with the exception of US_Holiday_Days.

•	Night_with_Holidays—Standard_Days and Night_Hours, with the exception of US_Holiday_Days.

•	Two_Shifts—Standard_Days, with both Standard_Hours and Swing_Hours, with the exception of US_Holiday_Days.

•	Three_Shifts—Standard_Days, with Standard_Hours, Swing_Hours, and Night_Hours, with the exception of US_Holiday_Days.

•	US_Holidays—Holiday_Days and All_Hours.


To define or edit a schedule

1	On the Model toolbar, click the Schedule tool.

or

On the Model menu, click Schedule.

The Define Schedule dialog box appears.

•	To edit an existing schedule, select it.

•	To define a new schedule, click to select a schedule that is similar to the one you will be creating, and click Add. This creates a copy of the schedule and displays the Add New Schedule dialog box. You enter a new name (no spaces) and click OK.

The name is selected from the list of existing schedules and a visual representation of the calendar is displayed in the dialog box. The colors of the days indicate their status.

•	Green—Days that are displayed in green represent active time.

•	Gray—Days that are displayed in gray are not part of the schedule and are therefore marked inactive.

•	Red (only in composite schedules)—Days that are displayed in red are specifically marked inactive by another schedule.

•	You can click a day to see the exact active hours. For example, if you click January 9 in the Standard_with_Holidays schedule, the standard hours appear.

2	From the Time Line, choose the days and hours to be included as active in the schedule.

3	To add inactive time, create a composite schedule.

Note
Any changes that you make to a schedule apply only to the active process diagram. To copy the schedule to other process diagrams or templates, use the Scenario window. See To copy and paste scenario data on page 542.


Define Days dialog box

Defining Days

Defining Hours

Defining Schedule Types

Defining Composite Schedules

To define or edit a schedule

To add or edit a definition for days within a schedule

To add or edit a definition for hours within a schedule

To create a composite schedule

To define an event schedule


Defining Days

You can use the following definitions to define a day in resource or activity schedules:

•	Standard—Monday through Friday.

•	Weekend_Days—Saturday and Sunday.

•	Holiday_Days—New Year’s Day, Memorial Day, July Fourth, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, and Christmas Day.

•	Mondays—Every Monday.

•	Tuesdays—Every Tuesday.

•	Wednesdays—Every Wednesday.

•	Thursdays—Every Thursday.

•	Fridays—Every Friday.

•	Saturdays—Every Saturday.

•	Sundays—Every Sunday.

•	First_Day_of_Month—The first day of every month.

•	Last_Day_of_Month—The last day of every month.


To add or edit a definition for days within a schedule

1	On the Model toolbar, click the Schedules tool.

or

On the Model menu, click Schedule.

The Define Schedule dialog box appears.

2	Under Time Line, next to Days, click Define.

The Define Days dialog box appears. Days that have not been assigned appear white.

Note
If you change the definition for Standard_Days (or any other day or hour schedules), it changes all schedules in the active process diagram that contain that day schedule.


Define Days dialog box

Defining Schedules

To define or edit a schedule

To add or edit a definition for days within a schedule

To add or edit a definition for hours within a schedule

To create a composite schedule

To define an event schedule


Define Days dialog box

Use this dialog box to select and edit an existing list, or click Add to create a list.

•	Day Type—Choose which days are to be included. The choices are Selected Days, First Work Day, or Last Work Day.

For Selected Days, click the days in the week or calendar to choose them.

•	Week Type—Choose among Weekly, Every N Weeks, or Calendar.

At this point, the days simply form a list. Later, when the list is included in a composite schedule, you can specify whether the list is active or inactive. For example, Holiday_Days is a list of standard holidays. When included in a composite schedule, it is specified as inactive (for example, no one works during holidays).


Defining Hours

The following definitions are used to define the hours in resource or activity schedules:

•	Standard_Hours—The time periods are 8:00 am to 12:00 pm, 12:00 pm to 1:00 pm (out of service), and 1:00 pm to 5:00 pm.

•	Swing_Hours—The time periods are 4:00 pm to 8:00 pm, 8:00 pm to 9:00 pm (out of service), 9:00 pm to 12:00 am, and 12:00 am to 1:00 am.

•	Night_Hours—The time periods are 12:00 am to 4:00 am, 4:00 am to 5:00 am (out of service), and 5:00 am to 9:00 am.


To add or edit a definition for hours within a schedule

1	   On the Model toolbar, click the Schedules tool.

or

On the Model menu, click Schedule.

The Define Schedule dialog box appears.

2	Under Time Line, next to Hours, click Define.

The Define Hours dialog box appears.

You can select an existing list to edit it, or you can click Add to create a new list.


Defining Schedules

Using Schedules

To define or edit a schedule

To add or edit a definition for days within a schedule

To add or edit a definition for hours within a schedule

To create a composite schedule

To define an event schedule


Define Hours dialog box

Element	Description
Out of Service Span	Defines the currently selected time span as out of service. Out of service time is not eligible for overtime and is maintained as a separate statistic in the report results.
Paid	Defines the currently selected time span as paid (the default). An unpaid time span can be used for such things as coffee breaks.


Defining Composite Schedules

A composite schedule is a combination of existing schedules and lists of days and hours (some of which may be inactive) that creates a new schedule. You can edit an existing schedule or combine schedules to create a composite schedule.

Creating a composite schedule can save you time because it takes advantage of predefined components such as holidays. For example, a Swing_With_Holidays schedule is a composite schedule. It consists of the Swing schedule with US_Holidays schedule excluded. When a composite schedule is created, the days and hours form a mask or an overlay on the schedule, depending on whether the hours and days are active or inactive.

To define a new schedule, create a new schedule, or pick and choose among existing schedules, and then add different active or inactive hours to make a new schedule.


Defining Schedules

Using Schedules


To create a composite schedule

1	On the Model toolbar, click the Schedule tool.

or

On the Model menu, click Schedule.

2	In the Define Schedule dialog box, under Time Line, click Composite.

The Edit Composite Schedule dialog box appears.


Defining Days

Defining Hours

Defining Schedule Types

Defining Composite Schedules

To define or edit a schedule

To add or edit a definition for days within a schedule

To add or edit a definition for hours within a schedule

To create a composite schedule

To define an event schedule


Edit Composite Schedule dialog box

A composite schedule can consist of more than one schedule and more than one list of days and hours. You can select an existing composite and edit it, or click Insert Days/Hours or Insert Schedule to create a new composite.

•	Choose a Days definition (or create a new one by clicking Define).

•	Choose an Hours definition (or create a new one).

•	Specify whether the days and hours are inactive time (that is, nothing happens during this time).

•	To insert another schedule, click Insert Schedule.

This displays a list of available schedules to choose from (or you can create a new one). You can also specify whether the schedule is active or not.

For example, in the following illustration, Consultant_Days consists of two schedules, Standard and Swing, both of which are active.


Defining Schedules

Using Schedules


Defining Event Schedules

An event schedule is a list of specific points in time, as compared to a regular schedule that includes time spans. You use an event schedule when you want to designate an event that happens at a specific time, for example, a batch process.


Defining Hours for Events

Defining Days for Events

Defining Schedules

Using Schedules


Defining Hours for Events

You can set the following parameters to define event hours:

•	Morning. 8:00 am.

•	Afternoon. 1:00 pm.

•	End_of_Day. 5:00 pm.


Defining Event Schedules

Defining Schedules for Events

Defining Days for Events

Defining Schedules

Using Schedules


Defining Schedules for Events

You can set the following parameters to define event schedules:

•	Every_Morning—An event happens every morning.

•	Every_Afternoon—An event happens every afternoon.

•	Every_End_of_Day—An event happens every End_of_Day.

•	Weekly—An event happens Monday morning of every week.

•	First_of_Month—An event happens on the first morning of every month.

•	Last_of_Month—An event happens on the last morning of every month.


Defining Event Schedules

Defining Hours for Events

Defining Days for Events

Defining Schedules

Using Schedules


Defining Days for Events

Event days are defined the same as days.


Defining Days

Defining Event Schedules

Defining Schedules for Events

Defining Schedules

Using Schedules


To define an event schedule

1	On the Model toolbar, click the Event tool.

or

On the Model menu, click Event.

The Define Event dialog box appears. A list of existing events is displayed.

2	To see the definition for an existing event, click to select it.

The dialog box is updated to show the weekly or monthly calendar that displays the event. You can view the hours of the event by clicking a specific day in the calendar.

You can select an existing list to edit it, or click Add to create a new event.


Defining Schedule Types

Defining Composite Schedules

To define or edit a schedule

To add or edit a definition for days within a schedule

To add or edit a definition for hours within a schedule

To create a composite schedule

To define an event schedule


Define Event dialog box

Use this dialog box to define events. Events are usually used when specifying batch inputs by time.

•	Days—Select from the list, or click Define to create one.

•	Hours—Select from the list, or click Define to create one.


Defining Schedules

Defining Composite Schedules

Defining Schedule Types

Defining Days

Defining Hours


To define or edit a schedule

To add or edit a definition for days within a schedule

To add or edit a definition for hours within a schedule

To create a composite schedule

To define an event schedule


Opening Multiple Scenarios

You can create multiple scenarios to compare models. A model consists of one or more process diagrams, reports, and scenario data. If you find that you make many changes to the scenario data between simulations, you can use multiple scenarios to save time . You can create two or more versions of the scenario data to compare the results of such things as changing the number of transactions generated or the value of an attribute.

The run setup, generators, resources, schedules, initializations, function definitions, and monitoring information apply only to a single scenario. You must supply this information for each scenario (or use the defaults). Process diagrams form the base for all of the scenarios. The only differences are the scenario data; for example, the function definitions or the generators.


Running a Simulation

Using the Scenario Window

Setting Up a Simulation Run

Using Generators

Using Resources

Tracing the Model While Running the Simulation

Using Schedules


To open a new scenario

To copy scenario data

To paste scenario data

To delete or rename a scenario

To open the scenario window or view a scenario

To copy and paste scenario data

To arrange windows

To reopen a window

To load example data for running a simulation - Now Try This


To open a new scenario

1	On the File menu, click Components.

2	In the Components dialog box, click New, and then click Scenario.

3	To close the Components dialog box, click Close.


Using the Scenario Window

Setting Up a Simulation Run

Using Generators

Using Resources

Tracing the Model While Running the Simulation

Using Schedules

To copy scenario data

To paste scenario data

To delete or rename a scenario

To open the scenario window or view a scenario

To copy and paste scenario data

To arrange windows

To reopen a window

To load example data for running a simulation - Now Try This


To copy scenario data

When you open a new scenario, it contains the system defaults. If you have set up a scenario and want to use it as the basis for a new scenario, you can use the Copy and Paste buttons.

1	On the File menu, click Components.

2	In the Components dialog box, select the name of the scenario that you want to copy.

3	Click Copy.


Using the Scenario Window

Setting Up a Simulation Run

Using Generators

Using Resources

Tracing the Model While Running the Simulation

Using Schedules

To open a new scenario

To paste scenario data

To delete or rename a scenario

To open the scenario window or view a scenario

To copy and paste scenario data

To arrange windows

To reopen a window

To load example data for running a simulation - Now Try This


To paste scenario data

After you copy a scenario to the clipboard, you can paste it to create a new scenario.

1	In the Scenarios dialog box, click Paste.

This pastes a copy of the scenario information on the clipboard to create a new scenario. The new scenario is the last number in the sequence (for example, Scenario4 if there were previously three scenarios).

The Paste button appears only if a scenario has been copied to the clipboard. You can also copy and paste scenarios between files.

2	Double-click the new scenario name.

This opens the copied scenario.


Using the Scenario Window

Setting Up a Simulation Run

Using Generators

Using Resources

Tracing the Model While Running the Simulation

Using Schedules

To open a new scenario

To copy scenario data

To delete or rename a scenario

To open the scenario window or view a scenario

To copy and paste scenario data

To arrange windows

To reopen a window

To load example data for running a simulation - Now Try This


To delete or rename a scenario

1	On the File menu, click Components.

2	Select the scenario that you want to delete or rename.

•	To delete, click Delete.

•	To rename, click Rename. The Rename dialog box appears. The name can contain as many as 64 alphanumeric characters, including underscore and space characters.


Using the Scenario Window

Setting Up a Simulation Run

Using Generators

Using Resources

Tracing the Model While Running the Simulation

Using Schedules

To open a new scenario

To copy scenario data

To paste scenario data

To open the scenario window or view a scenario

To copy and paste scenario data

To arrange windows

To reopen a window

To load example data for running a simulation - Now Try This


Using the Scenario Window

The scenario window lists all of the scenario data that you can set with the tools using the Model menu or the Model toolbar (Run Setup, Generators, Resources, and so forth).

Use the scenario window to set global aspects of simulation. The scenario window is in outline form. Click the Plus icon to expand or the Minus icon to collapse a topic. After you expand a topic, you can double-click any item to display the dialog box to change its value. After you set global data, on the Model menu, point to Run, and then click Start to begin the simulation.


Running a Simulation

About the Generator Timeline

Opening Multiple Scenarios

Setting Up a Simulation Run

Using Generators

Using Resources

Tracing the Model While Running the Simulation

Using Schedules


To open a new scenario

To copy scenario data

To paste scenario data

To delete or rename a scenario

To open the scenario window or view a scenario

To copy and paste scenario data

To arrange windows

To reopen a window

To load example data for running a simulation - Now Try This


To open the scenario window or view a scenario

1	On the Model toolbar, click the Scenarios tool.

or

On the File menu, click Components.

The Components dialog box appears with a list of available scenario names.

2	Double-click the name of the scenario you want to open, typically Scenario1.

or

Select the name and click View.

The Scenario window opens. You can click the outline buttons to expand and contract them. Some categories are unavailable because their members are not used in any activities.

Note
After you have a window open, use the Windows menu to view it.

You can delete unused data whenever it is no longer needed. For example, if you created a function that is no longer used, its definition is kept in the scenario window for later use but it is dimmed. You can delete it by selecting the definition and pressing Delete.


About the Generator Timeline

Opening Multiple Scenarios

Setting Up a Simulation Run

Using Generators

Using Resources

Tracing the Model While Running the Simulation

Using Schedules

To copy and paste scenario data

To arrange windows

To reopen a window

To load example data for running a simulation - Now Try This


To copy and paste scenario data

To copy scenario data, for example, a generator definition or schedule, into another process diagram, follow these steps.

1	In the Scenario window, click to expand the topic so that you can view the data that you want to copy.

2	Click to select the data.

For example, the Standard_Hours schedule is selected.

3	On the Edit menu, click Copy.

4	Open the Scenario window in another process diagram.

5	Click to expand this topic to view the data that matches what you have copied to the clipboard.

6	On the Edit menu, click Paste.


About the Generator Timeline

Opening Multiple Scenarios

Setting Up a Simulation Run

Using Generators

Using Resources

Tracing the Model While Running the Simulation

Using Schedules

To open a new scenario

To copy scenario data

To paste scenario data

To delete or rename a scenario

To open the scenario window or view a scenario

To copy and paste scenario data

To arrange windows

To reopen a window

To load example data for running a simulation - Now Try This


About the Generator Timeline

The timeline is a visual method for checking the simulation time. It appears after you have defined a custom starting or ending time. The top half of the timeline shows units of simulated time. A red line marks the actual length of the simulation as set in the control data. The bottom half of the timeline indicates how long the generator is going to issue transactions.


To arrange windows

After you open any of the iGrafx Process windows, you can use the Window menu to arrange the windows on the screen or to view them one at a time. The Window menu contains standard Windows items.


To reopen a window

If you close a process, scenario, or report window, you can open it by clicking Components on the File menu, selecting a process, scenario, or report, and then clicking View.


Running a Simulation - Now Try This

Ticket Service provides tickets to concerts, plays, and sporting events. When customers arrive at the ticket sales counter, they are asked for the event and number of tickets. If tickets are available, the worker chooses the seats and processes the payment. In this exercise, your task is to set the simulation data and run a simulation.


Running a Simulation

Setting Up a Simulation Run

Using Generators

Using Resources

Tracing the Model While Running the Simulation

Using Schedules

About the Generator Timeline

Opening Multiple Scenarios

Using the Scenario Window


To load example data for running a simulation - Now Try This

To create a calendar - Now Try This

To define the run setup - Now Try This

To define the generators - Now Try This

To define the resources - Now Try This

To run the simulation - Now Try This


To load example data for running a simulation - Now Try This

1	On the File menu, click Close, and close any open diagrams.

2	On the File menu, click Open.

3	Select iGrafx\Pro\8.0\Exercise\Ex6.igx, and click Open.

The process diagram appears.


Running a Simulation - Now Try This


To create a calendar - Now Try This

For the TicketService example, you will create a new schedule that adds new Company holidays to the existing holiday schedule.

1	On the Model toolbar, click the Schedule tool.

or

On the Model menu, click Schedules.

The Define Schedule dialog box appears.

2	In the Existing Schedules list, click to select Holidays (or US_Holidays).

You might have to scroll to see it.

3	Click Add.

This makes a copy of the Holidays and displays the Add New Schedule dialog box.

4	Enter the name: Company_Holidays

5	Click OK to close the dialog box.

6	Under Time Line, for Days, make sure that Holiday_Days is displayed and click Define.

7	In the Define Days dialog box, click Add.

This makes a copy of Holiday_Days and displays the Add New Day dialog box.

8	Enter the name: Company_Days_Off

9	Click OK to close the dialog box.

10	Back in the Define Days dialog box, leave the Day Type set to Selected Days and Calendar.

11	In the calendar, go to the appropriate months, and click these days.

March 15, 1997 for Founder’s Day

July 30, 1997 for Annual Picnic

The days are displayed in green.

12	Click OK to close the Define Days dialog box.

13	Under Existing Schedules, select Standard_with_Holidays.

14	Under Time Line, click Edit Composite.

The Edit Composite Schedule dialog box appears.

15	In the Composite list, click to select US_Holidays.

16	For Available Schedules, choose Company_Holidays.

17	Click to specify inactive time.

18	Click OK to close both dialog boxes.


To define the run setup - Now Try This

1	On the Model toolbar, click the Run Setup tool.

or

On the Model menu, click Run Setup.

2	In the Run Setup dialog box, choose the Simulation Time tab.

3	For Simulation Time, choose Calendar.

4	For Default Schedule, choose Standard_with_Holidays.

This is the schedule that uses the Company holidays.

5	For Simulation Start, choose By Weekday.

6	For Simulation End, choose Custom.

7	Set the custom end time to 5 Days.

8	Set the Time Conversion to Standard.

9	Click OK to close the Run Setup dialog box.


To define the generators - Now Try This

1	   On the Model toolbar, click the Generators tool.

or

On the Model menu, click Generators.

2	In the Define Generators dialog box, check to make sure that “Generator 1” in Existing Generators is highlighted to indicate that it is selected.

3	For Generator Type, choose Interarrival.

4	For Interarrival Time, choose Distributed.

5	For Distribution Range, set the range to: Between 10 and 15 Minutes

6	Click OK to close the dialog box.


To define the resources - Now Try This

There are two workers in the Ticket Sales department. They are paid $10 an hour and are eligible for up to one-half hour overtime, at $15 an hour, if they have already started working on a ticket sale.

1	   On the Model toolbar, click the Resources tool.

or

On the Model menu, click Resources.

2	In the Define Resources dialog box, check to make sure that “Worker” in Existing Resources is highlighted to indicate that it is selected.

3	Increase the number of resources to 2.

4	Set the schedule to Default.

5	For Hourly Rate, enter: 10.00

6	For Overtime, enter: 15.00

7	For Max Hours Per Day, enter: .50

8	Click OK to close the Define Resources dialog box.


To run the simulation - Now Try This

After setting the schedule, run setup, generators, and resource information, it is time to run the simulation.

1	On the Model menu, point to Run, and then click Start.

This runs the simulation and makes the Report window active.

2	In the report window, look at the Time tab. The simulation ran for five days, which was set in Run Setup. Remember that this is 120 hours in calendar time.

190 transactions completed the process, with an average service time of 21.40 minutes.

(In the following report element, several statistics are omitted for space reasons.)

3	Look at the Cost tab.

In the fourth report element, the total resource cost is $825.33.

Note
In the following report element, several statistics are omitted.

4	This is the end of this exercise. If you want to save your file, do so now.


Using Trace Mode with Process Diagrams

Trace mode graphically traces a simulation (the flow of transactions through a process diagram). The shapes for each activity change color as transactions move through them. Trace mode lets you troubleshoot a model by simply watching the transactions in the trace window – you can see how the model is working and identify problem areas.

Trace Mode Features

The trace mode allows you to do the following:

•	Visually track how a process diagram is transacted

•	Use colors to display the state of an activity

•	Set pause points that let you run the simulation to a pause point and then you can examine the status of individual settings

•	View or set the value of transaction and global attributes during the simulation

•	Quickly identify problem areas in a process diagram

•	Track transaction paths

•	Quick what-if analysis by modifying attributes

•	Trace a simulation in normal (graphical) view

•	Trace a simulation in tabular view

Entering and Exiting Trace Mode

Enter and exit trace mode by selecting a process diagram, and then selecting the Trace command. Access the Trace command by doing the following:

•	On the Model menu, point to Run, and then click Trace

•	On the Model menu, click the Trace tool.

Tip

All diagrams in the file enter or exit trace mode when you click the trace tool.


Using the Trace Toolbar

Using the Global Attributes Window

Using Pause Points and the Pause Points Window


To display the trace toolbar

To set the viewing percentage

To enable trace mode

To exit trace mode

To pause and resume a simulation while in trace mode

To run a simulation until a pause point is encountered while in trace mode

To stop a simulation while in trace mode

To start and stop the simulation while in trace mode

To increase or decrease the simulation speed while in trace mode

To change the trace colors

To open and close the Attributes window

To review or modify global attribute values during a simulation

To insert a pause point

To use pause points to start and stop a simulation

To edit a pause point

To delete pause points


Using the Trace Toolbar

The following tools are located on the Trace toolbar and are used to control the trace of a simulation:

To start the simulation, click Start.

To step through the simulation, click Step.

To pause the simulation, click Pause.

To resume the simulation after pausing, click Start/Resume.

To run the simulation until a pause point is encountered, click Go To Pause.

To stop the simulation, click Stop.

To restart the simulation until the next Pause point is encountered, click Go To Pause.

To increase or decrease the simulation speed, move the slider.


To display the trace toolbar

To set the viewing percentage

To enable trace mode

To exit trace mode

To pause and resume a simulation while in trace mode

To run a simulation until a pause point is encountered while in trace mode

To stop a simulation while in trace mode

To start and stop the simulation while in trace mode

To increase or decrease the simulation speed while in trace mode

To change the trace colors


To enable trace mode

1	On the Window menu, select a process diagram.

or

On the Open menu, click Open, and select a process diagram.

2	On the Model menu, point to Run, and click Trace.

or

On the Model toolbar, click Trace.

Tip

If you have a process diagram in trace mode, you must exit trace mode before you can place another process diagram in trace mode.

The active window goes into trace mode.

Tip

Use the trace mode with a process diagram in normal or tabular view.


Trace Colors dialog box

Using the Trace Toolbar

Using the Trace Numbers

Using the Global Attributes Window

To display the trace toolbar

To set the viewing percentage

To enable trace mode

To exit trace mode

To pause and resume a simulation while in trace mode

To run a simulation until a pause point is encountered while in trace mode

To stop a simulation while in trace mode

To start and stop the simulation while in trace mode

To increase or decrease the simulation speed while in trace mode

To change the trace colors


To exit trace mode

Click Trace.


To pause and resume a simulation while in trace mode

1	Click Pause.

The simulation pauses.

2	Click Start/Resume.

The simulation resumes.


To run a simulation until a pause point is encountered while in trace mode

1	Select the shape containing the activity you would like to pause.

2	On the Control menu, click Set Pause Point to insert a condition that causes the simulation to pause.

3	To start or resume the simulation and watch the shapes change colors, click Start/Resume.

or

To start or resume the simualation until the next pause is encountered, click Go To Pause.

The simulation resumes at maximum speed. The shapes will not change color until the simulation pauses.


To stop a simulation while in trace mode

Click Stop.

The simulation stops. Trace mode remains active.


To display the trace toolbar

1	From the View menu, click Toolbars.

2	In the Toolbars dialog box, click the check box for Trace.


To pause and resume a simulation while in trace mode

To set the viewing percentage

To start and stop the simulation while in trace mode

To change the trace colors


To set the viewing percentage

1	Use the View combo box in the standard toolbar.

or

From the View menu, click Zoom.

2	In the Zoom dialog box, set the viewing percentage.

Note
If you select All and change the size of the process window while in trace mode, the program recalculates the percentage and continues to display the entire process diagram.

3	To use the entire window, click the Maximize icon.


To pause and resume a simulation while in trace mode

To start and stop the simulation while in trace mode

To change the trace colors


To start and stop the simulation while in trace mode

To start the simulation, click Start.

Tip

To keep the report window from displaying on top of the process diagram after the simulation has completed, click Minimize on the report window, and convert it into an icon.

To stop the simulation, click Stop.


To increase or decrease the simulation speed while in trace mode

To step through the simulation, click Step.

To pause the simulation, click Pause.

To resume the simulation after pausing, click Start/Resume.

ITo run the simulatation until a pause point is encountered, click Go To Pause.

To restart the simulation until the next Pause point is encountered, click Go To Pause.

To increase or decrease the simulation speed, move the slider.


To pause and resume a simulation while in trace mode

To set the viewing percentage

To change the trace colors


Setting Trace Colors

Trace colors are used to display the status of an activity during the simulation of a process diagram that is in trace mode. Select the Trace Colors command on the Control menu to modify the trace colors.


Trace Colors dialog box

Using the Global Attributes Window

Using Pause Points and the Pause Points Window


Trace Colors dialog box

During the simulation of a process diagram that is trace mode, the activities change color to indicate the state of each transaction.

Color	Description
Green	Transaction is moving after completing an activity.
Blue	Transaction is working. For example, the transaction is at an activity that has a work duration associated with it.
Red	Transaction is blocked, because it is waiting for a condition to change (other than resource availability).  For example, a transaction waits for a batching condition to be met or is blocked by a delay duration.
Yellow	Transaction is waiting for resources to become available.
Gray	Transaction is waiting because of a schedule that is inactive, for example, after 5:00 pm using the Standard schedule.  The schedule can apply to either a resource used by the activity or the activity itself.


Using the Trace Toolbar

Trace Colors dialog box

Using the Global Attributes Window

Using Pause Points and the Pause Points Window


To pause and resume a simulation while in trace mode

To start and stop the simulation while in trace mode

To change the trace colors

To open and close the Attributes window

To review or modify global attribute values during a simulation

To insert a pause point


To change the trace colors

1	On the Control menu, click Trace Colors.

2	On the Trace Colors dialog box, use the scrolling lists to choose the new colors.

3	Click OK.

Note
You can use the trace window to view more than one process.


To open and close the Attributes window

To review or modify global attribute values during a simulation

To insert a pause point


Using the Trace Numbers

During the simulation of a process diagram that is in trace mode, inside each shape trace numbers may appear. The trace numbers provide detailed information about the transaction status. The transaction status is indicated by the color of the shape during the trace. When more than one transactions accumulate for processing at any activity, the trace numbers display the total number of transactions at the activity and the number of transactions that are in the shown state. Only one trace color appears in an activity at any one moment.

For example, at the following activity, fifteen total transactions have accumulated, and five are being worked. The trace numbers 5/15 appear inside the shape.

Tip

You can also check the state of the other transactions. See To open and close the Attributes window.


Using the Trace Toolbar

Using the Global Attributes Window

Using Pause Points and the Pause Points Window


To pause and resume a simulation while in trace mode

To start and stop the simulation while in trace mode

To change the trace colors

To open and close the Attributes window

To review or modify global attribute values during a simulation

To insert a pause point


Using the Transactions Window

When you enable trace mode, the Transactions window appears. During a simulation, use this window to:

•	View transaction status and data while the simulation runs

•	View transaction attributes values

•	Modify transaction attributes values to validate the data in your process diagram

Reviewing and Modifying Transaction Attribute Data

The left side of the window sequentially numbers and displays the data for the transactions as they flow through the process diagram. Each transaction is on separate row. The column headings for the window include the names of the transaction attributes assigned to the transaction. To modify a transaction attribute, double-click on the cell you want to modify.

Tip

To display the transaction attributes column headings in the Transactions window, click the right mouse button in the window, and click Attributes on the shortcut menu.

Reviewing and Editing Resource Data

The right side of the transaction window displays resource information for each transaction. Modify these settings by double-clicking on the value that you want to modify.


Using the Trace Numbers

Using the Trace Toolbar

Using Pause Points and the Pause Points Window


To pause and resume a simulation while in trace mode

To start and stop the simulation while in trace mode

To change the trace colors

To open and close the Attributes window

To review or modify global attribute values during a simulation

To insert a pause point


To open and close the Transactions window

During a trace simulation, you can view transaction information in the Transactions window.

1	Click Trace.

2	On the View menu, click Transactions.


Using the Trace Numbers

Using the Trace Toolbar

Using Pause Points and the Pause Points Window


To pause and resume a simulation while in trace mode

To start and stop the simulation while in trace mode

To change the trace colors

To open and close the Attributes window

To review or modify global attribute values during a simulation

To insert a pause point


To review or modify transaction attributes in the Transactions window

During a trace simulation, you can view transaction information in the Transactions window.

1	Click Trace.

2	On the View menu, click Transactions.

The Transactions window appears.

3	Click the right mouse button in the Transactions window, and click Attributes on the shortcut menu.

The column headings for the attribute values appear in the Transactions window.

4	Start the simulation.

Transactions, their attributes, and resource data appears in the Transactions window.

5	Click Pause.

6	To modify the transaction attribute associated with a transaction, double-click the value in the appropriate column in the Transactions window.

Note
Changing the duration transaction attribute does not affect the current activity.

7	Click stop to end the simulation.

or

Click Resume/Start to restart the simulation, and repeat steps 4 – 6.


Using the Trace Toolbar

Using the Global Attributes Window

Using Pause Points and the Pause Points Window


To pause and resume a simulation while in trace mode

To start and stop the simulation while in trace mode

To change the trace colors

To open and close the Attributes window

To review or modify global attribute values during a simulation

To insert a pause point


Using the Global Attributes Window

While in trace mode, you can display this window by selecting Attributes on the Control menu. During a simulation, use this window to:

•	View global transaction attribute data while the simulation runs

•	Modify global transaction attributes values to validate the data in your process diagram


Using the Trace Numbers

Using the Trace Toolbar

Using Pause Points and the Pause Points Window


To pause and resume a simulation while in trace mode

To start and stop the simulation while in trace mode

To change the trace colors

To open and close the Attributes window

To review or modify global attribute values during a simulation

To insert a pause point


To open and close the Attributes window

During a trace simulation, you can view the settings for global attributes global attributes window.

1	Click Trace.

2	On the View menu, click Attributes.


To review or modify global attribute values during a simulation


To review or modify global attribute values during a simulation

1	Click Trace.

2	On the View menu, click Attributes.

3	The Attributes windows appears.

4	Start the simulation.

The global attributes (scenario, process, and department attributes) settings appear in the Attributes window during this simulation.

5	Click Pause.

6	To modify the global attribute associated with a transaction, double-click the value in the appropriate column in the Attributes window.

7	Click stop to end the simulation.

or

Click Resume/Start to restart the simulation, and repeat steps 4 – 6.

8	To remove the attribute window, on the View menu, click Attributes.


To open and close the Attributes window

To insert a pause point


Using Pause Points and the Pause Points Window

A pause point is a breaking position that you can place in a trace simulation. When you run a trace, transactions stop at any pause points. You can use this break to examine attributes or values associated with the transaction.


Using the Trace Numbers

Using the Trace Toolbar

Using the Global Attributes Window


To insert a pause point

To pause and resume a simulation while in trace mode

To start and stop the simulation while in trace mode

To change the trace colors

To open and close the Attributes window

To review or modify global attribute values during a simulation


To insert a pause point

1	In the trace window, highlight the activity for the pause point.

2	On the Control menu, click Set Pause Point, and the Set Pause Point dialog box appears.

To always pause the simulation when a transaction reaches this point, click Always.

To conditionally pause the simulation based on an expression evaluating to true, click Expression True.

The expression builder appears. Insert an expression. To pause the simulation after a specified count of transactions reaches this point, click After Count.

A scrolling counter appears. Enter a count. When the number of transactions through the activity equals the count, the next transaction pauses.

3	Click OK.


To open and close the Attributes window


To use pause points to start and stop a simulation

1	Click Go To Pause to go to a pause point.

This runs the simulation at its fastest speed (not changing the colors) until it reaches the pause point. This is a useful time-saver when the point that you wish to analyze occurs well into the simulation.

2	Click Resume/Start to continue past a pause point.


To insert a pause point

To edit a pause point

To delete pause points


To edit a pause point

1	On the View menu, click Pause Points.

2	In the Pause Points window, double-click a pause point to edit it using the Set Pause Point dialog box.

3	To activate a pause point, select the check box in the Active column.


To insert a pause point

To activate or deactivate a pause point

To delete pause points

To use pause points to start and stop a simulation


To activate or deactivate a pause point

1	On the View menu, click Pause Points.

2	In the Pause Points window, select the check box in the Active column to activate or clear the check box to deactivate.


To insert a pause point

To edit a pause point

To delete pause points

To use pause points to start and stop a simulation


To delete pause points

1	On the View menu, click Pause Points.

2	In the Pause Points window, click to select the pause point definition.

3	On the Control menu, click Delete Pause Point.

or

On the Control menu, click Delete All Pause Points.


To activate or deactivate a pause point

To insert a pause point

To edit a pause point

To use pause points to start and stop a simulation


Using Multiple Processes

Use multiple processes and subprocesses to create a structure in a process model. The processes in a model share such things as scenario attributes, function declarations, and run settings. However, each process can have its own generator to activate transactions, or the generator can be inactive. The generators can start and stop at different times during the simulation. These capabilities let you model parallel activities or resource contention.


Using Process Hierarchy

Working with Processes

Using Subprocesses

Tips for Working with Multiple Processes

Adding Generators - Now Try This

Using Trace with Multiple Processes - Now Try This

Using Multiple Processes - Now Try This


To create a new process

To view hierarchy in a process diagram

To open an existing process or subprocess

To add or deactivate a generator

To add generators - Now Try This

To view a subprocess

To view a subprocess - Now Try This

To use trace mode to view multiple processes

To build a process hierarchy

To run a trace - Now Try This


Using Process Hierarchy

When you build a model that has multiple sets of activities, you may want to create structure in a hierarchy.


Using Multiple Processes

Parallel or Concurrent Processes.

Subprocesses

Working with Processes

Using Subprocesses

Tips for Working with Multiple Processes


To create a new process

To view hierarchy in a process diagram

To open an existing process or subprocess

To add or deactivate a generator

To add generators - Now Try This

To view a subprocess

To view a subprocess - Now Try This

To use trace mode to view multiple processes

To build a process hierarchy

To run a trace - Now Try This


Parallel or Concurrent Processes.

In a model that has two or more parallel processes, the product or outcome of one of the processes tends to be different from the product or outcome of the other process. You can create subprocesses for a model using the Components command on the File menu.

For example, consider a main process of manufacturing circuit boards. This process has a different goal from the maintenance department which keeps the machines oiled and repaired every two months. In this case, you can treat the maintenance steps as a parallel process with its own generator. This type of model provides a powerful method for modeling resource contention.


Subprocesses

Using Process Hierarchy

Working with Processes


Subprocesses

Subprocesses are often created for organizational reasons. For example, if you have different audiences for segments of the process diagram, you can define the highest-level activities in the main process diagram and define subordinate activities as subprocesses, as shown in the following illustration.


Parallel or Concurrent Processes.

Parallel or Concurrent Processes.

Working with Processes


Working with Processes

Every file containing a process diagram contains at least one process. If you are working with multiple processes, you create the processes within the same file for use as either concurrent processes or subprocesses.


Using Multiple Processes

Using Process Hierarchy

Using Subprocesses

Creating Concurrent Processes

Using Generators for Concurrent Processes

Adding or Deactivating Generators

Using Subprocesses

Tips for Working with Multiple Processes


To create a new process

To view hierarchy in a process diagram

To open an existing process or subprocess

To add or deactivate a generator

To add generators - Now Try This

To view a subprocess

To view a subprocess - Now Try This

To use trace mode to view multiple processes

To build a process hierarchy

To run a trace - Now Try This


To create a new process

1	On the File menu, select Components.

The Components dialog box appears.

Tip

Click the + button to expand an item.

2	Select how to view the components.

•	All Components. All of the processes in the file are listed in alphabetical order.

•	Diagram Hierarchy. The relationships between the processes are shown.

•	Diagrams, By Contained Departments. This is a list of all departments in the file. You can expand a department to view the processes in which each department is used.

3	To create a new process, click New, and select Process.

•	To create a new process based on a template, click New, and select New From Template. In the New Component From Template dialog box, select a template and a component.

•	To rename a process, select a process from the list, click Rename, and change its name. For example, you can rename Process1 to Engineering.

•	To copy a process, select a process from the list, and then click Copy. Click Paste to copy the contents of the clipboard into a new process.


To build a process hierarchy

To create a new document from the Welcome dialog

To create a new document using the New command

To create a document from a template

To create a new template

To view hierarchy in a process diagram

To open an existing process or subprocess

Creating New Documents

Using Multiple Processes

Working with Processes


To view hierarchy in a process diagram

1	On the File menu, click Components.

2	In the Components dialog box, select the Diagram Hierarchy option to view the relationships between different processes.

The process hierarchy appears in the dialog box.


To create a new process

To open an existing process or subprocess

To view hierarchy in a process diagram

Working with Processes

Using Multiple Processes


To open an existing process or subprocess

1	On the File menu, click Components.

2	In the Components dialog box, select the process name that you want to open, and click Open.


To create a new process

To view hierarchy in a process diagram

Working with Processes

Using Multiple Processes


Creating Concurrent Processes

A concurrent process is any process that operates simultaneously with other processes. Concurrent processes are typically used to contend for resources or set values that cause events to happen in other processes.


Using Multiple Processes

Using Generators for Concurrent Processes

Adding or Deactivating Generators

Using Process Hierarchy

Working with Processes

Adding Generators - Now Try This

Tips for Working with Multiple Processes


To create a new process

To view hierarchy in a process diagram

To open an existing process or subprocess

To add or deactivate a generator


Using Generators for Concurrent Processes

Each process has one or more generators, one or more Start activities, and starting and ending times. A generator can actively issue transactions or you can deactivate it so that the process receives transactions only from Process activities in another process. In this sense, a Process activity is like a generator. Any process that receives its transactions solely from another process is a subprocess.


Using Process Hierarchy

Using Subprocesses

Creating Concurrent Processes

Using Generators for Concurrent Processes

Adding or Deactivating Generators

Adding Generators - Now Try This

Tips for Working with Multiple Processes


To create a new process

To view hierarchy in a process diagram

To open an existing process or subprocess

To add or deactivate a generator


Adding or Deactivating Generators

A generator is automatically created for every process. The generator determines how often transactions are issued. By default, the generator for a subprocess is inactive.


Using Process Hierarchy

Using Subprocesses

Creating Concurrent Processes

Using Generators for Concurrent Processes

Adding or Deactivating Generators

Adding Generators - Now Try This

Tips for Working with Multiple Processes


To create a new process

To view hierarchy in a process diagram

To open an existing process or subprocess

To add or deactivate a generator


To add or deactivate a generator

On the model menu, click the Generators tool.

The Define Generator dialog box appears.

Note
Each generator introduces transactions into the process according to the instructions in its generator definition. For example, one generator can issue transactions every two and four days, and in the same process, another generator can issue transactions every day.

•	If you want a process to receive transactions only from a Process activity, you can deactivate or delete the generator.

•	If the subprocess also operates as an independent process, you can leave the generator active.


Adding Generators - Now Try This

At Product Development Corp., several processes occur simultaneously. The main process, which is managed in the Product Testing department, consists of hierarchical tasks done by two other departments. A fourth department, the Review Board, performs independent examinations.


Using Multiple Processes

Using Generators for Concurrent Processes

Adding or Deactivating Generators

Using Trace with Multiple Processes - Now Try This

Using Multiple Processes - Now Try This


To add generators - Now Try This

To view a subprocess - Now Try This

To run a trace - Now Try This


To add generators - Now Try This

1	On the File menu, click Open.

2	Select iGrafx\Pro\8.0\Exercise\Ex7.igx, and click Open.

3	Click OK.

The process diagram for Process1 appears.

4	If you are not already using the full screen, click Maximize.

5	On the File menu, click Components, and use this dialog box to open Process2.

6	On the Modeling toolbar, click the Generators tool.

or

On the Model menu, click Generators.

The Define Generators dialog box appears.

7	For Existing Generators, select Process2.

8	For Process Start Point, select Process2 and Start.

9	For Generator Type, select Interarrival.

10	For Active, check the box to specify that the generator is active.

11	For Active Period to Generate Transactions, review the settings for Simulation Start and Simulation End.

12	For Schedule, leave set to Always.

13	For Interarrival Time, select Constant and set to every 6 months.

14	For Attribute Settings, add Preempt and set it equal to True.

15	When you are finished in the Define Generators dialog box, click OK.

16	Close Process2.

You have set a generator for the Review Board for twice a year, with preemptive authority.


Adding Generators - Now Try This


Using Subprocesses

To create hierarchy in a process diagram, you can use subprocesses. The top-level process typically contains high-level activities, with other subprocesses containing the subordinate activities.

In a hierarchical process diagram, the generator for a subprocess is typically inactive. Transactions are issued instead by higher-level Process activities in another process.

Some overhead is associated with multiple processes, mostly in the time it takes for you to create the diagrams, but also in maintenance and simulation time. This is a trade-off to be considered if you are creating a large number of hierarchical layers (10 or more).


Using Multiple Processes

Private and Non-Private Subprocesses

Using Trace with Multiple Processes - Now Try This

Using Generators for Concurrent Processes

Adding or Deactivating Generators

Using Process Hierarchy

Working with Processes

Tips for Working with Multiple Processes


To view a subprocess


To view a subprocess

Select the activity that contains the subprocess, press the Shift key, and double-click the mouse.

or

On the File menu, click Components, and select a subprocess from the list of Processes in the Components dialog box.

The subprocess appears in a window.

Tip

To quickly find all the Process activities, on the Edit menu, click Select. Use the Select dialog box to select all Process activities.


Using Subprocesses

Using Trace with Multiple Processes - Now Try This

To view a subprocess - Now Try This


Private and Non-Private Subprocesses

The transactions in a non-private subprocess interact with other transactions while those in a private subprocess do not. Private subprocesses ensure that transactions are kept separate for purposes of splitting and joining.

Assume you have two processes that use the same subprocess for creating a technical document. The Process activity Create document is the same for both processes.

Although the subprocess is the same, the transactions are kept apart. By using a private subprocess, you ensure that a joining activity collects the correct document chapters for the parent process.


Using Subprocesses

Using Trace with Multiple Processes - Now Try This


To view a subprocess


Using Trace with Multiple Processes - Now Try This

In Product Testing, two departments perform work in parallel. Of course, the departments could be added to the first process, but for this example, your task is to model these activities as separate processes.


Using Subprocesses

Private and Non-Private Subprocesses


To view a subprocess - Now Try This

To view a subprocess

To add generators - Now Try This


To view a subprocess - Now Try This

1	In the Process1 window, double-click Prepare test plan.

The Properties dialog box appears.

2	Select the Task tab.

3	Change the activity type to Process.

4	Specify that the activity calls a Subprocess for Process3.

5	Without closing the Properties dialog box, click to select the Test 40-series activity. (You may have to move the dialog box to view it.)

6	Change the activity type to Process.

7	Specify that the activity calls a Subprocess for Process4.

8	Click OK to close the Properties dialog box.

9	On the Modeling toolbar, click the Generator tool.

The Define Generators dialog box appears.

10	For Existing Generators, select Process3.

11	Click to toggle Active so that the generator is inactive.

12	Repeat Steps 10 and 11 to make Process4 inactive.

13	Minimize all of the process diagram windows except Process1.


Adding Generators - Now Try This


Tips for Working with Multiple Processes

Before you create a new process, assign unique names to any departments that will not be shared. Otherwise, all departments with the same name are considered to be the same department across the processes. For example, a newly-created process had a department name Dept. 1 that is a shared department with Dept. 1 in all other processes. A shared department uses the same resources and attributes for simulation purposes.

After a department is shared, any change to the name affects all the shared department names in all processes.


Using Multiple Processes

Linking and Unlinking Department Names

Windowing Techniques

Using Multiple Processes - Now Try This


Linking and Unlinking Department Names

When two or more departments have the same name, the departments are linked (when you edit one name, it changes all other departments with the same name). After department names are linked, you can unlink them.


Windowing Techniques

Using Multiple Processes - Now Try This


To unlink departments


To unlink departments

1	Select the department.

2	Use the backspace key to delete all the characters in the department name.

Note
Be sure to delete all spaces.

3	Deselect the department.

Now you can make changes to the department name without affecting the other departments.


Linking and Unlinking Department Names

Tell me how . . .

Tips for Working with Multiple Processes


Windowing Techniques

The Window menu items are useful for viewing windows containing different processes. For example, you can have windows open for two processes and then select Tile Horizontal from the Window menu. This creates a horizontal configuration that enables you to view both processes. If you have other windows open, you can turn them into icons so that they do not block other windows.


Tell me how . . .

Linking and Unlinking Department Names

Using Multiple Processes - Now Try This

Tips for Working with Multiple Processes


To use trace mode to view multiple processes

To build a process hierarchy


To use trace mode to view multiple processes

1	On the Model menu, point to Run, and then click Trace to place Process1 in trace mode.

2	On the Window menu, click Window to create a copy of the active window.

3	On the File menu, click Components.

4	In the Components dialog box, select a process under the Diagrams category, and click View.

The process appears in a window.

5	Select another process to view, or click Close.


Windowing Techniques

Using Multiple Processes - Now Try This

To build a process hierarchy


To build a process hierarchy

You can copy existing process diagrams into a single process diagram to build a hierarchical process diagram (a process that contains subprocesses).

1	On the File menu, click New, and Point to Process to create a new, untitled process diagram that will represent the highest-level for activities in your process.

2	On the File Menu, click Components.

3	In the Components dialog box, click New, and select Process.

A new process diagram is created and appears in a window.

4	On the File menu, click Save.

For example, save the process diagram using the name Top.

5	(Optional) Draw symbols to represent the highest-level activities.

Later, after the subprocesses have been created, you can specify which symbol references a subprocess using the Properties command (Properties dialog box - Task tab).

6	On the File menu, click New to create a second process diagram.

For example, open a file that you have already created for the Sales department.

7	On the Window menu, select Tile Horizontally (or Cascade) to view both process diagrams.

8	Activate the window containing the second process diagram (Sales.)

9	On the File menu, click Components.

10	In the Components dialog box, select the process Sales, and click Copy.

This copies the contents of the Sales process diagram to the clipboard.

11	Click to select the process for Top. (Process1).

12	Click Paste.

This copies the clipboard (the Sales process diagram) into Process2 in the original file contains Top. You can repeat the steps to copy other existing files into new processes.

13	Activate the first window and create Process activities for the other processes.

You do this by double-clicking on an activity and specifying process information on the Task tab.

14	One at a time, activate each of the subprocesses, and on the Model menu, select Generators.

15	In the Generators dialog box, specify that the generator for each subprocess in not Active.


Windowing Techniques

Using Multiple Processes - Now Try This

To use trace mode to view multiple processes


Using Multiple Processes - Now Try This

After the Product Testing group prepared the model of their processes, they wanted to troubleshoot to see if it was doing what they expected. Your task is to use the Trace window to visually check that the transactions are being sent to the appropriate processes and to see that transactions for the Review Board occur twice a year to review the testing procedures.


Using Multiple Processes

Tell me how . . .

Windowing Techniques

Adding Generators - Now Try This

Using Trace with Multiple Processes - Now Try This


To add generators - Now Try This

To view a subprocess - Now Try This

To run a trace - Now Try This


To run a trace - Now Try This

1	In the Process1 window, on the Model menu, point to Run, and then click Trace.

2	On the Window menu, click New Window.

3	On the File menu, click Components.

The Components dialog box appears.

4	Select Process2, and click View, or double-click Process 2.

The process appears in a window.

5	To make it easier to view the trace, close the windows that are not trace windows. You can also turn them into icons,

(You need one window open or the file will close.)

6	On the Window menu, select Tile Horizontally.

This rearranges the windows so that all trace windows are visible.

7	On the Modeling menu, point to Run, and then click Start.

As the model is traced, you can watch what happens in each of the processes as a transaction is generated.

8	On the Modeling menu, point to Run, and then click Stop.

This completes this exercises. You can save the model you created.


Adding Generators - Now Try This


Using Monitors

A monitor is a data filter that you can place on any activity in the process diagram to collect data. The types of data include basic transaction statistics such as busy and waiting time, number of transactions, or the value of attributes at certain points.

Monitors provide a method of validating a model by checking intermediate statistics. For example, you can place a monitor to tabulate the number of transactions that reach an activity. You can also use starting and ending monitors to gather data about a specific segment of the process flow.


Using Monitors to Collect Data

Using Monitors - Now Try This


To find a monitor

To find multiple occurrences of a monitor

To delete or remove monitors

To open the exercise data for using monitors - Now Try This

To define and place the monitor - Now Try This

To run the simulation and review monitor data - Now Try This


Using Monitors to Collect Data

A monitor collects statistics about transactions and attribute data. The statistics are gathered at the activities that you specify in the process diagram. Monitors can collect the following data.

Data Type	Description
Count	Counts the transactions at a specific point to track how many times a transaction reached an activity. This can represent scrapped units or canceled orders.
Basic transaction statistics	Collects basic statistics either between two points or from the start point to the current monitor. You can use this to collect statistics such as service time or waiting time between two points.
Filtered data	Further filters the data, for example, how many transactions matched a specific attribute value.
Accumulated values	A value that cumulatively increases every time a transaction passes through the activity.


Evaluating Monitors

Monitors are evaluated during simulation at the start of an activity. This affects monitor statistics because the activity containing the monitor is not included in the statistics. For example, if a monitor keeps track of basic statistics such as service time and busy time, it does not include time statistics for the activity on which the monitor is placed.


Viewing Monitor Statistics

After you run a simulation, you can view monitor results in the Report window by adding a report element. You can add the element to any of the tabs, for example, the Custom tab. In the report element, you specify statistics specifically gathered by monitors.


Identifying Monitors in the Tabular View

Activities with monitors placed on them have a monitor indicator displayed to the left of the activity.


Using Monitors

Define Monitor dialog box

Using Monitors - Now Try This


To define a monitor

To place a monitor

To find a monitor

To find multiple occurrences of a monitor

To delete or remove monitors


To define a monitor

1	Select the activity at which to place a monitor.

2	   On the Model toolbar, click the Monitor tool.

or

On the Model menu, click Monitors.

The Define Monitors dialog box appears. This dialog box contains a list of monitors that exist in the model.

The number after a monitor name indicates the number of placements of the monitor. For example, Test(1) indicates that the Test monitor has been placed on one activity.

3	To add a new monitor, click Add.

The Add New Monitor dialog box appears. Use this dialog box to specify the monitor name and type.

or

To modify a monitor, select it and click Modify.

The Modify Monitor Type dialog box appears. Use this dialog box to modify the monitor type.


Define Monitor dialog box

Using Monitors to Collect Data

Using Monitors - Now Try This

To place a monitor

To find a monitor

To find multiple occurrences of a monitor

To delete or remove monitors


Define Monitor dialog box

Use this dialog box to define the monitor type. After you have specified the name and monitor type, click OK to close the dialog box. The monitor remains selected in the list of Existing Monitors, so further edits affect the selected monitor.

Element	Description
Monitor name	Enter a name for the monitor. You can use any characters except spaces and these special characters: * ? , ; [ ] + = \ / : | < >.
Monitor type	Individual—Collects data only at a particular activity, for example, from the beginning to this point. This is useful for keeping track of different counts, such as the number of transactions that are processed at an activity. Start—Marks transactions so that End monitors can collect statistics on them. You set which transactions are marked with an expression in the Start monitor.
	For example, this Start monitor definition, shown in the Scenario window, marks transactions when the Count attribute is greater than 100.
	End—Collects statistics from all Start monitors or a specific monitor, and can further filter the transactions with an expression. Start and End—Marks transactions and also collects statistics from other Start monitors.
Data collection type	Basic—The monitor collects all basic transaction statistics.  Attribute—In addition to the basic statistic collection, the monitor adds the value of an attribute. A list of defined attributes appears. Click to select the attribute. The value is added to the previous values.  For non-numeric attributes, the value is based on the member's enumeration value (for example, the first member is 0, the second member 1).
Accumulate	Always—The monitor accumulates the requested information for every transaction. Expression—The monitor only accumulates information only when the expression is true. When you select Expression, the expression builder appears.
From (End Monitor only)	If the monitor is an End Monitor, select the starting point from which to accumulate data. All—Transactions are accumulated from all Start monitors. (Monitor name)—Transactions are accumulated from only the specified Start monitor.


Using Monitors to Collect Data


To place a monitor

1	Select the shape that contains the activity at which you want to place the monitor.

2	   On the Model menu, click Monitor, or click the Monitor tool on the Modeling toolbar.

3	In the Define Monitors dialog box, define a monitor or select an existing monitor from the list.

4	Click Place.

A number appears after the monitor name, indicating the number of times the monitor has been placed.


Using Monitors to Collect Data

To define a monitor

To find a monitor

To find multiple occurrences of a monitor

To delete or remove monitors


To find a monitor

1	   On the Model menu, click Monitor.

or

On the Modeling toolbar, click the Monitor tool

2	In the Define Monitors dialog box, click the monitor name you want to find.

3	Click Find.

The Monitors dialog box closes, and the activity containing the monitor is selected.

4	Use the Monitor tool on the Modeling menu to modify, delete, remove, or place the monitor on a different activity.


Using Monitors to Collect Data

To define a monitor

To place a monitor

To find multiple occurrences of a monitor

To delete or remove monitors


To find multiple occurrences of a monitor

1	   On the Model menu, click Monitor.

or

On the Modeling toolbar, click the Monitor tool

2	In the Define Monitors dialog box, click the monitor name that you want to find.

A number appears after the monitor name, indicating the number of times the monitor has been placed.

3	Click Find.

The Find Monitor - Next Location dialog box appears and displays the monitor name and the number of occurrences.

4	To find and select all uses of the monitor, click Select All.

To find and select the next occurrence of the monitor, click Find Next.

To find and select the previous occurrence of the monitor, click Find Prev.


Using Monitors to Collect Data

To define a monitor

To place a monitor

To find a monitor

To delete or remove monitors


To delete or remove monitors

1	   On the Model menu, click Monitor.

or

On the Modeling toolbar, click the Monitor tool

2	In the Define Monitors dialog box, click the name of the monitor.

3	To remove the monitor from the current location, click Remove.

This removes the monitor but does not delete its definition. You can still place it on other activities. If you placed the monitor on more than one activity, clicking Remove removes the monitor only from the current location.

Note
To delete all the occurrences of the monitor and the monitor definition, click Delete.


Using Monitors to Collect Data

To define a monitor

To place a monitor

To find a monitor

To find multiple occurrences of a monitor


Using Monitors - Now Try This

A Testing department receives individual parts for testing. If the part does not pass, it is reworked. If the reworked part is acceptable, it is sent back for re-testing. Otherwise, it is scrapped. For this exercise, we will place a monitor to track the average service time for a part that is scrapped.


Using Monitors

Evaluating Monitors

Viewing Monitor Statistics

Identifying Monitors in the Tabular View

Define Monitor dialog box

Using Monitors - Now Try This


To open the exercise data for using monitors - Now Try This

To define and place the monitor - Now Try This

To run the simulation and review monitor data - Now Try This


To open the exercise data for using monitors - Now Try This

1	On the File menu, click Open.

2	Select iGrafx\Pro\8.0\Exercise\Ex8.igx, and click Open.

The process model appears in a window.

3	Click the Maximize icon to view the entire screen.

4	Use the following parameters to set up the exercise:

Run setup

•	The simulation uses calendar time.

•	The default schedule for the model is Standard.

•	The simulation runs until all transactions are complete.

Generator setup

•	The completion generator issues 10 transactions.


Using Monitors - Now Try This

To define and place the monitor - Now Try This

To run the simulation and review monitor data - Now Try This


To define and place the monitor - Now Try This

1	Click the Scrap activity in the Testing department.

2	   On the Model menu, click Monitors.

or

On the Modeling toolbar, click the Monitor tool

The Define Monitors dialog box appears.

3	Click Add.

The Add New Monitor dialog box appears.

4	For Monitor Name, type Scrap.

5	For Monitor Type, click Individual.

6	Click OK to close the Add New Monitor dialog box.

7	For Data Collection Type, select Basic.

8	For Accumulate, select Always.

9	Click Place.

The Scrap monitor is placed. The (1) indicates there is one placement.

10	Click OK to close the Define Monitors dialog box.


Using Monitors - Now Try This

To open the exercise data for using monitors - Now Try This

To run the simulation and review monitor data - Now Try This


To run the simulation and review monitor data - Now Try This

1	On the Model menu, point to Run, and then click Start.

This runs the simulation. When it is done, the report results are displayed.

2	In the Report window, click the Custom tab.

By default, the Custom tab is blank.

3	On the Edit menu, click Add Element.

The Statistic dialog box appears.

4	For Statistics Collection, select Monitors.

5	Click Single.

6	For Statistic, select Avg Service Time.

7	Click Next.

The Structure dialog box appears.

8	Leave the Column Labels set to Simulations.

9	For Row Legends, select Monitors and Scrap.

10	Click Next.

The Format dialog box appears. You can leave the options on this dialog box unchanged.

11	Click Finish.

The new report element appears. The average service time for any transaction that entered the Scrap activity was 6.67 hours.

12	Click the Time tab.

You can compare the average service time for all transactions (this includes transactions that were scrapped or not) or for specific activities.

This is the end of this self-paced exercise. If you want to save changes, do so now.


Using Monitors - Now Try This


Reporting Results

When you run a simulation, statistics are gathered about process times, costs, resource utilization, and queues. These statistics are categorized by transaction, activity, resource, or monitor.

You can use custom statistics to create unique combinations of the standard statistics (for example, setting costing information or revenue formulas). Custom statistics are updated and calculated automatically with each simulation.

You can maintain several sets of named simulation data to compare results across simulation runs and scenarios.


Reviewing Simulation Report Results

Using the Report Window to Review Transaction Statistics

Using the Report Window to Review Activity Statistics

Using the Report Window to Review Resource Statistics

Creating Custom Statistics in the Report Window

Using Department Statistics

Naming or Deleting Simulation Data


Reviewing Simulation Report Results

After a simulation runs, use the Run command or the Trace command on the Model menu to update the data in the report window with the results of the simulation.


Reporting Results

Report Window Tabs

Report Elements


To view reports in the report window

To edit a report element

To add a new report element

To open the exercise data for reviewing service times - Now Try This

To create custom statistics

To name or delete simulation data


Report Window Tabs

The data in the report window is divided into general categories using tabs. You can use a combination box to the right of the tabs to specify what type of statistics appear in the window. The categories include the following: All statistics, Overall (statistics that relate more globally to the model, such as elapsed time), Activities, Departments, Resources, and Processes.

•	Time. This tab includes statistics about transaction times, primarily cycle time and service time. Statistics are available that show overall transaction times, and times are also categorized by department, by process, and by activity.

•	Cost. This tab contains statistics about costs related to transactions, activities and resources.

•	Resource. This tab contains statistics related to resource utilization, resource time categorizations, and activity and resource costs.

•	Queue. This tab contains statistics collected when transactions waited in queues for resources or waited in queues at activities to be processed (either blocked or inactive).

•	Custom. The custom tab is intended for your use to create a custom page of statistics. You can copy and paste statistics from any of the other report tabbed pages, or you can add new report elements.


Reviewing Simulation Report Results

Report Elements

Edit Report Element dialog box - Statistic tab

Edit Report Element dialog box - Structure tab

Edit Report Element dialog box - Filters tab

Edit Report Element dialog box - Format tab


Report Elements

A report element represents a table or graph of statistical data. Each report element has a title and a collection of data associated with it.

Each tab in the report window contains several report elements. Edit a report element using the Elements command on the Report menu, and the Edit Report Element dialog box. This dialog box also appears when you double-click a report element.

You can copy and paste any report element into other Windows applications such as a word processor or spreadsheet.


To view reports in the report window

1	On the File menu, click Components.

In the Components dialog box, select the report, and click View.

The report window appears.

or

On the Model menu, point to Run, and then click Start to run the simulation.

Tip

When the simulation is complete, the report window appears.If the report window is obscured or not displayed, on the Window menu, click the Report window.

2	Select a report tab in the report window.

•	The Default button appears on the tabbed report window when you modify any of the settings for the default report elements. Click Default to return the element settings to their default values.

•	You can change, delete, or add elements to a report, or open other reports.

•	If you add report elements after you run a simulation, you can view the new statistics without re-simulating. However, if you change the process diagram or scenario information, you must simulate again to view new results.

Tip

To see report results for new attributes, monitors, or other changes that you made to the process diagram or scenario information, you must run the simulation again.


Reporting Results

Report Window Tabs

Report Elements

To view reports in the report window

To edit a report element

To add a new report element

To open the exercise data for reviewing service times - Now Try This

To create custom statistics

To name or delete simulation data


To edit a report element

You can change the contents or structure of a report element in any of the tabbed pages of the Report window.

1	Double-click the report element.

or

Right-mouse click on the report element, and click Edit Report.

The Edit Report Element dialog box appears.

2	Use the dialog box to modify the report element.


To add a new report element

1	Select the report element, and click Add Element on the Reports menu.

or

Right-mouse click on the report element, and click Add Element.

The Statistic dialog box appears.

2	Use this dialog box to define the statistics in the report element.

3	Click Next.

The Structure dialog box appears.

4	Use this dialog box to define column labels and row legends for the statistic.

This dialog box contains the same information as the Structure tab on the Edit Report Element dialog box.

5	Click Next.

The Filters dialog box appears.

6	Use this dialog box to define how to filter the statistic.

This dialog box contains the same information as the Filters tab on the Edit Report Element dialog box.

7	Click Next.

The Formats dialog box appears.

8	Use this dialog box to define how to format and sort the statistic.

This dialog box contains the same information as the Formats tab on the Edit Report Element dialog box.

9	Click Finish.


Edit Report Element dialog box - Statistic tab

Use this tab to specify which statistics are displayed in a report element. Access this dialog box by double-clicking a report element.

Most report elements already contain different statistics that typically are viewed together in the same category. Use this tab to remove or add other statistics.

Many of the names of the statistics are abbreviated in the dialog boxes and report elements. You can look up the definition for any abbreviation by using Search in the help.

An abbreviation for a statistic is shown after the full name. For example, Working Time (Avg Work, Tot Work) indicates that working time appears in report elements in two abbreviated forms, as average working time (Avg Work) and total working time (Tot Work).

Element	Description
Statistics category	The statistics category displays the type of information available for viewing. The list varies depending on the type of data that is available in the model and whether you select single or multiple statistics. Transactions. See Using the Report Window to Review Transaction Statistics. Resources. See ; Using the Report Window to Review Resource Statistics. Activities. See Using the Report Window to Review Activity Statistics. Custom Stats. This list contains all custom statistics that you have created, and other system-defined custom statistics (for example, time and workers). See Creating Custom Statistics in the Report Window. Monitors. This list contains all monitored data collection points. See Using Monitors. Scenario Attributes, Process Attributes, and Department Attributes. This list contains the attributes that you have defined.
Single or multiple statistics	Single. Choose this option if you want to display a single statistic in the report element. This gives you the ability to vary two other values in the report table (for example, multiple simulations appended to columns, and rows varied by department). The list of statistics is displayed in a scrolling list. You can click to select or remove an item from the list. Multiple. Choose this option to display and compare several statistics in the report element. This gives you statistics in the columns and allows you to vary only the rows. The dialog box displays a list of the statistics that the report element currently contains. You choose which statistics to include from the list of all statistics that are available.
Modify	To replace a statistic, select it, and click Modify. The Modify Statistic dialog box appears so you can select a statistic to replace the one you selected.
Remove	To remove a statistic, select it, and click Remove.
Arrow Up Arrow Down	To change the order of the statistics, select and use the arrows to move a statistic up and down in the list.
Add	To add a new statistic to the report element, click Add. The Add Statistic dialog box appears. You can choose value categories, resource categories, or resource rates to further modify some of the statistics, particularly cost statistics. For example, the Total Cost statistic can display only overtime rates (Total OT Costs) or all rates. The new statistic is added to the end of the list.


Edit Report Element dialog box - Structure tab

Use this tab to define row legends and select which columns of statistics are displayed. To open the dialog box, double-click a report element.

Element	Description
Column labels	Select which columns are displayed. This selection is not available in report elements that have multiple statistics. The list depends on the type of data that is available in the model. You can select one or more items from the list.
	Simulations. Choose from the simulation data sets that are available.  Only one simulation set is available if the model has been simulated only once or if you have not appended to the report.
	Snapshots. Choose from the available snapshots. For example, you can set the report element to display the data captured after 8 hours of simulation.  If snapshot data is shown cumulatively, each snapshot is added to the last. The cumulative data can start at the beginning of simulation or at the starting point you set.
Row legends	Select how you want the rows labeled in the report. The list contains only those items that are relevant to the model. None. Only one overall row is displayed. Processes. The rows are displayed by process. Departments. The rows are displayed by department. Activities. The rows are displayed by activity. You can further modify this choice as hierarchical or by showing department name. Hierarchical. The activities are listed in hierarchies.  Show Dept. Name. The department names are displayed as part of the activity label (default).  Simulations. The rows are displayed by simulations. Resources. The rows are displayed by resource. Pools. The rows appear in the order of resource pools.


Edit Report Element dialog box - Filters tab

The Filters tab enables you to further filter the statistics by individual departments, processes, or snapshots. You access it by double-clicking any report element.

The options available on the Filters tab vary depending on the type of data available in the model. For some models, none of the Filters options apply, so the Filters tab is unavailable.

Element	Description
Departments	Choose whether all departments are included in each statistic cell or pick a single department by name. This option is only available if there is more than one department.
Processes	Choose whether all processes are included in each statistic cell or a single process. This option is only available if there is more than one process.
Snapshots	Choose which snapshot to include in the data for each statistic cell. This option is only available if snapshots have been created.
Start at (snapshots only)	Choose which snapshot to begin including data into each cell. You can use this feature to look at only data after a certain amount of start-up time. This allows for loading transactions into the process to emulate steady state.


Edit Report Element dialog box - Format tab

This tab is used to sort the statistics in a report element, and specify the time units, number formats, and display options. Double-click any report element to open this dialog box.

Element	Description
Sorting	The sorting format determines the order of the columns. The statistic(s) in the current report element determines the order that the columns are sorted in. For example, for the statistic # of Transactions, the columns are sorted in the order of the number of transactions. For Ascending, columns are ordered by the smallest number first. If Ascending is not checked (descending), columns are ordered largest first.
Maximum number of rows	The maximum number of rows can be limited or unlimited. You enter a number to limit the rows. This option, combined with the above sorting capability, makes it easy to view a subset of relevant activities. For example, if you have 20 departments, you can display three by limiting the number of rows to three. If the rows are limited, the number of displayed rows is shown in the title of the report element, for example, 1 of 2 rows.
Time unit	You can set a specific time unit or Auto (automatic). An automatic time unit is calculated to the largest reasonable time unit, given the data.
Number format	Select the degrees of precision with which you want numbers displayed. A default number format is calculated to the largest reasonable number format. For example, a number format of 0.##### might display .00350 whereas a number format of 0 produces <1.
Tabular or graph	Choose whether to display the report element as tabular or graph. A tabular report element contains only text; a graph contains graphics, for example, a bar chart or line graph.


Using the Report Window to Review Transaction Statistics

You can use transaction statistics to analyze the time and cost of transactions in the model. Transaction statistics are calculated only for transactions that finish processing, either by completing the flow through the process diagram or by reaching an activity that has no further connections.

In the default Report window, both the Time and Cost tabs have report elements containing transaction statistics. (You can also add your own report elements to any tab or create additional reports.)

Note
Only completed transactions are included in transaction statistics.

If a model uses multiple processes to create hierarchy, the transaction statistics, by default, combine the results of all processes. For example, the transaction count is equal to the total number of transactions in all processes. You can change the row legends of the report element to view the results of a specific process.


Reporting Results

Transaction Formulas

Transaction Time Statistics - Time tab

About Joined Transactions

Transaction Cost Statistics - Cost tab

Formulas for Activity Statistics

Resource Statistics Formulas

Subsets of Resource Busy Time

Combinations of Resource Times

Transaction Statistics (Time)

Transaction Statistics (Cost)

Resources


Transaction Formulas

You can use the following formulas to process transaction statistics:

•	Total (Tot)

The combination of all of the completed transaction statistics. If you apply a filter to the statistic, then only specific, completed transactions are counted.

•	Average (Avg)

The total divided by the count of completed transactions. If you apply a filter, then only specific, completed transactions are counted (same as totals).

Transaction Count

•	Total # Transactions (#Trans)

The number of transactions that have completed the process. This does not include the transactions that are still in the process when the simulation ends. When a transaction leaves and reenters a department, it is counted only once in the department’s total.


Transaction Time Statistics - Time tab

The Time tab in the Report window displays the time that a transaction spends being processed and is categorized as either working, waiting for resource time, blocked time, or inactive time.


Reporting Results

Transaction Formulas

Working Time (Avg Work, Tot Work)

Waiting for Resource Time (Avg Res Wait, Tot Res Wait)

Blocked Time (Avg Block, Tot Block)

Inactive Time (Avg Inact, Tot Inact)

Cycle Time (Avg Cycle, Tot Cycle)

Service Time (Avg Serv, Tot Serv)

Waiting Time (Avg Wait, Tot Wait)

Service Waiting Time (Avg Serv Wait, Tot Serv Wait)

Transaction Time Statistics - Time tab

About Joined Transactions


Working Time (Avg Work, Tot Work)

The time spent in working for the duration of an activity.


Waiting for Resource Time (Avg Res Wait, Tot Res Wait)

The time a transaction spends at an activity waiting for a resource that is currently busy with another transaction or out of service.


Blocked Time (Avg Block, Tot Block)

The time a transaction spends blocked at an activity. This can occur when an activity batches by time or by gate, during a Delay duration, or when a capacity limit is reached. Blocked time does not include any time spent waiting for a resource at an activity.


Inactive Time (Avg Inact, Tot Inact)

The time a transaction spends at an activity waiting because the necessary resources or the activity are not in schedule (for example., inactive).


Cycle Time (Avg Cycle, Tot Cycle)

The wall clock time that it takes a transaction to complete. This is a combination of working time and waiting time.

The cycle time calculation depends on whether the model uses compressed or calendar time.

Tot Cycle = Tot Work + Tot Res Wait + Tot Block + Tot Inact

For example, using calendar time mode, a car (transaction) enters an Automobile Repair Center at 4:00 pm. It takes two hours to complete the transaction, but the mechanic leaves at 5:00 pm and comes back in at 8:00 am. Also, the mechanic is busy with other things until 9:00 am. The cycle time, therefore, is eighteen hours (two hours working, one hour waiting for resource and 15 hours inactive).


Service Time (Avg Serv, Tot Serv)

The actual amount of time that the transaction is being processed. This is a combination of working time, waiting for resource time, and blocked time, but not inactive time.

Tot Serv = Tot Work + Tot Res Wait + Tot Block

For example, in the Automobile Repair Center example, the service time is three hours (two hours working and one hour waiting).

Note
In a compressed time model, cycle time and service time are the same thing.


Waiting Time (Avg Wait, Tot Wait)

The wall clock time that a transaction waits to be processed.

Tot Wait = Tot Res Wait + Tot Block + Tot Inact

For example, in the Automobile Repair Center example, the waiting time is 16 hours (one hour waiting for resource and 15 hours inactive time).


Service Waiting Time (Avg Serv Wait, Tot Serv Wait)

The time that the transaction waited while being processed (not inactive).

Tot Serv Wait = Tot Res Wait + Tot Block

For example, in the Automobile Repair Center example, the service waiting time is one hour (one hour waiting for resource).


About Joined Transactions

When transactions join, special logic is applied to normalize the time statistics. In other words, the times for the transactions must be merged in a way that makes sense for a single transaction.

The joined transactions are compared two at a time and the statistics for the transaction with the largest cycle time are used. If the transactions have equal cycle time, then largest service time is used. If service time is equal, working time is used. If working time is equal, resource waiting time is used. And if resource waiting time is equal, blocked time is used.


Transaction Cost Statistics - Cost tab

The Cost tab in the Report window displays the transaction costs that are accumulated as each transaction passes through activities. The cost is a combination of fixed costs and resource costs for the activity.

The transaction costs can be categorized in several ways, as value type (VA, BVA, or NVA), resource types (Labor, Equipment, or Other), or time (Standard or Overtime). Fixed activity costs are added into the Other resource costs.

You can click to select different combinations of the costs when you insert a cost statistic.

Tip

A transaction can accumulate costs in two value-types for the same activity if the fixed cost has a different category than a resource being used at that activity.


Reporting Results

Transaction Cost Statistics - Cost tab

Value-Type Costs

Resource-Type Costs


Value-Type Costs

The value-type costs are divided as follows:

•	VA (Avg VA Cost, Tot VA Cost)

Costs that are marked as Value Added (to the process).

•	BVA (Avg BVA Cost, Tot BVA Cost)

Costs that are marked as Business Value Added (to the business but not the process).

•	NVA (Avg NVA Cost, Tot NVA Cost)

Costs that are marked as Non Value Added.


Resource-Type Costs

The resource-type costs are divided as follows:

•	Labor Cost (Avg Lbr Cost, Tot Lbr Cost)

The cost of labor resources that the transaction used.

•	Equipment Cost (Avg Eq Cost, Tot Eq Cost)

The cost of equipment resources that the transaction used.

•	Other Cost (Avg Oth Cost, Tot Oth Cost)

The cost of other resources and fixed activity costs. This includes:

Fixed activity cost.

Other resources. This is the cost of resources categorized as Other in the resource definition.

Other costs. These are for unmodeled resources or department breakdown for cross-department activities.

The time costs are divided as follows:

•	Standard (Avg Std Cost, Tot Std Cost)

The cost of resources working within normally scheduled hours. If no overtime is worked, then total cost equals standard cost.

•	Overtime (Avg OT Cost, Tot OT Cost)

The cost of resources working overtime.


Reporting Results - Now Try This

For this exercise, a Direct Mailing process diagram is simulated to examine the transaction statistics. There are three departments, Marketing, Graphics, and Staff, that process the materials for a direct mailing campaign. The durations, activity costs, and cost categories are displayed on each activity.


Reporting Results

Reviewing Activity Time Statistics - Now Try This

Reviewing Resource Statistics - Now Try This

Reviewing Service Time and Downtime - Now Try This


To open the example data file for reporting results - Now Try This

To run the simulation - Now Try This

To review time statistics - Now Try This

To review cost statistics - Now Try This

To review resource statistics using the Report Window - Now Try This

To review queue statistics using the Report window - Now Try This


To open the example data file for reporting results - Now Try This

1	On the File menu, click Close to close any open diagrams.

2	On the File menu, click Open.

3	Select iGrafx\Pro\8.0\Exercise\Ex12tran.igx, and click Open.

The process model appears in a window.

Run setup

•	The simulation uses calendar time.

•	The default schedule for the model is Standard. This means that the simulation is active Monday through Friday, 8:00 am to 5:00 pm, with an hour lunch break that is marked Out of Service.

•	The simulation runs until all transactions are complete.

Generator setup

•	The completion generator issues 10 transactions. These are issued sequentially; when one completes, another starts.

Resource setup

•	One Printer resource is used to print cover letters and brochures. The Printer is shared in one pool for both Marketing and Graphics. The resource type is Equipment.

•	The hourly rate to use the Printer is $10.00.

•	Each department has its own pool of one worker, for a total of three workers. The resource type is Labor.

•	The schedule for the workers is the default schedule.

•	A worker is authorized to work up to one hour overtime. All activities authorize overtime if the task has already been started. The hourly rate for the worker is $8.00; the overtime hourly rate is $12.00.


Reporting Results - Now Try This


To run the simulation - Now Try This

1	Maximize the iGrafx Process window.

2	On the Model menu, click Run, and point to Start to start the simulation.

When the simulation is complete, the report results appear in the Report window.

Tip

During this exercise, you can always return a Report tab to its original, unchanged state by clicking Default on the tab. (If this button does not appear, the report element has not changed.)


To review time statistics - Now Try This

1	In the Report window, click the Time tab.

2	Locate the first report element for Transaction Statistics.

Note that 10 transactions completed, which is the number set in the generator. Average cycle time is 35.40 hours and average service time is 10.60. (Remember that one day equals 24 hours.)

The Standard schedule sets eight hours of daily, active, in service time and we see that one transaction takes about 10.60 hours to be serviced. So, if the transaction is started first thing in the morning, the inactive time is probably only 15 hours (overnight plus one lunch). But if a transaction is started late in the day, it can accrue up to 30 hours of inactive time before it finishes. The average time is somewhere in between the two. You can scroll down further in the Report tab to view the Activity Statistics and see how times were accrued by activity.


To review cost statistics - Now Try This

1	In the Report window, click the Cost tab.

2	Locate the first Transaction Statistics report element.

Value Added. The average Value Added cost was $272.40. If you look at the Task tab for Paste up brochure in the Graphics department, it has a fixed cost of $50 and a Value-Added category of VA. The Worker resource accrues $8 an hour with the same classification as the task. These costs accrue for each transaction that is processed and count as VA in the statistics.

Business Value Added. The average Business Value Added cost was $26.80. If you look at the Task tab for Prepare plan in the Marketing department, it has a fixed cost of $10 and a Value-Added category of BVA. The Worker resource accrues $8 an hour with the same classification as the task.

Non Business Value Added. The average Non Business Value Added cost was $36.00. If you look at the Task tab for Check materials in the Marketing department, it has a fixed cost of $10 and a Value-Added category of NVA. The Worker resource accrues $8 an hour with the same classification as the task.

As noted before, the average cost for transactions is $335.20. This is the sum of labor, equipment, and Other costs incurred while processing a transaction. Let’s look at these three costs one at a time.

Labor. If the average labor cost, $115.20, is multiplied by the number of transactions, 10, the result is a total labor cost of $1152.00. You can scroll down to the Resource Statistics report element on the Cost tab to verify this.

Equipment. The average equipment cost is $40. The Printer hourly rate is $10, so we assume the average printer busy time is 4 hours. If we multiple 4 by the number of transactions, the total busy time for the printer is 40 hours. (This is verified on the Resource Statistics element on the Resource tab.)

Other. The average other costs are the sum of fixed costs from each of the activities. If you look at the Task tab on the Prepare plan activity in Marketing, you will see a fixed cost of $10. This is accrued by each transaction as it is processed and counts as Other.


To review the transaction count - Now Try This

1	In the Report window, click back to the Time tab.

2	Locate the second Transaction Statistics report element.

The element displays transactions by department. The number of transactions processed by each department is 10.

An interesting thing to point out about our model is that the transaction splits at Prepare materials and joins back together at Collate for mailing. As discussed in About Process Modeling, a split increases the number of transactions being processed until they join back together. Let’s examine what happens when the transactions remain split apart.

3	In the process diagram, delete the Staff department and simulate again.

(To delete Staff, select its department name area and press Delete.) This removes the one activity in the department that joined the transactions.

The number of transactions processed in Marketing doubles because it now has twenty completed transactions (ten that finish at Check materials and ten at Check brochure). You can verify that this affects all calculations that use the total number of transactions, for example, average cycle time.

4	This is the end of this exercise. On the File menu, click Close.

or

On the File menu, click Save As to save your changes.


Using the Report Window to Review Activity Statistics

Activity statistics are used to analyze the behavior of transactions being processed at activities.

In the Report window, the Time, Cost, Resource, and Queue tabs have report elements containing activity statistics. Each row of the report element is identified by the text label of the activity, with or without a department name. For example, an activity labeled Prepare report can appear in the report element as Prepare report or Dept. 1 - Prepare report. You can also add the process name if there is more than one process.

The order of the activities in a report element is affected by whether the report element is sorted and whether the element is hierarchical. If it is sorted, you can select the sorting format (). If the element is hierarchical, the activities in each process are sorted separately. Otherwise, the regular sorting format is used.


Reporting Results

Reviewing Activity Time Statistics - Now Try This

Formulas for Activity Statistics

Activity Time Statistics: Report Window - Time tab

Activity Cost Statistics: Report Window - Cost tab

Activity Queue Statistics: Report Window - Queue tab

Reviewing Activity Time Statistics - Now Try This

Using the Report Window to Review Activity Statistics


Formulas for Activity Statistics

The following calculations are available in many of the activity time and queue statistics.

•	Total (Tot)

For time statistics, the total time is calculated for each activity. If you apply a filter to the statistic, then only specific, completed transactions are counted.

•	Average (Avg)

For time statistics, the average is the total time for the activity divided by the count of completed transactions. For queue statistics, the denominator depends on the statistic.

•	Maximum (Max)

The highest number accumulated for the statistic at any one point in time (for example, the high-water mark).

•	Minimum (Min)

The lowest number accumulated for the statistic at any one point in time.


Activity Time Statistics: Report Window - Time tab

The Time tab in the Report window displays activity times. Activity times are similar to transaction times, except the times are calculated for each activity as transactions are processed. The time statistics are working time, waiting for resource time, blocked time, inactive time, cycle time, service time, waiting time, and service waiting time.


Activity Cost Statistics:
Report Window - Cost tab

The Cost tab in the Report window displays activity costs. Activity costs are similar to transaction costs, except the costs are calculated for each individual activity as transactions are processed. An activity can accumulate costs categorized by value type, by resource type, and by standard or overtime.


Activity Queue Statistics: Report Window - Queue tab

Element	Description
Maximum Capacity Used (Max Cap Used)	The maximum number of transactions processed in the activity at any one time.
	Average #Waiting Transactions (Avg #Wait) The average number of transactions that were waiting to be processed at the activity, at any one point in time that any transactions were waiting. (In other words, this is the average length of the line if there is a line at all.)
	Maximum #Waiting Transactions (Max #Wait) The highest number in the queue, or the largest number of transactions that were waiting to be processed by the activity at any one point in time.
	Total #Transactions that Waited for Resources (Tot #Res Wait) The total number of transactions that waited to be processed by resources at the activity.
	Total #Transactions Blocked (Tot #Block) The total number of transactions that had to wait to be processed by the activity because of a blocking condition. A blocked condition can occur when an activity batches by time or by gate, during a Delay activity, or when capacity limits are met.
	Resource Waiting Time (Avg Res Wait, Tot Res Wait) The total time that resources that were already acquired for a transaction had to wait because of blocked or waiting for resource conditions.
	Total #Waiting Transactions (Tot #Wait) The total number of transactions that had to wait to be processed by the activity. This is a combination of the total count spent waiting for resources and total blocked count. Tot #Wait = Tot #Res Wait + Tot #Block


Reviewing Activity Time Statistics - Now Try This

For this exercise, we will look at the time, costs, resource, and queue statistics for activities in an office model. When an order arrives, the Front Desk receives it and sends a fax to the main office. Staff picks up the orders twice a day, once at 8:00 am and once at 1:00 pm, for processing. After the order is processed, a follow-up fax is sent to the main office.

For this exercise, a Direct Mailing process diagram is simulated to examine the transaction statistics. There are three departments, Marketing, Graphics, and Staff, that process the materials for a direct mailing campaign. The durations, activity costs, and cost categories are displayed on each activity.


Reporting Results

Using the Report Window to Review Activity Statistics


To open the activity time statistics sample data - Now Try This

To run the simulation and generate a report - Now Try This

To review time statistics using the Report window - Now Try This

To review cost statistics using the Report window - Now Try This

To review resource statistics using the Report Window - Now Try This

To review queue statistics using the Report window - Now Try This

To review resource statistics using the Report Window - Now Try This


To open the activity time statistics sample data - Now Try This

1	On the File menu, click Close to close any open diagrams.

2	On the File menu, click Open.

The Open File dialog box appears.

3	Select the file iGrafx\Pro\8.0\Exercise\Ex10.igx, and click Open.

The process model appears in a window.

Run setup

•	The simulation uses calendar time.

•	The default schedule for the model is Standard. This means that the simulation is active Monday through Friday, 8:00 am to 5:00 pm, with an hour lunch break that is marked Out of Service.

•	The simulation runs for five days.

Generator setup

•	An interarrival generator issues a transaction every three hours.

Resource setup

•	One fax machine is used to fax materials to other cities. The machine is shared in one pool for both departments. The resource type is Equipment.

•	The hourly rate to use the fax machine is $10.00.

•	The Front Desk has a pool of one worker and Staff has a pool of one worker, for a total of two workers. The resource type is Labor.

•	The schedule for the workers is the default schedule.

•	The workers are not authorized to work overtime. The hourly rate for the worker is $14.00.


Reviewing Activity Time Statistics - Now Try This


To run the simulation and generate a report - Now Try This

1	Maximize the iGrafx Process window.

2	On Model menu, click Run, and point to Start to start the simulation.

When the simulation finishes, the Report window appears.


To review time statistics using the Report window - Now Try This

1	In the Report window, click the Time tab.

2	Double-click the Activity Statistics report element.

The Edit Report Element dialog box appears.

3	Click the Statistic tab.

4	For Statistics Category, leave Activities selected.

5	Select and remove Avg Serv, Avg Wait, and Avg Serv Wait.

This helps make the report element easier to read (in terms of width) for our example.

6	Select the Filters tab.

7	For Departments, select Staff.

This narrows down the statistics to be examined, specifically to activities in the Staff department.

8	Select the Format tab.

9	For Sorting, select #Trans.

This sorts the activities in the report element by the number of transactions that were processed.

10	For Time Unit, select Hours.

This displays the times as hours, instead of the automatic unit.

11	Leave the other options unchanged.

12	Click OK.

The modified Activity Statistics report element is displayed.

The average cycle time of Pick up orders is 29.89 hours. This is the total cycle time, 269.00, divided by the total number of transactions, 9, and rounded off. The cycle time is the sum of the activity’s working time, resource waiting time, blocked time, and inactive time.


To review cost statistics using the Report window - Now Try This

1	In the Report window, click the Cost tab.

2	Locate the first Activity Statistics report element.

Do not edit the statistics in this exercise.

The total cost for the statistics in the Front Desk department was $155.00, all of which was marked as Valued Added. The cost is the sum of labor, equipment, and other costs.

3	Locate the second Activity Statistics report element.

Do not edit the statistics in this exercise. This report element breaks activity costs by activity. The costs are added into the previous report element which displays totals by departments.


To review resource statistics using the Report Window - Now Try This

1	In the Report window, click the Resource tab.

2	Locate the Activity Statistics report element.

You do not need to edit anything. This report element contains statistics similar to the Cost tab, with the emphasis on resource types (for example, labor, equipment, and Other).


To review queue statistics using the Report window - Now Try This

1	In the Report window, click the Queue tab.

2	Locate the Activity Statistics report element.

Do not edit the statistics in this exercise. Although the Front Desk processed15 transactions, only 4 transactions completed. This means that 11 transactions were still in process when the simulation ended. We also see the results of the Staff - Pick up order batching activity. There were 19 total transactions that waited at this activity. The most transactions at any one time were 5.

3	This is the end of this exercise. On the File menu, click Close.

or

On the File menu, click Save As to save your changes.


Using the Report Window to Review Resource Statistics

Resource statistics are used to analyze data that has been collected about resources, including workers and other resources that you have defined.

In the Report window, the Cost, Resource, and Queue tabs have report elements containing resource statistics.


Reporting Results

Reviewing Resource Statistics - Now Try This

Reviewing Service Time and Downtime - Now Try This

Resource Statistics Formulas

Using the Report Window to Review Resource Time Statistics - Resource tab

Using the Report Window to Review Resource Cost Statistics - Cost and Resource tabs

Using the Report Window to Review Resource Queue Statistics - Queue tab

Reviewing Resource Statistics - Now Try This

Reviewing Service Time and Downtime - Now Try This


To open the activity time statistics sample data - Now Try This

To run the simulation and generate a report - Now Try This


Resource Statistics Formulas

The following calculations are available in many of the resource statistics.

•	Total (Tot)

The total is the sum of time or costs accrued by the resource. If you apply a filter to the statistic, then only specific things such as departments, resources, or pools are counted. For example, totals that are filtered by department only include processing time that occurred in the department.

•	Average (Avg)

The total divided by the count of resources. If you apply a filter, then only specific departments, resources, or pools are counted.


Using the Report Window to Review Resource Statistics

Using the Report Window to Review Resource Time Statistics - Resource tab


Using the Report Window to Review Resource Time Statistics - Resource tab

The Time tab in the Report window displays resource time statistics. During simulation, a resource can always be classified as busy, out of service, idle, or inactive. You set how a resource spends its time when you specify how activities acquire and use it, for how long, and by its schedule.

The sum of a resource’s time equals the total elapsed time of the simulation.

•	Workers (Count)

The total number of workers for one or all departments.

•	Total Elapsed Time (Time)

The amount of time that elapsed between the simulation starting and ending times.

•	Busy Time (Avg Busy, Tot Busy)

The time that a resource spends working, for example, processing a transaction. This time is paid.

Also see the following discussion on the two subsets of busy time: waiting versus non-waiting time, and standard time versus overtime.

•	Out of Service Time (Avg OOS, Tot OOS)

The time that a resource is active but unavailable to process transactions. A resource can also be acquired by an activity as out of service. Out of service time can be paid or unpaid, depending on how the time span is defined in the resource’s schedule.

•	Idle Time (Avg Idle, Tot Idle)

The time that a resource spends available for use but not currently processing a transaction. This time is paid.

•	Inactive Time

The remaining time when a resource is out of schedule. This time is unpaid.


Using the Report Window to Review Resource Statistics

Subsets of Resource Busy Time

Combinations of Resource Times


Subsets of Resource Busy Time

•	Resource Waiting Time and Non-Waiting Time (Avg Res Wait, Tot Res Wait)

The time that a resource spends waiting. This occurs when an activity processing a transaction acquires a resource with the Wait option, and the transaction must wait for some reason (for example, waiting for another resource, or the transaction incurs blocked or inactive time).

Tot Busy = Tot Res Wait + (Total resource non-waiting time)

•	Resource Standard Time and Resource Overtime (Avg OT, Tot OT)

The time that a resource spends in standard time or overtime. A resource is in overtime if an activity acquires a resource and requires that it finish processing the transaction even though the resource should go out of schedule (become inactive) prior to finishing.

Tot Busy = (Resource standard time) + Tot OT


Combinations of Resource Times

•	Resource Utilization (Res Util%)

The percentage of scheduled active time (when a resource should be in schedule) that a resource is busy but not out of service.

The total scheduled active time is calculated by figuring the total number of hours during which the resource is scheduled to be active during the entire simulation. For example, assume a simulation runs for two calendar days using the Standard schedule. This creates 18 hours scheduled active time and two hours out of service time (lunch breaks) for a total of 16 hours. If the total busy time for a worker is eight hours, the resource utilization is 50%.

•	Non-Waiting Resource Utilization (NW Util%)

The percentage of scheduled active time (when a resource should be in schedule) that a resource is busy but not waiting or out of service.

If the worker in the previous example has accrued two hours waiting for another resource, then the non-waiting resource utilization is 37.50%.

Note
It is possible to get over 100% resource utilization because overtime can cause busy time outside of the scheduled active time.


Using the Report Window to Review Resource Cost Statistics - Cost and Resource tabs

The costs associated with a resource are specified when you define a resource and at the time when an activity uses a resource.

The resource paid times are divided into the following categories (also see the previous discussion on resource standard time in Subsets of Resource Busy Time).

•	Resource Standard Paid Time

A resource’s normally scheduled hours. This includes busy time, out of service time (but only if it has been marked paid in the schedule) and idle time.

(Resource standard paid time) = Tot Busy + Tot OOS (paid) + Tot Idle

•	Resource Overtime (Avg OT, Tot OT)

The amount of time that a resource worked overtime.

A resource’s cost is the combination of standard cost, overtime cost, and any per use costs.

•	Standard Cost (Avg Std Cost, Tot Std Cost)

The cost of the resource working during standard hours. This is the result of multiplying the resource’s standard paid hours by the hourly rate that is specified in the resource definition. )

Tot Std Cost = (Resource standard paid time) * (Resource’s standard hourly rate)

•	Overtime Cost (Avg OT Cost, Tot OT Cost)

The cost of the resource working during overtime. This is the result of multiplying the overtime hours by the overtime hourly rate of the resource.

Tot OT Cost = Tot OT * (Resource’s overtime hourly rate)

•	Use Cost (Avg Use Cost, Tot Use Cost)

The per use cost is determined by the number of transactions that are processed. The cost is incurred whenever an activity uses the resource, either as Acquire or Activity to process a transaction.

Tot Use Cost = (Number of times the resource is used) * (Resource’s per use cost)


Using the Report Window to Review Resource Statistics

Reviewing Resource Statistics - Now Try This

Reviewing Service Time and Downtime - Now Try This


Using the Report Window to Review Resource Queue Statistics - Queue tab

These resource queue statistics are used to examine the behavior of transactions requesting the use of resources at activities.

Note
The difference between a resource queue and an activity queue is that a resource queue is created when transactions are waiting for a resource. Activity queues are created when transactions wait at an activity to be processed.

•	Total # Trans (#Trans)

The number of requests of this resource queue from transactions.

•	Total # Waiting Trans (Tot Wait#)

The number of requests of this resource queue that cannot be serviced (e.g., all resources busy) causing the transactions to wait.

•	Maximum Number of Waiting Transactions (Max Wait#)

The highest number in the queue, or the largest number of transactions that were waiting for a resource at this queue at any one point in time.

•	Average Number of Waiting Transactions (Avg Wait#)

The average number of transactions that were waiting at the queue at any one point in time.

•	Transaction Waiting Time (Avg Wait, Tot Wait)

The time that transactions waited for resources from this queue, including all transactions that did not wait. For example, if two transactions waited 10 minutes and two other transactions did not wait, then the total transaction waiting time is 20 minutes and the average transaction waiting time is 5 minutes.

•	Average Non-zero Transaction Waiting Time (Avg NZ Wait)

The average time that transactions that waited for resources from this queue, not including any transactions that did not wait (for example, all waiting times are greater than zero). In the above example, the average non-zero transaction waiting time is 10 minutes.


Using the Report Window to Review Resource Statistics

Using the Report Window to Review Resource Cost Statistics - Cost and Resource tabs


Reviewing Resource Statistics - Now Try This

For this exercise, a simple process diagram is simulated to examine how the resource statistics are calculated. The process diagram has two activities, a Start activity (no duration) and a Perform task activity that has a duration between 1 and 2 hours.


Reporting Results

Using the Report Window to Review Resource Statistics

Using the Report Window to Review Resource Cost Statistics - Cost and Resource tabs

Reporting Results - Now Try This

Reviewing Activity Time Statistics - Now Try This

Reviewing Service Time and Downtime - Now Try This


To open the resource queue statistics exercise data - Now Try This

To run the resource queue simulation - Now Try This


To open the resource queue statistics exercise data - Now Try This

1	On the File menu, click Close to close any open diagrams.

2	On the File menu, click Open.

The Open File dialog box appears.

3	Select the file iGrafx\Pro\8.0\Exercise\Ex10ref.igx, and click Open.

The process model appears in a window.

Run setup

•	The simulation uses calendar time.

•	The simulation runs for five days.

Schedule setup

•	The default schedule for the model is Standard.

The simulation is active from Monday through Friday, 8:00 am to 5:00 pm. There is an unpaid lunch hour which is marked paid, out of service.

•	The scheduled active time (for example, all the time spans in the schedule) for one week is 45 hours. Forty of these hours are standard time; five are unpaid, out of service time.

Generator setup

•	A transaction is generated every ninety minutes.

Resource setup

•	One worker is available.

•	The worker is authorized to work up to two hours overtime. The activity Perform task allows overtime if the task has already started.

•	The hourly rate for the worker is $10; the overtime hourly rate is $15.


Reviewing Resource Statistics - Now Try This


To run the resource queue simulation - Now Try This

1	On the Model menu, click Run, and point to Start.

When the simulation is complete, the report results are appear in the Report window.

2	In the Report window, click the Resource tab.

You do not have to edit anything. First, look at resource utilization. As defined previously, it is equal to the resource’s busy time, divided by the active time, which is all of the schedule’s time spans that are not out of service (OOS).

Next, examine some of the other resource statistics. The report shows that the resource accrued 37.47 hours busy time (of which 2.12 were overtime) and 4.66 hours idle time. Lunches account for the five hours unpaid, out of service time.

If you take the busy time (37.47 hours), subtract overtime (2.12), and add idle time (4.66), the total is equal to the resource standard time (40.01, including round-off).

And finally, look at some of the costs that have accrued. The total labor cost, by activity, is $385.31. If we subtract the overtime cost of $31.86 (2.12 hours at $15 an hour) from it, we have a total standard cost of $353.45. This equals the average busy time (37.47 hours), minus overtime (2.12 hours), multiplied by the $10 hourly rate.

3	This is the end of this exercise. On the File menu, click Close.

or

On the File menu, click Save As to save your changes.


Reviewing Service Time and Downtime - Now Try This

In this exercise, you will examine service time and unscheduled downtime for equipment. In the process diagram, there are two departments: Manufacturing and Downtime. The purpose of the Downtime department is to perform unscheduled service.

A distinction is made between scheduled and unscheduled out of service because the former can automatically be built into a schedule (for example, the lunch breaks in the previous example). Unscheduled out of service, or downtime, typically happens more randomly.


Using the Report Window to Review Resource Statistics

Reviewing Activity Time Statistics - Now Try This

Reviewing Resource Statistics - Now Try This


To open the exercise data for reviewing service times - Now Try This

To run the simulation - Now Try This


To open the exercise data for reviewing service times - Now Try This

1	On the File menu, click Close to close any open diagrams.

2	On the File menu, click Open.

3	Select iGrafx\Pro\8.0\Exercise\Ex11serv.igx, and click Open.

The process model appears in a window.

Run setup

•	The model uses calendar time.

•	The default schedule for the model is Standard.

•	The simulation runs for ten minutes.

Generator setup

•	Each department has its own Start statement and its own generator.

•	One transaction is generated in Manufacturing every one minute.

•	One transaction is generated in Downtime between every five and seven minutes. (This number could easily be more random.) The first transaction is issued after the simulation has run for 5 minutes.

Resource setup

•	One equipment resource is available.

•	The equipment resource is used for the Use equipment activity in Manufacturing.

•	The equipment resource is marked as out of service for the Service activity in Downtime. You can verify this by looking at the Resource tab for this activity.


Reviewing Service Time and Downtime - Now Try This


To run the simulation - Now Try This

1	On the Model menu, click Run, and point to Start.

When the simulation is complete, the report results appear in the Report window.

2	In the Report window, click the Resource tab.

In the first report element, for resource utilization, you can see that the worker was utilized 50% and the equipment was fully utilized for the entire process (100%).

In the second report element, we see that out of the total simulation time (which was set to 10 minutes), the average busy time for the equipment was 9 minutes and the average out of service time was 1 minute. There was no idle time.

3	This is the end of this exercise. On the File menu, click Close.

or

On the File menu, click Save As to save your changes.


Creating Custom Statistics in the Report Window

You can create custom statistics to make calculations that are specific to your design, using arithmetic operators, scenario attributes, and functions.


Reporting Results


To create custom statistics


To create custom statistics

1	With a report window active, on the Reports menu, click Custom Stats.

The Custom Statistics dialog box appears.

To modify a statistic, select it and click Modify.

To delete a statistic, select it and click Delete.

2	To add a new statistic, click Add.

The Edit Custom Statistic dialog box appears.

3	For Name, type a brief name to describe the statistic.

4	Select Transaction, Resource, Expression, or Monitor.

Transaction. Select one of the statistics: Total Time Elapsed, Completion Count, Service Time, Waiting Time, Cycle Time, Work Time, Resource Wait Time, Blocked Time, Cost, VA Cost, BVA Cost, or NVA Cost.

For example, TotalOrders equals the number of transactions that complete.

TotalOrders = Completion Count

Resource. Select the name of the resource and one of the following: Count, Use Count, Time Busy, Time Out Of Service, Time Waiting, Total Cost, Busy Cost, Use Cost, Time Idle, and Overtime.

For example, InUse equals the time busy for resource named Laser.

InUse = Laser Time Busy

Expression. Click to use scenario attributes, functions, members, operators, and already-defined custom statistic names to create an expression.

For example, if the wage rate is $15 per hour, then you use the following expression.

Wage = 15 * Hours(Time)

Monitor. Select the name of the monitor and one of the following: Completion Count, Service Time, Waiting Time, Attribute Value, Cycle Time, Work Time, Resource Wait Time, Blocked Time, Cost, VA Cost, BVA Cost, or NVA Cost.

For example, Total Count equals the number of transactions that have come through a monitor.

TotalCount = Pass Count

5	For Hidden, check the box to indicate that the statistic is hidden (for example, not part of the output results in the report). You can click to toggle the box.

6	After you finish editing the Custom Statistics dialog box, click OK.

Unless you have specified that it is hidden, the definition of the custom statistic is added the Custom tab on the report window.

After you create a custom statistic, you view its results by creating a report element with Custom Stats as the Statistic category. The statistic can be added to any tab (for example, Time, Cost, and Resource) in the report window.


Reporting Results


Naming or Deleting Simulation Data

You can create reports that do the following:

•	Append a new report to an existing report so that you can compare the results of a subsequent simulation.

•	Replace the report data with each simulation.

•	Create a new report for each simulation, the default setting (for example, reports are named Sim #1, Sim #2, and so forth).

The report names and creation options appear in the Run Setup dialog box and in the report elements. This dialog box appears when you select the Run Setup command on the Model menu.


Reporting Results

Run Setup dialog box - Initialization and Reports tab


To name or delete simulation data


To name or delete simulation data

1	On the Report menu, click Simulation Data.

The Simulation Data dialog box appears. It contains a list of the simulation runs that are currently appended to the report. If a name is dimmed, it is unassigned.

2	Select the simulation name.

3	Click Name to display the Name Simulation Data dialog box.

4	Type a name.

5	Click OK to close the Name Simulation Data dialog box.

6	Click Close to close the Simulation Data dialog box.


Using Department Statistics

When activities span multiple departments, the report results take into account the shared elements of time, cost, and resources.

In the report results, a cross-department activity appears in each of the departments that participate in the activity. You use the Structure tab of the Edit Report Element dialog box to specify that individual departments appear in the row legends. For example, the department names and the text for the activity are displayed in the report element.


Reporting Results

Transaction Statistics (Time)

Activity Statistics (Time)

Transaction Statistics (Cost)

Activity Statistics (Cost)


Transaction Statistics (Time)

When a transaction is processed in a cross-department activity, time accumulates in the same manner as for an activity in one department. In other words, the time that the transaction spends being processed accumulates the same for one department as for several. Like all transaction statistics, the time can be either working, waiting for resource, blocked, or inactive time. If you look at the transaction statistics by department, you will see that the time accumulates the same in each department that participates in the cross-department activity.

For example, at a Support Agency, a service bulletin (the transaction) is reviewed for one hour by editors from two departments. The transaction working time is one hour, so each department accumulates one hour of working time.

An interesting result of work being performed in parallel is that time accumulates in several departments concurrently. If you add up the working times of several departments, the sum can easily exceed the total elapsed time of the simulation. In the above example, the total service time is one hour and not two hours.


Using the Report Window to Review Resource Statistics

Cross-Department Time Statistics

Cross-Department Cost Statistics


Activity Statistics (Time)

When a transaction is processed by a cross-department activity, the activity accumulates time. Like all activity statistics, this means that the activity can be accumulating work time, resource waiting time, blocked time, or inactive time. If you look at this time sorted by department, you will see that each department accumulates the same time.

For example, at a Software Code Review meeting, participants from three departments attend a meeting that takes three hours. The activity accrues three hours in each department but the total working time is three hours and not nine hours.


Transaction Statistics (Cost)

Transaction costs for a cross-department activity are the result of adding or accumulating both fixed costs and resource costs. When a transaction is processed, the fixed cost of the activity is split equally among all participating departments. The resource costs are assigned to their individual departments.

Let’s begin with a simple example that uses only a fixed activity cost and no resource costs. For a bulk mailing of a brochure (the transaction), two departments share in the purchase of a mailing list that costs $400. The transaction has a total cost of $400, of which $200 is accrued in each department.


Activity Statistics (Cost)

Each department that participates in a cross-department activity accrues activity statistics.

To continue the previous example, look at how the fixed costs are created for an activity. Fixed costs are assigned as part of the Activity Base in the Task tab on the Edit Activity dialog box.

Now add resource costs to the previous example. The labels for the brochure (still the transaction) are printed using a computer from Dept. A and another printer from Dept. B (the two resources). Creating the labels takes one hour.

The activity still has a fixed cost of $400 to buy the mailing list. The computer in Dept. A costs $20 per hour and the printer in Dept. B costs $40 per hour.

By default, the fixed costs for a cross-department activity apply to all participating departments. However, you can use the Other resource type to model fixed activity costs that are used by individual departments.


Resources

The resources associated with a cross-department activity can be used by an individual department or by all departments that participate in the activity. In other words, in the Resources tab of the Edit Activity dialog box, you can name an individual department or choose All departments. If a resource is specified for All departments, then each department uses its own instance of the resource.

For example, in a Corporate Planning Division, two departments participate in a two-hour planning meeting. The activity specifies that it uses one worker resource and one laptop computer, each of which we defined to exist in a separate pool by department. The resource specification applies to both departments, that is, each department uses one of their own workers and one of their own computers, for a total of two of each. The resource statistics indicate which departments used individual resources.


Using Graphs

You can display report elements in either a tabular format or as a graph. If you select a graph, several graph types are available, including such common graphs as pie charts and line graphs, and other more unusual graphs such as a scatter graph or a box-whisker graph.

When you run a simulation, statistics are gathered about process times, costs, resource utilization, and queues. These statistics are categorized by transaction, activity, resource, or monitor.

You can use custom statistics to create your own unique combinations of the standard statistics. For example, you can set costing information or revenue formulas. The custom statistics are updated and calculated automatically with each simulation.

You can also maintain several sets of named simulation data to compare results across simulation runs and scenarios.


Creating Graphs

Graph Types

Creating Graphs from Report Data - Now Try This


Creating Graphs

The report results can be displayed as a graph. You have your choice of 2D or 3D styles for many of the graphs.


Using Graphs

Graph Types

Creating Graphs from Report Data - Now Try This


To create a graph using report data

To open the exercise data for creating a graph - Now Try This

To change simulation names - Now Try This

To create a graph using report data - Now Try This


To create a graph using report data

1	In a report window, double-click the report element that you want to graph.

2	In the Edit Report Element dialog box, select the Format tab.

3	For Display As, select Graph.

This adds the Graph Style button.

4	Click Graph Style.

The Graph Control dialog box appears. Use this dialog box to select the type of graph and other characteristics such as style, titles, fonts, markers, and background.


To open the exercise data for creating a graph - Now Try This

To change simulation names - Now Try This

To create a graph using report data - Now Try This

Graph Control dialog box

Using Graphs

Graph Types

Creating Graphs from Report Data - Now Try This


Graph Types

You can select different titles, fonts, and colors for many of the areas and descriptive text in a graph. The style options that are available depend on the type of graph that you select.

Creating Graphs

Pie Chart

Polar Graph

Bubble Graph

2D Scatter Graph

3D Scatter Graph

Line Graph

2D Bar Graph

3D Bar Graph

Area Graph

Gantt Chart

High-Low-Close Graph

Candlestick Graph

Box-Whisker Graph

Tape Graph

Surface Graph


Using Graphs

Creating Graphs

Creating Graphs from Report Data - Now Try This


Pie Chart

The pie chart, one of the simplest graph types, consists of a circle (or pie) divided into two or more sections (slices). Pie charts show the proportion of parts to the whole. By labeling each pie slice with the quantity it represents, you can also compare parts to each other, although not as effectively as with a bar graph or other graph type.

•	Each pie chart can graph only one data set, with each data point represented by a pie slice.

•	Negative data points are ignored and not shown.

•	You can draw any pie chart in either 2D or 3D form.

When to use a pie chart

•	To graph a single data set when your primary message is the relationship of the parts to the whole.

Other graph types to consider

•	If you are more concerned with comparing parts to each other than to the whole, try a 2D bar graph or 3D bar graph.

•	If you have more than one data set and want to compare parts to the whole (one data set compared to the sum of all data sets), consider a stacked bar graph or area graph.


Graph Types

Using Graphs

Creating Graphs

Creating Graphs from Report Data - Now Try This


Polar Graph

The polar graph is essentially a line graph drawn on a circular grid, showing trends in values on the basis of angles. Like logarithmic graphs, polar graphs are useful primarily in mathematical and statistical applications.

•	In a polar graph, the independent variable is charted on the angular axis, based on an origin (zero point) of three o'clock. The dependent variable is charted on the radial axis, with the origin at the center of the circle.

•	Polar graphs can chart multiple data sets, each represented by a single line, with as many data points as are meaningful.

•	If you do not supply an angular position for each data point, the first point is placed at an angle of 0, with subsequent points at increments of 360 (degrees) divided by the total number of points.

•	When drawing a polar graph, you can use any combination of lines, symbols, and sticks drawn between points and the center origin.

When to use a polar graph

•	To graph according to angles or other criteria particularly suited to a circular format.

•	To graph repeating data sets that flow into each other. For example, you can graph temperatures hour by hour for several consecutive days, representing each day in a different color or pattern.

Other graph types to consider

•	Any data set you can chart on a polar graph can also be shown on a line graph. Line graphs are usually more readable, but they cannot represent angles graphically or show multiple data sets linked end to end.


Bubble Graph

A bubble graph is a special form of the scatter graph showing bubbles, which are circular markers of variable size plotted on an X-Y grid. The size of each bubble is typically used to show the relative importance of a data point, such as the percentage of gross sales it represents. You can use a bubble graph to chart three variables in two dimensions

•	In a bubble graph, all three variables are independent. You can select which variable to show on the X axis, which to show on the Y axis, and which to show by the size of the bubble.

•	You must supply values for the X position, Y position, and bubble size for each point.

•	You cannot draw curves on a bubble graph.

When to use a bubble graph

•	When you have three variables to graph and want to show them on a single set of axes.


2D Scatter Graph

The 2D scatter graph consists of plotted points scattered around an X-Y grid. The pattern may reveal a relationship between the two variables measured by the X and Y axes.

•	Scatter graphs can chart multiple data sets, each represented by a different symbol, each having any number of data points.

•	You can display scatter plots alone, curves alone, or both together. Your selections in the  property page in the Graph Control dialog box determine the combination.

When to use a scatter graph

•	To view actual measurements or observations on a grid, possibly revealing patterns and trends in those data.

•	With plotted points alone when you want to show the data empirically, without suggesting a relationship between the X and Y variables.

•	With a curve alone when you want to show the relationship between the X and Y variables as suggested by the data, irrespective of the actual data points.

•	With both plotted points and a curve when you want to show the empirical data as well as suggest trends.

Other graph types to consider

•	When you are graphing against only two variables and you can plot points at regular intervals along the X axis without specifying X positions, you should generally use a line graph with symbols instead of a 2D scatter graph.


3D Scatter Graph

The 3D scatter graph consists of plotted points scattered around an X-Y-Z space. The pattern may reveal a relationship between the three variables measured by the X, Y, and Z axes.

•	Scatter graphs can chart multiple data sets, each represented by a different symbol, each having any number of data points.

•	When defining a scatter graph, you usually supply an X position for each data point. However, you can supply no X positions and automatically place points at X increments of 1, starting at 0.

•	You can emphasize the Y value of each plotted point by selecting the Sticks option in the  property page in the Graph Control dialog box.

When to use a 3D scatter graph

•	To view actual measurements or observations in 3D space, possibly revealing patterns and trends in those data.

Other graph types to consider

•	When you are graphing against three variables, consider a bubble graph, which is generally easier to read than a 3D scatter graph. Instead of using three axes (X, Y, and Z), bubble graphs plot bubbles of different sizes along an X and a Y axis. The third variable is shown by the size of each bubble.


Line Graph

The line graph consists of one or more lines (or sequences of symbols) drawn on an X-Y grid. These graphs let you show trends in values over a continuous scale.

•	In a line graph, the X axis usually represents an independent variable, which is most often a time scale. The Y axis usually shows a dependent variable, such as a quantity or percentage.

•	When drawing a line graph, you can use any combination of lines, symbols, and vertical sticks. You can select this combination in the  property page in the Graph Control dialog box.

•	In the  property page in the Graph Control dialog box, you can select to show the X axis, Y axis, or both in a logarithmic scale – creating a lin/log, log/lin, or log/log graph.

When to use a line graph

•	To show the trend of one or more data sets over time or another continuous scale.

Other graph types to consider

•	If your main focus is on the quantities at various data points rather than the trends in those quantities, consider an absolute area graph.

•	If you are graphing discrete values – with data points that are based on two independent variables and that do not necessarily occur at regular intervals – use a 2D scatter graph.

•	If your data points are not consecutive – for example, if you want to graph data only for 1987, 1990, and 1992 – a 2D bar graph or 3D bar graph may be more appropriate.


2D Bar Graph

A bar graph consists of two or more parallel bars of equal width drawn on an X-Y grid. Bar graphs compare amounts to each other. They can also suggest trends, especially in vertical form.

•	2D bar graphs are available in three styles: simple, stacked, and stacked percentage. You can select a style on the  property page in the Graph Control dialog box.

•	You can draw bars either vertically or horizontally. In the vertical format, viewers tend to attribute a left-to-right sequence to the bars, whether you intend one or not. To select vertical or horizontal bars, go to the Style property page in the Graph Control dialog box.

When to use a bar graph

•	In simple form when you want to compare values to each other.

•	In clustered form (simple style with multiple data sets) when you want to compare corresponding data points of multiple data sets to each other.

•	In stacked form when you want to compare each data set to the sum of all sets.

•	In stacked percentage form when you want to show a percentage breakdown of the sum of data sets.

Other graph types to consider

•	If you are graphing only one data set and you want to compare parts to the whole rather than to each other, use a pie chart.

•	When the trend of values is your primary concern, and especially when you want to imply a gradual flow between data points, consider a line graph or area graph.


3D Bar Graph

A bar graph consists of two or more parallel bars of equal width drawn on an X-Y grid. Bar graphs compare amounts to each other. They can also suggest trends, especially in vertical form.

•	3D bar graphs are available in four styles: simple, stacked, stacked percentage, and z-clustered. You can select this style on the  property page in the Graph Control dialog box.

•	You can draw bars either vertically or horizontally. In the vertical format, viewers tend to attribute a left-to-right sequence to the bars, whether you intend one or not. To select vertical or horizontal bars, go to the main property page in the Graph Control dialog box.

When to use a bar graph

•	In simple form when you want to compare values to each other.

•	In clustered (simple style with multiple data sets) or z-clustered form when you want to compare corresponding data points of multiple data sets to each other.

•	In stacked form when you want to compare each data set to the sum of all sets.

•	In stacked percentage form when you want to show a percentage breakdown of the sum of data sets.

Other graph types to consider

•	If you're graphing only one data set and you want to compare parts to the whole rather than to each other, use a pie chart.

•	When the trend of values is your primary concern, and especially when you want to imply a gradual flow between data points, consider a line graph or area graph.


Area Graph

The area graph consists of one or more lines drawn on an X-Y grid, with the area between the line and the X axis filled in. Like line graphs, area graphs show trends in values but give greater emphasis to quantities.

•	Area graphs are available in three forms: stacked, absolute, and stacked percentage. You can select one of these forms on the  property page in the Graph Control dialog box.

•	Negative data points are ignored and not shown.

•	You can draw any area graph in either 2D or 3D form.

When to use an area graph

•	To show the trend of one or more data sets over time or another continuous scale, with an emphasis on quantities.

•	In cumulative form when you want to compare each data set to the sum of all sets.

•	In absolute form when you want to compare data sets to each other. Absolute area graphs work better in 3D.

•	In percentage form when you want to view trends in the percentage breakdown of the sum of data sets.

Other graph types to consider

•	If you want to emphasize trends themselves (the downward or upward movement of values) over quantities, use a line graph.

•	If you want data points to stand as separate entities rather than flowing together, consider a 2D bar graph or 3D bar graph (in stacked or stacked percentage form) rather than a cumulative or percentage area graph.


Gantt Chart

The Gantt chart is a specialized version of the horizontal bar graph in simple or stacked form. It's used almost exclusively to show a project schedule, with each bar or bar segment marking the start time, duration, and completion time of a task.

•	Depending on your needs, you can have each bar represent either a single task (one solid bar) or a sequence of tasks (stacked bar).

•	Gantt charts are made up of at least two data sets. The first set contains the values for the start point of each bar, and subsequent sets contain the end points of each bar segment.

•	Unlike bar graphs, Gantt charts are always drawn horizontally and only in 2D form.

•	Gantt bars are placed along the Y axis at increments of 1, starting at 1.

•	In default form, Gantt chart bars are drawn with no spaces between them. To add spaces, go to the  property page in the Graph Control dialog box and select the Spaced option.

•	You cannot show negative data points on a Gantt chart.

When to use a Gantt chart

•	To graph a project schedule when you know the start time and end time for each task.

Other graph types to consider

•	If every task starts at the same point, you can use a 2D bar graph or 3D bar graph (in simple or stacked form) to show the same information.


High-Low-Close Graph

The high-low-close (HLC) graph lets you chart a range of values on an X-Y grid. The range is shown as a vertical bar, with horizontal crossbars for the high, the low, and a normative value usually called the close. An alternate version, the open-high-low-close (OHLC) graph, adds a fourth crossbar for another normative value usually called the open.

•	When you click the High-Low icon on the 2D Gallery property page, you get an HLC graph by default. To get an OHLC graph, go to the  property page in the Graph Control dialog box and select the Open Values option.

•	An HLC graph must have three data sets (high, low, and close values), and an OHLC graph must have four data sets (open, high, low, and close values). There is no limit on the number of data points you can graph, but each data set should have the same number.

•	You can also draw the graph without the open and close bars, without the high and low bars, or with no bars at all. These options are available in the  property page in the Graph Control dialog box.

When to use a high-low-close graph

•	When you're charting other values that can be set up in a similar fashion with three (HLC) or four (OHLC) data sets – for example, high, low, and average daily temperatures by month.

Other graph types to consider

•	If you're considering the OHLC graph, be sure to look at the candlestick graph as well. It shows the same information and also emphasizes the trend (up or down) of close values from point to point.


Candlestick Graph

The candlestick graph is an alternative to the open-high-low-close graph. It consists of a series of boxes, with lines extending up and down from the ends, drawn on an X-Y grid. The top and bottom of each box indicate the open and close values. If the open value is higher, the box is filled with a color; if the close value is higher, the box is filled with white. The ascending and descending lines indicate the high and low values for that point.

•	The candlestick graph requires four data sets (open, high, low, and close values), each of which should have the same number of data points.

•	If you do not supply an X position for each data point, points are placed at increments of 1, starting at 0.

•	No style variants are available.

When to use a candlestick graph

•	When you're charting other values that can be set up in a similar fashion with four data sets.

Other graph types to consider

•	The open-high-low-close graph serves the same purpose as the candlestick graph, but with less emphasis on whether each plot point shows an up or down. A possible advantage of open-high-low-close over candlestick is that you can fit curves into high-low-close graphs to indicate trends in values.


Box-Whisker Graph

The box-whisker graph illustrates the spread of data groups around their medians, using a box and whiskers to break down each data group by percentile.

When creating a box-whisker graph, you can either specify the seven percentile parameters for each symbol (provide parametric data) or supply a group of raw data for the Graph Control to process and graph.

•	With parametric data, you need exactly seven data sets, which specify the values at percentiles of 5, 10, 25, 50 (the median), 75, 90, and 95.

•	With raw data, you need enough data sets to hold all the values making up each group (always at least seven sets). When you draw the graph, sort the values for each group, then assign the seven percentile positions (5, 10, 25, 50, 75, 90, or 95) to the values closest to those percentiles. For example, in a group of 20 values, the second value would be shown as the tenth percentile.

•	For raw data, you can also add symbols to the graph showing each value. If a group contains duplicate values, only one symbol is shown at that position.

•	The number of data points is the number of box-whisker symbols.

When to use a box-whisker graph

•	When you want to show how the values in one or more data groups are distributed around their medians. You can either specify the percentile breakdowns of the data groups or provide raw data and have the Graph Control determine the percentile breakdowns.


Tape Graph

The tape graph is a 3D form of the line graph. It gives you only one styling option – tapes drawn between data points - but is otherwise the same as the line graph.


Surface Graph

You can use the surface graph to represent data topographically in three dimensions. The graph uses an X-Z grid drawn at regular increments in the X and Z directions, with one Y value for each X-Z intersection. The color scale of the graph is automatically keyed to the height of its points, helping the viewer differentiate between higher and lower values.

•	A surface graph represents a minimum of two data sets and usually at least three. Each data set holds the Y values of a row of points along the X axis. The first set applies to the row of points perpendicular to the Z origin (the back of the graph), and subsequent sets apply to additional rows.

•	All panels of the surface graph (the rectangles formed by the X and Z grids) are colored according to their height. You specify the colors at the maximum and minimum points of the axis, and the Graph Control interpolates colors between these points.

•	When drawing a surface graph, you can use lines to show the edges of each panel, fill each panel with a solid color, or use both lines and fills. You can also add side walls to the front and right edges of the graph. All of these options are available in the property page in the Graph Control dialog box.

Other graph types to consider

•	If your data points have irregularly spaced Z values, consider a 3D scatter graph.

•	If your data points have irregularly spaced X values but regular Z values, try a 3D bar graph or tape graph.


Creating Graphs from Report Data - Now Try This

In this exercise, you will change the names of simulation data for clarity and then create a line graph to display the results of five simulations. The process diagram consists of two departments that make copies of a report using a shared copier. Your purpose for running several simulations is to compare resource utilization when the amount of time between generated transactions is reduced.


Using Graphs

Creating Graphs

Graph Types

Graph Control dialog box


To open the exercise data for creating a graph - Now Try This

To change simulation names - Now Try This

To create a graph using report data - Now Try This


To open the exercise data for creating a graph - Now Try This

1	On the File menu, click Close to close any open diagrams.

2	On the File menu, click Open.

3	Select iGrafx\Pro\8.0\Exercise\Ex13.igx, and click Open.

The process map appears.

4	On the File menu, click Components.

5	In the Components dialog box, select Report1.

The Report window appears and is active.

6	Click the Resource tab.

7	Locate the first report element, Resource Utilization %.

The report element contains the results of five simulations.


Graph Control dialog box

Creating Graphs from Report Data - Now Try This


To change simulation names - Now Try This

When you examine the tabular element, you can see trends in the numbers. For example, Worker utilization went up with each subsequent simulation, although the Copier capped out after the third time. However, without appropriate labels, it’s difficult to understand what each simulation represents. In this part of the exercise, you will add simulation labels to describe the individual simulations.

1	On the Edit menu, click Simulation Data.

The Simulation Data dialog box appears.

2	Double-click Sim #1.

or

Select the simulation name and select the Name button.

The Name Simulation Data dialog box appears.

3	Enter 3 Hours, and click OK.

For the first simulation, transactions were generated every three hours.

4	Repeat the steps to change the name of Sim #2 to 2 Hours.

Transactions were generated every two hours.

5	Change the name of Sim #3 to 1 Hour.

Transactions were generated every hour.

6	Change the name of Sim #4 to 30 Min.

Transactions were generated every 30 minutes.

7	Change the name of Sim #5 to 15 Min.

Transactions were generated every 15 minutes.

8	Click Close to close the Simulation Data dialog box.

The report element contains the new simulation names.


To create a graph using report data - Now Try This

Trends in the report data are much easier to see when the data is shown as graph. For example, a line graph is a good choice to show tendencies and relationships between resources. In this exercise, you will change the tabular element to a graph.

1	Double-click the Resource Utilization % report element.

2	In the Edit Report Element dialog box, select the Format tab.

3	For Display As, select Graph.

4	Click Graph Style.

5	In the Graph Control dialog box, select the 2D Gallery tab.

6	Select the Line graph.

This specifies that the graph uses individual lines for each simulation to connect data points for resource utilization.

7	Select the Markers tab.

8	Under Symbols, for Size, use the sliding scale to increase the size of the markers.

This increases the size of the symbols drawn to differentiate each line, in this case, a triangle and a square. Markers are useful for making graphs more readable, especially for printing in black and white if the on-line graph uses a lot of color to differentiate data points.

Leave the other settings on this tab unchanged.

9	Select the Style tab.

10	For Markers, click to select both Symbols and Lines. Do not change the other settings on this tab.

This enables the markers. (In the previous step, you set their size.)

11	Select the Titles tab.

12	For Graph Title, type: Resource Utilization Percentage

The previous title was Resource Utilization %.

13	For Bottom Title, type: Generator Interarrival Rate

Do not change the other settings on this tab.

14	Select the Fonts tab.

15	Set a new typeface and size for the Graph Title (you used bold Book Antiqua), and click Apply Now.

16	Set a new typeface and size for Other Titles. Do not change the other settings on this tab.

17	Click OK to close the Graph Control dialog box.

18	Click OK to close the Edit Report Element dialog box.

This displays the report element.

Tip

To display the Graph Control dialog box to make other edits, press Shift and double-click a report element.

19	On the File menu, click Close.

This is the end of this self-paced exercise. You can save your changes.


Simulation Start Date dialog box

Use this dialog box to set the date and time from which to start the simulation.


Getting Started With Simulation

Run Setup dialog box - Simulation Time tab

Run Setup dialog box - Initialization and Reports tab

Run Setup dialog box - Snapshots tab

Taking Snapshots During a Simulation


Set Snapshot Time dialog box

Use this dialog box to set the time that a snapshot will occur.


Getting Started With Simulation

Run Setup dialog box - Simulation Time tab

Run Setup dialog box - Initialization and Reports tab

Run Setup dialog box - Snapshots tab

Taking Snapshots During a Simulation


Define Resources dialog box

Use this dialog box to add or edit the resources that are used to process transactions at activities. You can either modify an existing resource or add a new one. You define the number or resources, their schedule, and costs.


Running a Simulation

Add New Resource dialog box

Resource Pools dialog box

About Resource Costs

Define Days dialog box

Define Hours dialog box

Edit Composite Schedule dialog box

Define Event dialog box

Properties dialog box - Resources tab: Type of Resource


To define resources

To define resource pools

To create shared or unshared resource pools


Define Schedule dialog box

Use this dialog box to define a list of hours and days, and schedules used by resources. A schedule can be used in a model to specify when activities, resources, and generators are active or inactive.


Using Schedules

Defining Schedules

Running a Simulation

Setting Up a Simulation Run

Using Generators

Tracing the Model While Running the Simulation


To define or edit a schedule

To add or edit a definition for days within a schedule

To add or edit a definition for hours within a schedule

To create a composite schedule

To define an event schedule


Define Events dialog box

Use this dialog box to define regularly occurring times, or events, and default events.


Defining Event Schedules

Defining Hours for Events

Defining Days for Events

Defining Schedules

Using Schedules

Defining Schedules

Setting Up a Simulation Run

Using Generators


To define an event schedule

To define or edit a schedule

To add or edit a definition for days within a schedule

To add or edit a definition for hours within a schedule

To create a composite schedule


Define Attributes dialog box

Use this dialog box to add, modify, and delete transaction attributes for use by transactions, processes, scenarios, or departments.


Describing Model Behavior Using the Model Commands

About Transaction Attributes

Common Uses for Transaction Attributes

Defining a Transaction Attribute

Properties dialog box - Task tab

Setting a Value When the Transaction Is Created

Setting a Value in the Process Flow

Common Uses for Transaction Attributes

Setting a Priority on a Transaction


Set Attributes dialog box

Use this dialog box to add, modify, and delete transaction attributes for use by transactions, processes, scenarios, or departments.


Set Attributes dialog box

Use this dialog box to define a transaction attribute for use by transactions, processes, scenarios, or departments.


Define Types dialog box

Use this dialog box to define the attribute and transactions types.

The type for an attribute or function defines its range of values. The default types are Number, YesNo, and TrueFalse. You can create your own type and specify the range for the type by adding members to the type. For example, create the type Reports, and assign the members Daily, Weekly, Monthly, EndOfYear.


Defining Attribute and Function Types

Defining a Transaction Attribute

Using Global Attributes

Decision


To define an attribute type


Add New and Modify Monitor dialog box

Use this dialog box to add or to modify a monitor.


Using Monitors

Using Monitors to Collect Data

Working with Monitors

Define Monitor dialog box

Using Monitors - Now Try This


To define a monitor

To place a monitor

To find a monitor

To find multiple occurrences of a monitor

To delete or remove monitors


Define Transaction Groups dialog box

Use this dialog box to create groups. A group is a collection of transactions that is assigned when inputs are collected and batch processed. Type a new group name, and click Add.


Transaction Groups

Properties dialog box - Inputs tab: Collection Types and Other Information

Properties dialog box


Paste Attribute dialog box

Use this dialog box to select and paste an attribute. The attribute is copied to the clipboard then pasted into the expression.

For example, select the attribute type TrueFalse and the member names True and False appear. You can select True or False, and click OK to paste it in the expression.


Describing Model Behavior Using the Model Commands

About Transaction Attributes

Using Expressions

Defining Attribute and Function Types

Using Global Attributes

Decision


To define an attribute type


Paste Function dialog box

Use this dialog box to select a function, copy it to the clipboard, and then paste it into an expression.


Defining Attribute and Function Types

Describing Model Behavior Using the Model Commands

About Transaction Attributes

Using Expressions

Using Global Attributes

Decision


To define an attribute type


Paste Member dialog box

Use this dialog box to select and paste member names of an attribute type. The member name is copied to the clipboard where it can be pasted into expressions.

For example, select the attribute Priority, and click OK to paste it in the expression.


Using Expressions

Defining Attribute and Function Types

Using Global Attributes

Decision


Paste Operator dialog box

Use this dialog box to select and paste operators in expressions.


Adding Operators to Expressions

Using Expressions


To add a function to an expression using the expression toolbar

To define a function

To add a function


Set Pause Points dialog box

A pause point is a breaking position which you can place in a trace simulation. When you run a trace, transactions stop at any pause points. You can use this break to examine attributes or values associated with the transaction.


Find Start Points dialog box

Use this dialog box to find named start points in a model. By default, the Start symbol is a starting point. If a Start is not currently defined, this menu is grayed out. This command is useful for locating the start in a complicated process diagram, if it has been deleted or changed from the default.


Start Points

Start Points and Generators

Stopping Activity Outputs

Running a Simulation


Custom Statistics dialog box

Use this dialog box to display the statistics that have been defined. You can also add or modify statistics.


Creating Custom Statistics in the Report Window

Using the Report Window to Review Resource Statistics

Reporting Results

Using Resources


Edit Custom Statistics dialog box

Add or modify custom statistics that accumulate simulation data.


Simulation Data dialog box

Specify the simulation runs that are shown in a report. A list of simulation names is currently available. You can change the name of existing simulation runs or delete them.


Naming or Deleting Simulation Data

Run Setup dialog box

Run Setup dialog box - Initialization and Reports tab


Name Simulation Data dialog box

Name simulation runs. The default naming for simulation is Sim #1, Sim #2, and so forth. You can change the name of the simulation.

The simulation data names appear in the Run Setup dialog box and in the results shown in the report elements.


Reviewing Simulation Report Results

Run Setup dialog box


Graph Control dialog box

Use this dialog box to control the graph set up parameters.


Graph Control dialog box - 2D Gallery tab

Graph Control dialog box - 3D Gallery tab

Graph Control dialog box - Style tab

Graph Control dialog box - Titles tab

Graph Control dialog box - Axis tab

Control Graph dialog box - 3D Properties tab

Control Graph dialog box - Fonts tab

Control Graph dialog box - Markers tab

Control Graph dialog box - Background tab

Using Graphs

Graph Types

Creating Graphs

Creating Graphs from Report Data - Now Try This


Graph Control dialog box - 2D Gallery tab

Use this tab to select a 2D graph.

Pie Chart

Polar Graph

Bubble Graph

2D Scatter Graph

Line Graph

2D Bar Graph

Area Graph

Gantt Chart

High-Low-Close Graph

Candlestick Graph

Box-Whisker Graph

Tape Graph

Surface Graph


Graph Control dialog box - 3D Gallery tab

Use this tab to select a 3D graph.

Pie Chart

3D Scatter Graph

3D Bar Graph

Area Graph

Tape Graph

Surface Graph


Graph Control dialog box - Titles tab

Use this tab to set up the graph title.

•	Graph Title

In this box, you can enter text for the graph title, which can be up to 80 characters in length. This title appears centered at the top of the graphing window.

When you enter text for a title, the Graph Control adjusts the rest of the graphing window to provide space--either redrawing the graph and associated objects at a smaller size or decreasing the space between objects. When you clear the text box for a title, you disable it and provide more space for the rest of the graph.

If you enter a title that's too long to appear in a single line, the Graph Control automatically word-wraps it. If a title doesn't display at all, it's because the Graph Control can't make the font small enough to fit all the text in the space provided. Increase the size of the graphing window to make the title appear.

•	Title text

When you enter text for a title, the Graph Control adjusts the rest of the graphing window to provide space--either redrawing the graph and associated objects at a smaller size or decreasing the space between objects. When you clear the text box for a title, you disable it and provide more space for the rest of the graph.

If you enter a title that's too long to appear in a single line, the Graph Control automatically word-wraps it. If a title doesn't display at all, it's because the Graph Control can't make the font small enough to fit all the text in the space provided. Increase the size of the graphing window to make the title appear.

•	Bottom Title

In this box, you can enter text for the bottom title, which can be up to 80 characters in length. This title appears centered at the bottom of the graphing window. A bottom title frequently explains the X axis.

When you enter text for a title, the Graph Control adjusts the rest of the graphing window to provide space--either redrawing the graph and associated objects at a smaller size or decreasing the space between objects. When you clear the text box for a title, you disable it and provide more space for the rest of the graph.

If you enter a title that's too long to appear in a single line, the Graph Control automatically word-wraps it. If a title doesn't display at all, it's because the Graph Control can't make the font small enough to fit all the text in the space provided. Increase the size of the graphing window to make the title appear.

•	Left Title

This box lets you enter text for the left title, which can be up to 80 characters in length.

When you enter text for a title, the Graph Control adjusts the rest of the graphing window to provide space--either redrawing the graph and associated objects at a smaller size or decreasing the space between objects. When you clear the text box for a title, you disable it and provide more space for the rest of the graph.

If you enter a title that's too long to appear in a single line, the Graph Control automatically word-wraps it. If a title doesn't display at all, it's because the Graph Control can't make the font small enough to fit all the text in the space provided. Increase the size of the graphing window to make the title appear.

•	Horizontal (default)

Select this option if you want the title to print horizontally.

•	Up

Select this option if you want the title to print vertically, running in an upward direction.

•	Down

Select this option if you want the title to print vertically, running in a downward direction.

•	Right Title

This box lets you enter text for the right title, which can be up to 80 characters in length. The right title frequently explains the right-hand Y axis.

When you enter text for a title, the Graph Control adjusts the rest of the graphing window to provide space--either redrawing the graph and associated objects at a smaller size or decreasing the space between objects. When you clear the text box for a title, you disable it and provide more space for the rest of the graph.

If you enter a title that's too long to appear in a single line, the Graph Control automatically word-wraps it. If a title doesn't display at all, it's because the Graph Control can't make the font small enough to fit all the text in the space provided. Increase the size of the graphing window to make the title appear.


Graph Control dialog box - Style tab

Use this tab to set up the graph style.

Graph Control dialog box

Control Graph dialog box - Style tab for Bar Graph

Control Graph dialog box - Style tab for Box-Whisker Graph

Control Graph dialog box - Style tab for Gnatt Chart

Control Graph dialog box - Style tab for High-Low-Close Graph

Control Graph dialog box - Style tab for Polar Graph

Control Graph dialog box - Style tab for Scatter Graph 2D

Control Graph dialog box - Style tab for Surface Graph

Control Graph dialog box - Style tab for Line Graph including log-lin, lin-log and log-log

Control Graph dialog box - Style tab for Graphs with XY Grids


Control Graph dialog box - Style tab for Bar Graph

•	Horizontal

Select this option for a graph with bars drawn horizontally.

•	Vertical (default)

Select this option for a graph with bars drawn vertically, which is sometimes called a column graph.

•	Simple (default)

Select this option to draw one bar per data point. If you have more than one data set, corresponding points from each set are shown as clustered bars.

•	Stacked

Select this option to divide bars into segments, showing multiple data sets at corresponding data points.

•	Stacked %

Select this option to divide bars into segments representing percentages of a whole. Each complete bar will be the same length, but the breakdown of segments will vary according to their percentages at each data point.

•	Z-Clustered (available for 3D bar graphs only)

Select this option to draw multiple sets of bars, one bar per data point, with subsequent sets drawn in front of previous ones. In this form, smaller bars may be hidden behind larger values.


Control Graph dialog box - Style tab for Box-Whisker Graph

•	Parametric Data

Select this option if you want to specify the seven values making up the box-whisker graph.

•	Raw Data (default)

Select this option if you want the Graph Control to process a group of data and produce the seven values making up the box-whisker graph.

•	Show Samples (default is on)

Select this option to show the actual data values (samples) from which the box-whisker graph is produced, superimposed as symbols over the box-whisker graphics. Deselect it to show no samples.


Control Graph dialog box - Style tab for Gnatt Chart

•	Spaced (default is off)

Select this option to place spaces between Gantt bars. Deselect it to draw all bars adjacent to each other.


Control Graph dialog box - Style tab for High-Low-Close Graph

•	Data group

By default, a high-low-close graph charts three data sets: high values, low values, and closing values. In the Data group, you can enable a fourth data set for opening values, creating an open-high-low-close graph.

•	Open Values (default is off).

Select this option for an open-high-low-close graph. Deselect it for a high-low-close graph.

•	No High/Low Ticks (default is off)

Select this option to disable high and low ticks. Deselect it to show those ticks.

•	No Open/Close Ticks (default is off)

Select this option to disable open and close ticks. Deselect it to show those ticks.


Control Graph dialog box - Style tab for Pie Chart

•	Off (default is off)

Select this option to draw a pie chart with no labels for the slices. Deselect it to draw labels.

•	Connecting Lines (default is on)

Select this option to have connecting lines drawn between pie slices and their labels. Deselect it for no connecting lines.

•	Colored as Slices (default is off)

Select this option to have pie labels drawn in the same colors as their corresponding slices. Deselect it to have every label drawn in a single color (black by default, or as specified on the Fonts property page).

•	% Data Values (default is off)

Select this option to have pie labels show the percentage values of their slices (as related to the whole). Deselect it to have labels show the actual values of their slices.


Control Graph dialog box - Style tab for Polar Graph

•	Symbols (default is off)

Select this option to draw a symbol at the position of each data point. Deselect it for no symbols.

•	Lines (default is off)

Select this option to draw lines between data points. Deselect it for no lines.

Note
That if all options in the Markers group (Symbols, Lines, and Sticks) are deselected, lines are drawn in any case.

•	Sticks (default is off)

Select this option to draw a stick between each data point and the origin. Deselect it for no sticks.


Control Graph dialog box - Style tab for Scatter Graph 2D

•	Symbols (default is on)

Symbols are drawn along with curves.


Control Graph dialog box - Style tab for Scatter Graph 3D

•	Markers group

All 3D scatter graphs are drawn with symbols representing data points. In the Markers group, you can also enable vertical sticks for the graph.

•	Sticks (default is off).

Select this option to draw a vertical stick between each data point and the Y origin plane. Deselect it for no sticks.


Control Graph dialog box - Style tab for Surface Graph

•	Markers group

In the Markers group, you can choose style options for your 3D surface graph. The surface graph is based on a grid of cells drawn in the plane of the Y origin in other words, the graph would appear as a flat grid of rectangles if viewed from above. Each point lies at the intersection of the lines of this grid (which determines its X and Z values); the elevation of each point is its Y value, which is set by the GraphData property.

To differentiate cells of the grid, you can use filled panels, boundary lines, or both.

•	Filled Panels (default is on). Select this option to fill in the cells of a surface graph grid with panels (actually paired triangles) of color. Deselect it for no panels.

The color range of panels is determined by your settings in the Grade Color group.

•	Boundary Lines (default is on). This option lets you draw lines along the edges of each cell of the surface graph grid.

If Filled Panels is selected, select Boundary Lines to draw lines (which are always black) and deselect it for no lines.

If Filled Panels is deselected, lines are drawn in any case. Their color range is determined by your settings in the Grade Color group.

•	Min

This box sets the color for the lowest point on the surface graph.

•	Max

This box sets the color for the highest point on the surface graph.

•	On (default is off)

Select this option to draw side walls around the perimeter of the graph in the X and Z planes. Deselect it for no side walls.

•	Color

This box sets the color for the side walls, using the current color palette.


Control Graph dialog box - Style tab for Line Graph including log-lin, lin-log and log-log

•	Symbols (default is off)

Select this option to draw a symbol at the position of each data point. Deselect it for no symbols.

•	Lines (default is off)

Select this option to draw lines between data points. Deselect it for no lines.

Note
If all options in the Markers group (Symbols, Lines, and Sticks) are deselected, lines are drawn in any case.

•	Sticks (default is off)

Select this option to draw a vertical stick between each data point and the Y origin. Deselect it for no sticks.

•	Y Axis (default is off)

Select this option for a logarithmic Y axis. If you select Y Axis and leave X Axis off, you'll get a log/lin graph; if you select both, you'll get a log/log graph.

•	X Axis (default is off)

Select this option for a logarithmic X axis. If you select X Axis and leave Y Axis off, you'll get a lin/log graph; if you select both, you'll get a log/log graph.


Control Graph dialog box - Style tab for Graphs with XY Grids

•	X

Select this option to view and/or change the settings for the X axis.

•	Y Primary

Select this option to view or change the settings for the primary Y axis.

•	Y Overlay

Select this option to view and/or change the settings for the Y axis.

Note
You can't set Position options for Y Overlay because that axis is always drawn at the right.

•	Z

Select this option to view and/or change the settings for the Z axis.

Note
You can't set Position options for Z because that axis is always drawn at the bottom right.

•	Color of Axes (default is automatic black or white)

In this list box, you can choose a color for axes from the current color palette. The same color is applied to all axes. The default color is automatic black or white, whichever provides more contrast.

•	Variable (default)

When X is selected in the Apply to Axis group, select this option to draw the X axis intersecting the Y origin, whether that's at the top, bottom, or middle of the graph.

When Y Primary is selected in the Apply to Axis group, select this option to draw the primary Y axis intersecting the X origin, whether that's at the left, right, or middle of the graph.

•	Left or Top

When X is selected in the Apply to Axis group, select this option to draw the X axis at the top of the graph, regardless of the location of the Y origin.

When Y Primary is selected in the Apply to Axis group, select this option to draw the primary Y axis at the left edge of the graph, regardless of the location of the X origin.

•	Right or Bottom

When X is selected in the Apply to Axis group, select this option to draw the X axis at the bottom of the graph, regardless of the location of the Y origin.

When Y Primary is selected in the Apply to Axis group, select this option to draw the primary Y axis at the right edge of the graph, regardless of the location of the X origin.

•	Zero Origin (default for all X-Y-Z graphs except time series)

Select this option to draw the axis including the origin (zero) and extending far enough in the positive and negative directions to include all of the graph's values.

•	Variable Origin

Select this option to have the axis zoom in on the range of the graph's actual values, whether or not that range includes zero.

For X and Z axes, this option differs from Auto only if you specify X or Z values for data points.

•	User-Defined (default for time series graphs)

Select this option to set your own values for the minimum, maximum, and number of ticks for the axis. When you select User-Defined, the settings in the Range group are enabled.

•	Max (enabled by selecting User-Defined in the Scale group)

The Max setting is generally the maximum point of the axis, with the following exceptions:

If you have a positive Max with a negative Min, the Graph Control may adjust the maximum or minimum point so that it lies on a tick. See Ticks.

In 3D graphs, if you specify a Max that's too low to show all your data values, the Graph Control moves the maximum point to show all the values. The Ticks setting still applies.

For X and Z axes without specific X or Z values, the Max setting is ignored. The maximum point of the axis is equal to the number of points or sets you're graphing.

•	Min (enabled by selecting User-Defined in the Scale group)

The Min setting is generally the minimum point of the axis, with the following exceptions:

If you have a positive Max with a negative Min, the Graph Control may adjust the maximum or minimum point so that it lies on a tick. See Ticks.

In 3D graphs, if you specify a Min that's too high to show all your data values, the Graph Control moves the minimum point to show all the values. The Ticks setting still applies.

For X and Z axes without specific X or Z values, the Min setting is ignored. The minimum point of the axis is always 0.

•	Ticks (enabled by selecting User-Defined in the Scale group)

The Ticks setting determines the number of ticks along the selected axis. (Note that ticks are distinct from tick marks see the Tick Marks group.) The effect depends on the axis and the nature of your data:

For Y axes, X axes with specific X values, and Z axes with specific Z values, the Ticks setting specifies the number of ticks from the origin to the setting of either Max or Min, whichever has the higher magnitude (distance from 0). For example, if you set Min to -50 and Max to 20, Ticks applies to the axis segment between 0 and -50.

To determine the Ticks value you want to set, divide the length of the axis (or axis segment) by the desired interval between ticks. For the axis segment 0 to -50 we've just described (whose length is 50 units), if you want to place ticks 25 units apart, set Ticks to 2.

Both the maximum and minimum points of an axis must fall on a tick. If you have a negative Min with a positive Max, the Graph Control may have to move the minimum or maximum point to make this happen. In our example axis, ticks would be placed at -50, -25, 0, and 25 overriding the Max setting of 20.

For Z axes without specific Z values (3D bar, tape, area, and surface graphs), you can't specify Ticks. The option is disabled.

•	Show (default is on)

Select this option to show labels along the axis. Deselect it for no labels.

•	Vertical (available for X and Z axes only; default is off)

Select this option to display X or Z labels vertically (rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise). Deselect it for horizontal labels.

The Vertical option is normally used with text labels. It lets you use a larger font for labels because you don't need as much space horizontally.

•	Every (available for X axis only; default is 1)

The Every setting determines the frequency with which labels are displayed. A setting of 1 places a label at every tick along the X axis, a setting of 2 places a label at every other tick (beginning with the origin), and so on.

•	Show (available for X and Y Primary axes only; default is on)

Select this option to draw tick marks along the axis. Deselect it for no tick marks.

If you have a Y Overlay axis, your Show setting for Y Primary also applies to Y Overlay. Either both axes have tick marks or both don't.

•	Minor (available for X and Y Primary axes; default is off)

Select this option to draw five minor tick marks between standard tick marks.

•	Every (available for X axis with zero or variable origin only; default is 1)

If you select Zero Origin or Variable Origin in the Scale group, you can use the Every setting to specify the frequency with which tick marks are displayed along the X axis. An Every setting of 1 places a mark at each tick, a setting of 2 places a mark at every other tick, and so on.

The X axis must end with a tick mark. If you set an Every value that doesn't include the last value on the axis, the Graph Control will extend the axis so that it ends on a tick mark.

•	Show (available for X and Y Primary axes only; default is off)

Select this option to draw grid lines perpendicular to the axis, intersecting each tick mark. Deselect it for no grid lines.

•	Line (default is solid)

In this list box, you can choose a style for grid lines. The same style is applied to both X and Y grids.

•	Color (default is automatic black or white)

In this list box, you can choose a color for grids from the current palette. The same color is applied to both X and Y grids. The default color is automatic black or white, whichever provides more contrast.


Graph Control dialog box - Axis tab

Use this tab to set up the graph style.

Control Graph dialog box - Axis tab for Polar Graph

Control Graph dialog box - Axis tab for Graph Types with XY Grids


Control Graph dialog box - Axis tab for Graph Types with XY Grids

•	X

Select this option to view and/or change the settings for the X axis.

•	Y Primary

Select this option to view and/or change the settings for the primary Y axis.

•	Y Overlay

Select this option to view and/or change the settings for the Y axis.

Note
You can't set Position options for Y Overlay because that axis is always drawn at the right.

•	Z

Select this option to view and/or change the settings for the Z axis.

Note
You can't set Position options for Z because that axis is always drawn at the bottom right.

•	Color of Axes (default is automatic black or white)

In this list box, you can choose a color for axes from the current color palette. The same color is applied to all axes. The default color is automatic black or white, whichever provides more contrast.

•	Variable (default)

When X is selected in the Apply to Axis group, select this option to draw the X axis intersecting the Y origin, whether that's at the top, bottom, or middle of the graph.

When Y Primary is selected in the Apply to Axis group, select this option to draw the primary Y axis intersecting the X origin, whether that's at the left, right, or middle of the graph.

•	Left or Top

When X is selected in the Apply to Axis group, select this option to draw the X axis at the top of the graph, regardless of the location of the Y origin.

When Y Primary is selected in the Apply to Axis group, select this option to draw the primary Y axis at the left edge of the graph, regardless of the location of the X origin.

•	Right or Bottom

When X is selected in the Apply to Axis group, select this option to draw the X axis at the bottom of the graph, regardless of the location of the Y origin.

When Y Primary is selected in the Apply to Axis group, select this option to draw the primary Y axis at the right edge of the graph, regardless of the location of the X origin.

•	Zero Origin (default for all X-Y-Z graphs except time series)

Select this option to draw the axis including the origin (zero) and extending far enough in the positive and negative directions to include all of the graph's values.

•	Variable Origin

Select this option to have the axis zoom in on the range of the graph's actual values, whether or not that range includes zero.

For X and Z axes, this option differs from Auto only if you specify X or Z values for data points.

•	User-Defined (default for time series graphs)

Select this option to set your own values for the minimum, maximum, and number of ticks for the axis. When you select User-Defined, the settings in the Range group are enabled.

•	Max (enabled by selecting User-Defined in the Scale group)

The Max setting is generally the maximum point of the axis, with the following exceptions:

If you have a positive Max with a negative Min, the Graph Control may adjust the maximum or minimum point so that it lies on a tick. See Ticks.

In 3D graphs, if you specify a Max that's too low to show all your data values, the Graph Control moves the maximum point to show all the values. The Ticks setting still applies.

For X and Z axes without specific X or Z values, the Max setting is ignored. The maximum point of the axis is equal to the number of points or sets you're graphing.

•	Min (enabled by selecting User-Defined in the Scale group)

The Min setting is generally the minimum point of the axis, with the following exceptions:

If you have a positive Max with a negative Min, the Graph Control may adjust the maximum or minimum point so that it lies on a tick. See Ticks.

In 3D graphs, if you specify a Min that's too high to show all your data values, the Graph Control moves the minimum point to show all the values. The Ticks setting still applies.

For X and Z axes without specific X or Z values, the Min setting is ignored. The minimum point of the axis is always 0.

•	Ticks (enabled by selecting User-Defined in the Scale group)

The Ticks setting determines the number of ticks along the selected axis. (Note that ticks are distinct from tick marks see the Tick Marks group.) The effect depends on the axis and the nature of your data:

For Y axes, X axes with specific X values, and Z axes with specific Z values, the Ticks setting specifies the number of ticks from the origin to the setting of either Max or Min, whichever has the higher magnitude (distance from 0). For example, if you set Min to -50 and Max to 20, Ticks applies to the axis segment between 0 and -50.

To determine the Ticks value you want to set, divide the length of the axis (or axis segment) by the desired interval between ticks. For the axis segment 0 to -50 we've just described (whose length is 50 units), if you want to place ticks 25 units apart, set Ticks to 2.

Both the maximum and minimum points of an axis must fall on a tick. If you have a negative Min with a positive Max, the Graph Control may have to move the minimum or maximum point to make this happen. In our example axis, ticks would be placed at -50, -25, 0, and 25 overriding the Max setting of 20.

For Z axes without specific Z values (3D bar, tape, area, and surface graphs), you can't specify Ticks. The option is disabled.

•	Show (default is on)

Select this option to show labels along the axis. Deselect it for no labels.

•	Vertical (available for X and Z axes only; default is off)

Select this option to display X or Z labels vertically (rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise). Deselect it for horizontal labels.

The Vertical option is normally used with text labels. It lets you use a larger font for labels because you don't need as much space horizontally.

•	Every (available for X axis only; default is 1)

The Every setting determines the frequency with which labels are displayed. A setting of 1 places a label at every tick along the X axis, a setting of 2 places a label at every other tick (beginning with the origin), and so on.

•	Show (available for X and Y Primary axes only; default is on)

Select this option to draw tick marks along the axis. Deselect it for no tick marks.

If you have a Y Overlay axis, your Show setting for Y Primary also applies to Y Overlay. Either both axes have tick marks or both don't.

•	Minor (available for X and Y Primary axes; default is off)

Select this option to draw five minor tick marks between standard tick marks.

•	Every (available for X axis with zero or variable origin only; default is 1)

If you select Zero Origin or Variable Origin in the Scale group, you can use the Every setting to specify the frequency with which tick marks are displayed along the X axis. An Every setting of 1 places a mark at each tick, a setting of 2 places a mark at every other tick, and so on.

The X axis must end with a tick mark. If you set an Every value that doesn't include the last value on the axis, the Graph Control will extend the axis so that it ends on a tick mark.

•	Show (available for X and Y Primary axes only; default is off)

Select this option to draw grid lines perpendicular to the axis, intersecting each tick mark. Deselect it for no grid lines.

•	Line (default is solid)

In this list box, you can choose a style for grid lines. The same style is applied to both X and Y grids.

•	Color (default is automatic black or white)

In this list box, you can choose a color for grids from the current palette. The same color is applied to both X and Y grids. The default color is automatic black or white, whichever provides more contrast.


Control Graph dialog box - Axis tab for Polar Graph

•	Angular (default)

Select this option to view and/or change the angular axis, which is marked by a series of radial lines (spokes) at angular increments. The origin is three o'clock.

•	Radial

Select this option to view and/or change the settings for the radial axis, which is marked by a series of concentric circles.

•	Color of Axes (default is automatic black or white)

In this list box, you can choose a color for axes from the current color palette. The same color is applied to both the angular and radial axes. The default color is automatic black or white, whichever provides more contrast.

•	Show (default is on)

Select this option to show numeric labels along both the angular and radial axes. Deselect it for no labels along either axis.

•	Show (default is off)

Select this option to enable grid lines for the axes. Deselect it for no grid lines.

For angular axes, the Graph Control draws grid lines between the origin and outer wall of the polar graph at angles of 45, 135, 225, and 315 degrees.

For radial axes, the Graph Control draws four concentric circles at regular increments between the origin and the outer wall of the polar graph.

•	Line (default is solid)

In this list box, you can choose a style for grid lines. The same style is applied to both angular and radial grids.

•	Color (default is automatic black or white)

In this list box, you can choose a color for grids from the current palette. The same color is applied to both angular and radial grids. The default color is automatic black or white, whichever provides more contrast.


Control Graph dialog box - 3D Properties tab

•	Off (available only for 3D bar, tape, and area graphs)

Select this option for standard 3D. This option is included for compatibility with earlier editions of the Graph Control. Standard 3D doesn't support such True3D options as rotating cages and Z axis labels. All you can do is set the color of the walls and edges of the graph's cage.

•	Perspective (default)

Select this option for True3D with perspective projection. You can use the In-Out scroll bar to control the perspective at which graphs are drawn.

•	Isometric

Select this option for True3D with isometric projection. In this mode, angles are rendered as if the graph is viewed from an infinite distance (so all parallels are preserved in the drawing), and the In-Out scroll bar is disabled.

•	In-Out

The In-Out scroll bar controls the degree of perspective foreshortening or the perceived distance from which the graph is viewed for a True3D graph with perspective projection. This setting determines the acuteness of the angles in the graph.

The default In-Out bar setting places the viewing distance at about twice the width of the graph, which is defined as 50 units. Each click in decreases the viewing distance by one unit (to a minimum of 0 units, a distance about equal to the graph's width), and each click out increases the viewing distance by one unit (to a maximum of 100, a distance about four times the graph's width).

The In-Out scroll bar is disabled for True3D graphs with isometric projection. In those graphs, angles are drawn as if the viewing distance were infinite, so all parallels are preserved.

•	Up-Down (default is halfway up the graph)

The Up-Down bar sets the vertical viewing angle for a True3D graph.

The default Up-Down bar setting places the viewing angle halfway up the graph, which is defined as 0 degrees. Each click up or down shifts the angle by one degree, to a maximum of 90 degrees (directly above the graph) and a minimum of -60 degrees (somewhat below the floor of the graph cage).

•	Left-Right (default is facing the front of the graph)

The Left-Right bar sets the horizontal viewing angle for a True3D graph.

The default Left-Right bar setting places the viewing angle directly facing the front of the graph. Each click to the left or right shifts the angle by one degree, to a maximum of 180 degrees (to the right) and a minimum of -180 (to the left). The values of 180 and -180 provide the same view directly facing the rear of the graph.

•	Cage flips

If you select a viewing angle that would normally cause part of the graph to be obscured, the back or side wall flips to the opposite edge of the cage, letting you see the whole graph.

•	Off (default)

Select this option to disable cage flips.

•	Back and Side

Select this option to enable cage flips for both the back wall and side wall.

•	Back Only

Select this option to enable cage flips for the back wall only. This option makes it easier for the viewer to stay oriented to the graph, because the side wall always represents the left edge of the cage.

•	Depth

This scroll bar lets you vary the projected depth of True3D graphs.

The default Depth setting provides equal increments for units in the X and Z directions a graph with an equal number of points and sets would be of equal width and depth. The numeric value for this default is 100. Each click to the left decreases the value by 5 (to a minimum of 10) and each click to the right increases it by 5 (to a maximum of 1000).

•	X Gap

This scroll bar lets you set the gap between the bars of a True3D bar graph. This gap is in the X direction for vertical bar graphs and in the Y direction for horizontal bar graphs.

The default X Gap setting is 20 percent of the entire possible width of each bar the remaining 80 percent is occupied by the bar itself. Each click to the left decreases the gap percentage by 1 (to a minimum of 0) and each click to the right increases it by 1 (to a maximum of 95). At the minimum X Gap setting of 0, there's no gap between bars.

•	Z Gap

This scroll bar lets you set the gap in the Z (depth) direction between data sets in three kinds of True3D graphs with multiple data sets: bar (z-clustered style), area (absolute style), and tape.

The default Z Gap setting is 20 percent of the entire possible width of each bar (or area plot or tape) the remaining 80 percent is occupied by the bar itself. Each click to the left decreases the gap percentage by 1 (to a minimum of 0) and each click to the right increases it by 1 (to a maximum of 95). At the minimum Z Gap setting of 0, there's no gap between bars.

•	Wall Color (default is automatic color)

In this list box, you can choose a color for the walls and floor of a True3D graph cage from the current palette. The same color is applied to the back wall, side wall, and floor of the cage.

•	Thick Walls (default is on)

Select this option if you want the walls and floor of the True3D cage to appear thick, with edges. Deselect it for thin walls, which have no discernible edges.

•	Edge Color (default is automatic color)

In this list box, you can choose a color for the edges of a True3D graph cage from the current palette. This setting is disabled if you deselect the Thick Walls option.


Control Graph dialog box - Fonts tab

•	Graph Title (default)

Select this option to apply font settings to the graph's title, which always appears centered at the top of the graphing window.

•	Other Titles

Select this option to apply font settings to the graph's left, right, and bottom titles. The same settings apply to all three of these titles.

•	Labels

Select this option to apply font settings to the graph's labels including axis labels (for graphs with X-Y-Z grids and polar graphs), pie chart labels, and data labels. The same settings apply to all labels in use in the graph.

•	Legend

Select this option to apply font settings to the graph's legend.

•	Name (default is Arial)

In this list box, you can choose any installed Windows font for the selected text.

•	Italic (default is off)

Select this option to have the Graph Control italicize the text.

•	Bold (default is off)

Select this option to have the Graph Control display the text in boldface.

•	Underline (default is off)

Select this option to have the Graph Control underline the text.

•	Smart Scale (default is on)

Select this option to have the Graph Control automatically use smaller type if the size you specify (using the Smaller-Bigger scroll bar) makes the text too large for the available space. If the Graph Control can't make the type small enough to fit, the text won't display at all.

If you deselect Smart Scale, the Graph Control won't attempt to use type smaller than you specify with the Smaller-Bigger scroll bar. If the text is too large for the space available, it simply won't display.

•	Smaller-Bigger

This scroll bar lets you set the size of type. If Smart Scale is selected, the Graph Control may override your setting to make the text small enough to fit in the graphing window.

Each click on the Smaller end of the scroll bar decreases the text size by 5 arbitrary units (to a minimum of 50), and each click on the Bigger end increases it by 5 units (to a maximum of 500). The initial size depends on which type of text you're sizing.

•	Reset

Click this button to reset the text size to the default.


Control Graph dialog box - Markers tab

•	Click to Select a Point or Set

When you move the mouse pointer over the graph drawing at the upper left of the Markers page, the pointer becomes a large arrow. Point and click on the marker you want to apply settings to.

•	Apply To group

This group shows you the point or set number of the graph object you've selected in the graph illustration.

Set. For all graph types except pie, bubble, and bar graphs having one data set, a Set number is shown. Your settings apply to a particular data set.

Point. For pie charts, bubble graphs, and bar graphs having one data set, a Point number is shown. Your settings apply to a particular data point.

•	Reset All button

Click this button to return all values in the Markers property page to their default.

•	Color (default is automatic color selection)

In this list box, you can choose a color for the selected marker from the current palette.

By default, the Graph Control assigns an automatic series of colors to markers, chosen for variety. If you override this default by setting your own color for one marker, you have to set colors for the remaining markers as well otherwise, they'll be shown in black.

•	Pattern list box

The Pattern list box is enabled for pie, bubble, bar, area, Gantt, box-whisker, and tape graphs.

Pattern (default is solid). From this list box, you can choose a pattern for the selected marker. If you don't choose one, the marker appears in a solid color.

•	Symbols group

The options in this group are enabled for polar, scatter, line and logarithmic, time series, and (Size bar only) high-low-close and open-high-low-close graphs.

Symbol (default is automatic symbol). In this list box, you can choose one of 14 symbol options.

By default, the Graph Control assigns an automatic series of symbols to data sets, chosen for variety. If you override this default by setting your own symbol for one set, you have to set symbols for any remaining sets as well otherwise, they'll all default to the first available symbol (+).

Size. This scroll bar sets the size for symbols, based on a default of 100 arbitrary units. Each click to the left decreases the symbol size by 5 units (to a minimum of 10), and each click to the right increases it by 5 units (to a maximum of 1000).

•	Lines group

The Lines group is enabled for polar, line and logarithmic, and (Thick check box only) high-low-close and open-high-low-close graphs.

Thick (default is on). Select this option to enable thick lines, which are three pixels thick by default. Deselect it for thin lines, which are one pixel thick.

For polar, line, and logarithmic graphs, you can choose a line thickness of one to five pixels (overriding the default three pixels) in the list box. This setting applies to all lines in the graph. You can't set your own thickness for high-low-close or open-high-low-close markers, which are always three pixels thick when Thick is on.

Patterned (default is off). Select this option to enable patterned lines. Then, in the list box, you can choose a pattern for each line.


Control Graph dialog box - Background tab

•	Apply To

In the Apply To subgroup, you can select the graph object you want to apply styles and colors to the Graph Title (default), Bottom Title, Left Title, Right Title, Legend, or Graph (including the graph itself and its axes).

•	No Style (default)

Select this option for no styling effect.

•	Border

Select this option to draw a border around the object.

•	Drop Shadow

Select this option to draw a black drop shadow behind the object.

•	Raised

Select this option to draw a border with a raised appearance around the object.

•	Lowered

Select this option to draw a border with a lowered appearance around the object.

•	Text Color (default is automatic black or white)

In this list box, you can choose a color for the object's text from the current palette. The default color is automatic black or white, whichever provides the most contrast.

•	Background (default is automatic black or white)

In this list box, you can choose a background color for the rectangular area surrounding a graph. The default color is automatic black or white, whichever provides the most contrast.

•	Position (default is right-hand center)

If your graph has a legend, you can use these buttons to set the legend's position around the edges of the graphing window.

If you choose the top center or bottom center position, legend items are drawn horizontally in a single row. At all other positions, legend items are stacked vertically.

•	Size (default is maximum)

This scroll bar lets you set the size of a legend including the text, marker, and gap between items. The Size setting is a percentage of the maximum legend size. The default setting is 100, and each click to the left or right decreases or increases the setting by 1 (to a minimum of 0 or maximum of 100).

•	Background Color (default is light gray)

In this list box, you can choose a background color for the graphing window from the current color palette.

•	Backdrop (default is None)

This list box lets you choose a type of graphic image (bitmap or metafile) to use for the backdrop of the graphing window. You also choose how the image is displayed centered, tiled, or stretched.

•	File

In this text box, you can enter the filename for the graph's backdrop image. If you don't include a path to the file as part of this string, the Graph Control searches the current directory. The appropriate file extension (.BMP or .WMF) is added automatically, according to your selection in the Backdrop list box.

•	Browse

Click this button if you want to call up a standard Windows Open dialog to locate a backdrop file.


Add New Day dialog box

Use this dialog box to add a name for a new schedule. The schedule can be used in the model to specify when activities, resources, and generators are active or inactive.


Add New Hour dialog box

Use this dialog box to a name for a new list of hours. The list of hours can be combined with other calendar days and schedules to create a composite schedule.


Edit Cost/Count dialog box

Use this dialog box to increase or decrease the resource allocations for a department or pool.


Add New Schedule dialog box

Use this dialog box to add a name for a new schedule. The schedule can be used in the model to specify when activities, resources, and generators are active or inactive.


Formatting dialog box

Set the number format and time unit for the selected new field using the lists.


Process Name dialog box

To create a new process name or rename an existing process, type a new name in the New name box, and click OK.


Add/Modify Statistic dialog box

Select a new statistic from the list, and click OK.


Paste Custom Statistic dialog box

To paste a custom statistic in the Edit Custom Statistic dialog box, select the statistic from the Custom Statistic list, and click OK.


Find Monitor-Next Location dialog box

To find placed monitors in existing processes, click Find Next or Find Previous.


Header and Footer dialog box

Element	Description
Insert Tools	Lets you insert text, page numbers, date, time, or diagram name position in the header or footer.
Sections	Where the inserted header or footer information appears at the top or bottom of the page.


To create a custom header or footer


Toolbars dialog box

Element	Description
Toolbars list	Check the toolbar boxes you want to view in iGrafx Professional.
New button	Creates a new toolbar.
Customize button	Lets you add custom tools to other toolbars or a toolbar that you create.
Reset button	Resets the selected toolbar to its original settings.


To create a new toolbar

To rename a toolbar

To reset a toolbar


Name Toolbar dialog box

Type the name for your new toolbar in the box.


To create a new toolbar

To rename a toolbar

To reset a toolbar


Insert iGrid dialog box

To view descriptions of iGrids, click any icon in the box.


To insert an iGrid

To edit an iGrid in the diagram space


Format Department dialog box

Element	Description
Apply To	Name Area - Applies styles to the department header. Process Area - Applies styles to the department lane. Name and Process Areas - Applies styles to both the department header and lane.
Fill Style	Selects the styles and types of styles.
Sample	Displays your selections for the deparment header, department lane, or both.


Edit Gradient dialog box

Element	Description
Gradient Type	Selects the direction of the gradient pattern.
Attributes	Selects the size or angle of the gradient pattern direction.
Sample	Displays the gradient based on your selections.


Shape Properties dialog box

Element	Description
Name box	Displays the name of the selected shape. You can also type a new name for a shape in this box.
Keywords box	Type keywords for browsing shapes of this type in Share Media subjects.
Description	Type a description for the selected shape in this box.
Edit button	Opens the Edit Shape dialog box for setting shape defaults.


To set shape and line defaults using Share Media


Extension Projects dialog box

Element	Description
Projects list	Displays the *.flx projects saved on your hard disk.
New button	Opens the Save As dialog box where you can save the selected *.flx file under a new name.
Open button	Opens the Open dialog box where you can browse for another *.flx file.
Remove button	Removes the selected Project from the list.


To open a VBA Extension Project


Format Shape dialog box - General tab

To change the name of the shape, type the new name in the box.


New From Template dialog box

In the General tab, click the template you want to use, and click OK.


Move to Layer dialog box

To move currently selected objects to another layer, select the layer name in the box, and click OK.


To change the current layer

To add a layer to the active diagram

To delete a layer

To rename a layer

To change the order of a layer

To show or hide a layer


Print dialog box

Element	Description
Printer	Lists the current local or network printers available for your machine.
Print Range	Prints all pages or a range of pages.
Copies	Prints one copy or multiple copies.
Print What	Prints the open diagram or multiple diagrams contained in the entire document.
Preview button	Displays the current diagram as it will be printed.


To print a diagram

To see a print preview of your diagram


iGrid Properties dialog box

This dialog box lets you change the formatting and lock an iGrid to the page. For example, you can select the Allow Styling box to change the line style and color of the iGrid you select.


Code Assistant dialog box

This dialog box lets you handle events for specific shapes or groups of shapes in a single diagram or document. Selecting an event and choosing a handle option will open VBA where you can edit the code.


Insert ActiveX Control dialog box

To insert an ActiveX control in your diagram, select the control from the list, and click OK.


Value Class dialog box

To edit the Value Class for a particular shape, choose a new value class from the Value Class list and click OK.


Exclude Department dialog box

To exclude task data for a shape spanning two or more departments, select the departments in the Departments list, and click Yes. This moves the departments into the Excluded list.


iGrafx Professional

iGrafx Professional allows all business people to create a broad array of diagrams with easy and powerful ready-to-use tools. iGrafx Professional provides Microsoft Office users with a drag-and-drop environment that facilitates the creation of popular structured business graphics, from simple organizational charts to large, wall-sized process maps.

Now all business users including program managers, secretaries, software engineers, and marketing managers can quickly and easily integrate structured business graphics into documents, presentations, and worksheets to help them communicate ideas in a much more effective and compelling way.

Microsoft Office Compatible

iGrafx Professional is a Microsoft Office Compatible product, which means that its toolbars, menus, and accelerator keys are similar to those used by Microsoft Office. If you are already using Microsoft Office, which includes Microsoft Excel, Microsoft Word, Microsoft Access, and Microsoft PowerPoint, then many of the tasks you have learned to complete in Office can be completed in a similar manner in iGrafx Professional. Micrografx and Microsoft hope these similarities will make it easier for you to use our products together and with other Microsoft Office Compatible products.

As a Microsoft Office Compatible product, iGrafx Professional will support the Microsoft Intellimouse. This includes all featues of the Inteliimouse including zooming, panning, and scrolling functions.

Look for the Microsoft Office Compatible logo when purchasing software. For more information about the Microsoft Office Compatible program, and for a complete listing of Microsoft Office Compatible products, call Microsoft Customer Service at 1-800-426-9400 in the United States. Customers outside the United States may contact their local Microsoft office.

iGrafx Professional and the Office Compatible Features

Office Compatible features include:

•	Standardized toolbars that are now also dockable and fully customizable

•	Wizards that speed you through complex tasks

•	Shortcut menus, activated via right mouse button clicks, expand quick access to functions

•	Microsoft Office-style tabbed dialog boxes

•	OLE in place lets you run other programs within iGrafx Professional and iGrafx Professional within other programs

•	OLE drag and drop lets you drag an object from iGrafx Professional and drop it into any OLE container program, or drag an object from any OLE source program and drop it into iGrafx Professional

•	Microsoft Office-style color picker buttons for text, lines, and shapes

•	Scraps support for dragging objects onto the desktop and later into MS Office-compatible programs

•	ToolTips

•	Long filenames

•	In-place editing

While adapting to Microsoft Office, we have built the ability for you to customize the interface to best suit your needs.

Microsoft Office Binder Compliance

iGrafx Professional is fully compliant with the document requirements for Binder. iGrafx Professional files can easily be inserted as individual documents grouped in Binder with documents from other Binder-compliant programs.

Using Key Office Compatible Features

iGrafx Professional contains a toolbar which is similar to the ones in Microsoft Office. For example, you can print a diagram by pressing the Print button on the Standard toolbar, and you can discover each button's function just by pointing to it with the mouse. This will activate a ToolTip that displays the name of the button.

Using iGrafx Professional with Microsoft Office

Data in the iGrafx Professional window can be transferred to Microsoft Office programs. To do so:

1	Click at the top left of the data you want to copy and drag the mouse to the bottom right of the data.  This selects the data.

2	Press Ctrl+C to copy it.

3	Switch to any Office program.

4	Press Ctrl+V to paste it.

Run other programs within iGrafx Professional diagrams. To do so:

1	On the Insert menu, click OLE Object.

Choose either to create a new file, or to use an existing file.

2	If you select Create New, choose the program to run.

or

3	If you select Create from File, choose the file to open.

When you click OK, the file is inserted into your diagram.  To run the program, simply double-click the file.

You can also run iGrafx Professional within other programs. Refer to the program documentation for the procedure.

Drag and drop an iGrafx Professional object into any OLE container program.

For example, you can drag any diagram into a Word document. When you drop it, the program's icon appears in the document. To run the program and see the diagram, simply double-click the icon.

You can also drag other objects into iGrafx Professional and drop them into a diagram.


 3D effects, adding to shapes  165

 Acquire Group  364

 Actions, undoing  85

 Active

 limit on transactions  507

 schedule times  526

 Activity

 base

 value base  381

 capacity of  384

 defining tasks  368

 definition  308

 processes  373

 processing

 order of processing  408

 queue  627

 schedule  385

 setting duration  370

 statistics  625

 value base  353, 355

 Add New Attribute dialog box  445

 Adding

 fields to shapes  198

 preset line styles  193

 preset shape styles  190

 preset text styles  230

 shadow or 3D effects to shapes  165

 shape fill color, pattern, or gradient  157

 shapes to the Shape Library  140

 shapes to Toolbox toolbar  140

 verticies to lines  154

 Addition, in an expression  463

 Advanced shape field options  200

 Afternoon, event schedule  534

 Aligning

 objects  169, 172

 text blocks  226

 And, logical  463

 Angles, rotating  177

 Applying

 arrow and crossover formats  161

 fill formats  156

 line and border formats to shapes  158

 Arguments to functions  466

 Arithmatic operators  463

 Arrange menu  60

 Arranging, shapes in the Shape Library  143

 Arrowheads, choosing  162

 Arrows, applying formats  161

 Attaching, text to lines  217

 Attributes

 defining, example of  489

 definings  444

 department  455

 initializing  448, 449

 initializing in generator  513

 joining by  323

 locations

 finding the location of  454

 number, YesNo, TrueFalse  457

 preempt  451

 priority  450

 process  454

 scenario  454

 set before and after duration  367

 setting global values  456

 transaction  373

 values during trace  565

 with split outputs  399

 Automatic

 renumbering of all shapes  207

 renumbering of shapes  207

 Average number of waiting transactions  639

 Avg Cycle  616

 Avg Eq Cost  619

 Avg Inact  616

 Avg Lbr Cost  619

 Avg OT Cost  620

 Avg Oth Cost  619

 Avg Serv  616

 Avg Serv Wait  617

 Avg Std Cost  620

 Avg VA Cost  619

 Avg Wait  617

 Batching

 by time  525

 collection options  331

 inputs  329

 Blocked time

 definition  615

 delay  379

 inputs  339

 total number of transactions  628

 Borders

 adding to department lanes  128

 applying formats  158

 formatting lines for shapes  159

 Bringing, objects to the front  179

 Bullet styles, setting for text  222

 Business diagrams, editing  85

 Business value added, activity base  382

 Busy time  635

 BVA

 activity base  382

 cost  619

 Calendar time  500

 Callout Lines

 connecting to a shape from a graphic  247

 formatting  247

 Capacity  384

 Capacity of activity  384

 Cascading, windows  83

 Case statement, outputs  390

 Cells  436

 Chalk talks  77

 Changing

 number format for existing shapes  209

 shadow depths  166

 shadow directions

 shadow styles  167

 styles in tabular view  433

 Check model  522

 Checking, spelling  94

 Choosing

 a resource  350

 arrowheads  162

 indicators for shapes  81

 line crossovers  163

 line routing types  153

 preset line styles  193

 preset shape styles  190

 preset text styles  230

 spelling options  93

 text styles  221

 Clearing, objects  89

 Clipboard  80

 Closed objects, connecting  182

 Closing, documents  100

 Collections

 batching inputs  329

 joining inputs  320

 Color

 adding to shadows  165

 adding to shape fill  157

 adding to text  221

 in trace window  559

 Coloring

 lines  47

 shapes  48

 text  48

 Columns

 labels in a report element  609

 viewing in tables  432

 Comparisons, in an expression  463

 Completion generator  511

 Components

 copying and pasting  253

 creating new  251

 deleting  252

 renaming  253

 viewing  252

 Composite, schedule  532

 Compressed time  500

 Concurrent subprocesses  373, 580

 Connect points

 editing between shapes  152

 moving line ends on a shape  152

 Connecting

 closed objects  182

 open objects  183

 shapes by clicking  151

 shapes by dragging  150

 shapes with lines  149

 using the Connect Shapes command  152

 Connection lines, editing in a table  429

 Connectors, choosing for lines  155

 Constraints, transaction flow  411

 Continuous functions  485

 Converting

 FlowCharter charts  72

 graphics to shapes  246

 Copies, saving for documents  101

 Copying

 in tabular view  436

 information from online Help topics  25

 Copying, objects  86

 Costs

 activity  627

 categories, Value-added  382

 fixed, by activity  383

 function  470

 in report window  602

 resources  350, 516, 637

 transaction  618

 Creating

 a new process  574

 colors  47

 floating palettes  45

 new documents  66

 new toolbars  41

 subprocesses  373, 580

 templates  68

 text blocks

 shape text  216

 text on lines  217

 Cross department activities  350

 Crossovers, applying formats  161

 Cumulative data in report element  609

 Cursors, placing in text  218

 Custom report elements  602

 Custom statistics, editing  645

 Cutting

 objects  86

 text in the Note window  80

 Cycle time  616

 Data collection with monitors  589

 Data fields

 adding  291

 adding advanced options  292

 deleting  292

 Days

 setting for schedule  528

 within a schedule  529

 Decision cases, outputs  390

 Dedicated resources  361

 Default number, setting format for new shapes  208

 Defaults

 Default tab, setting for shapes and lines  189

 Default tab, setting for text  229

 setting for arrowheads  162

 setting for diagrams  190

 setting for text  221

 Shape Library, setting for shapes and lines  195

 Shape Library, setting for text  231

 Share Media, setting for shapes and lines  196

 Share Media, setting for text  232

 Defining

 attributes  444, 458

 schedules  526

 types  457

 Delay

 as activity  379

 batching options  331

 Deleting

 departments  129

 in tabular view  436

 objects  89

 preset line styles  195

 preset shape styles  192

 preset text styles  231

 shapes from Shape Library  141

 text  220

 text in the Note window  80

 toolbars  43

 Demand generator  511

 Department attributes  455

 Departments

 adding borders and dividers to lanes  128

 adding color, patterns, and gradients to  128

 and simulation  314

 changing lane margins and minimum lane size  130

 cross-activities  350

 deleting  129

 editing text in department headers  128

 inserting  126

 moving the location of names  127

 reordering  129

 setting the lane orientation of  126

 setting the text orientation for labels  127

 setting up  125

 Diagram elements, viewing  77

 Diagrams

 adding layers  259

 changing all layers  259

 changing current layers  258

 changing the order of layers  262

 copying and pasting components  253

 creating new components  251

 defining page setup  112

 deleting components  252

 deleting layers  260

 importing other formats  72

 making layers printable or nonprintable  265

 moving an object to a different layer  263

 moving objects back one layer  263

 moving objects forward one layer  264

 opening VBA Extension Projects  296

 placing shapes in  147

 printing  98

 renaming components  253

 renaming layers  261

 running VBA macros  295

 saving as web pages  103

 selecting the page orientation for  112

 setting defaults for  190

 setting the page margins for  113

 setting the paper size for  113

 setting the Print Notes option  114

 setting the scaling for  113

 setting titles for  114

 setting up a diagram page  112

 setting VBA security levels  296

 showing or hiding layers  265

 unlocking or locking layers  266

 unprotecting  96

 locking  95

 viewing  75, 77

 viewing components  252

 zooming  77

 Directions, changing for a shadow  167

 Disconnecting, objects  183

 Distributing, documents  105

 Division, in an expression  463

 Docking, toolbars  44

 Documents

 creating new

 using the Welcome dialog to create  66

 creating using the New command  67

 distributing  105

 new from a template  68

 new from the Welcome dialog  67

 opening  70

 opening using the Welcome dialog  70

 saving  100

 closing  100

 saving copies  101

 using the Open command  70

 Dragging and Dropping, OLE objects  277

 Draw toolbar  34

 Drawing, graphics  242

 Duplicating

 objects  90

 shapes in Shape Library  142

 Duration, on activity  370

 Edit menu  54

 Editing

 business diagrams

 process maps  85

 connect points between shapes  152

 department headers  128

 shapes in Shape Library  141

 Encryption  95, 96

 End of day, event schedule  534

 Ends, line  162

 Equipment

 as a resource  514

 as a resource cost  619

 Errors, reviewing in the output window  522

 Event  534

 Event schedule  331, 525, 534

 Expressions

 adding attributes to  464

 adding members to  465

 using  460

 Family

 about transactions  312

 joining inputs by  324

 Field descriptions, including with shapes  199

 Fields

 adding to shapes  198

 moving in or around shapes  199

 File menu  50

 Fills, applying formats  156

 Filters, in a report element  610

 Finding

 online Help topics  25

 text  90

 First day of the month, schedule  528

 First of month, event schedule  535

 Fitting, shapes to text  171

 Fixed cost

 activity base  383

 resource  637

 Flipping, objects  169, 177

 Floating palettes, creating  45

 FlowCharter 7.0

 opening diagrams in  73

 opening files  70

 Fonts, setting text defaults  221

 Footers

 creating custom  119

 inserting  119

 using  119

 Format menu  58

 Formats, in a report element  611

 Formatting

 applying fills  156

 callout lines  247

 lines  160

 lines for shape borders  159

 shapes and lines, described  156

 text  221

 Formatting toolbar  31

 Full screen views  77

 Function

 Abs  469

 Bernoulli distribution  469

 Beta distribution  469

 Between, BetweenNorm  469

 Binomial distribution  470

 Ceiling  470

 Costs  470

 Days to seconds, conversion  471

 Elapsed Time  472

 Erlang distribution  472

 Exp  472

 Exponential distribution  473

 Floor  473

 Gamma distribution  473

 Hours to seconds, conversion  473

 If  474

 Ln  474

 Log10  475

 Max  475

 Min  475

 Minutes to seconds, conversion  475

 Months to seconds, conversion  476

 Normal distribution  476

 PercentYes  477

 Poisson distribution  477

 Power  477

 Random variables  477

 Round  478

 Sqrt  478

 Standard normal distribution  476

 Time  478

 Trunc function  479

 Weeks to seconds, conversion  480

 Weibull distribution  480

 Years to seconds, conversion  480

 Functions

 adding  482

 defining  484

 dialog box  485

 list of  467

 mapping

 distribution  482

 name of  483

 using system  466

 Gallery, placing shapes using  148

 Gate, batching by  331

 Generators

 copying to clipboard  542

 defining  511

 icon in the Modeling toolbar

 defining  510

 Gradient, adding to shape fill  157

 Graphics

 adding text  217

 connecting callout lines to shapes  247

 converting to shapes  246

 drawing  242

 formatting callout lines  247

 moving  243

 reshaping  245

 resizing  244

 rotating  245

 Graphs  654

 Grids

 showing dots  124

 snapping objects to  124

 turning on for snapping  123

 using  121

 Grouping, objects  182

 Groups

 acquiring by  364

 transaction

 of inputs  344

 Guidelines

 adding horizontal  121

 adding vertical  122

 deleting  123

 moving  122

 using  121

 Headers

 creating custom  119

 inserting  119

 using  119

 Help menu  62

 Hidden lines, viewing  83

 Hiding

 diagram layers  265

 rulers  82

 shape numbers  206

 toolbars  46

 ToolTips  48

 Hierarchy

 creating  580

 viewing the process hierarchy  575

 Holidays  528

 Horizontal alignment, setting for text  226

 Horizontal lines  187

 Horizontally, tiling windows  83

 Hourly rate, resource costs  516

 Hours, setting for schedule  530

 HTML, saving diagrams as  103

 iDiagram toolbar  39

 iDiagrams

 adding entities to shapes  297

 creating entities  297

 deleting entities from shapes  298

 running  298

 Idle time  635

 iGrafx Professional tools, using  79

 iGrids

 editing  303

 inserting  303

 Inactive time, scheduling  526

 Indicators  81

 Initializing, transaction attributes  513

 Inputs

 batching  329

 defining activity  315

 groups  344

 joining  320

 joining by family  324

 queuing inputs  333

 start points  341

 Insert menu  57

 Inserting, departments  126

 Interarrival generator  511

 Intersecting, objects  185

 Java, saving diagrams as applets  103

 Joining

 inputs  320

 objects  184

 keyboard selection, moving text  219

 Labor

 as a resource  514

 as a resource cost  619

 Lane margins, changing size  130

 Lane orientation, setting for departments  126

 Last day of the month, schedule  528

 Last of month, event schedule  535

 Layers

 adding to diagrams  259

 changing all in a diagram  259

 changing current  258

 changing the order of  262

 deleting  260

 locking or unlocking  266

 making printable or nonprintable  265

 moving an object to a different layer  263

 moving objects back one layer  263

 moving objects forward one layer  264

 renaming  261

 showing or hiding  265

 Legends, inserting  293

 Line ends

 moving from connect points on a shape  152

 reversing between shapes  153

 Line formats, applying  158

 Line offset  187

 Line spacing, setting for text  223

 Lines

 adding a vertex to  154

 adding preset styles  193

 attaching text to  217

 callouts  247

 choosing arrowheads  162

 choosing crossovers  163

 choosing off-page connector functions  155

 choosing preset styles  193

 choosing routing types  153

 coloring  47

 connecting shapes with  149

 deleting preset styles  195

 formatting  156

 formatting for shape borders  159

 manipulating with Shapes  169

 renaming preset styles  194

 restoring automatic line moves  154

 selecting  88

 setting spacing  187

 Linking

 controlling OLE objects  279

 OLE objects  278

 Links

 activating  283

 adding advanced settings  284

 adding to a file or Web page  285

 adding to shapes  282

 deleting  284

 editing  283

 Locations  454

 Locking

 diagrams  95

 layers  266

 Making objects same size  169, 173

 Manipulating, shapes and lines together  169

 Manual, renumbering of shapes  208

 Master Page, viewing  77

 Max Cap Used  627

 Maximum

 capacity used  627

 number of rows in a report element  612

 number waiting  639

 Members

 adding to expressions  465

 of functions  482

 Minus button, in outline form  540

 Mod operator  463

 Model menu  61

 Modifying, connect points between shapes  152

 Monitor

 data collection  589

 defining  591

 dialog box  592

 finding  594

 finding multiple  595

 placing  594

 symbol in tabular view  591

 Morning, event schedule  534

 Moving

 in tabular view  436

 line ends from connect points on a shape  152

 objects back one layer  263

 objects forward one layer  264

 objects to the back  180

 objects to the front  179

 shape fields  199

 Multiple Scenarios  537

 Multiple statistics in a report element  608

 Multiplication, in an expression  463

 New command, creating new documents  67

 Night hours  530

 No value added, activity base  382

 Non-continuous functions  485

 Normal view, using  76

 Notes

 attaching to shapes  80

 in diagrams  87

 printing  81, 114

 Now Try This

 adding generators  578

 batching  336

 connections between cells  430

 copy and paste  438

 decisions  393

 describing modeling behavior  488

 fonts and shadows  435

 joining  325

 report results  640

 reporting results  620

 reviewing activity time statistics  628

 reviewing service time and downtime  642

 running a simulation  545

 transaction splits  400

 using monitors  597

 using Tabular View

 tables  427

 Number format in report element  612

 Numbering

 all shapes  207

 renumbering  208

 shapes  205, 207

 Numbering position, setting for shapes  209

 NVA

 activity base  382

 cost  619

 Objects

 aligning  172

 bringing to front  179

 connecting closed  182

 connecting open  183

 copying  86

 cutting  86, 89

 disconnecting  183

 duplicating  90

 flipping  177

 grouping  182

 intersecting  185

 joining  184

 making same size  173

 outlining  185

 pasting  87

 rotating  176

 angle rotation  177

 selecting  88

 sending to back  180

 slicing  186

 spacing evenly  175

 ungrouping  182

 Off-page Connectors, choosing for lines  155

 OLE Objects

 controlling links  279

 converting embedded  275

 creating links  278

 editing embedded  275

 embedding into diagrams  277

 inserting new  274

 using the Paste Special command for  277

 viewing as an icon  280

 On-demand generator  511

 Online Help

 copying topic information from  25

 finding topics in  25

 printing help topics  26

 Open command, using  70

 Open objects, connecting  183

 Opening

 documents  70

 documents using the Open command  70

 documents using the Welcome dialog  70

 FlowCharter 7.0 diagram  73

 Optima! 2.5 file  73

 Output window  82

 Windows Draw file  74

 Operators, adding to expressions  463

 Optima! 2.5 file, opening  70, 73

 Options, spelling  93

 Or, logical  463

 Order of processing  408

 Ordering  169

 Orientation, setting for text in shape fields  200

 Other resources, cost  350

 Out of service

 downtime  642

 resource behavior  358

 resources and overtime  361

 Outline form, using  540

 Outlining, objects  185

 Output window

 checking models  522

 using  82

 Outputs

 defining activitiy  389

 defining decisions  390

 splitting  396

 stopping processing  403

 Overtime

 activity behavior  386

 resource behavior  358

 resource costs  637

 resources  361

 schedules  525

 transaction costs  620

 Page breaks, viewing  83

 Page margins, setting  113

 Page Setup

 creating custom headers and footers  119

 defining  112

 inserting headers and footers  119

 selecting the page orientation for  112

 setting diagram titles  114

 setting page margins  113

 setting the diagram scaling for  113

 setting the page order for printing  115

 setting the paper size for  113

 setting the Print Notes option  114

 setting up a diagram page  112

 using headers and footers  119

 Palettes, as floating toolbars  44

 Parentheses, in an expression  463

 Paste Special command

 using  88

 using for OLE objects  277

 Pasting, objects and notes  87

 Pattern, adding to shape  157

 Pause during trace  567

 Percentages for outputs  390

 Placing

 shapes in diagrams  147

 shapes using the Gallery  148

 shapes using the Shape Library  148

 Plus button, in outline form  540

 Pools, using resource  517

 Preempt attribute  451

 Presentations  77

 Preset line styles

 adding  193

 choosing  193

 deleting  195

 renaming  194

 working with  188

 Preset shape styles

 adding  190

 choosing  190

 deleting  192

 renaming  191

 working with  188

 Preset Styles toolbar  38

 Preset text styles

 adding  230

 choosing  230

 deleting  231

 renaming  231

 Previewing  99

 Printing

 diagram layers  265

 diagrams  98

 notes  81, 114

 online Help topics  26

 previewing  99

 setting the page order for printing  115

 Priority attribute  450

 Private subprocesses  373, 581

 Process

 attributes  454

 creating hierarchy  580

 viewing  580

 viewing multiple in Trace window  583

 Process maps, editing  85

 Protecting, diagrams  95

 Queues

 automatically managed  313

 in the report window  602

 methods to set  333

 reviewing resources in the report window  639

 Queuing inputs, minimum and maximum  333

 Releasing a worker if waiting  363

 Renaming

 preset line styles  194

 preset shape styles  191

 preset text styles  231

 toolbars  42

 Renumbering

 all shapes automatically  207

 shapes automatically  207

 shapes manually  208

 Reopening, workspaces  102

 Reordering, departments  129

 Replacing

 shapes  169

 text

 text in shapes  92

 Reports

 elements  601

 filters  610

 format  611

 report window tabs  602

 setting run initialization options  507

 statistics collection  606

 structure  609

 viewing in the report window  603

 Resetting, toolbars  43

 Reshaping, graphics  245

 Resource Assignment Type  355

 Resource Behavior  358

 Resource Costs  637

 Resource Overtime  361

 Resource Quantity  357

 Resource Schedule  360

 Resource Statistics  633

 Resources

 acquiring by group  364

 adding to an activity  350

 copying to clipboard  542

 costs  516

 defining  514

 forcing from family  365

 in the report window  602

 overtime  361

 quantity  357

 reviewing cost statistics  638

 reviewing time statistics  635

 schedules  360

 using  345

 utilization  636

 waiting time  635

 Resources Waiting  363

 ResourcesTab  345

 Resume tool  522

 Reversing

 an undo  86

 line ends between shapes  153

 Rotating

 graphics  245

 objects  176

 objects by angles  177

 text in a text block  227

 text with a shape  228

 Row legends, in a report element  610

 Rulers, hiding  82

 Run Setup

 copying to clipboard  542

 setting data  500

 snapshots  508

 Save as command, using for documents  101

 Saving

 copies of documents  101

 diagrams as web pages  103

 documents  100

 workspaces  101

 Scenario

 attributes  454

 copying and pasting  538

 data, copying to clipboard  542

 definition  499

 deleting  540

 opening

 tool on Modeling toolbar  541

 opening multiple  537

 Scenario Data  542

 Scenario Window  540

 Schedule

 batch by time  331

 composite  532

 copying to clipboard  542

 defining  526

 defining days  528

 defining hours  530

 event  534

 for activity  385

 for generator  513

 for resources  360

 overtime  525

 using  524

 Security  95, 96

 Selecting

 angle and direction for rotating an object  177

 in tabular view  434

 objects  88

 text  218

 text by dragging  219

 text using the keyboard  219

 Sending, objects to the back  180

 Sequence for random numbers  507

 Service time  616

 Service waiting time  617

 Setting

 advanced shape field options  200

 bullet styles for text  222

 default number format for new shapes  208

 defaults for arrowheads  162

 numbering position in shapes  209

 preempts on a transaction  451

 priorities on transactions  450

 text defaults  221

 text orientation  226

 text orientation for shape fields  200

 work durations  370

 Shadows

 adding to shapes  165

 changing directions  167

 coloring  165

 Shape field descriptions, including with shapes  199

 Shape fields, setting text orientation  200

 Shape Library

 adding shapes to  140

 arranging shapes in  143

 duplicating shapes in  142

 editing shapes in  141

 placing shapes using  148

 removing shapes from  141

 setting defaults in  195, 231

 using  138

 Shape numbers

 showing on all shapes  206

 showing on selected shapes  206

 Shape text, creating  216

 Shapes

 activating links to  283

 adding advanced data options  292

 adding advanced link settings  284

 adding color, pattern, or gradient to fill  157

 adding data fields  291

 adding fields to  198

 adding preset shape styles  190

 adding secondary text areas  225

 adding shadow or 3D effects to  165

 adding to the Shape Library  140

 adding to the Toolbox toolbar  140

 arranging in the Shape Library  143

 attaching to notes  80

 changing number format for existing shapes  209

 choosing indicators  81

 choosing preset styles  190

 coloring  48

 connecting by dragging  150

 connecting two shapes by clicking  151

 connecting with lines  149

 deleting data fields  292

 deleting links from  284

 deleting preset styles  192

 deleting secondary text areas  225

 duplicating in Shape Libary  142

 editing connect points between  152

 editing in Shape Library  141

 editing links to  283

 fitting text to  171

 formatting lines for borders  159

 formatting, described  156

 linking to a new diagram  282

 linking to files or Web Pages  285

 making same size  173

 manipulating with lines  169

 moving fields  199

 numbering  205

 placing in diagrams  147

 placing using the Gallery  148

 placing using the Shape Library  148

 removing from Shape Library  141

 renaming preset shape styles  191

 renumbering all  207

 renumbering automatically  207

 renumbering manually  208

 replacing  169

 replacing text  92

 reversing line ends between  153

 rotating  176

 rotating text in  228

 selecting  88

 setting default number for new shapes  208

 setting numbering position for  209

 setting text margins inside  224

 showing numbers  206

 spacing evenly  175

 using spacing options between  187

 using the Connect Shapes command  152

 Share Media, setting defaults in  196, 232

 Showing

 diagram layers  265

 hidden lines  83

 page breaks  83

 shape numbers  206

 toolbars  46

 ToolTips  48

 Simulation

 snapshots  508

 starting and stopping  522

 Simulation data  647

 Single statistic in a report element  608

 Slicing, objects  186

 Snapshots

 in report element  609, 611

 taking during simulations  508

 Sorting, in report element  612

 Spacing

 between shapes and lines  187

 objects evenly  175

 SPC Charts

 adding data to  300

 deleting from a diagram  301

 inserting in a diagram  300

 Spelling

 checking  94

 options  93

 Splitting

 outputs  396

 windows  84

 Standard days  528

 Standard hours  530

 Standard toolbar  29

 Start Points for process diagrams  341

 Start/Resume tool  522

 Starting

 overtime  386

 the simulator  522

 Statistic, in a report element  606

 Statistics

 about transactions  613

 activity queues  627

 blocked time  615

 by department  648

 custom  645

 cycle time  616

 formulas  626, 634

 inactive time  616

 of a report element  606

 resource times  636

 reviewing resource costs  637

 reviewing resource queues  639

 reviewing resource time  634

 service time  616

 service waiting time  617

 subsets of resource busy time  635

 summary on activity  407

 transaction cost  618

 transaction formulas  614

 waiting for resource time  615

 waiting time  617

 working time  615

 Status Bar, using  82

 Stop tool  522

 Stopping

 process of outputs  403

 the simulator  522

 Structure, in a report element  609

 Styles, changing in tabular view  433

 Subprocesses

 hierarchy  580

 on an activity  373

 Subtraction, in an expression  463

 Summary, comments on activity statistics  407

 Suspend overtime  386

 Swing hours  530

 Symbols, for Start  341

 System functions

 list of  467

 using  466

 Tables

 changing styles of font, fill, border, or symbol  433

 connecting symbols with lines  429

 moving, copying, and deleting cells  436

 viewing  424

 viewing columns  432

 Tabular view

 changing styles  433

 reviewing start points and monitors  424

 selecting cells  434

 using  76

 Task, setting duration  370

 Technical Support  23

 Templates

 creating documents from  68

 creating new  68

 Text

 adding preset text styles  230

 adding secondary text areas to shapes  225

 adding to a graphic  217

 aligning  226

 choosing preset text styles  230

 coloring  48

 deleting  220

 deleting in the Note window  80

 deleting preset text styles  231

 deleting secondary text areas from shapes  225

 finding  90

 fitting shape to  171

 formatting  221

 placing cursors in text  218

 renaming preset text styles  231

 replacing  92

 rotating in a text block  227

 selecting  218

 selecting by dragging  219

 selecting using the keyboard  219

 setting line spacing for  223

 setting margins inside shapes  224

 setting orientation for  226

 Text blocks, creating  216

 Text colors  221

 Text on lines, creating  217

 Text orientation

 setting for department labels  127

 setting for shape fields  200

 Tiling

 window horizontally  83

 windowing techniques  583

 windows vertically  83

 Time

 blocked  615

 compressed vs. calendar  500

 cycle  616

 function  478

 inactive  616

 resource waiting  635

 reviewing resource statistics  634

 service  616

 service waiting  617

 waiting  617

 waiting for resource  615

 working  615

 Time unit, in a report element  612

 Toolbars

 as floating palettes  44

 creating new  41

 deleting  43

 docking

 attaching  44

 Draw  34

 Formatting  31

 iDiagram  39

 Preset Styles  38

 renaming  42

 resetting  43

 showing and hiding  46

 Standard  29

 Toolbox  33

 using  28

 Visual Basic  39

 Toolbox toolbar

 adding shapes  140

 defined  33

 Tools menu  59

 ToolTips

 showing

 hiding  48

 using  48, 49

 Tot Cycle  616

 Tot Eq Cost  619

 Tot Inact  616

 Tot Lbr Cost  619

 Tot OT Cost  620

 Tot Oth Cost  619

 Tot Serv  616

 Tot Serv Wait  617

 Tot Std Cost  620

 Tot VA Cost  619

 Tot Work  617

 Total transaction waiting time  639

 Trace

 colors  559

 multiple processes  583

 numbers  561

 pause  567

 starting and stopping  557

 window  554

 Transaction Costs  618

 Transaction Statistics  613

 Transaction time statistics  614

 Transactions

 active limits  507

 attributes  513

 attributes in subprocesses  373

 average number of waiting

 maximum number of waiting

 Tot Res Wait

 Tot #Wait  627

 costs  618

 definition  310

 family  312, 324

 flow constraints  411

 formulas  614

 values during trace  563

 Turning off, rulers  82

 Types

 defining attributes and functions  457

 Undoing, actions  85

 Unencrypting  96

 Ungrouping, objects  182

 Unlocking, layers  266

 Unprotecting, diagrams  96

 Using

 Bubble help

 ToolTips  49

 expressions  460

 iGrafx Professional tools  79

 menus and commands  50

 Normal view  76

 Paste Special command  88

 resources  350

 spacing options between shapes  187

 Status Bar  82

 Tabular view  76

 toolbars  28

 ToolTips  48

 Utilization, resource  636

 Value  353, 355

 Value added

 activity base  382

 cost  619

 VBA

 opening Extension Projects  296

 running macros  295

 setting security levels  296

 Vertical alignment, setting for text  226

 Vertical lines  187

 Vertically, tiling windows  83

 Verticies, adding to lines  154

 View menu  56

 View Scenarios tool  541

 Viewing

 charts as printed

 previewing  99

 diagrams  75

 hidden lines  83

 Master Page  77

 page breaks  83

 presentations

 diagrams

 all diagram elements  77

 tabular  424

 Views

 using Master Page  77

 using Normal  76

 using Tabular  76

 Visual Basic toolbar  39

 Waiting for resource time  615

 Waiting time

 defined  617

 inputs  339

 WaitTime  339

 Web pages, saving diagrams as  103

 Weekend days  528

 Welcome dialog

 creating new documents  67

 using to create documents  66

 Window menu  62

 Windows

 arranging  543

 cascading  83

 reopening  544

 scenario window  540

 message window  522

 splitting  84

 techniques for viewing multiple processes

 tiling  583

 tiling  83

 trace window, using  554

 Windows Draw file, opening  70, 74

 Worker

 custom statistic  634

 resource  350

 wait time  363

 Workspaces

 reopening  102

 saving  101

 Zooming, diagrams  77